24 files changed, 15319 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/.gitignore b/.gitignore
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..72bc69d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/.gitignore
@@ -0,0 +1,14 @@
+*.go
+Makefile.in
+Makefile
+configure
+autom4te.cache/
+config.log
+config.status
+env
+doc/*.info
+doc/images/*.png
+doc/images/*.svg
+doc/stamp-vti
+doc/version.texi
+doc/.dirstamp
diff --git a/Makefile.am b/Makefile.am
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ba9876c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Makefile.am
@@ -0,0 +1,76 @@
+# Guile Picture Language --- Compose pictures with Guile
+# Copyright © 2019 Ricardo Wurmus <rekado@elephly.net>
+#
+# This file is part of the Guile Picture Language
+#
+# Guile-Debbugs is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
+# modify it under the terms of the GNU  General Public License
+# as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of
+# the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# Guile-Debbugs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+# WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+# Affero General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with Guile-Debbugs.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+include guile.am
+
+moddir=$(prefix)/share/guile/site/@GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION@
+godir=$(libdir)/guile/@GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION@/ccache
+
+SOURCES =									\
+  pict.scm									\
+  pict/base64.scm							\
+  pict/sxml.scm
+
+EXTRA_DIST += \
+  env.in									\
+  $(SCM_TESTS)
+
+info_TEXINFOS = doc/picture-language.texi
+
+DOC_IMAGES = $(addsuffix .svg.scm, $(addprefix $(top_srcdir)/doc/images/, \
+  line hline vline polyline polyline2 polygon boring-triangles modifiers))
+
+infoimagedir = $(infodir)/images
+dist_infoimage_DATA =				\
+  $(DOC_IMAGES:%.scm=%.scm.png)
+
+%.svg.scm.svg: %.svg.scm
+	$(top_builddir)/env						\
+	$(GUILE) --no-auto-compile -e main		\
+	$(top_srcdir)/build-aux/generate-images.scm $(abs_top_srcdir)/$<
+
+%.svg.scm.png: %.svg.scm.svg
+	convert $< $@
+
+# We cannot add new dependencies to `%D%/picture-language.pdf' &
+# co. (info "(automake) Extending").  Using the `-local' rules is
+# imperfect, because they may be triggered after the main rule.  Oh,
+# well.
+pdf-local: $(DOC_IMAGES)
+info-local: $(DOC_IMAGES)
+
+EXTRA_DIST += \
+  $(DOC_IMAGES) \
+  $(DOC_IMAGES:%.svg.scm=%.svg.scm.svg) \
+  doc/fdl-1.3.texi
+
+dist-hook: gen-ChangeLog
+gen-ChangeLog:
+	$(AM_V_GEN)if test -d .git; then				\
+	  $(top_srcdir)/build-aux/gitlog-to-changelog	\
+	    > $(distdir)/cl-t;							\
+	  rm -f $(distdir)/ChangeLog;					\
+	  mv $(distdir)/cl-t $(distdir)/ChangeLog;		\
+	fi
+
+ps:
+dvi:
+install-ps:
+install-dvi:
+
+.PHONY: gen-ChangeLog install-dvi install-ps dvi ps
diff --git a/VERSION b/VERSION
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8acdd82
--- /dev/null
+++ b/VERSION
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+0.0.1
diff --git a/aclocal.m4 b/aclocal.m4
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05dd515
--- /dev/null
+++ b/aclocal.m4
@@ -0,0 +1,1375 @@
+# generated automatically by aclocal 1.16.1 -*- Autoconf -*-
+
+# Copyright (C) 1996-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY, to the extent permitted by law; without
+# even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A
+# PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
+
+m4_ifndef([AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIRS], [m4_defun([_AM_CONFIG_MACRO_DIRS], [])m4_defun([AC_CONFIG_MACRO_DIRS], [_AM_CONFIG_MACRO_DIRS($@)])])
+m4_ifndef([AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION],
+  [m4_copy([m4_PACKAGE_VERSION], [AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION])])dnl
+m4_if(m4_defn([AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION]), [2.69],,
+[m4_warning([this file was generated for autoconf 2.69.
+You have another version of autoconf.  It may work, but is not guaranteed to.
+If you have problems, you may need to regenerate the build system entirely.
+To do so, use the procedure documented by the package, typically 'autoreconf'.])])
+
+
+# serial 10
+
+
+
+
+# GUILE_PKG -- find Guile development files
+#
+# Usage: GUILE_PKG([VERSIONS])
+#
+# This macro runs the @code{pkg-config} tool to find development files
+# for an available version of Guile.
+#
+# By default, this macro will search for the latest stable version of
+# Guile (e.g. 2.2), falling back to the previous stable version
+# (e.g. 2.0) if it is available.  If no guile-@var{VERSION}.pc file is
+# found, an error is signalled.  The found version is stored in
+# @var{GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION}.
+#
+# If @code{GUILE_PROGS} was already invoked, this macro ensures that the
+# development files have the same effective version as the Guile
+# program.
+#
+# @var{GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION} is marked for substitution, as by
+# @code{AC_SUBST}.
+#
+AC_DEFUN([GUILE_PKG],
+ [PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG
+  _guile_versions_to_search="m4_default([$1], [2.2 2.0 1.8])"
+  if test -n "$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION"; then
+    _guile_tmp=""
+    for v in $_guile_versions_to_search; do
+      if test "$v" = "$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION"; then
+        _guile_tmp=$v
+      fi
+    done
+    if test -z "$_guile_tmp"; then
+      AC_MSG_FAILURE([searching for guile development files for versions $_guile_versions_to_search, but previously found $GUILE version $GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION])
+    fi
+    _guile_versions_to_search=$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION
+  fi
+  GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION=""
+  _guile_errors=""
+  for v in $_guile_versions_to_search; do
+    if test -z "$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION"; then
+      AC_MSG_NOTICE([checking for guile $v])
+      PKG_CHECK_EXISTS([guile-$v], [GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION=$v], [])
+    fi
+  done
+
+  if test -z "$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION"; then
+    AC_MSG_ERROR([
+No Guile development packages were found.
+
+Please verify that you have Guile installed.  If you installed Guile
+from a binary distribution, please verify that you have also installed
+the development packages.  If you installed it yourself, you might need
+to adjust your PKG_CONFIG_PATH; see the pkg-config man page for more.
+])
+  fi
+  AC_MSG_NOTICE([found guile $GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION])
+  AC_SUBST([GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION])
+ ])
+
+# GUILE_FLAGS -- set flags for compiling and linking with Guile
+#
+# Usage: GUILE_FLAGS
+#
+# This macro runs the @code{pkg-config} tool to find out how to compile
+# and link programs against Guile.  It sets four variables:
+# @var{GUILE_CFLAGS}, @var{GUILE_LDFLAGS}, @var{GUILE_LIBS}, and
+# @var{GUILE_LTLIBS}.
+#
+# @var{GUILE_CFLAGS}: flags to pass to a C or C++ compiler to build code that
+# uses Guile header files.  This is almost always just one or more @code{-I}
+# flags.
+#
+# @var{GUILE_LDFLAGS}: flags to pass to the compiler to link a program
+# against Guile.  This includes @code{-lguile-@var{VERSION}} for the
+# Guile library itself, and may also include one or more @code{-L} flag
+# to tell the compiler where to find the libraries.  But it does not
+# include flags that influence the program's runtime search path for
+# libraries, and will therefore lead to a program that fails to start,
+# unless all necessary libraries are installed in a standard location
+# such as @file{/usr/lib}.
+#
+# @var{GUILE_LIBS} and @var{GUILE_LTLIBS}: flags to pass to the compiler or to
+# libtool, respectively, to link a program against Guile.  It includes flags
+# that augment the program's runtime search path for libraries, so that shared
+# libraries will be found at the location where they were during linking, even
+# in non-standard locations.  @var{GUILE_LIBS} is to be used when linking the
+# program directly with the compiler, whereas @var{GUILE_LTLIBS} is to be used
+# when linking the program is done through libtool.
+#
+# The variables are marked for substitution, as by @code{AC_SUBST}.
+#
+AC_DEFUN([GUILE_FLAGS],
+ [AC_REQUIRE([GUILE_PKG])
+  PKG_CHECK_MODULES(GUILE, [guile-$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION])
+
+  dnl GUILE_CFLAGS and GUILE_LIBS are already defined and AC_SUBST'd by
+  dnl PKG_CHECK_MODULES.  But GUILE_LIBS to pkg-config is GUILE_LDFLAGS
+  dnl to us.
+
+  GUILE_LDFLAGS=$GUILE_LIBS
+
+  dnl Determine the platform dependent parameters needed to use rpath.
+  dnl AC_LIB_LINKFLAGS_FROM_LIBS is defined in gnulib/m4/lib-link.m4 and needs
+  dnl the file gnulib/build-aux/config.rpath.
+  AC_LIB_LINKFLAGS_FROM_LIBS([GUILE_LIBS], [$GUILE_LDFLAGS], [])
+  GUILE_LIBS="$GUILE_LDFLAGS $GUILE_LIBS"
+  AC_LIB_LINKFLAGS_FROM_LIBS([GUILE_LTLIBS], [$GUILE_LDFLAGS], [yes])
+  GUILE_LTLIBS="$GUILE_LDFLAGS $GUILE_LTLIBS"
+
+  AC_SUBST([GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION])
+  AC_SUBST([GUILE_CFLAGS])
+  AC_SUBST([GUILE_LDFLAGS])
+  AC_SUBST([GUILE_LIBS])
+  AC_SUBST([GUILE_LTLIBS])
+ ])
+
+# GUILE_SITE_DIR -- find path to Guile site directories
+#
+# Usage: GUILE_SITE_DIR
+#
+# This looks for Guile's "site" directories.  The variable @var{GUILE_SITE} will
+# be set to Guile's "site" directory for Scheme source files (usually something
+# like PREFIX/share/guile/site).  @var{GUILE_SITE_CCACHE} will be set to the
+# directory for compiled Scheme files also known as @code{.go} files
+# (usually something like
+# PREFIX/lib/guile/@var{GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION}/site-ccache).
+# @var{GUILE_EXTENSION} will be set to the directory for compiled C extensions
+# (usually something like
+# PREFIX/lib/guile/@var{GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION}/extensions). The latter two
+# are set to blank if the particular version of Guile does not support
+# them.  Note that this macro will run the macros @code{GUILE_PKG} and
+# @code{GUILE_PROGS} if they have not already been run.
+#
+# The variables are marked for substitution, as by @code{AC_SUBST}.
+#
+AC_DEFUN([GUILE_SITE_DIR],
+ [AC_REQUIRE([GUILE_PKG])
+  AC_REQUIRE([GUILE_PROGS])
+  AC_MSG_CHECKING(for Guile site directory)
+  GUILE_SITE=`$PKG_CONFIG --print-errors --variable=sitedir guile-$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION`
+  AC_MSG_RESULT($GUILE_SITE)
+  if test "$GUILE_SITE" = ""; then
+     AC_MSG_FAILURE(sitedir not found)
+  fi
+  AC_SUBST(GUILE_SITE)
+  AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Guile site-ccache directory using pkgconfig])
+  GUILE_SITE_CCACHE=`$PKG_CONFIG --variable=siteccachedir guile-$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION`
+  if test "$GUILE_SITE_CCACHE" = ""; then
+    AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Guile site-ccache directory using interpreter])
+    GUILE_SITE_CCACHE=`$GUILE -c "(display (if (defined? '%site-ccache-dir) (%site-ccache-dir) \"\"))"`
+    if test $? != "0" -o "$GUILE_SITE_CCACHE" = ""; then
+      AC_MSG_RESULT(no)
+      GUILE_SITE_CCACHE=""
+      AC_MSG_WARN([siteccachedir not found])
+    fi
+  fi
+  AC_MSG_RESULT($GUILE_SITE_CCACHE)
+  AC_SUBST([GUILE_SITE_CCACHE])
+  AC_MSG_CHECKING(for Guile extensions directory)
+  GUILE_EXTENSION=`$PKG_CONFIG --print-errors --variable=extensiondir guile-$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION`
+  AC_MSG_RESULT($GUILE_EXTENSION)
+  if test "$GUILE_EXTENSION" = ""; then
+    GUILE_EXTENSION=""
+    AC_MSG_WARN(extensiondir not found)
+  fi
+  AC_SUBST(GUILE_EXTENSION)
+ ])
+
+# GUILE_PROGS -- set paths to Guile interpreter, config and tool programs
+#
+# Usage: GUILE_PROGS([VERSION])
+#
+# This macro looks for programs @code{guile} and @code{guild}, setting
+# variables @var{GUILE} and @var{GUILD} to their paths, respectively.
+# The macro will attempt to find @code{guile} with the suffix of
+# @code{-X.Y}, followed by looking for it with the suffix @code{X.Y}, and
+# then fall back to looking for @code{guile} with no suffix. If
+# @code{guile} is still not found, signal an error. The suffix, if any,
+# that was required to find @code{guile} will be used for @code{guild}
+# as well.
+#
+# By default, this macro will search for the latest stable version of
+# Guile (e.g. 2.2). x.y or x.y.z versions can be specified. If an older
+# version is found, the macro will signal an error.
+#
+# The effective version of the found @code{guile} is set to
+# @var{GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION}.  This macro ensures that the effective
+# version is compatible with the result of a previous invocation of
+# @code{GUILE_FLAGS}, if any.
+#
+# As a legacy interface, it also looks for @code{guile-config} and
+# @code{guile-tools}, setting @var{GUILE_CONFIG} and @var{GUILE_TOOLS}.
+#
+# The variables are marked for substitution, as by @code{AC_SUBST}.
+#
+AC_DEFUN([GUILE_PROGS],
+ [_guile_required_version="m4_default([$1], [$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION])"
+  if test -z "$_guile_required_version"; then
+    _guile_required_version=2.2
+  fi
+
+  _guile_candidates=guile
+  _tmp=
+  for v in `echo "$_guile_required_version" | tr . ' '`; do
+    if test -n "$_tmp"; then _tmp=$_tmp.; fi
+    _tmp=$_tmp$v
+    _guile_candidates="guile-$_tmp guile$_tmp $_guile_candidates"
+  done
+
+  AC_PATH_PROGS(GUILE,[$_guile_candidates])
+  if test -z "$GUILE"; then
+      AC_MSG_ERROR([guile required but not found])
+  fi
+
+  _guile_suffix=`echo "$GUILE" | sed -e 's,^.*/guile\(.*\)$,\1,'`
+  _guile_effective_version=`$GUILE -c "(display (effective-version))"`
+  if test -z "$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION"; then
+    GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION=$_guile_effective_version
+  elif test "$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION" != "$_guile_effective_version"; then
+    AC_MSG_ERROR([found development files for Guile $GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION, but $GUILE has effective version $_guile_effective_version])
+  fi
+
+  _guile_major_version=`$GUILE -c "(display (major-version))"`
+  _guile_minor_version=`$GUILE -c "(display (minor-version))"`
+  _guile_micro_version=`$GUILE -c "(display (micro-version))"`
+  _guile_prog_version="$_guile_major_version.$_guile_minor_version.$_guile_micro_version"
+
+  AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Guile version >= $_guile_required_version])
+  _major_version=`echo $_guile_required_version | cut -d . -f 1`
+  _minor_version=`echo $_guile_required_version | cut -d . -f 2`
+  _micro_version=`echo $_guile_required_version | cut -d . -f 3`
+  if test "$_guile_major_version" -gt "$_major_version"; then
+    true
+  elif test "$_guile_major_version" -eq "$_major_version"; then
+    if test "$_guile_minor_version" -gt "$_minor_version"; then
+      true
+    elif test "$_guile_minor_version" -eq "$_minor_version"; then
+      if test -n "$_micro_version"; then
+        if test "$_guile_micro_version" -lt "$_micro_version"; then
+          AC_MSG_ERROR([Guile $_guile_required_version required, but $_guile_prog_version found])
+        fi
+      fi
+    elif test "$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION" = "$_major_version.$_minor_version" -a -z "$_micro_version"; then
+      # Allow prereleases that have the right effective version.
+      true
+    else
+      as_fn_error $? "Guile $_guile_required_version required, but $_guile_prog_version found" "$LINENO" 5
+    fi
+  elif test "$GUILE_EFFECTIVE_VERSION" = "$_major_version.$_minor_version" -a -z "$_micro_version"; then
+    # Allow prereleases that have the right effective version.
+    true
+  else
+    AC_MSG_ERROR([Guile $_guile_required_version required, but $_guile_prog_version found])
+  fi
+  AC_MSG_RESULT([$_guile_prog_version])
+
+  AC_PATH_PROG(GUILD,[guild$_guile_suffix])
+  AC_SUBST(GUILD)
+
+  AC_PATH_PROG(GUILE_CONFIG,[guile-config$_guile_suffix])
+  AC_SUBST(GUILE_CONFIG)
+  if test -n "$GUILD"; then
+    GUILE_TOOLS=$GUILD
+  else
+    AC_PATH_PROG(GUILE_TOOLS,[guile-tools$_guile_suffix])
+  fi
+  AC_SUBST(GUILE_TOOLS)
+ ])
+
+# GUILE_CHECK -- evaluate Guile Scheme code and capture the return value
+#
+# Usage: GUILE_CHECK_RETVAL(var,check)
+#
+# @var{var} is a shell variable name to be set to the return value.
+# @var{check} is a Guile Scheme expression, evaluated with "$GUILE -c", and
+#    returning either 0 or non-#f to indicate the check passed.
+#    Non-0 number or #f indicates failure.
+#    Avoid using the character "#" since that confuses autoconf.
+#
+AC_DEFUN([GUILE_CHECK],
+ [AC_REQUIRE([GUILE_PROGS])
+  $GUILE -c "$2" > /dev/null 2>&1
+  $1=$?
+ ])
+
+# GUILE_MODULE_CHECK -- check feature of a Guile Scheme module
+#
+# Usage: GUILE_MODULE_CHECK(var,module,featuretest,description)
+#
+# @var{var} is a shell variable name to be set to "yes" or "no".
+# @var{module} is a list of symbols, like: (ice-9 common-list).
+# @var{featuretest} is an expression acceptable to GUILE_CHECK, q.v.
+# @var{description} is a present-tense verb phrase (passed to AC_MSG_CHECKING).
+#
+AC_DEFUN([GUILE_MODULE_CHECK],
+         [AC_MSG_CHECKING([if $2 $4])
+	  GUILE_CHECK($1,(use-modules $2) (exit ((lambda () $3))))
+	  if test "$$1" = "0" ; then $1=yes ; else $1=no ; fi
+          AC_MSG_RESULT($$1)
+         ])
+
+# GUILE_MODULE_AVAILABLE -- check availability of a Guile Scheme module
+#
+# Usage: GUILE_MODULE_AVAILABLE(var,module)
+#
+# @var{var} is a shell variable name to be set to "yes" or "no".
+# @var{module} is a list of symbols, like: (ice-9 common-list).
+#
+AC_DEFUN([GUILE_MODULE_AVAILABLE],
+         [GUILE_MODULE_CHECK($1,$2,0,is available)
+         ])
+
+# GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED -- fail if a Guile Scheme module is unavailable
+#
+# Usage: GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED(symlist)
+#
+# @var{symlist} is a list of symbols, WITHOUT surrounding parens,
+# like: ice-9 common-list.
+#
+AC_DEFUN([GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED],
+         [GUILE_MODULE_AVAILABLE(ac_guile_module_required, ($1))
+          if test "$ac_guile_module_required" = "no" ; then
+              AC_MSG_ERROR([required guile module not found: ($1)])
+          fi
+         ])
+
+# GUILE_MODULE_EXPORTS -- check if a module exports a variable
+#
+# Usage: GUILE_MODULE_EXPORTS(var,module,modvar)
+#
+# @var{var} is a shell variable to be set to "yes" or "no".
+# @var{module} is a list of symbols, like: (ice-9 common-list).
+# @var{modvar} is the Guile Scheme variable to check.
+#
+AC_DEFUN([GUILE_MODULE_EXPORTS],
+ [GUILE_MODULE_CHECK($1,$2,$3,exports `$3')
+ ])
+
+# GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED_EXPORT -- fail if a module doesn't export a variable
+#
+# Usage: GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED_EXPORT(module,modvar)
+#
+# @var{module} is a list of symbols, like: (ice-9 common-list).
+# @var{modvar} is the Guile Scheme variable to check.
+#
+AC_DEFUN([GUILE_MODULE_REQUIRED_EXPORT],
+ [GUILE_MODULE_EXPORTS(guile_module_required_export,$1,$2)
+  if test "$guile_module_required_export" = "no" ; then
+      AC_MSG_ERROR([module $1 does not export $2; required])
+  fi
+ ])
+
+
+# pkg.m4 - Macros to locate and utilise pkg-config.   -*- Autoconf -*-
+# serial 12 (pkg-config-0.29.2)
+
+dnl Copyright © 2004 Scott James Remnant <scott@netsplit.com>.
+dnl Copyright © 2012-2015 Dan Nicholson <dbn.lists@gmail.com>
+dnl
+dnl This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+dnl it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+dnl the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or
+dnl (at your option) any later version.
+dnl
+dnl This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+dnl WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+dnl MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU
+dnl General Public License for more details.
+dnl
+dnl You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+dnl along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software
+dnl Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place - Suite 330, Boston, MA
+dnl 02111-1307, USA.
+dnl
+dnl As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+dnl distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+dnl configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+dnl the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that
+dnl program.
+
+dnl PKG_PREREQ(MIN-VERSION)
+dnl -----------------------
+dnl Since: 0.29
+dnl
+dnl Verify that the version of the pkg-config macros are at least
+dnl MIN-VERSION. Unlike PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG, which checks the user's
+dnl installed version of pkg-config, this checks the developer's version
+dnl of pkg.m4 when generating configure.
+dnl
+dnl To ensure that this macro is defined, also add:
+dnl m4_ifndef([PKG_PREREQ],
+dnl     [m4_fatal([must install pkg-config 0.29 or later before running autoconf/autogen])])
+dnl
+dnl See the "Since" comment for each macro you use to see what version
+dnl of the macros you require.
+m4_defun([PKG_PREREQ],
+[m4_define([PKG_MACROS_VERSION], [0.29.2])
+m4_if(m4_version_compare(PKG_MACROS_VERSION, [$1]), -1,
+    [m4_fatal([pkg.m4 version $1 or higher is required but ]PKG_MACROS_VERSION[ found])])
+])dnl PKG_PREREQ
+
+dnl PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG([MIN-VERSION])
+dnl ----------------------------------
+dnl Since: 0.16
+dnl
+dnl Search for the pkg-config tool and set the PKG_CONFIG variable to
+dnl first found in the path. Checks that the version of pkg-config found
+dnl is at least MIN-VERSION. If MIN-VERSION is not specified, 0.9.0 is
+dnl used since that's the first version where most current features of
+dnl pkg-config existed.
+AC_DEFUN([PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG],
+[m4_pattern_forbid([^_?PKG_[A-Z_]+$])
+m4_pattern_allow([^PKG_CONFIG(_(PATH|LIBDIR|SYSROOT_DIR|ALLOW_SYSTEM_(CFLAGS|LIBS)))?$])
+m4_pattern_allow([^PKG_CONFIG_(DISABLE_UNINSTALLED|TOP_BUILD_DIR|DEBUG_SPEW)$])
+AC_ARG_VAR([PKG_CONFIG], [path to pkg-config utility])
+AC_ARG_VAR([PKG_CONFIG_PATH], [directories to add to pkg-config's search path])
+AC_ARG_VAR([PKG_CONFIG_LIBDIR], [path overriding pkg-config's built-in search path])
+
+if test "x$ac_cv_env_PKG_CONFIG_set" != "xset"; then
+	AC_PATH_TOOL([PKG_CONFIG], [pkg-config])
+fi
+if test -n "$PKG_CONFIG"; then
+	_pkg_min_version=m4_default([$1], [0.9.0])
+	AC_MSG_CHECKING([pkg-config is at least version $_pkg_min_version])
+	if $PKG_CONFIG --atleast-pkgconfig-version $_pkg_min_version; then
+		AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
+	else
+		AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
+		PKG_CONFIG=""
+	fi
+fi[]dnl
+])dnl PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG
+
+dnl PKG_CHECK_EXISTS(MODULES, [ACTION-IF-FOUND], [ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND])
+dnl -------------------------------------------------------------------
+dnl Since: 0.18
+dnl
+dnl Check to see whether a particular set of modules exists. Similar to
+dnl PKG_CHECK_MODULES(), but does not set variables or print errors.
+dnl
+dnl Please remember that m4 expands AC_REQUIRE([PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG])
+dnl only at the first occurence in configure.ac, so if the first place
+dnl it's called might be skipped (such as if it is within an "if", you
+dnl have to call PKG_CHECK_EXISTS manually
+AC_DEFUN([PKG_CHECK_EXISTS],
+[AC_REQUIRE([PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG])dnl
+if test -n "$PKG_CONFIG" && \
+    AC_RUN_LOG([$PKG_CONFIG --exists --print-errors "$1"]); then
+  m4_default([$2], [:])
+m4_ifvaln([$3], [else
+  $3])dnl
+fi])
+
+dnl _PKG_CONFIG([VARIABLE], [COMMAND], [MODULES])
+dnl ---------------------------------------------
+dnl Internal wrapper calling pkg-config via PKG_CONFIG and setting
+dnl pkg_failed based on the result.
+m4_define([_PKG_CONFIG],
+[if test -n "$$1"; then
+    pkg_cv_[]$1="$$1"
+ elif test -n "$PKG_CONFIG"; then
+    PKG_CHECK_EXISTS([$3],
+                     [pkg_cv_[]$1=`$PKG_CONFIG --[]$2 "$3" 2>/dev/null`
+		      test "x$?" != "x0" && pkg_failed=yes ],
+		     [pkg_failed=yes])
+ else
+    pkg_failed=untried
+fi[]dnl
+])dnl _PKG_CONFIG
+
+dnl _PKG_SHORT_ERRORS_SUPPORTED
+dnl ---------------------------
+dnl Internal check to see if pkg-config supports short errors.
+AC_DEFUN([_PKG_SHORT_ERRORS_SUPPORTED],
+[AC_REQUIRE([PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG])
+if $PKG_CONFIG --atleast-pkgconfig-version 0.20; then
+        _pkg_short_errors_supported=yes
+else
+        _pkg_short_errors_supported=no
+fi[]dnl
+])dnl _PKG_SHORT_ERRORS_SUPPORTED
+
+
+dnl PKG_CHECK_MODULES(VARIABLE-PREFIX, MODULES, [ACTION-IF-FOUND],
+dnl   [ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND])
+dnl --------------------------------------------------------------
+dnl Since: 0.4.0
+dnl
+dnl Note that if there is a possibility the first call to
+dnl PKG_CHECK_MODULES might not happen, you should be sure to include an
+dnl explicit call to PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG in your configure.ac
+AC_DEFUN([PKG_CHECK_MODULES],
+[AC_REQUIRE([PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG])dnl
+AC_ARG_VAR([$1][_CFLAGS], [C compiler flags for $1, overriding pkg-config])dnl
+AC_ARG_VAR([$1][_LIBS], [linker flags for $1, overriding pkg-config])dnl
+
+pkg_failed=no
+AC_MSG_CHECKING([for $2])
+
+_PKG_CONFIG([$1][_CFLAGS], [cflags], [$2])
+_PKG_CONFIG([$1][_LIBS], [libs], [$2])
+
+m4_define([_PKG_TEXT], [Alternatively, you may set the environment variables $1[]_CFLAGS
+and $1[]_LIBS to avoid the need to call pkg-config.
+See the pkg-config man page for more details.])
+
+if test $pkg_failed = yes; then
+        AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
+        _PKG_SHORT_ERRORS_SUPPORTED
+        if test $_pkg_short_errors_supported = yes; then
+	        $1[]_PKG_ERRORS=`$PKG_CONFIG --short-errors --print-errors --cflags --libs "$2" 2>&1`
+        else
+	        $1[]_PKG_ERRORS=`$PKG_CONFIG --print-errors --cflags --libs "$2" 2>&1`
+        fi
+	# Put the nasty error message in config.log where it belongs
+	echo "$$1[]_PKG_ERRORS" >&AS_MESSAGE_LOG_FD
+
+	m4_default([$4], [AC_MSG_ERROR(
+[Package requirements ($2) were not met:
+
+$$1_PKG_ERRORS
+
+Consider adjusting the PKG_CONFIG_PATH environment variable if you
+installed software in a non-standard prefix.
+
+_PKG_TEXT])[]dnl
+        ])
+elif test $pkg_failed = untried; then
+        AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
+	m4_default([$4], [AC_MSG_FAILURE(
+[The pkg-config script could not be found or is too old.  Make sure it
+is in your PATH or set the PKG_CONFIG environment variable to the full
+path to pkg-config.
+
+_PKG_TEXT
+
+To get pkg-config, see <http://pkg-config.freedesktop.org/>.])[]dnl
+        ])
+else
+	$1[]_CFLAGS=$pkg_cv_[]$1[]_CFLAGS
+	$1[]_LIBS=$pkg_cv_[]$1[]_LIBS
+        AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
+	$3
+fi[]dnl
+])dnl PKG_CHECK_MODULES
+
+
+dnl PKG_CHECK_MODULES_STATIC(VARIABLE-PREFIX, MODULES, [ACTION-IF-FOUND],
+dnl   [ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND])
+dnl ---------------------------------------------------------------------
+dnl Since: 0.29
+dnl
+dnl Checks for existence of MODULES and gathers its build flags with
+dnl static libraries enabled. Sets VARIABLE-PREFIX_CFLAGS from --cflags
+dnl and VARIABLE-PREFIX_LIBS from --libs.
+dnl
+dnl Note that if there is a possibility the first call to
+dnl PKG_CHECK_MODULES_STATIC might not happen, you should be sure to
+dnl include an explicit call to PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG in your
+dnl configure.ac.
+AC_DEFUN([PKG_CHECK_MODULES_STATIC],
+[AC_REQUIRE([PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG])dnl
+_save_PKG_CONFIG=$PKG_CONFIG
+PKG_CONFIG="$PKG_CONFIG --static"
+PKG_CHECK_MODULES($@)
+PKG_CONFIG=$_save_PKG_CONFIG[]dnl
+])dnl PKG_CHECK_MODULES_STATIC
+
+
+dnl PKG_INSTALLDIR([DIRECTORY])
+dnl -------------------------
+dnl Since: 0.27
+dnl
+dnl Substitutes the variable pkgconfigdir as the location where a module
+dnl should install pkg-config .pc files. By default the directory is
+dnl $libdir/pkgconfig, but the default can be changed by passing
+dnl DIRECTORY. The user can override through the --with-pkgconfigdir
+dnl parameter.
+AC_DEFUN([PKG_INSTALLDIR],
+[m4_pushdef([pkg_default], [m4_default([$1], ['${libdir}/pkgconfig'])])
+m4_pushdef([pkg_description],
+    [pkg-config installation directory @<:@]pkg_default[@:>@])
+AC_ARG_WITH([pkgconfigdir],
+    [AS_HELP_STRING([--with-pkgconfigdir], pkg_description)],,
+    [with_pkgconfigdir=]pkg_default)
+AC_SUBST([pkgconfigdir], [$with_pkgconfigdir])
+m4_popdef([pkg_default])
+m4_popdef([pkg_description])
+])dnl PKG_INSTALLDIR
+
+
+dnl PKG_NOARCH_INSTALLDIR([DIRECTORY])
+dnl --------------------------------
+dnl Since: 0.27
+dnl
+dnl Substitutes the variable noarch_pkgconfigdir as the location where a
+dnl module should install arch-independent pkg-config .pc files. By
+dnl default the directory is $datadir/pkgconfig, but the default can be
+dnl changed by passing DIRECTORY. The user can override through the
+dnl --with-noarch-pkgconfigdir parameter.
+AC_DEFUN([PKG_NOARCH_INSTALLDIR],
+[m4_pushdef([pkg_default], [m4_default([$1], ['${datadir}/pkgconfig'])])
+m4_pushdef([pkg_description],
+    [pkg-config arch-independent installation directory @<:@]pkg_default[@:>@])
+AC_ARG_WITH([noarch-pkgconfigdir],
+    [AS_HELP_STRING([--with-noarch-pkgconfigdir], pkg_description)],,
+    [with_noarch_pkgconfigdir=]pkg_default)
+AC_SUBST([noarch_pkgconfigdir], [$with_noarch_pkgconfigdir])
+m4_popdef([pkg_default])
+m4_popdef([pkg_description])
+])dnl PKG_NOARCH_INSTALLDIR
+
+
+dnl PKG_CHECK_VAR(VARIABLE, MODULE, CONFIG-VARIABLE,
+dnl [ACTION-IF-FOUND], [ACTION-IF-NOT-FOUND])
+dnl -------------------------------------------
+dnl Since: 0.28
+dnl
+dnl Retrieves the value of the pkg-config variable for the given module.
+AC_DEFUN([PKG_CHECK_VAR],
+[AC_REQUIRE([PKG_PROG_PKG_CONFIG])dnl
+AC_ARG_VAR([$1], [value of $3 for $2, overriding pkg-config])dnl
+
+_PKG_CONFIG([$1], [variable="][$3]["], [$2])
+AS_VAR_COPY([$1], [pkg_cv_][$1])
+
+AS_VAR_IF([$1], [""], [$5], [$4])dnl
+])dnl PKG_CHECK_VAR
+
+# Copyright (C) 2002-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION(VERSION)
+# ----------------------------
+# Automake X.Y traces this macro to ensure aclocal.m4 has been
+# generated from the m4 files accompanying Automake X.Y.
+# (This private macro should not be called outside this file.)
+AC_DEFUN([AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION],
+[am__api_version='1.16'
+dnl Some users find AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION and mistake it for a way to
+dnl require some minimum version.  Point them to the right macro.
+m4_if([$1], [1.16.1], [],
+      [AC_FATAL([Do not call $0, use AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE([$1]).])])dnl
+])
+
+# _AM_AUTOCONF_VERSION(VERSION)
+# -----------------------------
+# aclocal traces this macro to find the Autoconf version.
+# This is a private macro too.  Using m4_define simplifies
+# the logic in aclocal, which can simply ignore this definition.
+m4_define([_AM_AUTOCONF_VERSION], [])
+
+# AM_SET_CURRENT_AUTOMAKE_VERSION
+# -------------------------------
+# Call AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION and AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION so they can be traced.
+# This function is AC_REQUIREd by AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE.
+AC_DEFUN([AM_SET_CURRENT_AUTOMAKE_VERSION],
+[AM_AUTOMAKE_VERSION([1.16.1])dnl
+m4_ifndef([AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION],
+  [m4_copy([m4_PACKAGE_VERSION], [AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION])])dnl
+_AM_AUTOCONF_VERSION(m4_defn([AC_AUTOCONF_VERSION]))])
+
+# AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND                                         -*- Autoconf -*-
+
+# Copyright (C) 2001-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# For projects using AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR([foo]), Autoconf sets
+# $ac_aux_dir to '$srcdir/foo'.  In other projects, it is set to
+# '$srcdir', '$srcdir/..', or '$srcdir/../..'.
+#
+# Of course, Automake must honor this variable whenever it calls a
+# tool from the auxiliary directory.  The problem is that $srcdir (and
+# therefore $ac_aux_dir as well) can be either absolute or relative,
+# depending on how configure is run.  This is pretty annoying, since
+# it makes $ac_aux_dir quite unusable in subdirectories: in the top
+# source directory, any form will work fine, but in subdirectories a
+# relative path needs to be adjusted first.
+#
+# $ac_aux_dir/missing
+#    fails when called from a subdirectory if $ac_aux_dir is relative
+# $top_srcdir/$ac_aux_dir/missing
+#    fails if $ac_aux_dir is absolute,
+#    fails when called from a subdirectory in a VPATH build with
+#          a relative $ac_aux_dir
+#
+# The reason of the latter failure is that $top_srcdir and $ac_aux_dir
+# are both prefixed by $srcdir.  In an in-source build this is usually
+# harmless because $srcdir is '.', but things will broke when you
+# start a VPATH build or use an absolute $srcdir.
+#
+# So we could use something similar to $top_srcdir/$ac_aux_dir/missing,
+# iff we strip the leading $srcdir from $ac_aux_dir.  That would be:
+#   am_aux_dir='\$(top_srcdir)/'`expr "$ac_aux_dir" : "$srcdir//*\(.*\)"`
+# and then we would define $MISSING as
+#   MISSING="\${SHELL} $am_aux_dir/missing"
+# This will work as long as MISSING is not called from configure, because
+# unfortunately $(top_srcdir) has no meaning in configure.
+# However there are other variables, like CC, which are often used in
+# configure, and could therefore not use this "fixed" $ac_aux_dir.
+#
+# Another solution, used here, is to always expand $ac_aux_dir to an
+# absolute PATH.  The drawback is that using absolute paths prevent a
+# configured tree to be moved without reconfiguration.
+
+AC_DEFUN([AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND],
+[AC_REQUIRE([AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR_DEFAULT])dnl
+# Expand $ac_aux_dir to an absolute path.
+am_aux_dir=`cd "$ac_aux_dir" && pwd`
+])
+
+# Do all the work for Automake.                             -*- Autoconf -*-
+
+# Copyright (C) 1996-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# This macro actually does too much.  Some checks are only needed if
+# your package does certain things.  But this isn't really a big deal.
+
+dnl Redefine AC_PROG_CC to automatically invoke _AM_PROG_CC_C_O.
+m4_define([AC_PROG_CC],
+m4_defn([AC_PROG_CC])
+[_AM_PROG_CC_C_O
+])
+
+# AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE(PACKAGE, VERSION, [NO-DEFINE])
+# AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE([OPTIONS])
+# -----------------------------------------------
+# The call with PACKAGE and VERSION arguments is the old style
+# call (pre autoconf-2.50), which is being phased out.  PACKAGE
+# and VERSION should now be passed to AC_INIT and removed from
+# the call to AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE.
+# We support both call styles for the transition.  After
+# the next Automake release, Autoconf can make the AC_INIT
+# arguments mandatory, and then we can depend on a new Autoconf
+# release and drop the old call support.
+AC_DEFUN([AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE],
+[AC_PREREQ([2.65])dnl
+dnl Autoconf wants to disallow AM_ names.  We explicitly allow
+dnl the ones we care about.
+m4_pattern_allow([^AM_[A-Z]+FLAGS$])dnl
+AC_REQUIRE([AM_SET_CURRENT_AUTOMAKE_VERSION])dnl
+AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_INSTALL])dnl
+if test "`cd $srcdir && pwd`" != "`pwd`"; then
+  # Use -I$(srcdir) only when $(srcdir) != ., so that make's output
+  # is not polluted with repeated "-I."
+  AC_SUBST([am__isrc], [' -I$(srcdir)'])_AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE([am__isrc])dnl
+  # test to see if srcdir already configured
+  if test -f $srcdir/config.status; then
+    AC_MSG_ERROR([source directory already configured; run "make distclean" there first])
+  fi
+fi
+
+# test whether we have cygpath
+if test -z "$CYGPATH_W"; then
+  if (cygpath --version) >/dev/null 2>/dev/null; then
+    CYGPATH_W='cygpath -w'
+  else
+    CYGPATH_W=echo
+  fi
+fi
+AC_SUBST([CYGPATH_W])
+
+# Define the identity of the package.
+dnl Distinguish between old-style and new-style calls.
+m4_ifval([$2],
+[AC_DIAGNOSE([obsolete],
+             [$0: two- and three-arguments forms are deprecated.])
+m4_ifval([$3], [_AM_SET_OPTION([no-define])])dnl
+ AC_SUBST([PACKAGE], [$1])dnl
+ AC_SUBST([VERSION], [$2])],
+[_AM_SET_OPTIONS([$1])dnl
+dnl Diagnose old-style AC_INIT with new-style AM_AUTOMAKE_INIT.
+m4_if(
+  m4_ifdef([AC_PACKAGE_NAME], [ok]):m4_ifdef([AC_PACKAGE_VERSION], [ok]),
+  [ok:ok],,
+  [m4_fatal([AC_INIT should be called with package and version arguments])])dnl
+ AC_SUBST([PACKAGE], ['AC_PACKAGE_TARNAME'])dnl
+ AC_SUBST([VERSION], ['AC_PACKAGE_VERSION'])])dnl
+
+_AM_IF_OPTION([no-define],,
+[AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED([PACKAGE], ["$PACKAGE"], [Name of package])
+ AC_DEFINE_UNQUOTED([VERSION], ["$VERSION"], [Version number of package])])dnl
+
+# Some tools Automake needs.
+AC_REQUIRE([AM_SANITY_CHECK])dnl
+AC_REQUIRE([AC_ARG_PROGRAM])dnl
+AM_MISSING_PROG([ACLOCAL], [aclocal-${am__api_version}])
+AM_MISSING_PROG([AUTOCONF], [autoconf])
+AM_MISSING_PROG([AUTOMAKE], [automake-${am__api_version}])
+AM_MISSING_PROG([AUTOHEADER], [autoheader])
+AM_MISSING_PROG([MAKEINFO], [makeinfo])
+AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH])dnl
+AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_INSTALL_STRIP])dnl
+AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_MKDIR_P])dnl
+# For better backward compatibility.  To be removed once Automake 1.9.x
+# dies out for good.  For more background, see:
+# <https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/automake/2012-07/msg00001.html>
+# <https://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/automake/2012-07/msg00014.html>
+AC_SUBST([mkdir_p], ['$(MKDIR_P)'])
+# We need awk for the "check" target (and possibly the TAP driver).  The
+# system "awk" is bad on some platforms.
+AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_AWK])dnl
+AC_REQUIRE([AC_PROG_MAKE_SET])dnl
+AC_REQUIRE([AM_SET_LEADING_DOT])dnl
+_AM_IF_OPTION([tar-ustar], [_AM_PROG_TAR([ustar])],
+	      [_AM_IF_OPTION([tar-pax], [_AM_PROG_TAR([pax])],
+			     [_AM_PROG_TAR([v7])])])
+_AM_IF_OPTION([no-dependencies],,
+[AC_PROVIDE_IFELSE([AC_PROG_CC],
+		  [_AM_DEPENDENCIES([CC])],
+		  [m4_define([AC_PROG_CC],
+			     m4_defn([AC_PROG_CC])[_AM_DEPENDENCIES([CC])])])dnl
+AC_PROVIDE_IFELSE([AC_PROG_CXX],
+		  [_AM_DEPENDENCIES([CXX])],
+		  [m4_define([AC_PROG_CXX],
+			     m4_defn([AC_PROG_CXX])[_AM_DEPENDENCIES([CXX])])])dnl
+AC_PROVIDE_IFELSE([AC_PROG_OBJC],
+		  [_AM_DEPENDENCIES([OBJC])],
+		  [m4_define([AC_PROG_OBJC],
+			     m4_defn([AC_PROG_OBJC])[_AM_DEPENDENCIES([OBJC])])])dnl
+AC_PROVIDE_IFELSE([AC_PROG_OBJCXX],
+		  [_AM_DEPENDENCIES([OBJCXX])],
+		  [m4_define([AC_PROG_OBJCXX],
+			     m4_defn([AC_PROG_OBJCXX])[_AM_DEPENDENCIES([OBJCXX])])])dnl
+])
+AC_REQUIRE([AM_SILENT_RULES])dnl
+dnl The testsuite driver may need to know about EXEEXT, so add the
+dnl 'am__EXEEXT' conditional if _AM_COMPILER_EXEEXT was seen.  This
+dnl macro is hooked onto _AC_COMPILER_EXEEXT early, see below.
+AC_CONFIG_COMMANDS_PRE(dnl
+[m4_provide_if([_AM_COMPILER_EXEEXT],
+  [AM_CONDITIONAL([am__EXEEXT], [test -n "$EXEEXT"])])])dnl
+
+# POSIX will say in a future version that running "rm -f" with no argument
+# is OK; and we want to be able to make that assumption in our Makefile
+# recipes.  So use an aggressive probe to check that the usage we want is
+# actually supported "in the wild" to an acceptable degree.
+# See automake bug#10828.
+# To make any issue more visible, cause the running configure to be aborted
+# by default if the 'rm' program in use doesn't match our expectations; the
+# user can still override this though.
+if rm -f && rm -fr && rm -rf; then : OK; else
+  cat >&2 <<'END'
+Oops!
+
+Your 'rm' program seems unable to run without file operands specified
+on the command line, even when the '-f' option is present.  This is contrary
+to the behaviour of most rm programs out there, and not conforming with
+the upcoming POSIX standard: <http://austingroupbugs.net/view.php?id=542>
+
+Please tell bug-automake@gnu.org about your system, including the value
+of your $PATH and any error possibly output before this message.  This
+can help us improve future automake versions.
+
+END
+  if test x"$ACCEPT_INFERIOR_RM_PROGRAM" = x"yes"; then
+    echo 'Configuration will proceed anyway, since you have set the' >&2
+    echo 'ACCEPT_INFERIOR_RM_PROGRAM variable to "yes"' >&2
+    echo >&2
+  else
+    cat >&2 <<'END'
+Aborting the configuration process, to ensure you take notice of the issue.
+
+You can download and install GNU coreutils to get an 'rm' implementation
+that behaves properly: <https://www.gnu.org/software/coreutils/>.
+
+If you want to complete the configuration process using your problematic
+'rm' anyway, export the environment variable ACCEPT_INFERIOR_RM_PROGRAM
+to "yes", and re-run configure.
+
+END
+    AC_MSG_ERROR([Your 'rm' program is bad, sorry.])
+  fi
+fi
+dnl The trailing newline in this macro's definition is deliberate, for
+dnl backward compatibility and to allow trailing 'dnl'-style comments
+dnl after the AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE invocation. See automake bug#16841.
+])
+
+dnl Hook into '_AC_COMPILER_EXEEXT' early to learn its expansion.  Do not
+dnl add the conditional right here, as _AC_COMPILER_EXEEXT may be further
+dnl mangled by Autoconf and run in a shell conditional statement.
+m4_define([_AC_COMPILER_EXEEXT],
+m4_defn([_AC_COMPILER_EXEEXT])[m4_provide([_AM_COMPILER_EXEEXT])])
+
+# When config.status generates a header, we must update the stamp-h file.
+# This file resides in the same directory as the config header
+# that is generated.  The stamp files are numbered to have different names.
+
+# Autoconf calls _AC_AM_CONFIG_HEADER_HOOK (when defined) in the
+# loop where config.status creates the headers, so we can generate
+# our stamp files there.
+AC_DEFUN([_AC_AM_CONFIG_HEADER_HOOK],
+[# Compute $1's index in $config_headers.
+_am_arg=$1
+_am_stamp_count=1
+for _am_header in $config_headers :; do
+  case $_am_header in
+    $_am_arg | $_am_arg:* )
+      break ;;
+    * )
+      _am_stamp_count=`expr $_am_stamp_count + 1` ;;
+  esac
+done
+echo "timestamp for $_am_arg" >`AS_DIRNAME(["$_am_arg"])`/stamp-h[]$_am_stamp_count])
+
+# Copyright (C) 2001-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH
+# ------------------
+# Define $install_sh.
+AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH],
+[AC_REQUIRE([AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND])dnl
+if test x"${install_sh+set}" != xset; then
+  case $am_aux_dir in
+  *\ * | *\	*)
+    install_sh="\${SHELL} '$am_aux_dir/install-sh'" ;;
+  *)
+    install_sh="\${SHELL} $am_aux_dir/install-sh"
+  esac
+fi
+AC_SUBST([install_sh])])
+
+# Copyright (C) 2003-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# Check whether the underlying file-system supports filenames
+# with a leading dot.  For instance MS-DOS doesn't.
+AC_DEFUN([AM_SET_LEADING_DOT],
+[rm -rf .tst 2>/dev/null
+mkdir .tst 2>/dev/null
+if test -d .tst; then
+  am__leading_dot=.
+else
+  am__leading_dot=_
+fi
+rmdir .tst 2>/dev/null
+AC_SUBST([am__leading_dot])])
+
+# Fake the existence of programs that GNU maintainers use.  -*- Autoconf -*-
+
+# Copyright (C) 1997-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# AM_MISSING_PROG(NAME, PROGRAM)
+# ------------------------------
+AC_DEFUN([AM_MISSING_PROG],
+[AC_REQUIRE([AM_MISSING_HAS_RUN])
+$1=${$1-"${am_missing_run}$2"}
+AC_SUBST($1)])
+
+# AM_MISSING_HAS_RUN
+# ------------------
+# Define MISSING if not defined so far and test if it is modern enough.
+# If it is, set am_missing_run to use it, otherwise, to nothing.
+AC_DEFUN([AM_MISSING_HAS_RUN],
+[AC_REQUIRE([AM_AUX_DIR_EXPAND])dnl
+AC_REQUIRE_AUX_FILE([missing])dnl
+if test x"${MISSING+set}" != xset; then
+  case $am_aux_dir in
+  *\ * | *\	*)
+    MISSING="\${SHELL} \"$am_aux_dir/missing\"" ;;
+  *)
+    MISSING="\${SHELL} $am_aux_dir/missing" ;;
+  esac
+fi
+# Use eval to expand $SHELL
+if eval "$MISSING --is-lightweight"; then
+  am_missing_run="$MISSING "
+else
+  am_missing_run=
+  AC_MSG_WARN(['missing' script is too old or missing])
+fi
+])
+
+# Helper functions for option handling.                     -*- Autoconf -*-
+
+# Copyright (C) 2001-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# _AM_MANGLE_OPTION(NAME)
+# -----------------------
+AC_DEFUN([_AM_MANGLE_OPTION],
+[[_AM_OPTION_]m4_bpatsubst($1, [[^a-zA-Z0-9_]], [_])])
+
+# _AM_SET_OPTION(NAME)
+# --------------------
+# Set option NAME.  Presently that only means defining a flag for this option.
+AC_DEFUN([_AM_SET_OPTION],
+[m4_define(_AM_MANGLE_OPTION([$1]), [1])])
+
+# _AM_SET_OPTIONS(OPTIONS)
+# ------------------------
+# OPTIONS is a space-separated list of Automake options.
+AC_DEFUN([_AM_SET_OPTIONS],
+[m4_foreach_w([_AM_Option], [$1], [_AM_SET_OPTION(_AM_Option)])])
+
+# _AM_IF_OPTION(OPTION, IF-SET, [IF-NOT-SET])
+# -------------------------------------------
+# Execute IF-SET if OPTION is set, IF-NOT-SET otherwise.
+AC_DEFUN([_AM_IF_OPTION],
+[m4_ifset(_AM_MANGLE_OPTION([$1]), [$2], [$3])])
+
+# Check to make sure that the build environment is sane.    -*- Autoconf -*-
+
+# Copyright (C) 1996-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# AM_SANITY_CHECK
+# ---------------
+AC_DEFUN([AM_SANITY_CHECK],
+[AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether build environment is sane])
+# Reject unsafe characters in $srcdir or the absolute working directory
+# name.  Accept space and tab only in the latter.
+am_lf='
+'
+case `pwd` in
+  *[[\\\"\#\$\&\'\`$am_lf]]*)
+    AC_MSG_ERROR([unsafe absolute working directory name]);;
+esac
+case $srcdir in
+  *[[\\\"\#\$\&\'\`$am_lf\ \	]]*)
+    AC_MSG_ERROR([unsafe srcdir value: '$srcdir']);;
+esac
+
+# Do 'set' in a subshell so we don't clobber the current shell's
+# arguments.  Must try -L first in case configure is actually a
+# symlink; some systems play weird games with the mod time of symlinks
+# (eg FreeBSD returns the mod time of the symlink's containing
+# directory).
+if (
+   am_has_slept=no
+   for am_try in 1 2; do
+     echo "timestamp, slept: $am_has_slept" > conftest.file
+     set X `ls -Lt "$srcdir/configure" conftest.file 2> /dev/null`
+     if test "$[*]" = "X"; then
+	# -L didn't work.
+	set X `ls -t "$srcdir/configure" conftest.file`
+     fi
+     if test "$[*]" != "X $srcdir/configure conftest.file" \
+	&& test "$[*]" != "X conftest.file $srcdir/configure"; then
+
+	# If neither matched, then we have a broken ls.  This can happen
+	# if, for instance, CONFIG_SHELL is bash and it inherits a
+	# broken ls alias from the environment.  This has actually
+	# happened.  Such a system could not be considered "sane".
+	AC_MSG_ERROR([ls -t appears to fail.  Make sure there is not a broken
+  alias in your environment])
+     fi
+     if test "$[2]" = conftest.file || test $am_try -eq 2; then
+       break
+     fi
+     # Just in case.
+     sleep 1
+     am_has_slept=yes
+   done
+   test "$[2]" = conftest.file
+   )
+then
+   # Ok.
+   :
+else
+   AC_MSG_ERROR([newly created file is older than distributed files!
+Check your system clock])
+fi
+AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
+# If we didn't sleep, we still need to ensure time stamps of config.status and
+# generated files are strictly newer.
+am_sleep_pid=
+if grep 'slept: no' conftest.file >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  ( sleep 1 ) &
+  am_sleep_pid=$!
+fi
+AC_CONFIG_COMMANDS_PRE(
+  [AC_MSG_CHECKING([that generated files are newer than configure])
+   if test -n "$am_sleep_pid"; then
+     # Hide warnings about reused PIDs.
+     wait $am_sleep_pid 2>/dev/null
+   fi
+   AC_MSG_RESULT([done])])
+rm -f conftest.file
+])
+
+# Copyright (C) 2009-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# AM_SILENT_RULES([DEFAULT])
+# --------------------------
+# Enable less verbose build rules; with the default set to DEFAULT
+# ("yes" being less verbose, "no" or empty being verbose).
+AC_DEFUN([AM_SILENT_RULES],
+[AC_ARG_ENABLE([silent-rules], [dnl
+AS_HELP_STRING(
+  [--enable-silent-rules],
+  [less verbose build output (undo: "make V=1")])
+AS_HELP_STRING(
+  [--disable-silent-rules],
+  [verbose build output (undo: "make V=0")])dnl
+])
+case $enable_silent_rules in @%:@ (((
+  yes) AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY=0;;
+   no) AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY=1;;
+    *) AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY=m4_if([$1], [yes], [0], [1]);;
+esac
+dnl
+dnl A few 'make' implementations (e.g., NonStop OS and NextStep)
+dnl do not support nested variable expansions.
+dnl See automake bug#9928 and bug#10237.
+am_make=${MAKE-make}
+AC_CACHE_CHECK([whether $am_make supports nested variables],
+   [am_cv_make_support_nested_variables],
+   [if AS_ECHO([['TRUE=$(BAR$(V))
+BAR0=false
+BAR1=true
+V=1
+am__doit:
+	@$(TRUE)
+.PHONY: am__doit']]) | $am_make -f - >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  am_cv_make_support_nested_variables=yes
+else
+  am_cv_make_support_nested_variables=no
+fi])
+if test $am_cv_make_support_nested_variables = yes; then
+  dnl Using '$V' instead of '$(V)' breaks IRIX make.
+  AM_V='$(V)'
+  AM_DEFAULT_V='$(AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY)'
+else
+  AM_V=$AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY
+  AM_DEFAULT_V=$AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY
+fi
+AC_SUBST([AM_V])dnl
+AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE([AM_V])dnl
+AC_SUBST([AM_DEFAULT_V])dnl
+AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE([AM_DEFAULT_V])dnl
+AC_SUBST([AM_DEFAULT_VERBOSITY])dnl
+AM_BACKSLASH='\'
+AC_SUBST([AM_BACKSLASH])dnl
+_AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE([AM_BACKSLASH])dnl
+])
+
+# Copyright (C) 2001-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# AM_PROG_INSTALL_STRIP
+# ---------------------
+# One issue with vendor 'install' (even GNU) is that you can't
+# specify the program used to strip binaries.  This is especially
+# annoying in cross-compiling environments, where the build's strip
+# is unlikely to handle the host's binaries.
+# Fortunately install-sh will honor a STRIPPROG variable, so we
+# always use install-sh in "make install-strip", and initialize
+# STRIPPROG with the value of the STRIP variable (set by the user).
+AC_DEFUN([AM_PROG_INSTALL_STRIP],
+[AC_REQUIRE([AM_PROG_INSTALL_SH])dnl
+# Installed binaries are usually stripped using 'strip' when the user
+# run "make install-strip".  However 'strip' might not be the right
+# tool to use in cross-compilation environments, therefore Automake
+# will honor the 'STRIP' environment variable to overrule this program.
+dnl Don't test for $cross_compiling = yes, because it might be 'maybe'.
+if test "$cross_compiling" != no; then
+  AC_CHECK_TOOL([STRIP], [strip], :)
+fi
+INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM="\$(install_sh) -c -s"
+AC_SUBST([INSTALL_STRIP_PROGRAM])])
+
+# Copyright (C) 2006-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# _AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE(VARIABLE)
+# ---------------------------
+# Prevent Automake from outputting VARIABLE = @VARIABLE@ in Makefile.in.
+# This macro is traced by Automake.
+AC_DEFUN([_AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE])
+
+# AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE(VARIABLE)
+# --------------------------
+# Public sister of _AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE.
+AC_DEFUN([AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE], [_AM_SUBST_NOTMAKE($@)])
+
+# Check how to create a tarball.                            -*- Autoconf -*-
+
+# Copyright (C) 2004-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This file is free software; the Free Software Foundation
+# gives unlimited permission to copy and/or distribute it,
+# with or without modifications, as long as this notice is preserved.
+
+# _AM_PROG_TAR(FORMAT)
+# --------------------
+# Check how to create a tarball in format FORMAT.
+# FORMAT should be one of 'v7', 'ustar', or 'pax'.
+#
+# Substitute a variable $(am__tar) that is a command
+# writing to stdout a FORMAT-tarball containing the directory
+# $tardir.
+#     tardir=directory && $(am__tar) > result.tar
+#
+# Substitute a variable $(am__untar) that extract such
+# a tarball read from stdin.
+#     $(am__untar) < result.tar
+#
+AC_DEFUN([_AM_PROG_TAR],
+[# Always define AMTAR for backward compatibility.  Yes, it's still used
+# in the wild :-(  We should find a proper way to deprecate it ...
+AC_SUBST([AMTAR], ['$${TAR-tar}'])
+
+# We'll loop over all known methods to create a tar archive until one works.
+_am_tools='gnutar m4_if([$1], [ustar], [plaintar]) pax cpio none'
+
+m4_if([$1], [v7],
+  [am__tar='$${TAR-tar} chof - "$$tardir"' am__untar='$${TAR-tar} xf -'],
+
+  [m4_case([$1],
+    [ustar],
+     [# The POSIX 1988 'ustar' format is defined with fixed-size fields.
+      # There is notably a 21 bits limit for the UID and the GID.  In fact,
+      # the 'pax' utility can hang on bigger UID/GID (see automake bug#8343
+      # and bug#13588).
+      am_max_uid=2097151 # 2^21 - 1
+      am_max_gid=$am_max_uid
+      # The $UID and $GID variables are not portable, so we need to resort
+      # to the POSIX-mandated id(1) utility.  Errors in the 'id' calls
+      # below are definitely unexpected, so allow the users to see them
+      # (that is, avoid stderr redirection).
+      am_uid=`id -u || echo unknown`
+      am_gid=`id -g || echo unknown`
+      AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether UID '$am_uid' is supported by ustar format])
+      if test $am_uid -le $am_max_uid; then
+         AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
+      else
+         AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
+         _am_tools=none
+      fi
+      AC_MSG_CHECKING([whether GID '$am_gid' is supported by ustar format])
+      if test $am_gid -le $am_max_gid; then
+         AC_MSG_RESULT([yes])
+      else
+        AC_MSG_RESULT([no])
+        _am_tools=none
+      fi],
+
+  [pax],
+    [],
+
+  [m4_fatal([Unknown tar format])])
+
+  AC_MSG_CHECKING([how to create a $1 tar archive])
+
+  # Go ahead even if we have the value already cached.  We do so because we
+  # need to set the values for the 'am__tar' and 'am__untar' variables.
+  _am_tools=${am_cv_prog_tar_$1-$_am_tools}
+
+  for _am_tool in $_am_tools; do
+    case $_am_tool in
+    gnutar)
+      for _am_tar in tar gnutar gtar; do
+        AM_RUN_LOG([$_am_tar --version]) && break
+      done
+      am__tar="$_am_tar --format=m4_if([$1], [pax], [posix], [$1]) -chf - "'"$$tardir"'
+      am__tar_="$_am_tar --format=m4_if([$1], [pax], [posix], [$1]) -chf - "'"$tardir"'
+      am__untar="$_am_tar -xf -"
+      ;;
+    plaintar)
+      # Must skip GNU tar: if it does not support --format= it doesn't create
+      # ustar tarball either.
+      (tar --version) >/dev/null 2>&1 && continue
+      am__tar='tar chf - "$$tardir"'
+      am__tar_='tar chf - "$tardir"'
+      am__untar='tar xf -'
+      ;;
+    pax)
+      am__tar='pax -L -x $1 -w "$$tardir"'
+      am__tar_='pax -L -x $1 -w "$tardir"'
+      am__untar='pax -r'
+      ;;
+    cpio)
+      am__tar='find "$$tardir" -print | cpio -o -H $1 -L'
+      am__tar_='find "$tardir" -print | cpio -o -H $1 -L'
+      am__untar='cpio -i -H $1 -d'
+      ;;
+    none)
+      am__tar=false
+      am__tar_=false
+      am__untar=false
+      ;;
+    esac
+
+    # If the value was cached, stop now.  We just wanted to have am__tar
+    # and am__untar set.
+    test -n "${am_cv_prog_tar_$1}" && break
+
+    # tar/untar a dummy directory, and stop if the command works.
+    rm -rf conftest.dir
+    mkdir conftest.dir
+    echo GrepMe > conftest.dir/file
+    AM_RUN_LOG([tardir=conftest.dir && eval $am__tar_ >conftest.tar])
+    rm -rf conftest.dir
+    if test -s conftest.tar; then
+      AM_RUN_LOG([$am__untar <conftest.tar])
+      AM_RUN_LOG([cat conftest.dir/file])
+      grep GrepMe conftest.dir/file >/dev/null 2>&1 && break
+    fi
+  done
+  rm -rf conftest.dir
+
+  AC_CACHE_VAL([am_cv_prog_tar_$1], [am_cv_prog_tar_$1=$_am_tool])
+  AC_MSG_RESULT([$am_cv_prog_tar_$1])])
+
+AC_SUBST([am__tar])
+AC_SUBST([am__untar])
+]) # _AM_PROG_TAR
+
diff --git a/bootstrap.sh b/bootstrap.sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..5a29d5f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/bootstrap.sh
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+autoreconf -vif
diff --git a/build-aux/generate-images.scm b/build-aux/generate-images.scm
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..87d67ea
--- /dev/null
+++ b/build-aux/generate-images.scm
@@ -0,0 +1,7 @@
+(import (pict) (ice-9 match))
+(define* (main #:optional (args (command-line)))
+  (match args
+    ((_ source)
+     (let ((pict (load source))
+           (target (string-append source ".svg")))
+       (pict->file pict target)))))
diff --git a/build-aux/install-sh b/build-aux/install-sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..8175c64
--- /dev/null
+++ b/build-aux/install-sh
@@ -0,0 +1,518 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# install - install a program, script, or datafile
+
+scriptversion=2018-03-11.20; # UTC
+
+# This originates from X11R5 (mit/util/scripts/install.sh), which was
+# later released in X11R6 (xc/config/util/install.sh) with the
+# following copyright and license.
+#
+# Copyright (C) 1994 X Consortium
+#
+# Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy
+# of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to
+# deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the
+# rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or
+# sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is
+# furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
+#
+# The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in
+# all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
+#
+# THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR
+# IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
+# FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT.  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE
+# X CONSORTIUM BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
+# AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNEC-
+# TION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.
+#
+# Except as contained in this notice, the name of the X Consortium shall not
+# be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other deal-
+# ings in this Software without prior written authorization from the X Consor-
+# tium.
+#
+#
+# FSF changes to this file are in the public domain.
+#
+# Calling this script install-sh is preferred over install.sh, to prevent
+# 'make' implicit rules from creating a file called install from it
+# when there is no Makefile.
+#
+# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
+# from scratch.
+
+tab='	'
+nl='
+'
+IFS=" $tab$nl"
+
+# Set DOITPROG to "echo" to test this script.
+
+doit=${DOITPROG-}
+doit_exec=${doit:-exec}
+
+# Put in absolute file names if you don't have them in your path;
+# or use environment vars.
+
+chgrpprog=${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}
+chmodprog=${CHMODPROG-chmod}
+chownprog=${CHOWNPROG-chown}
+cmpprog=${CMPPROG-cmp}
+cpprog=${CPPROG-cp}
+mkdirprog=${MKDIRPROG-mkdir}
+mvprog=${MVPROG-mv}
+rmprog=${RMPROG-rm}
+stripprog=${STRIPPROG-strip}
+
+posix_mkdir=
+
+# Desired mode of installed file.
+mode=0755
+
+chgrpcmd=
+chmodcmd=$chmodprog
+chowncmd=
+mvcmd=$mvprog
+rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
+stripcmd=
+
+src=
+dst=
+dir_arg=
+dst_arg=
+
+copy_on_change=false
+is_target_a_directory=possibly
+
+usage="\
+Usage: $0 [OPTION]... [-T] SRCFILE DSTFILE
+   or: $0 [OPTION]... SRCFILES... DIRECTORY
+   or: $0 [OPTION]... -t DIRECTORY SRCFILES...
+   or: $0 [OPTION]... -d DIRECTORIES...
+
+In the 1st form, copy SRCFILE to DSTFILE.
+In the 2nd and 3rd, copy all SRCFILES to DIRECTORY.
+In the 4th, create DIRECTORIES.
+
+Options:
+     --help     display this help and exit.
+     --version  display version info and exit.
+
+  -c            (ignored)
+  -C            install only if different (preserve the last data modification time)
+  -d            create directories instead of installing files.
+  -g GROUP      $chgrpprog installed files to GROUP.
+  -m MODE       $chmodprog installed files to MODE.
+  -o USER       $chownprog installed files to USER.
+  -s            $stripprog installed files.
+  -t DIRECTORY  install into DIRECTORY.
+  -T            report an error if DSTFILE is a directory.
+
+Environment variables override the default commands:
+  CHGRPPROG CHMODPROG CHOWNPROG CMPPROG CPPROG MKDIRPROG MVPROG
+  RMPROG STRIPPROG
+"
+
+while test $# -ne 0; do
+  case $1 in
+    -c) ;;
+
+    -C) copy_on_change=true;;
+
+    -d) dir_arg=true;;
+
+    -g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
+        shift;;
+
+    --help) echo "$usage"; exit $?;;
+
+    -m) mode=$2
+        case $mode in
+          *' '* | *"$tab"* | *"$nl"* | *'*'* | *'?'* | *'['*)
+            echo "$0: invalid mode: $mode" >&2
+            exit 1;;
+        esac
+        shift;;
+
+    -o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
+        shift;;
+
+    -s) stripcmd=$stripprog;;
+
+    -t)
+        is_target_a_directory=always
+        dst_arg=$2
+        # Protect names problematic for 'test' and other utilities.
+        case $dst_arg in
+          -* | [=\(\)!]) dst_arg=./$dst_arg;;
+        esac
+        shift;;
+
+    -T) is_target_a_directory=never;;
+
+    --version) echo "$0 $scriptversion"; exit $?;;
+
+    --) shift
+        break;;
+
+    -*) echo "$0: invalid option: $1" >&2
+        exit 1;;
+
+    *)  break;;
+  esac
+  shift
+done
+
+# We allow the use of options -d and -T together, by making -d
+# take the precedence; this is for compatibility with GNU install.
+
+if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
+  if test -n "$dst_arg"; then
+    echo "$0: target directory not allowed when installing a directory." >&2
+    exit 1
+  fi
+fi
+
+if test $# -ne 0 && test -z "$dir_arg$dst_arg"; then
+  # When -d is used, all remaining arguments are directories to create.
+  # When -t is used, the destination is already specified.
+  # Otherwise, the last argument is the destination.  Remove it from $@.
+  for arg
+  do
+    if test -n "$dst_arg"; then
+      # $@ is not empty: it contains at least $arg.
+      set fnord "$@" "$dst_arg"
+      shift # fnord
+    fi
+    shift # arg
+    dst_arg=$arg
+    # Protect names problematic for 'test' and other utilities.
+    case $dst_arg in
+      -* | [=\(\)!]) dst_arg=./$dst_arg;;
+    esac
+  done
+fi
+
+if test $# -eq 0; then
+  if test -z "$dir_arg"; then
+    echo "$0: no input file specified." >&2
+    exit 1
+  fi
+  # It's OK to call 'install-sh -d' without argument.
+  # This can happen when creating conditional directories.
+  exit 0
+fi
+
+if test -z "$dir_arg"; then
+  if test $# -gt 1 || test "$is_target_a_directory" = always; then
+    if test ! -d "$dst_arg"; then
+      echo "$0: $dst_arg: Is not a directory." >&2
+      exit 1
+    fi
+  fi
+fi
+
+if test -z "$dir_arg"; then
+  do_exit='(exit $ret); exit $ret'
+  trap "ret=129; $do_exit" 1
+  trap "ret=130; $do_exit" 2
+  trap "ret=141; $do_exit" 13
+  trap "ret=143; $do_exit" 15
+
+  # Set umask so as not to create temps with too-generous modes.
+  # However, 'strip' requires both read and write access to temps.
+  case $mode in
+    # Optimize common cases.
+    *644) cp_umask=133;;
+    *755) cp_umask=22;;
+
+    *[0-7])
+      if test -z "$stripcmd"; then
+        u_plus_rw=
+      else
+        u_plus_rw='% 200'
+      fi
+      cp_umask=`expr '(' 777 - $mode % 1000 ')' $u_plus_rw`;;
+    *)
+      if test -z "$stripcmd"; then
+        u_plus_rw=
+      else
+        u_plus_rw=,u+rw
+      fi
+      cp_umask=$mode$u_plus_rw;;
+  esac
+fi
+
+for src
+do
+  # Protect names problematic for 'test' and other utilities.
+  case $src in
+    -* | [=\(\)!]) src=./$src;;
+  esac
+
+  if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
+    dst=$src
+    dstdir=$dst
+    test -d "$dstdir"
+    dstdir_status=$?
+  else
+
+    # Waiting for this to be detected by the "$cpprog $src $dsttmp" command
+    # might cause directories to be created, which would be especially bad
+    # if $src (and thus $dsttmp) contains '*'.
+    if test ! -f "$src" && test ! -d "$src"; then
+      echo "$0: $src does not exist." >&2
+      exit 1
+    fi
+
+    if test -z "$dst_arg"; then
+      echo "$0: no destination specified." >&2
+      exit 1
+    fi
+    dst=$dst_arg
+
+    # If destination is a directory, append the input filename.
+    if test -d "$dst"; then
+      if test "$is_target_a_directory" = never; then
+        echo "$0: $dst_arg: Is a directory" >&2
+        exit 1
+      fi
+      dstdir=$dst
+      dstbase=`basename "$src"`
+      case $dst in
+	*/) dst=$dst$dstbase;;
+	*)  dst=$dst/$dstbase;;
+      esac
+      dstdir_status=0
+    else
+      dstdir=`dirname "$dst"`
+      test -d "$dstdir"
+      dstdir_status=$?
+    fi
+  fi
+
+  case $dstdir in
+    */) dstdirslash=$dstdir;;
+    *)  dstdirslash=$dstdir/;;
+  esac
+
+  obsolete_mkdir_used=false
+
+  if test $dstdir_status != 0; then
+    case $posix_mkdir in
+      '')
+        # Create intermediate dirs using mode 755 as modified by the umask.
+        # This is like FreeBSD 'install' as of 1997-10-28.
+        umask=`umask`
+        case $stripcmd.$umask in
+          # Optimize common cases.
+          *[2367][2367]) mkdir_umask=$umask;;
+          .*0[02][02] | .[02][02] | .[02]) mkdir_umask=22;;
+
+          *[0-7])
+            mkdir_umask=`expr $umask + 22 \
+              - $umask % 100 % 40 + $umask % 20 \
+              - $umask % 10 % 4 + $umask % 2
+            `;;
+          *) mkdir_umask=$umask,go-w;;
+        esac
+
+        # With -d, create the new directory with the user-specified mode.
+        # Otherwise, rely on $mkdir_umask.
+        if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
+          mkdir_mode=-m$mode
+        else
+          mkdir_mode=
+        fi
+
+        posix_mkdir=false
+        case $umask in
+          *[123567][0-7][0-7])
+            # POSIX mkdir -p sets u+wx bits regardless of umask, which
+            # is incompatible with FreeBSD 'install' when (umask & 300) != 0.
+            ;;
+          *)
+            # Note that $RANDOM variable is not portable (e.g. dash);  Use it
+            # here however when possible just to lower collision chance.
+            tmpdir=${TMPDIR-/tmp}/ins$RANDOM-$$
+
+            trap 'ret=$?; rmdir "$tmpdir/a/b" "$tmpdir/a" "$tmpdir" 2>/dev/null; exit $ret' 0
+
+            # Because "mkdir -p" follows existing symlinks and we likely work
+            # directly in world-writeable /tmp, make sure that the '$tmpdir'
+            # directory is successfully created first before we actually test
+            # 'mkdir -p' feature.
+            if (umask $mkdir_umask &&
+                $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode "$tmpdir" &&
+                exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$tmpdir/a/b") >/dev/null 2>&1
+            then
+              if test -z "$dir_arg" || {
+                   # Check for POSIX incompatibilities with -m.
+                   # HP-UX 11.23 and IRIX 6.5 mkdir -m -p sets group- or
+                   # other-writable bit of parent directory when it shouldn't.
+                   # FreeBSD 6.1 mkdir -m -p sets mode of existing directory.
+                   test_tmpdir="$tmpdir/a"
+                   ls_ld_tmpdir=`ls -ld "$test_tmpdir"`
+                   case $ls_ld_tmpdir in
+                     d????-?r-*) different_mode=700;;
+                     d????-?--*) different_mode=755;;
+                     *) false;;
+                   esac &&
+                   $mkdirprog -m$different_mode -p -- "$test_tmpdir" && {
+                     ls_ld_tmpdir_1=`ls -ld "$test_tmpdir"`
+                     test "$ls_ld_tmpdir" = "$ls_ld_tmpdir_1"
+                   }
+                 }
+              then posix_mkdir=:
+              fi
+              rmdir "$tmpdir/a/b" "$tmpdir/a" "$tmpdir"
+            else
+              # Remove any dirs left behind by ancient mkdir implementations.
+              rmdir ./$mkdir_mode ./-p ./-- "$tmpdir" 2>/dev/null
+            fi
+            trap '' 0;;
+        esac;;
+    esac
+
+    if
+      $posix_mkdir && (
+        umask $mkdir_umask &&
+        $doit_exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$dstdir"
+      )
+    then :
+    else
+
+      # The umask is ridiculous, or mkdir does not conform to POSIX,
+      # or it failed possibly due to a race condition.  Create the
+      # directory the slow way, step by step, checking for races as we go.
+
+      case $dstdir in
+        /*) prefix='/';;
+        [-=\(\)!]*) prefix='./';;
+        *)  prefix='';;
+      esac
+
+      oIFS=$IFS
+      IFS=/
+      set -f
+      set fnord $dstdir
+      shift
+      set +f
+      IFS=$oIFS
+
+      prefixes=
+
+      for d
+      do
+        test X"$d" = X && continue
+
+        prefix=$prefix$d
+        if test -d "$prefix"; then
+          prefixes=
+        else
+          if $posix_mkdir; then
+            (umask=$mkdir_umask &&
+             $doit_exec $mkdirprog $mkdir_mode -p -- "$dstdir") && break
+            # Don't fail if two instances are running concurrently.
+            test -d "$prefix" || exit 1
+          else
+            case $prefix in
+              *\'*) qprefix=`echo "$prefix" | sed "s/'/'\\\\\\\\''/g"`;;
+              *) qprefix=$prefix;;
+            esac
+            prefixes="$prefixes '$qprefix'"
+          fi
+        fi
+        prefix=$prefix/
+      done
+
+      if test -n "$prefixes"; then
+        # Don't fail if two instances are running concurrently.
+        (umask $mkdir_umask &&
+         eval "\$doit_exec \$mkdirprog $prefixes") ||
+          test -d "$dstdir" || exit 1
+        obsolete_mkdir_used=true
+      fi
+    fi
+  fi
+
+  if test -n "$dir_arg"; then
+    { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dst"; } &&
+    { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dst"; } &&
+    { test "$obsolete_mkdir_used$chowncmd$chgrpcmd" = false ||
+      test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd $mode "$dst"; } || exit 1
+  else
+
+    # Make a couple of temp file names in the proper directory.
+    dsttmp=${dstdirslash}_inst.$$_
+    rmtmp=${dstdirslash}_rm.$$_
+
+    # Trap to clean up those temp files at exit.
+    trap 'ret=$?; rm -f "$dsttmp" "$rmtmp" && exit $ret' 0
+
+    # Copy the file name to the temp name.
+    (umask $cp_umask && $doit_exec $cpprog "$src" "$dsttmp") &&
+
+    # and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits.
+    #
+    # If any of these fail, we abort the whole thing.  If we want to
+    # ignore errors from any of these, just make sure not to ignore
+    # errors from the above "$doit $cpprog $src $dsttmp" command.
+    #
+    { test -z "$chowncmd" || $doit $chowncmd "$dsttmp"; } &&
+    { test -z "$chgrpcmd" || $doit $chgrpcmd "$dsttmp"; } &&
+    { test -z "$stripcmd" || $doit $stripcmd "$dsttmp"; } &&
+    { test -z "$chmodcmd" || $doit $chmodcmd $mode "$dsttmp"; } &&
+
+    # If -C, don't bother to copy if it wouldn't change the file.
+    if $copy_on_change &&
+       old=`LC_ALL=C ls -dlL "$dst"     2>/dev/null` &&
+       new=`LC_ALL=C ls -dlL "$dsttmp"  2>/dev/null` &&
+       set -f &&
+       set X $old && old=:$2:$4:$5:$6 &&
+       set X $new && new=:$2:$4:$5:$6 &&
+       set +f &&
+       test "$old" = "$new" &&
+       $cmpprog "$dst" "$dsttmp" >/dev/null 2>&1
+    then
+      rm -f "$dsttmp"
+    else
+      # Rename the file to the real destination.
+      $doit $mvcmd -f "$dsttmp" "$dst" 2>/dev/null ||
+
+      # The rename failed, perhaps because mv can't rename something else
+      # to itself, or perhaps because mv is so ancient that it does not
+      # support -f.
+      {
+        # Now remove or move aside any old file at destination location.
+        # We try this two ways since rm can't unlink itself on some
+        # systems and the destination file might be busy for other
+        # reasons.  In this case, the final cleanup might fail but the new
+        # file should still install successfully.
+        {
+          test ! -f "$dst" ||
+          $doit $rmcmd -f "$dst" 2>/dev/null ||
+          { $doit $mvcmd -f "$dst" "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null &&
+            { $doit $rmcmd -f "$rmtmp" 2>/dev/null; :; }
+          } ||
+          { echo "$0: cannot unlink or rename $dst" >&2
+            (exit 1); exit 1
+          }
+        } &&
+
+        # Now rename the file to the real destination.
+        $doit $mvcmd "$dsttmp" "$dst"
+      }
+    fi || exit 1
+
+    trap '' 0
+  fi
+done
+
+# Local variables:
+# eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp)
+# time-stamp-start: "scriptversion="
+# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+# time-stamp-time-zone: "UTC0"
+# time-stamp-end: "; # UTC"
+# End:
diff --git a/build-aux/mdate-sh b/build-aux/mdate-sh
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..8c7a590
--- /dev/null
+++ b/build-aux/mdate-sh
@@ -0,0 +1,228 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Get modification time of a file or directory and pretty-print it.
+
+scriptversion=2018-03-07.03; # UTC
+
+# Copyright (C) 1995-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# written by Ulrich Drepper <drepper@gnu.ai.mit.edu>, June 1995
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program.  If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
+
+# This file is maintained in Automake, please report
+# bugs to <bug-automake@gnu.org> or send patches to
+# <automake-patches@gnu.org>.
+
+if test -n "${ZSH_VERSION+set}" && (emulate sh) >/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  emulate sh
+  NULLCMD=:
+  # Pre-4.2 versions of Zsh do word splitting on ${1+"$@"}, which
+  # is contrary to our usage.  Disable this feature.
+  alias -g '${1+"$@"}'='"$@"'
+  setopt NO_GLOB_SUBST
+fi
+
+case $1 in
+  '')
+     echo "$0: No file.  Try '$0 --help' for more information." 1>&2
+     exit 1;
+     ;;
+  -h | --h*)
+    cat <<\EOF
+Usage: mdate-sh [--help] [--version] FILE
+
+Pretty-print the modification day of FILE, in the format:
+1 January 1970
+
+Report bugs to <bug-automake@gnu.org>.
+EOF
+    exit $?
+    ;;
+  -v | --v*)
+    echo "mdate-sh $scriptversion"
+    exit $?
+    ;;
+esac
+
+error ()
+{
+  echo "$0: $1" >&2
+  exit 1
+}
+
+
+# Prevent date giving response in another language.
+LANG=C
+export LANG
+LC_ALL=C
+export LC_ALL
+LC_TIME=C
+export LC_TIME
+
+# Use UTC to get reproducible result.
+TZ=UTC0
+export TZ
+
+# GNU ls changes its time format in response to the TIME_STYLE
+# variable.  Since we cannot assume 'unset' works, revert this
+# variable to its documented default.
+if test "${TIME_STYLE+set}" = set; then
+  TIME_STYLE=posix-long-iso
+  export TIME_STYLE
+fi
+
+save_arg1=$1
+
+# Find out how to get the extended ls output of a file or directory.
+if ls -L /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  ls_command='ls -L -l -d'
+else
+  ls_command='ls -l -d'
+fi
+# Avoid user/group names that might have spaces, when possible.
+if ls -n /dev/null 1>/dev/null 2>&1; then
+  ls_command="$ls_command -n"
+fi
+
+# A 'ls -l' line looks as follows on OS/2.
+#  drwxrwx---        0 Aug 11  2001 foo
+# This differs from Unix, which adds ownership information.
+#  drwxrwx---   2 root  root      4096 Aug 11  2001 foo
+#
+# To find the date, we split the line on spaces and iterate on words
+# until we find a month.  This cannot work with files whose owner is a
+# user named "Jan", or "Feb", etc.  However, it's unlikely that '/'
+# will be owned by a user whose name is a month.  So we first look at
+# the extended ls output of the root directory to decide how many
+# words should be skipped to get the date.
+
+# On HPUX /bin/sh, "set" interprets "-rw-r--r--" as options, so the "x" below.
+set x`$ls_command /`
+
+# Find which argument is the month.
+month=
+command=
+until test $month
+do
+  test $# -gt 0 || error "failed parsing '$ls_command /' output"
+  shift
+  # Add another shift to the command.
+  command="$command shift;"
+  case $1 in
+    Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;;
+    Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;;
+    Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;;
+    Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;;
+    May) month=May; nummonth=5;;
+    Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;;
+    Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;;
+    Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;;
+    Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;;
+    Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;;
+    Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;;
+    Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;;
+  esac
+done
+
+test -n "$month" || error "failed parsing '$ls_command /' output"
+
+# Get the extended ls output of the file or directory.
+set dummy x`eval "$ls_command \"\\\$save_arg1\""`
+
+# Remove all preceding arguments
+eval $command
+
+# Because of the dummy argument above, month is in $2.
+#
+# On a POSIX system, we should have
+#
+# $# = 5
+# $1 = file size
+# $2 = month
+# $3 = day
+# $4 = year or time
+# $5 = filename
+#
+# On Darwin 7.7.0 and 7.6.0, we have
+#
+# $# = 4
+# $1 = day
+# $2 = month
+# $3 = year or time
+# $4 = filename
+
+# Get the month.
+case $2 in
+  Jan) month=January; nummonth=1;;
+  Feb) month=February; nummonth=2;;
+  Mar) month=March; nummonth=3;;
+  Apr) month=April; nummonth=4;;
+  May) month=May; nummonth=5;;
+  Jun) month=June; nummonth=6;;
+  Jul) month=July; nummonth=7;;
+  Aug) month=August; nummonth=8;;
+  Sep) month=September; nummonth=9;;
+  Oct) month=October; nummonth=10;;
+  Nov) month=November; nummonth=11;;
+  Dec) month=December; nummonth=12;;
+esac
+
+case $3 in
+  ???*) day=$1;;
+  *) day=$3; shift;;
+esac
+
+# Here we have to deal with the problem that the ls output gives either
+# the time of day or the year.
+case $3 in
+  *:*) set `date`; eval year=\$$#
+       case $2 in
+	 Jan) nummonthtod=1;;
+	 Feb) nummonthtod=2;;
+	 Mar) nummonthtod=3;;
+	 Apr) nummonthtod=4;;
+	 May) nummonthtod=5;;
+	 Jun) nummonthtod=6;;
+	 Jul) nummonthtod=7;;
+	 Aug) nummonthtod=8;;
+	 Sep) nummonthtod=9;;
+	 Oct) nummonthtod=10;;
+	 Nov) nummonthtod=11;;
+	 Dec) nummonthtod=12;;
+       esac
+       # For the first six month of the year the time notation can also
+       # be used for files modified in the last year.
+       if (expr $nummonth \> $nummonthtod) > /dev/null;
+       then
+	 year=`expr $year - 1`
+       fi;;
+  *) year=$3;;
+esac
+
+# The result.
+echo $day $month $year
+
+# Local Variables:
+# mode: shell-script
+# sh-indentation: 2
+# eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp)
+# time-stamp-start: "scriptversion="
+# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+# time-stamp-time-zone: "UTC0"
+# time-stamp-end: "; # UTC"
+# End:
diff --git a/build-aux/missing b/build-aux/missing
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..8e3d931
--- /dev/null
+++ b/build-aux/missing
@@ -0,0 +1,215 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# Common wrapper for a few potentially missing GNU programs.
+
+scriptversion=2018-03-07.03; # UTC
+
+# Copyright (C) 1996-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+# Originally written by Fran,cois Pinard <pinard@iro.umontreal.ca>, 1996.
+
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program.  If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
+
+if test $# -eq 0; then
+  echo 1>&2 "Try '$0 --help' for more information"
+  exit 1
+fi
+
+case $1 in
+
+  --is-lightweight)
+    # Used by our autoconf macros to check whether the available missing
+    # script is modern enough.
+    exit 0
+    ;;
+
+  --run)
+    # Back-compat with the calling convention used by older automake.
+    shift
+    ;;
+
+  -h|--h|--he|--hel|--help)
+    echo "\
+$0 [OPTION]... PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...
+
+Run 'PROGRAM [ARGUMENT]...', returning a proper advice when this fails due
+to PROGRAM being missing or too old.
+
+Options:
+  -h, --help      display this help and exit
+  -v, --version   output version information and exit
+
+Supported PROGRAM values:
+  aclocal   autoconf  autoheader   autom4te  automake  makeinfo
+  bison     yacc      flex         lex       help2man
+
+Version suffixes to PROGRAM as well as the prefixes 'gnu-', 'gnu', and
+'g' are ignored when checking the name.
+
+Send bug reports to <bug-automake@gnu.org>."
+    exit $?
+    ;;
+
+  -v|--v|--ve|--ver|--vers|--versi|--versio|--version)
+    echo "missing $scriptversion (GNU Automake)"
+    exit $?
+    ;;
+
+  -*)
+    echo 1>&2 "$0: unknown '$1' option"
+    echo 1>&2 "Try '$0 --help' for more information"
+    exit 1
+    ;;
+
+esac
+
+# Run the given program, remember its exit status.
+"$@"; st=$?
+
+# If it succeeded, we are done.
+test $st -eq 0 && exit 0
+
+# Also exit now if we it failed (or wasn't found), and '--version' was
+# passed; such an option is passed most likely to detect whether the
+# program is present and works.
+case $2 in --version|--help) exit $st;; esac
+
+# Exit code 63 means version mismatch.  This often happens when the user
+# tries to use an ancient version of a tool on a file that requires a
+# minimum version.
+if test $st -eq 63; then
+  msg="probably too old"
+elif test $st -eq 127; then
+  # Program was missing.
+  msg="missing on your system"
+else
+  # Program was found and executed, but failed.  Give up.
+  exit $st
+fi
+
+perl_URL=https://www.perl.org/
+flex_URL=https://github.com/westes/flex
+gnu_software_URL=https://www.gnu.org/software
+
+program_details ()
+{
+  case $1 in
+    aclocal|automake)
+      echo "The '$1' program is part of the GNU Automake package:"
+      echo "<$gnu_software_URL/automake>"
+      echo "It also requires GNU Autoconf, GNU m4 and Perl in order to run:"
+      echo "<$gnu_software_URL/autoconf>"
+      echo "<$gnu_software_URL/m4/>"
+      echo "<$perl_URL>"
+      ;;
+    autoconf|autom4te|autoheader)
+      echo "The '$1' program is part of the GNU Autoconf package:"
+      echo "<$gnu_software_URL/autoconf/>"
+      echo "It also requires GNU m4 and Perl in order to run:"
+      echo "<$gnu_software_URL/m4/>"
+      echo "<$perl_URL>"
+      ;;
+  esac
+}
+
+give_advice ()
+{
+  # Normalize program name to check for.
+  normalized_program=`echo "$1" | sed '
+    s/^gnu-//; t
+    s/^gnu//; t
+    s/^g//; t'`
+
+  printf '%s\n' "'$1' is $msg."
+
+  configure_deps="'configure.ac' or m4 files included by 'configure.ac'"
+  case $normalized_program in
+    autoconf*)
+      echo "You should only need it if you modified 'configure.ac',"
+      echo "or m4 files included by it."
+      program_details 'autoconf'
+      ;;
+    autoheader*)
+      echo "You should only need it if you modified 'acconfig.h' or"
+      echo "$configure_deps."
+      program_details 'autoheader'
+      ;;
+    automake*)
+      echo "You should only need it if you modified 'Makefile.am' or"
+      echo "$configure_deps."
+      program_details 'automake'
+      ;;
+    aclocal*)
+      echo "You should only need it if you modified 'acinclude.m4' or"
+      echo "$configure_deps."
+      program_details 'aclocal'
+      ;;
+   autom4te*)
+      echo "You might have modified some maintainer files that require"
+      echo "the 'autom4te' program to be rebuilt."
+      program_details 'autom4te'
+      ;;
+    bison*|yacc*)
+      echo "You should only need it if you modified a '.y' file."
+      echo "You may want to install the GNU Bison package:"
+      echo "<$gnu_software_URL/bison/>"
+      ;;
+    lex*|flex*)
+      echo "You should only need it if you modified a '.l' file."
+      echo "You may want to install the Fast Lexical Analyzer package:"
+      echo "<$flex_URL>"
+      ;;
+    help2man*)
+      echo "You should only need it if you modified a dependency" \
+           "of a man page."
+      echo "You may want to install the GNU Help2man package:"
+      echo "<$gnu_software_URL/help2man/>"
+    ;;
+    makeinfo*)
+      echo "You should only need it if you modified a '.texi' file, or"
+      echo "any other file indirectly affecting the aspect of the manual."
+      echo "You might want to install the Texinfo package:"
+      echo "<$gnu_software_URL/texinfo/>"
+      echo "The spurious makeinfo call might also be the consequence of"
+      echo "using a buggy 'make' (AIX, DU, IRIX), in which case you might"
+      echo "want to install GNU make:"
+      echo "<$gnu_software_URL/make/>"
+      ;;
+    *)
+      echo "You might have modified some files without having the proper"
+      echo "tools for further handling them.  Check the 'README' file, it"
+      echo "often tells you about the needed prerequisites for installing"
+      echo "this package.  You may also peek at any GNU archive site, in"
+      echo "case some other package contains this missing '$1' program."
+      ;;
+  esac
+}
+
+give_advice "$1" | sed -e '1s/^/WARNING: /' \
+                       -e '2,$s/^/         /' >&2
+
+# Propagate the correct exit status (expected to be 127 for a program
+# not found, 63 for a program that failed due to version mismatch).
+exit $st
+
+# Local variables:
+# eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp)
+# time-stamp-start: "scriptversion="
+# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+# time-stamp-time-zone: "UTC0"
+# time-stamp-end: "; # UTC"
+# End:
diff --git a/build-aux/test-driver b/build-aux/test-driver
new file mode 100755
index 0000000..2930e80
--- /dev/null
+++ b/build-aux/test-driver
@@ -0,0 +1,148 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# test-driver - basic testsuite driver script.
+
+scriptversion=2018-03-07.03; # UTC
+
+# Copyright (C) 2011-2018 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+#
+# This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify
+# it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by
+# the Free Software Foundation; either version 2, or (at your option)
+# any later version.
+#
+# This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the
+# GNU General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with this program.  If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+# As a special exception to the GNU General Public License, if you
+# distribute this file as part of a program that contains a
+# configuration script generated by Autoconf, you may include it under
+# the same distribution terms that you use for the rest of that program.
+
+# This file is maintained in Automake, please report
+# bugs to <bug-automake@gnu.org> or send patches to
+# <automake-patches@gnu.org>.
+
+# Make unconditional expansion of undefined variables an error.  This
+# helps a lot in preventing typo-related bugs.
+set -u
+
+usage_error ()
+{
+  echo "$0: $*" >&2
+  print_usage >&2
+  exit 2
+}
+
+print_usage ()
+{
+  cat <<END
+Usage:
+  test-driver --test-name=NAME --log-file=PATH --trs-file=PATH
+              [--expect-failure={yes|no}] [--color-tests={yes|no}]
+              [--enable-hard-errors={yes|no}] [--]
+              TEST-SCRIPT [TEST-SCRIPT-ARGUMENTS]
+The '--test-name', '--log-file' and '--trs-file' options are mandatory.
+END
+}
+
+test_name= # Used for reporting.
+log_file=  # Where to save the output of the test script.
+trs_file=  # Where to save the metadata of the test run.
+expect_failure=no
+color_tests=no
+enable_hard_errors=yes
+while test $# -gt 0; do
+  case $1 in
+  --help) print_usage; exit $?;;
+  --version) echo "test-driver $scriptversion"; exit $?;;
+  --test-name) test_name=$2; shift;;
+  --log-file) log_file=$2; shift;;
+  --trs-file) trs_file=$2; shift;;
+  --color-tests) color_tests=$2; shift;;
+  --expect-failure) expect_failure=$2; shift;;
+  --enable-hard-errors) enable_hard_errors=$2; shift;;
+  --) shift; break;;
+  -*) usage_error "invalid option: '$1'";;
+   *) break;;
+  esac
+  shift
+done
+
+missing_opts=
+test x"$test_name" = x && missing_opts="$missing_opts --test-name"
+test x"$log_file"  = x && missing_opts="$missing_opts --log-file"
+test x"$trs_file"  = x && missing_opts="$missing_opts --trs-file"
+if test x"$missing_opts" != x; then
+  usage_error "the following mandatory options are missing:$missing_opts"
+fi
+
+if test $# -eq 0; then
+  usage_error "missing argument"
+fi
+
+if test $color_tests = yes; then
+  # Keep this in sync with 'lib/am/check.am:$(am__tty_colors)'.
+  red='[0;31m' # Red.
+  grn='[0;32m' # Green.
+  lgn='[1;32m' # Light green.
+  blu='[1;34m' # Blue.
+  mgn='[0;35m' # Magenta.
+  std='[m'     # No color.
+else
+  red= grn= lgn= blu= mgn= std=
+fi
+
+do_exit='rm -f $log_file $trs_file; (exit $st); exit $st'
+trap "st=129; $do_exit" 1
+trap "st=130; $do_exit" 2
+trap "st=141; $do_exit" 13
+trap "st=143; $do_exit" 15
+
+# Test script is run here.
+"$@" >$log_file 2>&1
+estatus=$?
+
+if test $enable_hard_errors = no && test $estatus -eq 99; then
+  tweaked_estatus=1
+else
+  tweaked_estatus=$estatus
+fi
+
+case $tweaked_estatus:$expect_failure in
+  0:yes) col=$red res=XPASS recheck=yes gcopy=yes;;
+  0:*)   col=$grn res=PASS  recheck=no  gcopy=no;;
+  77:*)  col=$blu res=SKIP  recheck=no  gcopy=yes;;
+  99:*)  col=$mgn res=ERROR recheck=yes gcopy=yes;;
+  *:yes) col=$lgn res=XFAIL recheck=no  gcopy=yes;;
+  *:*)   col=$red res=FAIL  recheck=yes gcopy=yes;;
+esac
+
+# Report the test outcome and exit status in the logs, so that one can
+# know whether the test passed or failed simply by looking at the '.log'
+# file, without the need of also peaking into the corresponding '.trs'
+# file (automake bug#11814).
+echo "$res $test_name (exit status: $estatus)" >>$log_file
+
+# Report outcome to console.
+echo "${col}${res}${std}: $test_name"
+
+# Register the test result, and other relevant metadata.
+echo ":test-result: $res" > $trs_file
+echo ":global-test-result: $res" >> $trs_file
+echo ":recheck: $recheck" >> $trs_file
+echo ":copy-in-global-log: $gcopy" >> $trs_file
+
+# Local Variables:
+# mode: shell-script
+# sh-indentation: 2
+# eval: (add-hook 'before-save-hook 'time-stamp)
+# time-stamp-start: "scriptversion="
+# time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+# time-stamp-time-zone: "UTC0"
+# time-stamp-end: "; # UTC"
+# End:
diff --git a/build-aux/texinfo.tex b/build-aux/texinfo.tex
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac5c1d9
--- /dev/null
+++ b/build-aux/texinfo.tex
@@ -0,0 +1,11727 @@
+% texinfo.tex -- TeX macros to handle Texinfo files.
+% 
+% Load plain if necessary, i.e., if running under initex.
+\expandafter\ifx\csname fmtname\endcsname\relax\input plain\fi
+%
+\def\texinfoversion{2018-02-12.17}
+%
+% Copyright 1985, 1986, 1988, 1990, 1991, 1992, 1993, 1994, 1995,
+% 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000, 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006,
+% 2007, 2008, 2009, 2010, 2011, 2012, 2013, 2014, 2015, 2016, 2017, 2018
+% Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
+% modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as
+% published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of the
+% License, or (at your option) any later version.
+%
+% This texinfo.tex file is distributed in the hope that it will be
+% useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty
+% of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+% General Public License for more details.
+%
+% You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+% along with this program.  If not, see <https://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+%
+% As a special exception, when this file is read by TeX when processing
+% a Texinfo source document, you may use the result without
+% restriction. This Exception is an additional permission under section 7
+% of the GNU General Public License, version 3 ("GPLv3").
+%
+% Please try the latest version of texinfo.tex before submitting bug
+% reports; you can get the latest version from:
+%   https://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/texinfo/ (the Texinfo release area), or
+%   https://ftpmirror.gnu.org/texinfo/ (same, via a mirror), or
+%   https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo/ (the Texinfo home page)
+% The texinfo.tex in any given distribution could well be out
+% of date, so if that's what you're using, please check.
+%
+% Send bug reports to bug-texinfo@gnu.org.  Please include including a
+% complete document in each bug report with which we can reproduce the
+% problem.  Patches are, of course, greatly appreciated.
+%
+% To process a Texinfo manual with TeX, it's most reliable to use the
+% texi2dvi shell script that comes with the distribution.  For a simple
+% manual foo.texi, however, you can get away with this:
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   texindex foo.??
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   tex foo.texi
+%   dvips foo.dvi -o  # or whatever; this makes foo.ps.
+% The extra TeX runs get the cross-reference information correct.
+% Sometimes one run after texindex suffices, and sometimes you need more
+% than two; texi2dvi does it as many times as necessary.
+%
+% It is possible to adapt texinfo.tex for other languages, to some
+% extent.  You can get the existing language-specific files from the
+% full Texinfo distribution.
+%
+% The GNU Texinfo home page is https://www.gnu.org/software/texinfo.
+
+
+\message{Loading texinfo [version \texinfoversion]:}
+
+% If in a .fmt file, print the version number
+% and turn on active characters that we couldn't do earlier because
+% they might have appeared in the input file name.
+\everyjob{\message{[Texinfo version \texinfoversion]}%
+  \catcode`+=\active \catcode`\_=\active}
+
+% LaTeX's \typeout.  This ensures that the messages it is used for
+% are identical in format to the corresponding ones from latex/pdflatex.
+\def\typeout{\immediate\write17}%
+
+\chardef\other=12
+
+% We never want plain's \outer definition of \+ in Texinfo.
+% For @tex, we can use \tabalign.
+\let\+ = \relax
+
+% Save some plain tex macros whose names we will redefine.
+\let\ptexb=\b
+\let\ptexbullet=\bullet
+\let\ptexc=\c
+\let\ptexcomma=\,
+\let\ptexdot=\.
+\let\ptexdots=\dots
+\let\ptexend=\end
+\let\ptexequiv=\equiv
+\let\ptexexclam=\!
+\let\ptexfootnote=\footnote
+\let\ptexgtr=>
+\let\ptexhat=^
+\let\ptexi=\i
+\let\ptexindent=\indent
+\let\ptexinsert=\insert
+\let\ptexlbrace=\{
+\let\ptexless=<
+\let\ptexnewwrite\newwrite
+\let\ptexnoindent=\noindent
+\let\ptexplus=+
+\let\ptexraggedright=\raggedright
+\let\ptexrbrace=\}
+\let\ptexslash=\/
+\let\ptexsp=\sp
+\let\ptexstar=\*
+\let\ptexsup=\sup
+\let\ptext=\t
+\let\ptextop=\top
+{\catcode`\'=\active \global\let\ptexquoteright'}% active in plain's math mode
+
+% If this character appears in an error message or help string, it
+% starts a new line in the output.
+\newlinechar = `^^J
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \inputlineno to get the line number, for better error
+% messages, but if we're using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.
+%
+\ifx\inputlineno\thisisundefined
+  \let\linenumber = \empty % Pre-3.0.
+\else
+  \def\linenumber{l.\the\inputlineno:\space}
+\fi
+
+% Set up fixed words for English if not already set.
+\ifx\putwordAppendix\undefined  \gdef\putwordAppendix{Appendix}\fi
+\ifx\putwordChapter\undefined   \gdef\putwordChapter{Chapter}\fi
+\ifx\putworderror\undefined     \gdef\putworderror{error}\fi
+\ifx\putwordfile\undefined      \gdef\putwordfile{file}\fi
+\ifx\putwordin\undefined        \gdef\putwordin{in}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexIsEmpty\undefined       \gdef\putwordIndexIsEmpty{(Index is empty)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordIndexNonexistent\undefined   \gdef\putwordIndexNonexistent{(Index is nonexistent)}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInfo\undefined      \gdef\putwordInfo{Info}\fi
+\ifx\putwordInstanceVariableof\undefined \gdef\putwordInstanceVariableof{Instance Variable of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMethodon\undefined  \gdef\putwordMethodon{Method on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordNoTitle\undefined   \gdef\putwordNoTitle{No Title}\fi
+\ifx\putwordof\undefined        \gdef\putwordof{of}\fi
+\ifx\putwordon\undefined        \gdef\putwordon{on}\fi
+\ifx\putwordpage\undefined      \gdef\putwordpage{page}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsection\undefined   \gdef\putwordsection{section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSection\undefined   \gdef\putwordSection{Section}\fi
+\ifx\putwordsee\undefined       \gdef\putwordsee{see}\fi
+\ifx\putwordSee\undefined       \gdef\putwordSee{See}\fi
+\ifx\putwordShortTOC\undefined  \gdef\putwordShortTOC{Short Contents}\fi
+\ifx\putwordTOC\undefined       \gdef\putwordTOC{Table of Contents}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordMJan\undefined \gdef\putwordMJan{January}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMFeb\undefined \gdef\putwordMFeb{February}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMar\undefined \gdef\putwordMMar{March}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMApr\undefined \gdef\putwordMApr{April}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMMay\undefined \gdef\putwordMMay{May}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJun\undefined \gdef\putwordMJun{June}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMJul\undefined \gdef\putwordMJul{July}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMAug\undefined \gdef\putwordMAug{August}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMSep\undefined \gdef\putwordMSep{September}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMOct\undefined \gdef\putwordMOct{October}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMNov\undefined \gdef\putwordMNov{November}\fi
+\ifx\putwordMDec\undefined \gdef\putwordMDec{December}\fi
+%
+\ifx\putwordDefmac\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefmac{Macro}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefspec\undefined   \gdef\putwordDefspec{Special Form}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefvar\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefvar{Variable}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDefopt\undefined    \gdef\putwordDefopt{User Option}\fi
+\ifx\putwordDeffunc\undefined   \gdef\putwordDeffunc{Function}\fi
+
+% Give the space character the catcode for a space.
+\def\spaceisspace{\catcode`\ =10\relax}
+
+% Likewise for ^^M, the end of line character.
+\def\endlineisspace{\catcode13=10\relax}
+
+\chardef\dashChar  = `\-
+\chardef\slashChar = `\/
+\chardef\underChar = `\_
+
+% Ignore a token.
+%
+\def\gobble#1{}
+
+% The following is used inside several \edef's.
+\def\makecsname#1{\expandafter\noexpand\csname#1\endcsname}
+
+% Hyphenation fixes.
+\hyphenation{
+  Flor-i-da Ghost-script Ghost-view Mac-OS Post-Script
+  auto-ma-ti-cal-ly ap-pen-dix bit-map bit-maps
+  data-base data-bases eshell fall-ing half-way long-est man-u-script
+  man-u-scripts mini-buf-fer mini-buf-fers over-view par-a-digm
+  par-a-digms rath-er rec-tan-gu-lar ro-bot-ics se-vere-ly set-up spa-ces
+  spell-ing spell-ings
+  stand-alone strong-est time-stamp time-stamps which-ever white-space
+  wide-spread wrap-around
+}
+
+% Sometimes it is convenient to have everything in the transcript file
+% and nothing on the terminal.  We don't just call \tracingall here,
+% since that produces some useless output on the terminal.  We also make
+% some effort to order the tracing commands to reduce output in the log
+% file; cf. trace.sty in LaTeX.
+%
+\def\gloggingall{\begingroup \globaldefs = 1 \loggingall \endgroup}%
+\def\loggingall{%
+  \tracingstats2
+  \tracingpages1
+  \tracinglostchars2  % 2 gives us more in etex
+  \tracingparagraphs1
+  \tracingoutput1
+  \tracingmacros2
+  \tracingrestores1
+  \showboxbreadth\maxdimen \showboxdepth\maxdimen
+  \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined\else % etex gives us more logging
+    \tracingscantokens1
+    \tracingifs1
+    \tracinggroups1
+    \tracingnesting2
+    \tracingassigns1
+  \fi
+  \tracingcommands3  % 3 gives us more in etex
+  \errorcontextlines16
+}%
+
+% @errormsg{MSG}.  Do the index-like expansions on MSG, but if things
+% aren't perfect, it's not the end of the world, being an error message,
+% after all.
+% 
+\def\errormsg{\begingroup \indexnofonts \doerrormsg}
+\def\doerrormsg#1{\errmessage{#1}}
+
+% add check for \lastpenalty to plain's definitions.  If the last thing
+% we did was a \nobreak, we don't want to insert more space.
+%
+\def\smallbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\smallskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-50\smallskip\fi\fi}
+\def\medbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\medskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-100\medskip\fi\fi}
+\def\bigbreak{\ifnum\lastpenalty<10000\par\ifdim\lastskip<\bigskipamount
+  \removelastskip\penalty-200\bigskip\fi\fi}
+
+% Output routine
+%
+
+% For a final copy, take out the rectangles
+% that mark overfull boxes (in case you have decided
+% that the text looks ok even though it passes the margin).
+%
+\def\finalout{\overfullrule=0pt }
+
+% Do @cropmarks to get crop marks.
+%
+\newif\ifcropmarks
+\let\cropmarks = \cropmarkstrue
+%
+% Dimensions to add cropmarks at corners.
+% Added by P. A. MacKay, 12 Nov. 1986
+%
+\newdimen\outerhsize \newdimen\outervsize % set by the paper size routines
+\newdimen\cornerlong  \cornerlong=1pc
+\newdimen\cornerthick \cornerthick=.3pt
+\newdimen\topandbottommargin \topandbottommargin=.75in
+
+% Output a mark which sets \thischapter, \thissection and \thiscolor.
+% We dump everything together because we only have one kind of mark.
+% This works because we only use \botmark / \topmark, not \firstmark.
+%
+% A mark contains a subexpression of the \ifcase ... \fi construct.
+% \get*marks macros below extract the needed part using \ifcase.
+%
+% Another complication is to let the user choose whether \thischapter
+% (\thissection) refers to the chapter (section) in effect at the top
+% of a page, or that at the bottom of a page.
+
+% \domark is called twice inside \chapmacro, to add one
+% mark before the section break, and one after.
+%   In the second call \prevchapterdefs is the same as \lastchapterdefs,
+% and \prevsectiondefs is the same as \lastsectiondefs.
+%   Then if the page is not broken at the mark, some of the previous
+% section appears on the page, and we can get the name of this section
+% from \firstmark for @everyheadingmarks top.
+%   @everyheadingmarks bottom uses \botmark.
+%
+% See page 260 of The TeXbook.
+\def\domark{%
+  \toks0=\expandafter{\lastchapterdefs}%
+  \toks2=\expandafter{\lastsectiondefs}%
+  \toks4=\expandafter{\prevchapterdefs}%
+  \toks6=\expandafter{\prevsectiondefs}%
+  \toks8=\expandafter{\lastcolordefs}%
+  \mark{%
+                   \the\toks0 \the\toks2  % 0: marks for @everyheadingmarks top
+      \noexpand\or \the\toks4 \the\toks6  % 1: for @everyheadingmarks bottom
+    \noexpand\else \the\toks8             % 2: color marks
+  }%
+}
+
+% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks,
+% \getcolormarks - extract needed part of mark.
+%
+% \topmark doesn't work for the very first chapter (after the title
+% page or the contents), so we use \firstmark there -- this gets us
+% the mark with the chapter defs, unless the user sneaks in, e.g.,
+% @setcolor (or @url, or @link, etc.) between @contents and the very
+% first @chapter.
+\def\gettopheadingmarks{%
+  \ifcase0\topmark\fi
+  \ifx\thischapter\empty \ifcase0\firstmark\fi \fi
+}
+\def\getbottomheadingmarks{\ifcase1\botmark\fi}
+\def\getcolormarks{\ifcase2\topmark\fi}
+
+% Avoid "undefined control sequence" errors.
+\def\lastchapterdefs{}
+\def\lastsectiondefs{}
+\def\lastsection{}
+\def\prevchapterdefs{}
+\def\prevsectiondefs{}
+\def\lastcolordefs{}
+
+% Margin to add to right of even pages, to left of odd pages.
+\newdimen\bindingoffset
+\newdimen\normaloffset
+\newdimen\txipagewidth \newdimen\txipageheight
+
+% Main output routine.
+%
+\chardef\PAGE = 255
+\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}
+
+\newbox\headlinebox
+\newbox\footlinebox
+
+% \onepageout takes a vbox as an argument.
+% \shipout a vbox for a single page, adding an optional header, footer,
+% cropmarks, and footnote.  This also causes index entries for this page
+% to be written to the auxiliary files.
+%
+\def\onepageout#1{%
+  \ifcropmarks \hoffset=0pt \else \hoffset=\normaloffset \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno  \advance\hoffset by \bindingoffset
+  \else \advance\hoffset by -\bindingoffset\fi
+  %
+  % Common context changes for both heading and footing.
+  % Do this outside of the \shipout so @code etc. will be expanded in
+  % the headline as they should be, not taken literally (outputting ''code).
+  \def\commmonheadfootline{\let\hsize=\txipagewidth \texinfochars}
+  %
+  % Retrieve the information for the headings from the marks in the page,
+  % and call Plain TeX's \makeheadline and \makefootline, which use the
+  % values in \headline and \footline.
+  %
+  % This is used to check if we are on the first page of a chapter.
+  \ifcase1\topmark\fi
+  \let\prevchaptername\thischaptername
+  \ifcase0\firstmark\fi
+  \let\curchaptername\thischaptername
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno \getoddheadingmarks \else \getevenheadingmarks \fi
+  \ifodd\pageno \getoddfootingmarks \else \getevenfootingmarks \fi
+  %
+  \ifx\curchaptername\prevchaptername
+    \let\thischapterheading\thischapter
+  \else
+    % \thischapterheading is the same as \thischapter except it is blank
+    % for the first page of a chapter.  This is to prevent the chapter name 
+    % being shown twice.
+    \def\thischapterheading{}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  \global\setbox\headlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makeheadline}%
+  \global\setbox\footlinebox = \vbox{\commmonheadfootline \makefootline}%
+  %
+  {%
+    % Set context for writing to auxiliary files like index files.
+    % Have to do this stuff outside the \shipout because we want it to
+    % take effect in \write's, yet the group defined by the \vbox ends
+    % before the \shipout runs.
+    %
+    \indexdummies         % don't expand commands in the output.
+    \normalturnoffactive  % \ in index entries must not stay \, e.g., if
+               % the page break happens to be in the middle of an example.
+               % We don't want .vr (or whatever) entries like this:
+               % \entry{{\indexbackslash }acronym}{32}{\code {\acronym}}
+               % "\acronym" won't work when it's read back in;
+               % it needs to be
+               % {\code {{\backslashcurfont }acronym}
+    \shipout\vbox{%
+      % Do this early so pdf references go to the beginning of the page.
+      \ifpdfmakepagedest \pdfdest name{\the\pageno} xyz\fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks \vbox to \outervsize\bgroup
+        \hsize = \outerhsize
+        \vskip-\topandbottommargin
+        \vtop to0pt{%
+          \line{\ewtop\hfil\ewtop}%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nstop}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nstop}%
+          }%
+          \vss}%
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin
+        \line\bgroup
+          \hfil % center the page within the outer (page) hsize.
+          \ifodd\pageno\hskip\bindingoffset\fi
+          \vbox\bgroup
+      \fi
+      %
+      \unvbox\headlinebox
+      \pagebody{#1}%
+      \ifdim\ht\footlinebox > 0pt
+        % Only leave this space if the footline is nonempty.
+        % (We lessened \vsize for it in \oddfootingyyy.)
+        % The \baselineskip=24pt in plain's \makefootline has no effect.
+        \vskip 24pt
+        \unvbox\footlinebox
+      \fi
+      %
+      \ifcropmarks
+          \egroup % end of \vbox\bgroup
+        \hfil\egroup % end of (centering) \line\bgroup
+        \vskip\topandbottommargin plus1fill minus1fill
+        \boxmaxdepth = \cornerthick
+        \vbox to0pt{\vss
+          \line{%
+            \vbox{\moveleft\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+            \hfill
+            \vbox{\moveright\cornerthick\nsbot}%
+          }%
+          \nointerlineskip
+          \line{\ewbot\hfil\ewbot}%
+        }%
+      \egroup % \vbox from first cropmarks clause
+      \fi
+    }% end of \shipout\vbox
+  }% end of group with \indexdummies
+  \advancepageno
+  \ifnum\outputpenalty>-20000 \else\dosupereject\fi
+}
+
+\newinsert\margin \dimen\margin=\maxdimen
+
+% Main part of page, including any footnotes
+\def\pagebody#1{\vbox to\txipageheight{\boxmaxdepth=\maxdepth #1}}
+{\catcode`\@ =11
+\gdef\pagecontents#1{\ifvoid\topins\else\unvbox\topins\fi
+% marginal hacks, juha@viisa.uucp (Juha Takala)
+\ifvoid\margin\else % marginal info is present
+  \rlap{\kern\hsize\vbox to\z@{\kern1pt\box\margin \vss}}\fi
+\dimen@=\dp#1\relax \unvbox#1\relax
+\ifvoid\footins\else\vskip\skip\footins\footnoterule \unvbox\footins\fi
+\ifr@ggedbottom \kern-\dimen@ \vfil \fi}
+}
+
+% Here are the rules for the cropmarks.  Note that they are
+% offset so that the space between them is truly \outerhsize or \outervsize
+% (P. A. MacKay, 12 November, 1986)
+%
+\def\ewtop{\vrule height\cornerthick depth0pt width\cornerlong}
+\def\nstop{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerthick depth\cornerlong width\cornerthick}}
+\def\ewbot{\vrule height0pt depth\cornerthick width\cornerlong}
+\def\nsbot{\vbox
+  {\hrule height\cornerlong depth\cornerthick width\cornerthick}}
+
+
+% Argument parsing
+
+% Parse an argument, then pass it to #1.  The argument is the rest of
+% the input line (except we remove a trailing comment).  #1 should be a
+% macro which expects an ordinary undelimited TeX argument.
+% For example, \def\foo{\parsearg\fooxxx}.
+%
+\def\parsearg{\parseargusing{}}
+\def\parseargusing#1#2{%
+  \def\argtorun{#2}%
+  \begingroup
+    \obeylines
+    \spaceisspace
+    #1%
+    \parseargline\empty% Insert the \empty token, see \finishparsearg below.
+}
+
+{\obeylines %
+  \gdef\parseargline#1^^M{%
+    \endgroup % End of the group started in \parsearg.
+    \argremovecomment #1\comment\ArgTerm%
+  }%
+}
+
+% First remove any @comment, then any @c comment.  Also remove a @texinfoc
+% comment (see \scanmacro for details).  Pass the result on to \argcheckspaces.
+\def\argremovecomment#1\comment#2\ArgTerm{\argremovec #1\c\ArgTerm}
+\def\argremovec#1\c#2\ArgTerm{\argremovetexinfoc #1\texinfoc\ArgTerm}
+\def\argremovetexinfoc#1\texinfoc#2\ArgTerm{\argcheckspaces#1\^^M\ArgTerm}
+
+% Each occurrence of `\^^M' or `<space>\^^M' is replaced by a single space.
+%
+% \argremovec might leave us with trailing space, e.g.,
+%    @end itemize  @c foo
+% This space token undergoes the same procedure and is eventually removed
+% by \finishparsearg.
+%
+\def\argcheckspaces#1\^^M{\argcheckspacesX#1\^^M \^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesX#1 \^^M{\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M}
+\def\argcheckspacesY#1\^^M#2\^^M#3\ArgTerm{%
+  \def\temp{#3}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty
+    % Do not use \next, perhaps the caller of \parsearg uses it; reuse \temp:
+    \let\temp\finishparsearg
+  \else
+    \let\temp\argcheckspaces
+  \fi
+  % Put the space token in:
+  \temp#1 #3\ArgTerm
+}
+
+% If a _delimited_ argument is enclosed in braces, they get stripped; so
+% to get _exactly_ the rest of the line, we had to prevent such situation.
+% We prepended an \empty token at the very beginning and we expand it now,
+% just before passing the control to \argtorun.
+% (Similarly, we have to think about #3 of \argcheckspacesY above: it is
+% either the null string, or it ends with \^^M---thus there is no danger
+% that a pair of braces would be stripped.
+%
+% But first, we have to remove the trailing space token.
+%
+\def\finishparsearg#1 \ArgTerm{\expandafter\argtorun\expandafter{#1}}
+
+
+% \parseargdef - define a command taking an argument on the line
+%
+% \parseargdef\foo{...}
+%	is roughly equivalent to
+% \def\foo{\parsearg\Xfoo}
+% \def\Xfoo#1{...}
+\def\parseargdef#1{%
+  \expandafter \doparseargdef \csname\string#1\endcsname #1%
+}
+\def\doparseargdef#1#2{%
+  \def#2{\parsearg#1}%
+  \def#1##1%
+}
+
+% Several utility definitions with active space:
+{
+  \obeyspaces
+  \gdef\obeyedspace{ }
+
+  % Make each space character in the input produce a normal interword
+  % space in the output.  Don't allow a line break at this space, as this
+  % is used only in environments like @example, where each line of input
+  % should produce a line of output anyway.
+  %
+  \gdef\sepspaces{\obeyspaces\let =\tie}
+
+  % If an index command is used in an @example environment, any spaces
+  % therein should become regular spaces in the raw index file, not the
+  % expansion of \tie (\leavevmode \penalty \@M \ ).
+  \gdef\unsepspaces{\let =\space}
+}
+
+
+\def\flushcr{\ifx\par\lisppar \def\next##1{}\else \let\next=\relax \fi \next}
+
+% Define the framework for environments in texinfo.tex.  It's used like this:
+%
+%   \envdef\foo{...}
+%   \def\Efoo{...}
+%
+% It's the responsibility of \envdef to insert \begingroup before the
+% actual body; @end closes the group after calling \Efoo.  \envdef also
+% defines \thisenv, so the current environment is known; @end checks
+% whether the environment name matches.  The \checkenv macro can also be
+% used to check whether the current environment is the one expected.
+%
+% Non-false conditionals (@iftex, @ifset) don't fit into this, so they
+% are not treated as environments; they don't open a group.  (The
+% implementation of @end takes care not to call \endgroup in this
+% special case.)
+
+
+% At run-time, environments start with this:
+\def\startenvironment#1{\begingroup\def\thisenv{#1}}
+% initialize
+\let\thisenv\empty
+
+% ... but they get defined via ``\envdef\foo{...}'':
+\long\def\envdef#1#2{\def#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+\def\envparseargdef#1#2{\parseargdef#1{\startenvironment#1#2}}
+
+% Check whether we're in the right environment:
+\def\checkenv#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\thisenv\temp
+  \else
+    \badenverr
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Environment mismatch, #1 expected:
+\def\badenverr{%
+  \errhelp = \EMsimple
+  \errmessage{This command can appear only \inenvironment\temp,
+    not \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+}
+\def\inenvironment#1{%
+  \ifx#1\empty
+    outside of any environment%
+  \else
+    in environment \expandafter\string#1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @end foo executes the definition of \Efoo.
+% But first, it executes a specialized version of \checkenv
+%
+\parseargdef\end{%
+  \if 1\csname iscond.#1\endcsname
+  \else
+    % The general wording of \badenverr may not be ideal.
+    \expandafter\checkenv\csname#1\endcsname
+    \csname E#1\endcsname
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newhelp\EMsimple{Press RETURN to continue.}
+
+
+% Be sure we're in horizontal mode when doing a tie, since we make space
+% equivalent to this in @example-like environments. Otherwise, a space
+% at the beginning of a line will start with \penalty -- and
+% since \penalty is valid in vertical mode, we'd end up putting the
+% penalty on the vertical list instead of in the new paragraph.
+{\catcode`@ = 11
+ % Avoid using \@M directly, because that causes trouble
+ % if the definition is written into an index file.
+ \global\let\tiepenalty = \@M
+ \gdef\tie{\leavevmode\penalty\tiepenalty\ }
+}
+
+% @: forces normal size whitespace following.
+\def\:{\spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @* forces a line break.
+\def\*{\unskip\hfil\break\hbox{}\ignorespaces}
+
+% @/ allows a line break.
+\let\/=\allowbreak
+
+% @. is an end-of-sentence period.
+\def\.{.\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @! is an end-of-sentence bang.
+\def\!{!\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @? is an end-of-sentence query.
+\def\?{?\spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor\space}
+
+% @frenchspacing on|off  says whether to put extra space after punctuation.
+%
+\def\onword{on}
+\def\offword{off}
+%
+\parseargdef\frenchspacing{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword \plainfrenchspacing
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword \plainnonfrenchspacing
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @frenchspacing option `\temp', must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% @w prevents a word break.  Without the \leavevmode, @w at the
+% beginning of a paragraph, when TeX is still in vertical mode, would
+% produce a whole line of output instead of starting the paragraph.
+\def\w#1{\leavevmode\hbox{#1}}
+
+% @group ... @end group forces ... to be all on one page, by enclosing
+% it in a TeX vbox.  We use \vtop instead of \vbox to construct the box
+% to keep its height that of a normal line.  According to the rules for
+% \topskip (p.114 of the TeXbook), the glue inserted is
+% max (\topskip - \ht (first item), 0).  If that height is large,
+% therefore, no glue is inserted, and the space between the headline and
+% the text is small, which looks bad.
+%
+% Another complication is that the group might be very large.  This can
+% cause the glue on the previous page to be unduly stretched, because it
+% does not have much material.  In this case, it's better to add an
+% explicit \vfill so that the extra space is at the bottom.  The
+% threshold for doing this is if the group is more than \vfilllimit
+% percent of a page (\vfilllimit can be changed inside of @tex).
+%
+\newbox\groupbox
+\def\vfilllimit{0.7}
+%
+\envdef\group{%
+  \ifnum\catcode`\^^M=\active \else
+    \errhelp = \groupinvalidhelp
+    \errmessage{@group invalid in context where filling is enabled}%
+  \fi
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  \setbox\groupbox = \vtop\bgroup
+    % Do @comment since we are called inside an environment such as
+    % @example, where each end-of-line in the input causes an
+    % end-of-line in the output.  We don't want the end-of-line after
+    % the `@group' to put extra space in the output.  Since @group
+    % should appear on a line by itself (according to the Texinfo
+    % manual), we don't worry about eating any user text.
+    \comment
+}
+%
+% The \vtop produces a box with normal height and large depth; thus, TeX puts
+% \baselineskip glue before it, and (when the next line of text is done)
+% \lineskip glue after it.  Thus, space below is not quite equal to space
+% above.  But it's pretty close.
+\def\Egroup{%
+    % To get correct interline space between the last line of the group
+    % and the first line afterwards, we have to propagate \prevdepth.
+    \endgraf % Not \par, as it may have been set to \lisppar.
+    \global\dimen1 = \prevdepth
+  \egroup           % End the \vtop.
+  \addgroupbox
+  \prevdepth = \dimen1
+  \checkinserts
+}
+
+\def\addgroupbox{
+  % \dimen0 is the vertical size of the group's box.
+  \dimen0 = \ht\groupbox  \advance\dimen0 by \dp\groupbox
+  % \dimen2 is how much space is left on the page (more or less).
+  \dimen2 = \txipageheight   \advance\dimen2 by -\pagetotal
+  % if the group doesn't fit on the current page, and it's a big big
+  % group, force a page break.
+  \ifdim \dimen0 > \dimen2
+    \ifdim \pagetotal < \vfilllimit\txipageheight
+      \page
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \box\groupbox
+}
+
+%
+% TeX puts in an \escapechar (i.e., `@') at the beginning of the help
+% message, so this ends up printing `@group can only ...'.
+%
+\newhelp\groupinvalidhelp{%
+group can only be used in environments such as @example,^^J%
+where each line of input produces a line of output.}
+
+% @need space-in-mils
+% forces a page break if there is not space-in-mils remaining.
+
+\newdimen\mil  \mil=0.001in
+
+\parseargdef\need{%
+  % Ensure vertical mode, so we don't make a big box in the middle of a
+  % paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  % If the @need value is less than one line space, it's useless.
+  \dimen0 = #1\mil
+  \dimen2 = \ht\strutbox
+  \advance\dimen2 by \dp\strutbox
+  \ifdim\dimen0 > \dimen2
+    %
+    % Do a \strut just to make the height of this box be normal, so the
+    % normal leading is inserted relative to the preceding line.
+    % And a page break here is fine.
+    \vtop to #1\mil{\strut\vfil}%
+    %
+    % TeX does not even consider page breaks if a penalty added to the
+    % main vertical list is 10000 or more.  But in order to see if the
+    % empty box we just added fits on the page, we must make it consider
+    % page breaks.  On the other hand, we don't want to actually break the
+    % page after the empty box.  So we use a penalty of 9999.
+    %
+    % There is an extremely small chance that TeX will actually break the
+    % page at this \penalty, if there are no other feasible breakpoints in
+    % sight.  (If the user is using lots of big @group commands, which
+    % almost-but-not-quite fill up a page, TeX will have a hard time doing
+    % good page breaking, for example.)  However, I could not construct an
+    % example where a page broke at this \penalty; if it happens in a real
+    % document, then we can reconsider our strategy.
+    \penalty9999
+    %
+    % Back up by the size of the box, whether we did a page break or not.
+    \kern -#1\mil
+    %
+    % Do not allow a page break right after this kern.
+    \nobreak
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @br   forces paragraph break (and is undocumented).
+
+\let\br = \par
+
+% @page forces the start of a new page.
+%
+\def\page{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% @exdent text....
+% outputs text on separate line in roman font, starting at standard page margin
+
+% This records the amount of indent in the innermost environment.
+% That's how much \exdent should take out.
+\newskip\exdentamount
+
+% This defn is used inside fill environments such as @defun.
+\parseargdef\exdent{\hfil\break\hbox{\kern -\exdentamount{\rm#1}}\hfil\break}
+
+% This defn is used inside nofill environments such as @example.
+\parseargdef\nofillexdent{{\advance \leftskip by -\exdentamount
+  \leftline{\hskip\leftskip{\rm#1}}}}
+
+% @inmargin{WHICH}{TEXT} puts TEXT in the WHICH margin next to the current
+% paragraph.  For more general purposes, use the \margin insertion
+% class.  WHICH is `l' or `r'.  Not documented, written for gawk manual.
+%
+\newskip\inmarginspacing \inmarginspacing=1cm
+\def\strutdepth{\dp\strutbox}
+%
+\def\doinmargin#1#2{\strut\vadjust{%
+  \nobreak
+  \kern-\strutdepth
+  \vtop to \strutdepth{%
+    \baselineskip=\strutdepth
+    \vss
+    % if you have multiple lines of stuff to put here, you'll need to
+    % make the vbox yourself of the appropriate size.
+    \ifx#1l%
+      \llap{\ignorespaces #2\hskip\inmarginspacing}%
+    \else
+      \rlap{\hskip\hsize \hskip\inmarginspacing \ignorespaces #2}%
+    \fi
+    \null
+  }%
+}}
+\def\inleftmargin{\doinmargin l}
+\def\inrightmargin{\doinmargin r}
+%
+% @inmargin{TEXT [, RIGHT-TEXT]}
+% (if RIGHT-TEXT is given, use TEXT for left page, RIGHT-TEXT for right;
+% else use TEXT for both).
+%
+\def\inmargin#1{\parseinmargin #1,,\finish}
+\def\parseinmargin#1,#2,#3\finish{% not perfect, but better than nothing.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have both texts
+    \def\righttext{#2}%
+  \else
+    \def\lefttext{#1}%  have only one text
+    \def\righttext{#1}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifodd\pageno
+    \def\temp{\inrightmargin\righttext}% odd page -> outside is right margin
+  \else
+    \def\temp{\inleftmargin\lefttext}%
+  \fi
+  \temp
+}
+
+% @include FILE -- \input text of FILE.
+%
+\def\include{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\includezzz}
+\def\includezzz#1{%
+  \pushthisfilestack
+  \def\thisfile{#1}%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable  % we want to expand any @value in FILE.
+    \turnoffactive        % and allow special characters in the expansion
+    \indexnofonts         % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
+    \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @include of #1^^J}%
+    \edef\temp{\noexpand\input #1 }%
+    %
+    % This trickery is to read FILE outside of a group, in case it makes
+    % definitions, etc.
+    \expandafter
+  }\temp
+  \popthisfilestack
+}
+\def\filenamecatcodes{%
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`~=\other
+  \catcode`^=\other
+  \catcode`_=\other
+  \catcode`|=\other
+  \catcode`<=\other
+  \catcode`>=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other
+  \catcode`-=\other
+  \catcode`\`=\other
+  \catcode`\'=\other
+}
+
+\def\pushthisfilestack{%
+  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackX\popthisfilestack\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackX{%
+  \expandafter\pushthisfilestackY\thisfile\StackTerm
+}
+\def\pushthisfilestackY #1\StackTerm #2\StackTerm {%
+  \gdef\popthisfilestack{\gdef\thisfile{#1}\gdef\popthisfilestack{#2}}%
+}
+
+\def\popthisfilestack{\errthisfilestackempty}
+\def\errthisfilestackempty{\errmessage{Internal error:
+  the stack of filenames is empty.}}
+%
+\def\thisfile{}
+
+% @center line
+% outputs that line, centered.
+%
+\parseargdef\center{%
+  \ifhmode
+    \let\centersub\centerH
+  \else
+    \let\centersub\centerV
+  \fi
+  \centersub{\hfil \ignorespaces#1\unskip \hfil}%
+  \let\centersub\relax % don't let the definition persist, just in case
+}
+\def\centerH#1{{%
+  \hfil\break
+  \advance\hsize by -\leftskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \line{#1}%
+  \break
+}}
+%
+\newcount\centerpenalty
+\def\centerV#1{%
+  % The idea here is the same as in \startdefun, \cartouche, etc.: if
+  % @center is the first thing after a section heading, we need to wipe
+  % out the negative parskip inserted by \sectionheading, but still
+  % prevent a page break here.
+  \centerpenalty = \lastpenalty
+  \ifnum\centerpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \fi
+  \ifnum\centerpenalty>9999 \penalty\centerpenalty \fi
+  \line{\kern\leftskip #1\kern\rightskip}%
+}
+
+% @sp n   outputs n lines of vertical space
+%
+\parseargdef\sp{\vskip #1\baselineskip}
+
+% @comment ...line which is ignored...
+% @c is the same as @comment
+% @ignore ... @end ignore  is another way to write a comment
+
+
+\def\c{\begingroup \catcode`\^^M=\active%
+\catcode`\@=\other \catcode`\{=\other \catcode`\}=\other%
+\cxxx}
+{\catcode`\^^M=\active \gdef\cxxx#1^^M{\endgroup}}
+%
+\let\comment\c
+
+% @paragraphindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS, close enough.
+% NCHARS can also be the word `asis' or `none'.
+% We cannot feasibly implement @paragraphindent asis, though.
+%
+\def\asisword{asis} % no translation, these are keywords
+\def\noneword{none}
+%
+\parseargdef\paragraphindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \defaultparindent = 0pt
+    \else
+      \defaultparindent = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+}
+
+% @exampleindent NCHARS
+% We'll use ems for NCHARS like @paragraphindent.
+% It seems @exampleindent asis isn't necessary, but
+% I preserve it to make it similar to @paragraphindent.
+\parseargdef\exampleindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\asisword
+  \else
+    \ifx\temp\noneword
+      \lispnarrowing = 0pt
+    \else
+      \lispnarrowing = #1em
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @firstparagraphindent WORD
+% If WORD is `none', then suppress indentation of the first paragraph
+% after a section heading.  If WORD is `insert', then do indent at such
+% paragraphs.
+%
+% The paragraph indentation is suppressed or not by calling
+% \suppressfirstparagraphindent, which the sectioning commands do.
+% We switch the definition of this back and forth according to WORD.
+% By default, we suppress indentation.
+%
+\def\suppressfirstparagraphindent{\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\def\insertword{insert}
+%
+\parseargdef\firstparagraphindent{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\noneword
+    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \dosuppressfirstparagraphindent
+  \else\ifx\temp\insertword
+    \let\suppressfirstparagraphindent = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @firstparagraphindent option `\temp'}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Here is how we actually suppress indentation.  Redefine \everypar to
+% \kern backwards by \parindent, and then reset itself to empty.
+%
+% We also make \indent itself not actually do anything until the next
+% paragraph.
+%
+\gdef\dosuppressfirstparagraphindent{%
+  \gdef\indent  {\restorefirstparagraphindent \indent}%
+  \gdef\noindent{\restorefirstparagraphindent \noindent}%
+  \global\everypar = {\kern -\parindent \restorefirstparagraphindent}%
+}
+%
+\gdef\restorefirstparagraphindent{%
+  \global\let\indent = \ptexindent
+  \global\let\noindent = \ptexnoindent
+  \global\everypar = {}%
+}
+
+
+% @refill is a no-op.
+\let\refill=\relax
+
+% @setfilename INFO-FILENAME - ignored
+\let\setfilename=\comment
+
+% @bye.
+\outer\def\bye{\pagealignmacro\tracingstats=1\ptexend}
+
+
+\message{pdf,}
+% adobe `portable' document format
+\newcount\tempnum
+\newcount\lnkcount
+\newtoks\filename
+\newcount\filenamelength
+\newcount\pgn
+\newtoks\toksA
+\newtoks\toksB
+\newtoks\toksC
+\newtoks\toksD
+\newbox\boxA
+\newbox\boxB
+\newcount\countA
+\newif\ifpdf
+\newif\ifpdfmakepagedest
+
+%
+% For LuaTeX
+%
+
+\newif\iftxiuseunicodedestname
+\txiuseunicodedestnamefalse % For pdfTeX etc.
+
+\ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
+\else
+  % Use Unicode destination names
+  \txiuseunicodedestnametrue
+  % Escape PDF strings with converting UTF-16 from UTF-8
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\%=12
+    \directlua{
+      function UTF16oct(str)
+        tex.sprint(string.char(0x5c) .. '376' .. string.char(0x5c) .. '377')
+        for c in string.utfvalues(str) do
+          if c < 0x10000 then
+            tex.sprint(
+              string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
+                            string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
+                            (c / 256), (c % 256)))
+          else
+            c = c - 0x10000
+            local c_hi = c / 1024 + 0xd800
+            local c_lo = c % 1024 + 0xdc00
+            tex.sprint(
+              string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
+                            string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
+                            string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o' ..
+                            string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
+                            (c_hi / 256), (c_hi % 256),
+                            (c_lo / 256), (c_lo % 256)))
+          end
+        end
+      end
+    }
+  \endgroup
+  \def\pdfescapestrutfsixteen#1{\directlua{UTF16oct('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
+  % Escape PDF strings without converting
+  \begingroup
+    \directlua{
+      function PDFescstr(str)
+        for c in string.bytes(str) do
+          if c <= 0x20 or c >= 0x80 or c == 0x28 or c == 0x29 or c == 0x5c then
+            tex.sprint(
+              string.format(string.char(0x5c) .. string.char(0x25) .. '03o',
+                            c))
+          else
+            tex.sprint(string.char(c))
+          end
+        end
+      end
+    }
+  \endgroup
+  \def\pdfescapestring#1{\directlua{PDFescstr('\luaescapestring{#1}')}}
+  \ifnum\luatexversion>84
+    % For LuaTeX >= 0.85
+    \def\pdfdest{\pdfextension dest}
+    \let\pdfoutput\outputmode
+    \def\pdfliteral{\pdfextension literal}
+    \def\pdfcatalog{\pdfextension catalog}
+    \def\pdftexversion{\numexpr\pdffeedback version\relax}
+    \let\pdfximage\saveimageresource
+    \let\pdfrefximage\useimageresource
+    \let\pdflastximage\lastsavedimageresourceindex
+    \def\pdfendlink{\pdfextension endlink\relax}
+    \def\pdfoutline{\pdfextension outline}
+    \def\pdfstartlink{\pdfextension startlink}
+    \def\pdffontattr{\pdfextension fontattr}
+    \def\pdfobj{\pdfextension obj}
+    \def\pdflastobj{\numexpr\pdffeedback lastobj\relax}
+    \let\pdfpagewidth\pagewidth
+    \let\pdfpageheight\pageheight
+    \edef\pdfhorigin{\pdfvariable horigin}
+    \edef\pdfvorigin{\pdfvariable vorigin}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+% when pdftex is run in dvi mode, \pdfoutput is defined (so \pdfoutput=1
+% can be set).  So we test for \relax and 0 as well as being undefined.
+\ifx\pdfoutput\thisisundefined
+\else
+  \ifx\pdfoutput\relax
+  \else
+    \ifcase\pdfoutput
+    \else
+      \pdftrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+% PDF uses PostScript string constants for the names of xref targets,
+% for display in the outlines, and in other places.  Thus, we have to
+% double any backslashes.  Otherwise, a name like "\node" will be
+% interpreted as a newline (\n), followed by o, d, e.  Not good.
+% 
+% See http://www.ntg.nl/pipermail/ntg-pdftex/2004-July/000654.html and
+% related messages.  The final outcome is that it is up to the TeX user
+% to double the backslashes and otherwise make the string valid, so
+% that's what we do.  pdftex 1.30.0 (ca.2005) introduced a primitive to
+% do this reliably, so we use it.
+
+% #1 is a control sequence in which to do the replacements,
+% which we \xdef.
+\def\txiescapepdf#1{%
+  \ifx\pdfescapestring\thisisundefined
+    % No primitive available; should we give a warning or log?
+    % Many times it won't matter.
+    \xdef#1{#1}%
+  \else
+    % The expandable \pdfescapestring primitive escapes parentheses,
+    % backslashes, and other special chars.
+    \xdef#1{\pdfescapestring{#1}}%
+  \fi
+}
+\def\txiescapepdfutfsixteen#1{%
+  \ifx\pdfescapestrutfsixteen\thisisundefined
+    % No UTF-16 converting macro available.
+    \txiescapepdf{#1}%
+  \else
+    \xdef#1{\pdfescapestrutfsixteen{#1}}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+\newhelp\nopdfimagehelp{Texinfo supports .png, .jpg, .jpeg, and .pdf images
+with PDF output, and none of those formats could be found.  (.eps cannot
+be supported due to the design of the PDF format; use regular TeX (DVI
+output) for that.)}
+
+\ifpdf
+  %
+  % Color manipulation macros using ideas from pdfcolor.tex,
+  % except using rgb instead of cmyk; the latter is said to render as a
+  % very dark gray on-screen and a very dark halftone in print, instead
+  % of actual black. The dark red here is dark enough to print on paper as
+  % nearly black, but still distinguishable for online viewing.  We use
+  % black by default, though.
+  \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
+  \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
+  %
+  % rg sets the color for filling (usual text, etc.);
+  % RG sets the color for stroking (thin rules, e.g., normal _'s).
+  \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\pdfliteral{#1 rg  #1 RG}}
+  %
+  % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
+  % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
+  \def\setcolor#1{%
+    \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
+    \domark
+    \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
+  \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
+  \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
+  \def\lastcolordefs{}
+  %
+  \def\makefootline{%
+    \baselineskip24pt
+    \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\makeheadline{%
+    \vbox to 0pt{%
+      \vskip-22.5pt
+      \line{%
+        \vbox to8.5pt{}%
+        % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
+        \getcolormarks
+        % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
+        \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
+      }%
+      \vss
+    }%
+    \nointerlineskip
+  }
+  %
+  %
+  \pdfcatalog{/PageMode /UseOutlines}
+  %
+  % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
+  \def\dopdfimage#1#2#3{%
+    \def\pdfimagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \def\pdfimageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+    %
+    % pdftex (and the PDF format) support .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
+    % others).  Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
+    % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
+    % bitmap.
+    \let\pdfimgext=\empty
+    \begingroup
+      \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
+        \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
+          \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
+            \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
+              \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
+                \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
+                  \errhelp = \nopdfimagehelp
+                  \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for pdf}%
+                \else \gdef\pdfimgext{JPG}%
+                \fi
+              \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpeg}%
+              \fi
+            \else \gdef\pdfimgext{jpg}%
+            \fi
+          \else \gdef\pdfimgext{png}%
+          \fi
+        \else \gdef\pdfimgext{PDF}%
+        \fi
+      \else \gdef\pdfimgext{pdf}%
+      \fi
+      \closein 1
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    % without \immediate, ancient pdftex seg faults when the same image is
+    % included twice.  (Version 3.14159-pre-1.0-unofficial-20010704.)
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+      \immediate\pdfimage
+    \else
+      \immediate\pdfximage
+    \fi
+      \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \pdfimagewidth \fi
+      \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \pdfimageheight \fi
+      \ifnum\pdftexversion<13
+         #1.\pdfimgext
+       \else
+         {#1.\pdfimgext}%
+       \fi
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14 \else
+      \pdfrefximage \pdflastximage
+    \fi}
+  %
+  \def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
+    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
+    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \turnoffactive
+    \iftxiuseunicodedestname
+      \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
+        % Pass through Latin-1 characters.
+        % LuaTeX with byte wise I/O converts Latin-1 characters to Unicode.
+      \else
+        \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
+          % Pass through Unicode characters.
+        \else
+          % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
+          \passthroughcharsfalse
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \else
+      % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
+      \passthroughcharsfalse
+    \fi
+    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
+    \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
+  }}
+  %
+  \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
+    \indexnofonts
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \turnoffactive
+    \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
+      % The PDF format can use an extended form of Latin-1 in bookmark
+      % strings.  See Appendix D of the PDF Reference, Sixth Edition, for
+      % the "PDFDocEncoding".
+      \passthroughcharstrue
+      % Pass through Latin-1 characters.
+      %   LuaTeX: Convert to Unicode
+      %   pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
+      \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+    \else
+      \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
+        \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
+          % For pdfTeX  with UTF-8.
+          % TODO: the PDF format can use UTF-16 in bookmark strings,
+          % but the code for this isn't done yet.
+          % Use ASCII approximations.
+          \passthroughcharsfalse
+          \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+        \else
+          % For LuaTeX with UTF-8.
+          % Pass through Unicode characters for title texts.
+          \passthroughcharstrue
+          \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+        \fi
+      \else
+        % For non-Latin-1 or non-UTF-8 encodings.
+        % Use ASCII approximations.
+        \passthroughcharsfalse
+        \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    % LuaTeX: Convert to UTF-16
+    % pdfTeX: Use Latin-1 as PDFDocEncoding
+    \txiescapepdfutfsixteen\pdfoutlinetext
+  }}
+  %
+  \def\pdfmkdest#1{%
+    \setpdfdestname{#1}%
+    \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
+  }
+  %
+  % used to mark target names; must be expandable.
+  \def\pdfmkpgn#1{#1}
+  %
+  % by default, use black for everything.
+  \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
+  \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
+  \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
+  %
+  % Adding outlines to PDF; macros for calculating structure of outlines
+  % come from Petr Olsak
+  \def\expnumber#1{\expandafter\ifx\csname#1\endcsname\relax 0%
+    \else \csname#1\endcsname \fi}
+  \def\advancenumber#1{\tempnum=\expnumber{#1}\relax
+    \advance\tempnum by 1
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname#1\endcsname{\the\tempnum}}
+  %
+  % #1 is the section text, which is what will be displayed in the
+  % outline by the pdf viewer.  #2 is the pdf expression for the number
+  % of subentries (or empty, for subsubsections).  #3 is the node text,
+  % which might be empty if this toc entry had no corresponding node.
+  % #4 is the page number
+  %
+  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
+    % Generate a link to the node text if that exists; else, use the
+    % page number.  We could generate a destination for the section
+    % text in the case where a section has no node, but it doesn't
+    % seem worth the trouble, since most documents are normally structured.
+    \setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
+    \setpdfdestname{#3}
+    \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
+      \def\pdfdestname{#4}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \pdfoutline goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}#2{\pdfoutlinetext}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
+    \begingroup
+      % Read toc silently, to get counts of subentries for \pdfoutline.
+      \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\def\thischapnum{##2}%
+	\def\thissecnum{0}%
+	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\advancenumber{chap\thischapnum}%
+	\def\thissecnum{##2}%
+	\def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\advancenumber{sec\thissecnum}%
+	\def\thissubsecnum{##2}%
+      }%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+	\advancenumber{subsec\thissubsecnum}%
+      }%
+      \def\thischapnum{0}%
+      \def\thissecnum{0}%
+      \def\thissubsecnum{0}%
+      %
+      % use \def rather than \let here because we redefine \chapentry et
+      % al. a second time, below.
+      \def\appentry{\numchapentry}%
+      \def\appsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+      \def\appsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+      \def\appsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      \def\unnchapentry{\numchapentry}%
+      \def\unnsecentry{\numsecentry}%
+      \def\unnsubsecentry{\numsubsecentry}%
+      \def\unnsubsubsecentry{\numsubsubsecentry}%
+      \readdatafile{toc}%
+      %
+      % Read toc second time, this time actually producing the outlines.
+      % The `-' means take the \expnumber as the absolute number of
+      % subentries, which we calculated on our first read of the .toc above.
+      %
+      % We use the node names as the destinations.
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{chap##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{sec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{count-\expnumber{subsec##2}}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{% count is always zero
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{}{##3}{##4}}%
+      %
+      % PDF outlines are displayed using system fonts, instead of
+      % document fonts.  Therefore we cannot use special characters,
+      % since the encoding is unknown.  For example, the eogonek from
+      % Latin 2 (0xea) gets translated to a | character.  Info from
+      % Staszek Wawrykiewicz, 19 Jan 2004 04:09:24 +0100.
+      %
+      % TODO this right, we have to translate 8-bit characters to
+      % their "best" equivalent, based on the @documentencoding.  Too
+      % much work for too little return.  Just use the ASCII equivalents
+      % we use for the index sort strings.
+      % 
+      \indexnofonts
+      \setupdatafile
+      % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
+      % Texinfo index files.  So set that up.
+      \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
+      \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
+      \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
+      \input \tocreadfilename
+    \endgroup
+  }
+  {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
+   \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
+   \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
+   \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
+  ]
+  %
+  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
+    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
+    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
+      \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
+      \advance\filenamelength by 1
+    \fi
+    \nextsp}
+  \def\getfilename#1{%
+    \filenamelength=0
+    % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
+    % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
+  }
+  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+    \let \startlink \pdfannotlink
+  \else
+    \let \startlink \pdfstartlink
+  \fi
+  % make a live url in pdf output.
+  \def\pdfurl#1{%
+    \begingroup
+      % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
+      % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
+      % of @url.  for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
+      % people have actually reported a problem with.
+      %
+      \normalturnoffactive
+      \def\@{@}%
+      \let\/=\empty
+      \makevalueexpandable
+      % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
+      % special-casing \var here?
+      \def\var##1{##1}%
+      %
+      \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
+      \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+        user{/Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >>}%
+    \endgroup}
+  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
+  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
+  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
+  \def\maketoks{%
+    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
+    \ifx\first0\adn0
+    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
+    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
+    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
+    \else
+      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
+      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
+        \let\next=\maketoks
+        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
+        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
+      \fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \next}
+  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
+    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
+  \def\pdflink#1{%
+    \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]} goto name{\pdfmkpgn{#1}}
+    \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
+  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
+\else
+  % non-pdf mode
+  \let\pdfmkdest = \gobble
+  \let\pdfurl = \gobble
+  \let\endlink = \relax
+  \let\setcolor = \gobble
+  \let\pdfsetcolor = \gobble
+  \let\pdfmakeoutlines = \relax
+\fi  % \ifx\pdfoutput
+
+%
+% For XeTeX
+%
+\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+\else
+  %
+  % XeTeX version check
+  %
+  \ifnum\strcmp{\the\XeTeXversion\XeTeXrevision}{0.99996}>-1
+    % TeX Live 2016 contains XeTeX 0.99996 and xdvipdfmx 20160307.
+    % It can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special (from TeX Live SVN r40941).
+    % For avoiding PDF destination name replacement, we use this special
+    % instead of xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
+    \special{dvipdfmx:config C 0x0010}
+    % XeTeX 0.99995+ comes with xdvipdfmx 20160307+.
+    % It can handle Unicode destination names for PDF.
+    \txiuseunicodedestnametrue
+  \else
+    % XeTeX < 0.99996 (TeX Live < 2016) cannot use the
+    % `dvipdfmx:config' special.
+    % So for avoiding PDF destination name replacement,
+    % xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010' is necessary.
+    %
+    % XeTeX < 0.99995 can not handle Unicode destination names for PDF
+    % because xdvipdfmx 20150315 has a UTF-16 conversion issue.
+    % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
+    \txiuseunicodedestnamefalse
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Color support
+  %
+  \def\rgbDarkRed{0.50 0.09 0.12}
+  \def\rgbBlack{0 0 0}
+  %
+  \def\pdfsetcolor#1{\special{pdf:scolor [#1]}}
+  %
+  % Set color, and create a mark which defines \thiscolor accordingly,
+  % so that \makeheadline knows which color to restore.
+  \def\setcolor#1{%
+    \xdef\lastcolordefs{\gdef\noexpand\thiscolor{#1}}%
+    \domark
+    \pdfsetcolor{#1}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\maincolor{\rgbBlack}
+  \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}
+  \edef\thiscolor{\maincolor}
+  \def\lastcolordefs{}
+  %
+  \def\makefootline{%
+    \baselineskip24pt
+    \line{\pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\footline}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\makeheadline{%
+    \vbox to 0pt{%
+      \vskip-22.5pt
+      \line{%
+        \vbox to8.5pt{}%
+        % Extract \thiscolor definition from the marks.
+        \getcolormarks
+        % Typeset the headline with \maincolor, then restore the color.
+        \pdfsetcolor{\maincolor}\the\headline\pdfsetcolor{\thiscolor}%
+      }%
+      \vss
+    }%
+    \nointerlineskip
+  }
+  %
+  % PDF outline support
+  %
+  % Emulate pdfTeX primitive
+  \def\pdfdest name#1 xyz{%
+    \special{pdf:dest (#1) [@thispage /XYZ @xpos @ypos null]}%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\setpdfdestname#1{{%
+    % We have to set dummies so commands such as @code, and characters
+    % such as \, aren't expanded when present in a section title.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \turnoffactive
+    \iftxiuseunicodedestname
+      % Pass through Unicode characters.
+    \else
+      % Use ASCII approximations in destination names.
+      \passthroughcharsfalse
+    \fi
+    \def\pdfdestname{#1}%
+    \txiescapepdf\pdfdestname
+  }}
+  %
+  \def\setpdfoutlinetext#1{{%
+    \turnoffactive
+    % Always use Unicode characters in title texts.
+    \def\pdfoutlinetext{#1}%
+    % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts to UTF-16.
+    % So we do not convert.
+    \txiescapepdf\pdfoutlinetext
+  }}
+  %
+  \def\pdfmkdest#1{%
+    \setpdfdestname{#1}%
+    \safewhatsit{\pdfdest name{\pdfdestname} xyz}%
+  }
+  %
+  % by default, use black for everything.
+  \def\urlcolor{\rgbBlack}
+  \def\linkcolor{\rgbBlack}
+  \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\pdfendlink}
+  %
+  \def\dopdfoutline#1#2#3#4{%
+    \setpdfoutlinetext{#1}
+    \setpdfdestname{#3}
+    \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
+      \def\pdfdestname{#4}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \special{pdf:out [-] #2 << /Title (\pdfoutlinetext) /A
+      << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >> }%
+  }
+  %
+  \def\pdfmakeoutlines{%
+    \begingroup
+      %
+      % For XeTeX, counts of subentries are not necessary.
+      % Therefore, we read toc only once.
+      %
+      % We use node names as destinations.
+      \def\partentry##1##2##3##4{}% ignore parts in the outlines
+      \def\numchapentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{1}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{2}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{3}{##3}{##4}}%
+      \def\numsubsubsecentry##1##2##3##4{%
+        \dopdfoutline{##1}{4}{##3}{##4}}%
+      %
+      \let\appentry\numchapentry%
+      \let\appsecentry\numsecentry%
+      \let\appsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
+      \let\appsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
+      \let\unnchapentry\numchapentry%
+      \let\unnsecentry\numsecentry%
+      \let\unnsubsecentry\numsubsecentry%
+      \let\unnsubsubsecentry\numsubsubsecentry%
+      %
+      % For XeTeX, xdvipdfmx converts strings to UTF-16.
+      % Therefore, the encoding and the language may not be considered.
+      %
+      \indexnofonts
+      \setupdatafile
+      % We can have normal brace characters in the PDF outlines, unlike
+      % Texinfo index files.  So set that up.
+      \def\{{\lbracecharliteral}%
+      \def\}{\rbracecharliteral}%
+      \catcode`\\=\active \otherbackslash
+      \input \tocreadfilename
+    \endgroup
+  }
+  {\catcode`[=1 \catcode`]=2
+   \catcode`{=\other \catcode`}=\other
+   \gdef\lbracecharliteral[{]%
+   \gdef\rbracecharliteral[}]%
+  ]
+
+  \special{pdf:docview << /PageMode /UseOutlines >> }
+  % ``\special{pdf:tounicode ...}'' is not necessary
+  % because xdvipdfmx converts strings from UTF-8 to UTF-16 without it.
+  % However, due to a UTF-16 conversion issue of xdvipdfmx 20150315,
+  % ``\special{pdf:dest ...}'' cannot handle non-ASCII strings.
+  % It is fixed by xdvipdfmx 20160106 (TeX Live SVN r39753).
+%
+  \def\skipspaces#1{\def\PP{#1}\def\D{|}%
+    \ifx\PP\D\let\nextsp\relax
+    \else\let\nextsp\skipspaces
+      \addtokens{\filename}{\PP}%
+      \advance\filenamelength by 1
+    \fi
+    \nextsp}
+  \def\getfilename#1{%
+    \filenamelength=0
+    % If we don't expand the argument now, \skipspaces will get
+    % snagged on things like "@value{foo}".
+    \edef\temp{#1}%
+    \expandafter\skipspaces\temp|\relax
+  }
+  % make a live url in pdf output.
+  \def\pdfurl#1{%
+    \begingroup
+      % it seems we really need yet another set of dummies; have not
+      % tried to figure out what each command should do in the context
+      % of @url.  for now, just make @/ a no-op, that's the only one
+      % people have actually reported a problem with.
+      %
+      \normalturnoffactive
+      \def\@{@}%
+      \let\/=\empty
+      \makevalueexpandable
+      % do we want to go so far as to use \indexnofonts instead of just
+      % special-casing \var here?
+      \def\var##1{##1}%
+      %
+      \leavevmode\setcolor{\urlcolor}%
+      \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
+        /Subtype /Link /A << /S /URI /URI (#1) >> >>}%
+    \endgroup}
+  \def\endlink{\setcolor{\maincolor}\special{pdf:eann}}
+  \def\pdfgettoks#1.{\setbox\boxA=\hbox{\toksA={#1.}\toksB={}\maketoks}}
+  \def\addtokens#1#2{\edef\addtoks{\noexpand#1={\the#1#2}}\addtoks}
+  \def\adn#1{\addtokens{\toksC}{#1}\global\countA=1\let\next=\maketoks}
+  \def\poptoks#1#2|ENDTOKS|{\let\first=#1\toksD={#1}\toksA={#2}}
+  \def\maketoks{%
+    \expandafter\poptoks\the\toksA|ENDTOKS|\relax
+    \ifx\first0\adn0
+    \else\ifx\first1\adn1 \else\ifx\first2\adn2 \else\ifx\first3\adn3
+    \else\ifx\first4\adn4 \else\ifx\first5\adn5 \else\ifx\first6\adn6
+    \else\ifx\first7\adn7 \else\ifx\first8\adn8 \else\ifx\first9\adn9
+    \else
+      \ifnum0=\countA\else\makelink\fi
+      \ifx\first.\let\next=\done\else
+        \let\next=\maketoks
+        \addtokens{\toksB}{\the\toksD}
+        \ifx\first,\addtokens{\toksB}{\space}\fi
+      \fi
+    \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \next}
+  \def\makelink{\addtokens{\toksB}%
+    {\noexpand\pdflink{\the\toksC}}\toksC={}\global\countA=0}
+  \def\pdflink#1{%
+    \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0]
+      /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A << /S /GoTo /D (#1) >> >>}%
+    \setcolor{\linkcolor}#1\endlink}
+  \def\done{\edef\st{\global\noexpand\toksA={\the\toksB}}\st}
+%
+  %
+  % @image support
+  %
+  % #1 is image name, #2 width (might be empty/whitespace), #3 height (ditto).
+  \def\doxeteximage#1#2#3{%
+    \def\xeteximagewidth{#2}\setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \def\xeteximageheight{#3}\setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+    %
+    % XeTeX (and the PDF format) supports .pdf, .png, .jpg (among
+    % others).  Let's try in that order, PDF first since if
+    % someone has a scalable image, presumably better to use that than a
+    % bitmap.
+    \let\xeteximgext=\empty
+    \begingroup
+      \openin 1 #1.pdf \ifeof 1
+        \openin 1 #1.PDF \ifeof 1
+          \openin 1 #1.png \ifeof 1
+            \openin 1 #1.jpg \ifeof 1
+              \openin 1 #1.jpeg \ifeof 1
+                \openin 1 #1.JPG \ifeof 1
+                  \errmessage{Could not find image file #1 for XeTeX}%
+                \else \gdef\xeteximgext{JPG}%
+                \fi
+              \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpeg}%
+              \fi
+            \else \gdef\xeteximgext{jpg}%
+            \fi
+          \else \gdef\xeteximgext{png}%
+          \fi
+        \else \gdef\xeteximgext{PDF}%
+        \fi
+      \else \gdef\xeteximgext{pdf}%
+      \fi
+      \closein 1
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    \def\xetexpdfext{pdf}%
+    \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
+      \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
+    \else
+      \def\xetexpdfext{PDF}%
+      \ifx\xeteximgext\xetexpdfext
+        \XeTeXpdffile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
+      \else
+        \XeTeXpicfile "#1".\xeteximgext ""
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifdim \wd0 >0pt width \xeteximagewidth \fi
+    \ifdim \wd2 >0pt height \xeteximageheight \fi \relax
+  }
+\fi
+
+
+%
+\message{fonts,}
+
+% Set the baselineskip to #1, and the lineskip and strut size
+% correspondingly.  There is no deep meaning behind these magic numbers
+% used as factors; they just match (closely enough) what Knuth defined.
+%
+\def\lineskipfactor{.08333}
+\def\strutheightpercent{.70833}
+\def\strutdepthpercent {.29167}
+%
+% can get a sort of poor man's double spacing by redefining this.
+\def\baselinefactor{1}
+%
+\newdimen\textleading
+\def\setleading#1{%
+  \dimen0 = #1\relax
+  \normalbaselineskip = \baselinefactor\dimen0
+  \normallineskip = \lineskipfactor\normalbaselineskip
+  \normalbaselines
+  \setbox\strutbox =\hbox{%
+    \vrule width0pt height\strutheightpercent\baselineskip
+                    depth \strutdepthpercent \baselineskip
+  }%
+}
+
+% PDF CMaps.  See also LaTeX's t1.cmap.
+%
+% do nothing with this by default.
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1\endcsname\gobble
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname\gobble
+\expandafter\let\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname\gobble
+
+% if we are producing pdf, and we have \pdffontattr, then define cmaps.
+% (\pdffontattr was introduced many years ago, but people still run
+% older pdftex's; it's easy to conditionalize, so we do.)
+\ifpdf \ifx\pdffontattr\thisisundefined \else
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1-0)
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1-0 TeX OT1 0)
+%%Version: 1.000
+%%EndComments
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+12 dict begin
+begincmap
+/CIDSystemInfo
+<< /Registry (TeX)
+/Ordering (OT1)
+/Supplement 0
+>> def
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1-0 def
+/CMapType 2 def
+1 begincodespacerange
+<00> <7F>
+endcodespacerange
+8 beginbfrange
+<00> <01> <0393>
+<09> <0A> <03A8>
+<23> <26> <0023>
+<28> <3B> <0028>
+<3F> <5B> <003F>
+<5D> <5E> <005D>
+<61> <7A> <0061>
+<7B> <7C> <2013>
+endbfrange
+40 beginbfchar
+<02> <0398>
+<03> <039B>
+<04> <039E>
+<05> <03A0>
+<06> <03A3>
+<07> <03D2>
+<08> <03A6>
+<0B> <00660066>
+<0C> <00660069>
+<0D> <0066006C>
+<0E> <006600660069>
+<0F> <00660066006C>
+<10> <0131>
+<11> <0237>
+<12> <0060>
+<13> <00B4>
+<14> <02C7>
+<15> <02D8>
+<16> <00AF>
+<17> <02DA>
+<18> <00B8>
+<19> <00DF>
+<1A> <00E6>
+<1B> <0153>
+<1C> <00F8>
+<1D> <00C6>
+<1E> <0152>
+<1F> <00D8>
+<21> <0021>
+<22> <201D>
+<27> <2019>
+<3C> <00A1>
+<3D> <003D>
+<3E> <00BF>
+<5C> <201C>
+<5F> <02D9>
+<60> <2018>
+<7D> <02DD>
+<7E> <007E>
+<7F> <00A8>
+endbfchar
+endcmap
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+end
+end
+%%EndResource
+%%EOF
+    }\endgroup
+  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1\endcsname#1{%
+    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+  }%
+%
+% \cmapOT1IT
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1IT-0)
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1IT-0 TeX OT1IT 0)
+%%Version: 1.000
+%%EndComments
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+12 dict begin
+begincmap
+/CIDSystemInfo
+<< /Registry (TeX)
+/Ordering (OT1IT)
+/Supplement 0
+>> def
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1IT-0 def
+/CMapType 2 def
+1 begincodespacerange
+<00> <7F>
+endcodespacerange
+8 beginbfrange
+<00> <01> <0393>
+<09> <0A> <03A8>
+<25> <26> <0025>
+<28> <3B> <0028>
+<3F> <5B> <003F>
+<5D> <5E> <005D>
+<61> <7A> <0061>
+<7B> <7C> <2013>
+endbfrange
+42 beginbfchar
+<02> <0398>
+<03> <039B>
+<04> <039E>
+<05> <03A0>
+<06> <03A3>
+<07> <03D2>
+<08> <03A6>
+<0B> <00660066>
+<0C> <00660069>
+<0D> <0066006C>
+<0E> <006600660069>
+<0F> <00660066006C>
+<10> <0131>
+<11> <0237>
+<12> <0060>
+<13> <00B4>
+<14> <02C7>
+<15> <02D8>
+<16> <00AF>
+<17> <02DA>
+<18> <00B8>
+<19> <00DF>
+<1A> <00E6>
+<1B> <0153>
+<1C> <00F8>
+<1D> <00C6>
+<1E> <0152>
+<1F> <00D8>
+<21> <0021>
+<22> <201D>
+<23> <0023>
+<24> <00A3>
+<27> <2019>
+<3C> <00A1>
+<3D> <003D>
+<3E> <00BF>
+<5C> <201C>
+<5F> <02D9>
+<60> <2018>
+<7D> <02DD>
+<7E> <007E>
+<7F> <00A8>
+endbfchar
+endcmap
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+end
+end
+%%EndResource
+%%EOF
+    }\endgroup
+  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1IT\endcsname#1{%
+    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+  }%
+%
+% \cmapOT1TT
+  \begingroup
+    \catcode`\^^M=\active \def^^M{^^J}% Output line endings as the ^^J char.
+    \catcode`\%=12 \immediate\pdfobj stream {%!PS-Adobe-3.0 Resource-CMap
+%%DocumentNeededResources: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%IncludeResource: ProcSet (CIDInit)
+%%BeginResource: CMap (TeX-OT1TT-0)
+%%Title: (TeX-OT1TT-0 TeX OT1TT 0)
+%%Version: 1.000
+%%EndComments
+/CIDInit /ProcSet findresource begin
+12 dict begin
+begincmap
+/CIDSystemInfo
+<< /Registry (TeX)
+/Ordering (OT1TT)
+/Supplement 0
+>> def
+/CMapName /TeX-OT1TT-0 def
+/CMapType 2 def
+1 begincodespacerange
+<00> <7F>
+endcodespacerange
+5 beginbfrange
+<00> <01> <0393>
+<09> <0A> <03A8>
+<21> <26> <0021>
+<28> <5F> <0028>
+<61> <7E> <0061>
+endbfrange
+32 beginbfchar
+<02> <0398>
+<03> <039B>
+<04> <039E>
+<05> <03A0>
+<06> <03A3>
+<07> <03D2>
+<08> <03A6>
+<0B> <2191>
+<0C> <2193>
+<0D> <0027>
+<0E> <00A1>
+<0F> <00BF>
+<10> <0131>
+<11> <0237>
+<12> <0060>
+<13> <00B4>
+<14> <02C7>
+<15> <02D8>
+<16> <00AF>
+<17> <02DA>
+<18> <00B8>
+<19> <00DF>
+<1A> <00E6>
+<1B> <0153>
+<1C> <00F8>
+<1D> <00C6>
+<1E> <0152>
+<1F> <00D8>
+<20> <2423>
+<27> <2019>
+<60> <2018>
+<7F> <00A8>
+endbfchar
+endcmap
+CMapName currentdict /CMap defineresource pop
+end
+end
+%%EndResource
+%%EOF
+    }\endgroup
+  \expandafter\edef\csname cmapOT1TT\endcsname#1{%
+    \pdffontattr#1{/ToUnicode \the\pdflastobj\space 0 R}%
+  }%
+\fi\fi
+
+
+% Set the font macro #1 to the font named \fontprefix#2.
+% #3 is the font's design size, #4 is a scale factor, #5 is the CMap
+% encoding (only OT1, OT1IT and OT1TT are allowed, or empty to omit).
+% Example:
+% #1 = \textrm
+% #2 = \rmshape
+% #3 = 10
+% #4 = \mainmagstep
+% #5 = OT1
+%
+\def\setfont#1#2#3#4#5{%
+  \font#1=\fontprefix#2#3 scaled #4
+  \csname cmap#5\endcsname#1%
+}
+% This is what gets called when #5 of \setfont is empty.
+\let\cmap\gobble
+%
+% (end of cmaps)
+
+% Use cm as the default font prefix.
+% To specify the font prefix, you must define \fontprefix
+% before you read in texinfo.tex.
+\ifx\fontprefix\thisisundefined
+\def\fontprefix{cm}
+\fi
+% Support font families that don't use the same naming scheme as CM.
+\def\rmshape{r}
+\def\rmbshape{bx}               % where the normal face is bold
+\def\bfshape{b}
+\def\bxshape{bx}
+\def\ttshape{tt}
+\def\ttbshape{tt}
+\def\ttslshape{sltt}
+\def\itshape{ti}
+\def\itbshape{bxti}
+\def\slshape{sl}
+\def\slbshape{bxsl}
+\def\sfshape{ss}
+\def\sfbshape{ss}
+\def\scshape{csc}
+\def\scbshape{csc}
+
+% Definitions for a main text size of 11pt.  (The default in Texinfo.)
+%
+\def\definetextfontsizexi{%
+% Text fonts (11.2pt, magstep1).
+\def\textnominalsize{11pt}
+\edef\mainmagstep{\magstephalf}
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\def\textecsize{1095}
+
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
+\let\ttslfont=\defttsl \let\slfont=\defsl \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalli=cmmi9
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+\def\smallecsize{0900}
+
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+\def\smallerecsize{0800}
+
+% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
+\def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
+\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
+\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
+\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
+\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
+\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
+\font\seveni=cmmi7
+\font\sevensy=cmsy7
+\def\sevenecsize{0700}
+
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\titleecsize{2074}
+
+% Chapter (and unnumbered) fonts (17.28pt).
+\def\chapnominalsize{17pt}
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{17}{1000}{OT1}
+\let\chapbf=\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep2
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep3
+\def\chapecsize{1728}
+
+% Section fonts (14.4pt).
+\def\secnominalsize{14pt}
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\secrmnotbold\rmshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\font\seci=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+\def\sececsize{1440}
+
+% Subsection fonts (13.15pt).
+\def\ssecnominalsize{13pt}
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1315}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1315}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1315}{OT1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi12 scaled \magstephalf
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10 scaled 1315
+\def\ssececsize{1200}
+
+% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (10pt).
+\def\reducednominalsize{10pt}
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\font\reducedi=cmmi10
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy10
+\def\reducedecsize{1000}
+
+\textleading = 13.2pt % line spacing for 11pt CM
+\textfonts            % reset the current fonts
+\rm
+} % end of 11pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizexi
+
+
+% Definitions to make the main text be 10pt Computer Modern, with
+% section, chapter, etc., sizes following suit.  This is for the GNU
+% Press printing of the Emacs 22 manual.  Maybe other manuals in the
+% future.  Used with @smallbook, which sets the leading to 12pt.
+%
+\def\definetextfontsizex{%
+% Text fonts (10pt).
+\def\textnominalsize{10pt}
+\edef\mainmagstep{1000}
+\setfont\textrm\rmshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\texttt\ttshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\textbf\bfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textit\itshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\textsl\slshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsf\sfshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textsc\scshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1}
+\setfont\textttsl\ttslshape{10}{\mainmagstep}{OT1TT}
+\font\texti=cmmi10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\font\textsy=cmsy10 scaled \mainmagstep
+\def\textecsize{1000}
+
+% A few fonts for @defun names and args.
+\setfont\defbf\bfshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1}
+\setfont\deftt\ttshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\defsl\slshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\defttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstephalf}{OT1TT}
+\def\df{\let\ttfont=\deftt \let\bffont = \defbf
+\let\slfont=\defsl \let\ttslfont=\defttsl \bf}
+
+% Fonts for indices, footnotes, small examples (9pt).
+\def\smallnominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\smallrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smalltt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalli=cmmi9
+\font\smallsy=cmsy9
+\def\smallecsize{0900}
+
+% Fonts for small examples (8pt).
+\def\smallernominalsize{8pt}
+\setfont\smallerrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallertt\ttshape{8}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\smallerbf\bfshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerit\itshape{8}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\smallersl\slshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersf\sfshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallersc\scshape{10}{800}{OT1}
+\setfont\smallerttsl\ttslshape{10}{800}{OT1TT}
+\font\smalleri=cmmi8
+\font\smallersy=cmsy8
+\def\smallerecsize{0800}
+
+% Fonts for math mode superscripts (7pt).
+\def\sevennominalsize{7pt}
+\setfont\sevenrm\rmshape{7}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\seventt\ttshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\sevenbf\bfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
+\setfont\sevenit\itshape{7}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\sevensl\slshape{10}{700}{OT1}
+\setfont\sevensf\sfshape{10}{700}{OT1}
+\setfont\sevensc\scshape{10}{700}{OT1}
+\setfont\seventtsl\ttslshape{10}{700}{OT1TT}
+\font\seveni=cmmi7
+\font\sevensy=cmsy7
+\def\sevenecsize{0700}
+
+% Fonts for title page (20.4pt):
+\def\titlenominalsize{20pt}
+\setfont\titlerm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1}
+\setfont\titleit\itbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\titlesl\slbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\setfont\titlett\ttbshape{12}{\magstep3}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlettsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\titlesf\sfbshape{17}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\let\titlebf=\titlerm
+\setfont\titlesc\scbshape{10}{\magstep4}{OT1}
+\font\titlei=cmmi12 scaled \magstep3
+\font\titlesy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep4
+\def\titleecsize{2074}
+
+% Chapter fonts (14.4pt).
+\def\chapnominalsize{14pt}
+\setfont\chaprm\rmbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\chapit\itbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\chapsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\setfont\chaptt\ttbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\chapsf\sfbshape{12}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\let\chapbf\chaprm
+\setfont\chapsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep2}{OT1}
+\font\chapi=cmmi12 scaled \magstep1
+\font\chapsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep2
+\def\chapecsize{1440}
+
+% Section fonts (12pt).
+\def\secnominalsize{12pt}
+\setfont\secrm\rmbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\secit\itbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\secsl\slbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\setfont\sectt\ttbshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secttsl\ttslshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\secsf\sfbshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\let\secbf\secrm
+\setfont\secsc\scbshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}
+\font\seci=cmmi12
+\font\secsy=cmsy10 scaled \magstep1
+\def\sececsize{1200}
+
+% Subsection fonts (10pt).
+\def\ssecnominalsize{10pt}
+\setfont\ssecrm\rmbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssecit\itbshape{10}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\ssecsl\slbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\ssectt\ttbshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecttsl\ttslshape{10}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\ssecsf\sfbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\let\ssecbf\ssecrm
+\setfont\ssecsc\scbshape{10}{1000}{OT1}
+\font\sseci=cmmi10
+\font\ssecsy=cmsy10
+\def\ssececsize{1000}
+
+% Reduced fonts for @acronym in text (9pt).
+\def\reducednominalsize{9pt}
+\setfont\reducedrm\rmshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedtt\ttshape{9}{1000}{OT1TT}
+\setfont\reducedbf\bfshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedit\itshape{9}{1000}{OT1IT}
+\setfont\reducedsl\slshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsf\sfshape{9}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedsc\scshape{10}{900}{OT1}
+\setfont\reducedttsl\ttslshape{10}{900}{OT1TT}
+\font\reducedi=cmmi9
+\font\reducedsy=cmsy9
+\def\reducedecsize{0900}
+
+\divide\parskip by 2  % reduce space between paragraphs
+\textleading = 12pt   % line spacing for 10pt CM
+\textfonts            % reset the current fonts
+\rm
+} % end of 10pt text font size definitions, \definetextfontsizex
+
+% Fonts for short table of contents.
+\setfont\shortcontrm\rmshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\shortcontbf\bfshape{10}{\magstep1}{OT1}  % no cmb12
+\setfont\shortcontsl\slshape{12}{1000}{OT1}
+\setfont\shortconttt\ttshape{12}{1000}{OT1TT}
+
+
+% We provide the user-level command
+%   @fonttextsize 10
+% (or 11) to redefine the text font size.  pt is assumed.
+%
+\def\xiword{11}
+\def\xword{10}
+\def\xwordpt{10pt}
+%
+\parseargdef\fonttextsize{%
+  \def\textsizearg{#1}%
+  %\wlog{doing @fonttextsize \textsizearg}%
+  %
+  % Set \globaldefs so that documents can use this inside @tex, since
+  % makeinfo 4.8 does not support it, but we need it nonetheless.
+  %
+ \begingroup \globaldefs=1
+  \ifx\textsizearg\xword \definetextfontsizex
+  \else \ifx\textsizearg\xiword \definetextfontsizexi
+  \else
+    \errhelp=\EMsimple
+    \errmessage{@fonttextsize only supports `10' or `11', not `\textsizearg'}
+  \fi\fi
+ \endgroup
+}
+
+%
+% Change the current font style to #1, remembering it in \curfontstyle.
+% For now, we do not accumulate font styles: @b{@i{foo}} prints foo in
+% italics, not bold italics.
+%
+\def\setfontstyle#1{%
+  \def\curfontstyle{#1}% not as a control sequence, because we are \edef'd.
+  \csname #1font\endcsname  % change the current font
+}
+
+\def\rm{\fam=0 \setfontstyle{rm}}
+\def\it{\fam=\itfam \setfontstyle{it}}
+\def\sl{\fam=\slfam \setfontstyle{sl}}
+\def\bf{\fam=\bffam \setfontstyle{bf}}\def\bfstylename{bf}
+\def\tt{\fam=\ttfam \setfontstyle{tt}}
+
+% Texinfo sort of supports the sans serif font style, which plain TeX does not.
+% So we set up a \sf.
+\newfam\sffam
+\def\sf{\fam=\sffam \setfontstyle{sf}}
+
+% We don't need math for this font style.
+\def\ttsl{\setfontstyle{ttsl}}
+
+
+% In order for the font changes to affect most math symbols and letters,
+% we have to define the \textfont of the standard families.
+% We don't bother to reset \scriptscriptfont; awaiting user need.
+%
+\def\resetmathfonts{%
+  \textfont0=\rmfont \textfont1=\ifont \textfont2=\syfont
+  \textfont\itfam=\itfont \textfont\slfam=\slfont \textfont\bffam=\bffont
+  \textfont\ttfam=\ttfont \textfont\sffam=\sffont
+  %
+  % Fonts for superscript.  Note that the 7pt fonts are used regardless
+  % of the current font size.
+  \scriptfont0=\sevenrm \scriptfont1=\seveni \scriptfont2=\sevensy
+  \scriptfont\itfam=\sevenit \scriptfont\slfam=\sevensl
+  \scriptfont\bffam=\sevenbf \scriptfont\ttfam=\seventt
+  \scriptfont\sffam=\sevensf
+}
+
+%
+
+% The font-changing commands (all called \...fonts) redefine the meanings
+% of \STYLEfont, instead of just \STYLE.  We do this because \STYLE needs
+% to also set the current \fam for math mode.  Our \STYLE (e.g., \rm)
+% commands hardwire \STYLEfont to set the current font.
+%
+% The fonts used for \ifont are for "math italics"  (\itfont is for italics
+% in regular text).  \syfont is also used in math mode only.
+%
+% Each font-changing command also sets the names \lsize (one size lower)
+% and \lllsize (three sizes lower).  These relative commands are used
+% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms.
+%
+% This all needs generalizing, badly.
+%
+
+\def\assignfonts#1{%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\rmfont\csname #1rm\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\itfont\csname #1it\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\slfont\csname #1sl\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\bffont\csname #1bf\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttfont\csname #1tt\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\smallcaps\csname #1sc\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\sffont  \csname #1sf\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\ifont   \csname #1i\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\syfont  \csname #1sy\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\ttslfont\csname #1ttsl\endcsname
+}
+
+\newif\ifrmisbold
+
+% Select smaller font size with the current style.  Used to change font size
+% in, e.g., the LaTeX logo and acronyms.  If we are using bold fonts for
+% normal roman text, also use bold fonts for roman text in the smaller size.
+\def\switchtolllsize{%
+   \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lllsize}%
+   \ifrmisbold
+     \let\rmfont\bffont
+   \fi
+   \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
+}%
+
+\def\switchtolsize{%
+   \expandafter\assignfonts\expandafter{\lsize}%
+   \ifrmisbold
+     \let\rmfont\bffont
+   \fi
+   \csname\curfontstyle\endcsname
+}%
+
+\def\definefontsetatsize#1#2#3#4#5{%
+\expandafter\def\csname #1fonts\endcsname{%
+  \def\curfontsize{#1}%
+  \def\lsize{#2}\def\lllsize{#3}%
+  \csname rmisbold#5\endcsname
+  \assignfonts{#1}%
+  \resetmathfonts
+  \setleading{#4}%
+}}
+
+\definefontsetatsize{text}   {reduced}{smaller}{\textleading}{false}
+\definefontsetatsize{title}  {chap}   {subsec} {27pt}  {true}
+\definefontsetatsize{chap}   {sec}    {text}   {19pt}  {true}
+\definefontsetatsize{sec}    {subsec} {reduced}{17pt}  {true}
+\definefontsetatsize{ssec}   {text}   {small}  {15pt}  {true}
+\definefontsetatsize{reduced}{small}  {smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
+\definefontsetatsize{small}  {smaller}{smaller}{10.5pt}{false}
+\definefontsetatsize{smaller}{smaller}{smaller}{9.5pt} {false}
+
+\def\titlefont#1{{\titlefonts\rm #1}}
+\let\subsecfonts = \ssecfonts
+\let\subsubsecfonts = \ssecfonts
+
+% Define these just so they can be easily changed for other fonts.
+\def\angleleft{$\langle$}
+\def\angleright{$\rangle$}
+
+% Set the fonts to use with the @small... environments.
+\let\smallexamplefonts = \smallfonts
+
+% About \smallexamplefonts.  If we use \smallfonts (9pt), @smallexample
+% can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=86   smallbook=72  a4=90  a5=69
+% If we use \scriptfonts (8pt), then we can fit this many characters:
+%   8.5x11=90+  smallbook=80  a4=90+  a5=77
+% For me, subjectively, the few extra characters that fit aren't worth
+% the additional smallness of 8pt.  So I'm making the default 9pt.
+%
+% By the way, for comparison, here's what fits with @example (10pt):
+%   8.5x11=71  smallbook=60  a4=75  a5=58
+% --karl, 24jan03.
+
+% Set up the default fonts, so we can use them for creating boxes.
+%
+\definetextfontsizexi
+
+
+\message{markup,}
+
+% Check if we are currently using a typewriter font.  Since all the
+% Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero interword stretch (and
+% shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all typewriter fonts to have
+% this property, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifmonospace{\ifdim\fontdimen3\font=0pt }
+
+% Markup style infrastructure.  \defmarkupstylesetup\INITMACRO will
+% define and register \INITMACRO to be called on markup style changes.
+% \INITMACRO can check \currentmarkupstyle for the innermost
+% style.
+
+\let\currentmarkupstyle\empty
+
+\def\setupmarkupstyle#1{%
+  \def\currentmarkupstyle{#1}%
+  \markupstylesetup
+}
+
+\let\markupstylesetup\empty
+
+\def\defmarkupstylesetup#1{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\markupstylesetup
+    \expandafter{\markupstylesetup #1}%
+  \def#1%
+}
+
+% Markup style setup for left and right quotes.
+\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuplq{%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
+    \csname markupsetuplq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
+  \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuplqdefault \else \temp \fi
+}
+
+\defmarkupstylesetup\markupsetuprq{%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter \temp
+    \csname markupsetuprq\currentmarkupstyle\endcsname
+  \ifx\temp\relax \markupsetuprqdefault \else \temp \fi
+}
+
+{
+\catcode`\'=\active
+\catcode`\`=\active
+
+\gdef\markupsetuplqdefault{\let`\lq}
+\gdef\markupsetuprqdefault{\let'\rq}
+
+\gdef\markupsetcodequoteleft{\let`\codequoteleft}
+\gdef\markupsetcodequoteright{\let'\codequoteright}
+}
+
+\let\markupsetuplqcode \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqcode \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqexample \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqexample \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqkbd     \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqkbd     \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqsamp \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqsamp \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqverb \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqverb \markupsetcodequoteright
+%
+\let\markupsetuplqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteleft
+\let\markupsetuprqverbatim \markupsetcodequoteright
+
+% Allow an option to not use regular directed right quote/apostrophe
+% (char 0x27), but instead the undirected quote from cmtt (char 0x0d).
+% The undirected quote is ugly, so don't make it the default, but it
+% works for pasting with more pdf viewers (at least evince), the
+% lilypond developers report.  xpdf does work with the regular 0x27.
+%
+\def\codequoteright{%
+  \ifmonospace
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
+      \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequoteundirected\endcsname\relax
+        '%
+      \else \char'15 \fi
+    \else \char'15 \fi
+   \else
+     '%
+   \fi
+}
+%
+% and a similar option for the left quote char vs. a grave accent.
+% Modern fonts display ASCII 0x60 as a grave accent, so some people like
+% the code environments to do likewise.
+%
+\def\codequoteleft{%
+  \ifmonospace
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
+      \expandafter\ifx\csname SETcodequotebacktick\endcsname\relax
+        % [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391
+        % \relax disables Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
+        \relax`%
+      \else \char'22 \fi
+    \else \char'22 \fi
+   \else
+     \relax`%
+   \fi
+}
+
+% Commands to set the quote options.
+% 
+\parseargdef\codequoteundirected{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
+      = t%
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequoteundirected\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @codequoteundirected value `\temp', must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+%
+\parseargdef\codequotebacktick{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
+      = t%
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxicodequotebacktick\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @codequotebacktick value `\temp', must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% [Knuth] pp. 380,381,391, disable Spanish ligatures ?` and !` of \tt font.
+\def\noligaturesquoteleft{\relax\lq}
+
+% Count depth in font-changes, for error checks
+\newcount\fontdepth \fontdepth=0
+
+% Font commands.
+
+% #1 is the font command (\sl or \it), #2 is the text to slant.
+% If we are in a monospaced environment, however, 1) always use \ttsl,
+% and 2) do not add an italic correction.
+\def\dosmartslant#1#2{%
+  \ifusingtt 
+    {{\ttsl #2}\let\next=\relax}%
+    {\def\next{{#1#2}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}}%
+  \next
+}
+\def\smartslanted{\dosmartslant\sl}
+\def\smartitalic{\dosmartslant\it}
+
+% Output an italic correction unless \next (presumed to be the following
+% character) is such as not to need one.
+\def\smartitaliccorrection{%
+  \ifx\next,%
+  \else\ifx\next-%
+  \else\ifx\next.%
+  \else\ifx\next\.%
+  \else\ifx\next\comma%
+  \else\ptexslash
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \aftersmartic
+}
+
+% Unconditional use \ttsl, and no ic.  @var is set to this for defuns.
+\def\ttslanted#1{{\ttsl #1}}
+
+% @cite is like \smartslanted except unconditionally use \sl.  We never want
+% ttsl for book titles, do we?
+\def\cite#1{{\sl #1}\futurelet\next\smartitaliccorrection}
+
+\def\aftersmartic{}
+\def\var#1{%
+  \let\saveaftersmartic = \aftersmartic
+  \def\aftersmartic{\null\let\aftersmartic=\saveaftersmartic}%
+  \smartslanted{#1}%
+}
+
+\let\i=\smartitalic
+\let\slanted=\smartslanted
+\let\dfn=\smartslanted
+\let\emph=\smartitalic
+
+% Explicit font changes: @r, @sc, undocumented @ii.
+\def\r#1{{\rm #1}}              % roman font
+\def\sc#1{{\smallcaps#1}}       % smallcaps font
+\def\ii#1{{\it #1}}             % italic font
+
+% @b, explicit bold.  Also @strong.
+\def\b#1{{\bf #1}}
+\let\strong=\b
+
+% @sansserif, explicit sans.
+\def\sansserif#1{{\sf #1}}
+
+% We can't just use \exhyphenpenalty, because that only has effect at
+% the end of a paragraph.  Restore normal hyphenation at the end of the
+% group within which \nohyphenation is presumably called.
+%
+\def\nohyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = -1  \aftergroup\restorehyphenation}
+\def\restorehyphenation{\hyphenchar\font = `- }
+
+% Set sfcode to normal for the chars that usually have another value.
+% Can't use plain's \frenchspacing because it uses the `\x notation, and
+% sometimes \x has an active definition that messes things up.
+%
+\catcode`@=11
+  \def\plainfrenchspacing{%
+    \sfcode`\.=\@m \sfcode`\?=\@m \sfcode`\!=\@m
+    \sfcode`\:=\@m \sfcode`\;=\@m \sfcode`\,=\@m
+    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{1000}% for @. and friends
+  }
+  \def\plainnonfrenchspacing{%
+    \sfcode`\.3000\sfcode`\?3000\sfcode`\!3000
+    \sfcode`\:2000\sfcode`\;1500\sfcode`\,1250
+    \def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% for @. and friends
+  }
+\catcode`@=\other
+\def\endofsentencespacefactor{3000}% default
+
+% @t, explicit typewriter.
+\def\t#1{%
+  {\tt \rawbackslash \plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+  \null
+}
+
+% @samp.
+\def\samp#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{samp}\lq\tclose{#1}\rq\null}}
+
+% @indicateurl is \samp, that is, with quotes.
+\let\indicateurl=\samp
+
+% @code (and similar) prints in typewriter, but with spaces the same
+% size as normal in the surrounding text, without hyphenation, etc.
+% This is a subroutine for that.
+\def\tclose#1{%
+  {%
+    % Change normal interword space to be same as for the current font.
+    \spaceskip = \fontdimen2\font
+    %
+    % Switch to typewriter.
+    \tt
+    %
+    % But `\ ' produces the large typewriter interword space.
+    \def\ {{\spaceskip = 0pt{} }}%
+    %
+    % Turn off hyphenation.
+    \nohyphenation
+    %
+    \rawbackslash
+    \plainfrenchspacing
+    #1%
+  }%
+  \null % reset spacefactor to 1000
+}
+
+% We *must* turn on hyphenation at `-' and `_' in @code.
+% (But see \codedashfinish below.)
+% Otherwise, it is too hard to avoid overfull hboxes
+% in the Emacs manual, the Library manual, etc.
+%
+% Unfortunately, TeX uses one parameter (\hyphenchar) to control
+% both hyphenation at - and hyphenation within words.
+% We must therefore turn them both off (\tclose does that)
+% and arrange explicitly to hyphenate at a dash. -- rms.
+{
+  \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
+  \catcode`\'=\active \catcode`\`=\active
+  \global\let'=\rq \global\let`=\lq  % default definitions
+  %
+  \global\def\code{\begingroup
+    \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
+    % The following should really be moved into \setupmarkupstyle handlers.
+    \catcode\dashChar=\active  \catcode\underChar=\active
+    \ifallowcodebreaks
+     \let-\codedash
+     \let_\codeunder
+    \else
+     \let-\normaldash
+     \let_\realunder
+    \fi
+    % Given -foo (with a single dash), we do not want to allow a break
+    % after the hyphen.
+    \global\let\codedashprev=\codedash
+    %
+    \codex
+  }
+  %
+  \gdef\codedash{\futurelet\next\codedashfinish}
+  \gdef\codedashfinish{%
+    \normaldash % always output the dash character itself.
+    % 
+    % Now, output a discretionary to allow a line break, unless
+    % (a) the next character is a -, or
+    % (b) the preceding character is a -.
+    % E.g., given --posix, we do not want to allow a break after either -.
+    % Given --foo-bar, we do want to allow a break between the - and the b.
+    \ifx\next\codedash \else
+      \ifx\codedashprev\codedash 
+      \else \discretionary{}{}{}\fi
+    \fi
+    % we need the space after the = for the case when \next itself is a
+    % space token; it would get swallowed otherwise.  As in @code{- a}.
+    \global\let\codedashprev= \next
+  }
+}
+\def\normaldash{-}
+%
+\def\codex #1{\tclose{#1}\endgroup}
+
+\def\codeunder{%
+  % this is all so @math{@code{var_name}+1} can work.  In math mode, _
+  % is "active" (mathcode"8000) and \normalunderscore (or \char95, etc.)
+  % will therefore expand the active definition of _, which is us
+  % (inside @code that is), therefore an endless loop.
+  \ifusingtt{\ifmmode
+               \mathchar"075F % class 0=ordinary, family 7=ttfam, pos 0x5F=_.
+             \else\normalunderscore \fi
+             \discretionary{}{}{}}%
+            {\_}%
+}
+
+% An additional complication: the above will allow breaks after, e.g.,
+% each of the four underscores in __typeof__.  This is bad.
+% @allowcodebreaks provides a document-level way to turn breaking at -
+% and _ on and off.
+%
+\newif\ifallowcodebreaks  \allowcodebreakstrue
+
+\def\keywordtrue{true}
+\def\keywordfalse{false}
+
+\parseargdef\allowcodebreaks{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\keywordtrue
+    \allowcodebreakstrue
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\keywordfalse
+    \allowcodebreaksfalse
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @allowcodebreaks option `\txiarg', must be true|false}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% For @command, @env, @file, @option quotes seem unnecessary,
+% so use \code rather than \samp.
+\let\command=\code
+\let\env=\code
+\let\file=\code
+\let\option=\code
+
+% @uref (abbreviation for `urlref') aka @url takes an optional
+% (comma-separated) second argument specifying the text to display and
+% an optional third arg as text to display instead of (rather than in
+% addition to) the url itself.  First (mandatory) arg is the url.
+
+% TeX-only option to allow changing PDF output to show only the second
+% arg (if given), and not the url (which is then just the link target).
+\newif\ifurefurlonlylink
+
+% The main macro is \urefbreak, which allows breaking at expected
+% places within the url.  (There used to be another version, which
+% didn't support automatic breaking.)
+\def\urefbreak{\begingroup \urefcatcodes \dourefbreak}
+\let\uref=\urefbreak
+%
+\def\dourefbreak#1{\urefbreakfinish #1,,,\finish}
+\def\urefbreakfinish#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{% doesn't work in @example
+  \unsepspaces
+  \pdfurl{#1}%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+    \unhbox0 % third arg given, show only that
+  \else
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}% look for second arg
+    \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt
+      \ifpdf
+        % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
+        \ifurefurlonlylink
+          % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
+          \unhbox0             
+        \else
+          % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
+          % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
+          \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
+        \fi
+      \else
+        \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+          \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})% DVI, always show arg and url
+        \else
+          % For XeTeX
+          \ifurefurlonlylink
+            % PDF plus option to not display url, show just arg
+            \unhbox0             
+          \else
+            % PDF, normally display both arg and url for consistency,
+            % visibility, if the pdf is eventually used to print, etc.
+            \unhbox0\ (\urefcode{#1})%
+          \fi
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \urefcode{#1}% only url given, so show it
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% Allow line breaks around only a few characters (only).
+\def\urefcatcodes{%
+  \catcode`\&=\active \catcode`\.=\active
+  \catcode`\#=\active \catcode`\?=\active
+  \catcode`\/=\active
+}
+{
+  \urefcatcodes
+  %
+  \global\def\urefcode{\begingroup
+    \setupmarkupstyle{code}%
+    \urefcatcodes
+    \let&\urefcodeamp
+    \let.\urefcodedot
+    \let#\urefcodehash
+    \let?\urefcodequest
+    \let/\urefcodeslash
+    \codex
+  }
+  %
+  % By default, they are just regular characters.
+  \global\def&{\normalamp}
+  \global\def.{\normaldot}
+  \global\def#{\normalhash}
+  \global\def?{\normalquest}
+  \global\def/{\normalslash}
+}
+
+% we put a little stretch before and after the breakable chars, to help
+% line breaking of long url's.  The unequal skips make look better in
+% cmtt at least, especially for dots.
+\def\urefprestretchamount{.13em}
+\def\urefpoststretchamount{.1em}
+\def\urefprestretch{\urefprebreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax}
+\def\urefpoststretch{\urefpostbreak \hskip0pt plus\urefprestretchamount\relax}
+%
+\def\urefcodeamp{\urefprestretch \&\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodedot{\urefprestretch .\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodehash{\urefprestretch \#\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodequest{\urefprestretch ?\urefpoststretch}
+\def\urefcodeslash{\futurelet\next\urefcodeslashfinish}
+{
+  \catcode`\/=\active
+  \global\def\urefcodeslashfinish{%
+    \urefprestretch \slashChar
+    % Allow line break only after the final / in a sequence of
+    % slashes, to avoid line break between the slashes in http://.
+    \ifx\next/\else \urefpoststretch \fi
+  }
+}
+
+% One more complication: by default we'll break after the special
+% characters, but some people like to break before the special chars, so
+% allow that.  Also allow no breaking at all, for manual control.
+% 
+\parseargdef\urefbreakstyle{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\wordnone
+    \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordbefore
+    \def\urefprebreak{\allowbreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\nobreak}
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordafter
+    \def\urefprebreak{\nobreak}\def\urefpostbreak{\allowbreak}
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @urefbreakstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\wordafter{after}
+\def\wordbefore{before}
+\def\wordnone{none}
+
+\urefbreakstyle after
+
+% @url synonym for @uref, since that's how everyone uses it.
+%
+\let\url=\uref
+
+% rms does not like angle brackets --karl, 17may97.
+% So now @email is just like @uref, unless we are pdf.
+%
+%\def\email#1{\angleleft{\tt #1}\angleright}
+\ifpdf
+  \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
+  \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
+    \unsepspaces
+    \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
+    \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+    \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
+    \endlink
+  \endgroup}
+\else
+  \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+    \let\email=\uref
+  \else
+    \def\email#1{\doemail#1,,\finish}
+    \def\doemail#1,#2,#3\finish{\begingroup
+      \unsepspaces
+      \pdfurl{mailto:#1}%
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+      \ifdim\wd0>0pt\unhbox0\else\code{#1}\fi
+      \endlink
+    \endgroup}
+  \fi
+\fi
+
+% @kbdinputstyle -- arg is `distinct' (@kbd uses slanted tty font always),
+%   `example' (@kbd uses ttsl only inside of @example and friends),
+%   or `code' (@kbd uses normal tty font always).
+\parseargdef\kbdinputstyle{%
+  \def\txiarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\txiarg\worddistinct
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\ttsl}%
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordexample
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\ttsl}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else\ifx\txiarg\wordcode
+    \gdef\kbdexamplefont{\tt}\gdef\kbdfont{\tt}%
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @kbdinputstyle setting `\txiarg'}%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\worddistinct{distinct}
+\def\wordexample{example}
+\def\wordcode{code}
+
+% Default is `distinct'.
+\kbdinputstyle distinct
+
+% @kbd is like @code, except that if the argument is just one @key command,
+% then @kbd has no effect.
+\def\kbd#1{{\def\look{#1}\expandafter\kbdsub\look??\par}}
+
+\def\xkey{\key}
+\def\kbdsub#1#2#3\par{%
+  \def\one{#1}\def\three{#3}\def\threex{??}%
+  \ifx\one\xkey\ifx\threex\three \key{#2}%
+  \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
+  \else{\tclose{\kbdfont\setupmarkupstyle{kbd}\look}}\fi
+}
+
+% definition of @key that produces a lozenge.  Doesn't adjust to text size.
+%\setfont\keyrm\rmshape{8}{1000}{OT1}
+%\font\keysy=cmsy9
+%\def\key#1{{\keyrm\textfont2=\keysy \leavevmode\hbox{%
+%  \raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleleft}\kern-.08em\vtop{%
+%    \vbox{\hrule\kern-0.4pt
+%     \hbox{\raise0.4pt\hbox{\vphantom{\angleleft}}#1}}%
+%    \kern-0.4pt\hrule}%
+%  \kern-.06em\raise0.4pt\hbox{\angleright}}}}
+
+% definition of @key with no lozenge.  If the current font is already
+% monospace, don't change it; that way, we respect @kbdinputstyle.  But
+% if it isn't monospace, then use \tt.
+%
+\def\key#1{{\setupmarkupstyle{key}%
+  \nohyphenation
+  \ifmonospace\else\tt\fi
+  #1}\null}
+
+% @clicksequence{File @click{} Open ...}
+\def\clicksequence#1{\begingroup #1\endgroup}
+
+% @clickstyle @arrow   (by default)
+\parseargdef\clickstyle{\def\click{#1}}
+\def\click{\arrow}
+
+% Typeset a dimension, e.g., `in' or `pt'.  The only reason for the
+% argument is to make the input look right: @dmn{pt} instead of @dmn{}pt.
+%
+\def\dmn#1{\thinspace #1}
+
+% @acronym for "FBI", "NATO", and the like.
+% We print this one point size smaller, since it's intended for
+% all-uppercase.
+%
+\def\acronym#1{\doacronym #1,,\finish}
+\def\doacronym#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  {\switchtolsize #1}%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+  \fi
+  \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
+}
+
+% @abbr for "Comput. J." and the like.
+% No font change, but don't do end-of-sentence spacing.
+%
+\def\abbr#1{\doabbr #1,,\finish}
+\def\doabbr#1,#2,#3\finish{%
+  {\plainfrenchspacing #1}%
+  \def\temp{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    \space ({\unsepspaces \ignorespaces \temp \unskip})%
+  \fi
+  \null % reset \spacefactor=1000
+}
+
+% @asis just yields its argument.  Used with @table, for example.
+%
+\def\asis#1{#1}
+
+% @math outputs its argument in math mode.
+%
+% One complication: _ usually means subscripts, but it could also mean
+% an actual _ character, as in @math{@var{some_variable} + 1}.  So make
+% _ active, and distinguish by seeing if the current family is \slfam,
+% which is what @var uses.
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  \gdef\mathunderscore{%
+    \catcode`\_=\active
+    \def_{\ifnum\fam=\slfam \_\else\sb\fi}%
+  }
+}
+% Another complication: we want \\ (and @\) to output a math (or tt) \.
+% FYI, plain.tex uses \\ as a temporary control sequence (for no
+% particular reason), but this is not advertised and we don't care.
+%
+% The \mathchar is class=0=ordinary, family=7=ttfam, position=5C=\.
+\def\mathbackslash{\ifnum\fam=\ttfam \mathchar"075C \else\backslash \fi}
+%
+\def\math{%
+  \ifmmode\else % only go into math if not in math mode already
+    \tex
+    \mathunderscore
+    \let\\ = \mathbackslash
+    \mathactive
+    % make the texinfo accent commands work in math mode
+    \let\"=\ddot
+    \let\'=\acute
+    \let\==\bar
+    \let\^=\hat
+    \let\`=\grave
+    \let\u=\breve
+    \let\v=\check
+    \let\~=\tilde
+    \let\dotaccent=\dot
+    % have to provide another name for sup operator
+    \let\mathopsup=\sup
+  $\expandafter\finishmath\fi
+}
+\def\finishmath#1{#1$\endgroup}  % Close the group opened by \tex.
+
+% Some active characters (such as <) are spaced differently in math.
+% We have to reset their definitions in case the @math was an argument
+% to a command which sets the catcodes (such as @item or @section).
+%
+{
+  \catcode`^ = \active
+  \catcode`< = \active
+  \catcode`> = \active
+  \catcode`+ = \active
+  \catcode`' = \active
+  \gdef\mathactive{%
+    \let^ = \ptexhat
+    \let< = \ptexless
+    \let> = \ptexgtr
+    \let+ = \ptexplus
+    \let' = \ptexquoteright
+  }
+}
+
+% for @sub and @sup, if in math mode, just do a normal sub/superscript.
+% If in text, use math to place as sub/superscript, but switch
+% into text mode, with smaller fonts.  This is a different font than the
+% one used for real math sub/superscripts (8pt vs. 7pt), but let's not
+% fix it (significant additions to font machinery) until someone notices.
+%
+\def\sub{\ifmmode \expandafter\sb \else \expandafter\finishsub\fi}
+\def\finishsub#1{$\sb{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
+%
+\def\sup{\ifmmode \expandafter\ptexsp \else \expandafter\finishsup\fi}
+\def\finishsup#1{$\ptexsp{\hbox{\switchtolllsize #1}}$}%
+
+% @inlinefmt{FMTNAME,PROCESSED-TEXT} and @inlineraw{FMTNAME,RAW-TEXT}.
+% Ignore unless FMTNAME == tex; then it is like @iftex and @tex,
+% except specified as a normal braced arg, so no newlines to worry about.
+% 
+\def\outfmtnametex{tex}
+%
+\long\def\inlinefmt#1{\doinlinefmt #1,\finish}
+\long\def\doinlinefmt#1,#2,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
+  \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
+}
+% 
+% @inlinefmtifelse{FMTNAME,THEN-TEXT,ELSE-TEXT} expands THEN-TEXT if
+% FMTNAME is tex, else ELSE-TEXT.
+\long\def\inlinefmtifelse#1{\doinlinefmtifelse #1,,,\finish}
+\long\def\doinlinefmtifelse#1,#2,#3,#4,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinefmtname{#1}%
+  \ifx\inlinefmtname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\else \ignorespaces #3\fi
+}
+%
+% For raw, must switch into @tex before parsing the argument, to avoid
+% setting catcodes prematurely.  Doing it this way means that, for
+% example, @inlineraw{html, foo{bar} gets a parse error instead of being
+% ignored.  But this isn't important because if people want a literal
+% *right* brace they would have to use a command anyway, so they may as
+% well use a command to get a left brace too.  We could re-use the
+% delimiter character idea from \verb, but it seems like overkill.
+% 
+\long\def\inlineraw{\tex \doinlineraw}
+\long\def\doinlineraw#1{\doinlinerawtwo #1,\finish}
+\def\doinlinerawtwo#1,#2,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinerawname{#1}%
+  \ifx\inlinerawname\outfmtnametex \ignorespaces #2\fi
+  \endgroup % close group opened by \tex.
+}
+
+% @inlineifset{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is @set.
+%
+\long\def\inlineifset#1{\doinlineifset #1,\finish}
+\long\def\doinlineifset#1,#2,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax
+  \else\ignorespaces#2\fi
+}
+
+% @inlineifclear{VAR, TEXT} expands TEXT if VAR is not @set.
+%
+\long\def\inlineifclear#1{\doinlineifclear #1,\finish}
+\long\def\doinlineifclear#1,#2,\finish{%
+  \def\inlinevarname{#1}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET\inlinevarname\endcsname\relax \ignorespaces#2\fi
+}
+
+
+\message{glyphs,}
+% and logos.
+
+% @@ prints an @, as does @atchar{}.
+\def\@{\char64 }
+\let\atchar=\@
+
+% @{ @} @lbracechar{} @rbracechar{} all generate brace characters.
+\def\lbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char123\else\ensuremath\lbrace\fi}}
+\def\rbracechar{{\ifmonospace\char125\else\ensuremath\rbrace\fi}}
+\let\{=\lbracechar
+\let\}=\rbracechar
+
+% @comma{} to avoid , parsing problems.
+\let\comma = ,
+
+% Accents: @, @dotaccent @ringaccent @ubaraccent @udotaccent
+% Others are defined by plain TeX: @` @' @" @^ @~ @= @u @v @H.
+\let\, = \ptexc
+\let\dotaccent = \ptexdot
+\def\ringaccent#1{{\accent23 #1}}
+\let\tieaccent = \ptext
+\let\ubaraccent = \ptexb
+\let\udotaccent = \d
+
+% Other special characters: @questiondown @exclamdown @ordf @ordm
+% Plain TeX defines: @AA @AE @O @OE @L (plus lowercase versions) @ss.
+\def\questiondown{?`}
+\def\exclamdown{!`}
+\def\ordf{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{a}}}
+\def\ordm{\leavevmode\raise1ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize \underbar{o}}}
+
+% Dotless i and dotless j, used for accents.
+\def\imacro{i}
+\def\jmacro{j}
+\def\dotless#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\imacro \ifmmode\imath \else\ptexi \fi
+  \else\ifx\temp\jmacro \ifmmode\jmath \else\j \fi
+  \else \errmessage{@dotless can be used only with i or j}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% The \TeX{} logo, as in plain, but resetting the spacing so that a
+% period following counts as ending a sentence.  (Idea found in latex.)
+%
+\edef\TeX{\TeX \spacefactor=1000 }
+
+% @LaTeX{} logo.  Not quite the same results as the definition in
+% latex.ltx, since we use a different font for the raised A; it's most
+% convenient for us to use an explicitly smaller font, rather than using
+% the \scriptstyle font (since we don't reset \scriptstyle and
+% \scriptscriptstyle).
+%
+\def\LaTeX{%
+  L\kern-.36em
+  {\setbox0=\hbox{T}%
+   \vbox to \ht0{\hbox{%
+     \ifx\textnominalsize\xwordpt
+       % for 10pt running text, lllsize (8pt) is too small for the A in LaTeX.
+       % Revert to plain's \scriptsize, which is 7pt.
+       \count255=\the\fam $\fam\count255 \scriptstyle A$%
+     \else
+       % For 11pt, we can use our lllsize.
+       \switchtolllsize A%
+     \fi
+     }%
+     \vss
+  }}%
+  \kern-.15em
+  \TeX
+}
+
+% Some math mode symbols.  Define \ensuremath to switch into math mode
+% unless we are already there.  Expansion tricks may not be needed here,
+% but safer, and can't hurt.
+\def\ensuremath{\ifmmode \expandafter\asis \else\expandafter\ensuredmath \fi}
+\def\ensuredmath#1{$\relax#1$}
+%
+\def\bullet{\ensuremath\ptexbullet}
+\def\geq{\ensuremath\ge}
+\def\leq{\ensuremath\le}
+\def\minus{\ensuremath-}
+
+% @dots{} outputs an ellipsis using the current font.
+% We do .5em per period so that it has the same spacing in the cm
+% typewriter fonts as three actual period characters; on the other hand,
+% in other typewriter fonts three periods are wider than 1.5em.  So do
+% whichever is larger.
+%
+\def\dots{%
+  \leavevmode
+  \setbox0=\hbox{...}% get width of three periods
+  \ifdim\wd0 > 1.5em
+    \dimen0 = \wd0
+  \else
+    \dimen0 = 1.5em
+  \fi
+  \hbox to \dimen0{%
+    \hskip 0pt plus.25fil
+    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
+    .\hskip 0pt plus1fil
+    .\hskip 0pt plus.5fil
+  }%
+}
+
+% @enddots{} is an end-of-sentence ellipsis.
+%
+\def\enddots{%
+  \dots
+  \spacefactor=\endofsentencespacefactor
+}
+
+% @point{}, @result{}, @expansion{}, @print{}, @equiv{}.
+%
+% Since these characters are used in examples, they should be an even number of
+% \tt widths. Each \tt character is 1en, so two makes it 1em.
+%
+\def\point{$\star$}
+\def\arrow{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\result{\leavevmode\raise.05ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\Rightarrow$\hfil}}
+\def\expansion{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\mapsto$\hfil}}
+\def\print{\leavevmode\lower.1ex\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\dashv$\hfil}}
+\def\equiv{\leavevmode\hbox to 1em{\hfil$\ptexequiv$\hfil}}
+
+% The @error{} command.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook's \boxit.
+%
+\newbox\errorbox
+%
+{\ttfont \global\dimen0 = 3em}% Width of the box.
+\dimen2 = .55pt % Thickness of rules
+% The text. (`r' is open on the right, `e' somewhat less so on the left.)
+\setbox0 = \hbox{\kern-.75pt \reducedsf \putworderror\kern-1.5pt}
+%
+\setbox\errorbox=\hbox to \dimen0{\hfil
+   \hsize = \dimen0 \advance\hsize by -5.8pt % Space to left+right.
+   \advance\hsize by -2\dimen2 % Rules.
+   \vbox{%
+      \hrule height\dimen2
+      \hbox{\vrule width\dimen2 \kern3pt          % Space to left of text.
+         \vtop{\kern2.4pt \box0 \kern2.4pt}% Space above/below.
+         \kern3pt\vrule width\dimen2}% Space to right.
+      \hrule height\dimen2}
+    \hfil}
+%
+\def\error{\leavevmode\lower.7ex\copy\errorbox}
+
+% @pounds{} is a sterling sign, which Knuth put in the CM italic font.
+%
+\def\pounds{{\it\$}}
+
+% @euro{} comes from a separate font, depending on the current style.
+% We use the free feym* fonts from the eurosym package by Henrik
+% Theiling, which support regular, slanted, bold and bold slanted (and
+% "outlined" (blackboard board, sort of) versions, which we don't need).
+% It is available from http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/fonts/eurosym.
+%
+% Although only regular is the truly official Euro symbol, we ignore
+% that.  The Euro is designed to be slightly taller than the regular
+% font height.
+%
+% feymr - regular
+% feymo - slanted
+% feybr - bold
+% feybo - bold slanted
+%
+% There is no good (free) typewriter version, to my knowledge.
+% A feymr10 euro is ~7.3pt wide, while a normal cmtt10 char is ~5.25pt wide.
+% Hmm.
+%
+% Also doesn't work in math.  Do we need to do math with euro symbols?
+% Hope not.
+%
+%
+\def\euro{{\eurofont e}}
+\def\eurofont{%
+  % We set the font at each command, rather than predefining it in
+  % \textfonts and the other font-switching commands, so that
+  % installations which never need the symbol don't have to have the
+  % font installed.
+  %
+  % There is only one designed size (nominal 10pt), so we always scale
+  % that to the current nominal size.
+  %
+  % By the way, simply using "at 1em" works for cmr10 and the like, but
+  % does not work for cmbx10 and other extended/shrunken fonts.
+  %
+  \def\eurosize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+  %
+  \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
+    % bold:
+    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feybo10}{feybr10} at \eurosize
+  \else
+    % regular:
+    \font\thiseurofont = \ifusingit{feymo10}{feymr10} at \eurosize
+  \fi
+  \thiseurofont
+}
+
+% Glyphs from the EC fonts.  We don't use \let for the aliases, because
+% sometimes we redefine the original macro, and the alias should reflect
+% the redefinition.
+%
+% Use LaTeX names for the Icelandic letters.
+\def\DH{{\ecfont \char"D0}} % Eth
+\def\dh{{\ecfont \char"F0}} % eth
+\def\TH{{\ecfont \char"DE}} % Thorn
+\def\th{{\ecfont \char"FE}} % thorn
+%
+\def\guillemetleft{{\ecfont \char"13}}
+\def\guillemotleft{\guillemetleft}
+\def\guillemetright{{\ecfont \char"14}}
+\def\guillemotright{\guillemetright}
+\def\guilsinglleft{{\ecfont \char"0E}}
+\def\guilsinglright{{\ecfont \char"0F}}
+\def\quotedblbase{{\ecfont \char"12}}
+\def\quotesinglbase{{\ecfont \char"0D}}
+%
+% This positioning is not perfect (see the ogonek LaTeX package), but
+% we have the precomposed glyphs for the most common cases.  We put the
+% tests to use those glyphs in the single \ogonek macro so we have fewer
+% dummy definitions to worry about for index entries, etc.
+%
+% ogonek is also used with other letters in Lithuanian (IOU), but using
+% the precomposed glyphs for those is not so easy since they aren't in
+% the same EC font.
+\def\ogonek#1{{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\macrocharA\Aogonek
+  \else\ifx\temp\macrochara\aogonek
+  \else\ifx\temp\macrocharE\Eogonek
+  \else\ifx\temp\macrochare\eogonek
+  \else
+    \ecfont \setbox0=\hbox{#1}%
+    \ifdim\ht0=1ex\accent"0C #1%
+    \else\ooalign{\unhbox0\crcr\hidewidth\char"0C \hidewidth}%
+    \fi
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi
+  }%
+}
+\def\Aogonek{{\ecfont \char"81}}\def\macrocharA{A}
+\def\aogonek{{\ecfont \char"A1}}\def\macrochara{a}
+\def\Eogonek{{\ecfont \char"86}}\def\macrocharE{E}
+\def\eogonek{{\ecfont \char"A6}}\def\macrochare{e}
+%
+% Use the European Computer Modern fonts (cm-super in outline format)
+% for non-CM glyphs.  That is ec* for regular text and tc* for the text
+% companion symbols (LaTeX TS1 encoding).  Both are part of the ec
+% package and follow the same conventions.
+% 
+\def\ecfont{\etcfont{e}}
+\def\tcfont{\etcfont{t}}
+%
+\def\etcfont#1{%
+  % We can't distinguish serif/sans and italic/slanted, but this
+  % is used for crude hacks anyway (like adding French and German
+  % quotes to documents typeset with CM, where we lose kerning), so
+  % hopefully nobody will notice/care.
+  \edef\ecsize{\csname\curfontsize ecsize\endcsname}%
+  \edef\nominalsize{\csname\curfontsize nominalsize\endcsname}%
+  \ifmonospace
+    % typewriter:
+    \font\thisecfont = #1ctt\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+  \else
+    \ifx\curfontstyle\bfstylename
+      % bold:
+      \font\thisecfont = #1cb\ifusingit{i}{x}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+    \else
+      % regular:
+      \font\thisecfont = #1c\ifusingit{ti}{rm}\ecsize \space at \nominalsize
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \thisecfont
+}
+
+% @registeredsymbol - R in a circle.  The font for the R should really
+% be smaller yet, but lllsize is the best we can do for now.
+% Adapted from the plain.tex definition of \copyright.
+%
+\def\registeredsymbol{%
+  $^{{\ooalign{\hfil\raise.07ex\hbox{\switchtolllsize R}%
+               \hfil\crcr\Orb}}%
+    }$%
+}
+
+% @textdegree - the normal degrees sign.
+%
+\def\textdegree{$^\circ$}
+
+% Laurent Siebenmann reports \Orb undefined with:
+%  Textures 1.7.7 (preloaded format=plain 93.10.14)  (68K)  16 APR 2004 02:38
+% so we'll define it if necessary.
+%
+\ifx\Orb\thisisundefined
+\def\Orb{\mathhexbox20D}
+\fi
+
+% Quotes.
+\chardef\quotedblleft="5C
+\chardef\quotedblright=`\"
+\chardef\quoteleft=`\`
+\chardef\quoteright=`\'
+
+
+\message{page headings,}
+
+\newskip\titlepagetopglue \titlepagetopglue = 1.5in
+\newskip\titlepagebottomglue \titlepagebottomglue = 2pc
+
+% First the title page.  Must do @settitle before @titlepage.
+\newif\ifseenauthor
+\newif\iffinishedtitlepage
+
+% @setcontentsaftertitlepage used to do an implicit @contents or
+% @shortcontents after @end titlepage, but it is now obsolete.
+\def\setcontentsaftertitlepage{%
+  \errmessage{@setcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
+              command; move your @contents command if you want the contents
+              after the title page.}}%
+\def\setshortcontentsaftertitlepage{%
+  \errmessage{@setshortcontentsaftertitlepage has been removed as a Texinfo
+              command; move your @shortcontents and @contents commands if you 
+              want the contents after the title page.}}%
+
+\parseargdef\shorttitlepage{%
+  \begingroup \hbox{}\vskip 1.5in \chaprm \centerline{#1}%
+  \endgroup\page\hbox{}\page}
+
+\envdef\titlepage{%
+  % Open one extra group, as we want to close it in the middle of \Etitlepage.
+  \begingroup
+    \parindent=0pt \textfonts
+    % Leave some space at the very top of the page.
+    \vglue\titlepagetopglue
+    % No rule at page bottom unless we print one at the top with @title.
+    \finishedtitlepagetrue
+    %
+    % Most title ``pages'' are actually two pages long, with space
+    % at the top of the second.  We don't want the ragged left on the second.
+    \let\oldpage = \page
+    \def\page{%
+      \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+	 \finishtitlepage
+      \fi
+      \let\page = \oldpage
+      \page
+      \null
+    }%
+}
+
+\def\Etitlepage{%
+    \iffinishedtitlepage\else
+	\finishtitlepage
+    \fi
+    % It is important to do the page break before ending the group,
+    % because the headline and footline are only empty inside the group.
+    % If we use the new definition of \page, we always get a blank page
+    % after the title page, which we certainly don't want.
+    \oldpage
+  \endgroup
+  %
+  % Need this before the \...aftertitlepage checks so that if they are
+  % in effect the toc pages will come out with page numbers.
+  \HEADINGSon
+}
+
+\def\finishtitlepage{%
+  \vskip4pt \hrule height 2pt width \hsize
+  \vskip\titlepagebottomglue
+  \finishedtitlepagetrue
+}
+
+% Settings used for typesetting titles: no hyphenation, no indentation,
+% don't worry much about spacing, ragged right.  This should be used
+% inside a \vbox, and fonts need to be set appropriately first. \par should
+% be specified before the end of the \vbox, since a vbox is a group.
+% 
+\def\raggedtitlesettings{%
+  \rm
+  \hyphenpenalty=10000
+  \parindent=0pt
+  \tolerance=5000
+  \ptexraggedright
+}
+
+% Macros to be used within @titlepage:
+
+\let\subtitlerm=\rmfont
+\def\subtitlefont{\subtitlerm \normalbaselineskip = 13pt \normalbaselines}
+
+\parseargdef\title{%
+  \checkenv\titlepage
+  \vbox{\titlefonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
+  % print a rule at the page bottom also.
+  \finishedtitlepagefalse
+  \vskip4pt \hrule height 4pt width \hsize \vskip4pt
+}
+
+\parseargdef\subtitle{%
+  \checkenv\titlepage
+  {\subtitlefont \rightline{#1}}%
+}
+
+% @author should come last, but may come many times.
+% It can also be used inside @quotation.
+%
+\parseargdef\author{%
+  \def\temp{\quotation}%
+  \ifx\thisenv\temp
+    \def\quotationauthor{#1}% printed in \Equotation.
+  \else
+    \checkenv\titlepage
+    \ifseenauthor\else \vskip 0pt plus 1filll \seenauthortrue \fi
+    {\secfonts\rm \leftline{#1}}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% Set up page headings and footings.
+
+\let\thispage=\folio
+
+\newtoks\evenheadline    % headline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddheadline     % headline on odd pages
+\newtoks\evenfootline    % footline on even pages
+\newtoks\oddfootline     % footline on odd pages
+
+% Now make \makeheadline and \makefootline in Plain TeX use those variables
+\headline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddheadline
+                            \else \the\evenheadline \fi}}
+\footline={{\textfonts\rm \ifodd\pageno \the\oddfootline
+                            \else \the\evenfootline \fi}\HEADINGShook}
+\let\HEADINGShook=\relax
+
+% Commands to set those variables.
+% For example, this is what  @headings on  does
+% @evenheading @thistitle|@thispage|@thischapter
+% @oddheading @thischapter|@thispage|@thistitle
+% @evenfooting @thisfile||
+% @oddfooting ||@thisfile
+
+
+\def\evenheading{\parsearg\evenheadingxxx}
+\def\evenheadingxxx #1{\evenheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\def\oddheading{\parsearg\oddheadingxxx}
+\def\oddheadingxxx #1{\oddheadingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddheadingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\global\oddheadline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\parseargdef\everyheading{\oddheadingxxx{#1}\evenheadingxxx{#1}}%
+
+\def\evenfooting{\parsearg\evenfootingxxx}
+\def\evenfootingxxx #1{\evenfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\evenfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+\global\evenfootline={\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}}
+
+\def\oddfooting{\parsearg\oddfootingxxx}
+\def\oddfootingxxx #1{\oddfootingyyy #1\|\|\|\|\finish}
+\def\oddfootingyyy #1\|#2\|#3\|#4\finish{%
+  \global\oddfootline = {\rlap{\centerline{#2}}\line{#1\hfil#3}}%
+  %
+  % Leave some space for the footline.  Hopefully ok to assume
+  % @evenfooting will not be used by itself.
+  \global\advance\txipageheight by -12pt
+  \global\advance\vsize by -12pt
+}
+
+\parseargdef\everyfooting{\oddfootingxxx{#1}\evenfootingxxx{#1}}
+
+% @evenheadingmarks top     \thischapter <- chapter at the top of a page
+% @evenheadingmarks bottom  \thischapter <- chapter at the bottom of a page
+%
+% The same set of arguments for:
+%
+% @oddheadingmarks
+% @evenfootingmarks
+% @oddfootingmarks
+% @everyheadingmarks
+% @everyfootingmarks
+
+% These define \getoddheadingmarks, \getevenheadingmarks,
+% \getoddfootingmarks, and \getevenfootingmarks, each to one of
+% \gettopheadingmarks, \getbottomheadingmarks.
+%
+\def\evenheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}}
+\def\oddheadingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{heading}}
+\def\evenfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}}
+\def\oddfootingmarks{\headingmarks{odd}{footing}}
+\parseargdef\everyheadingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{heading}{#1}
+                          \headingmarks{odd}{heading}{#1} }
+\parseargdef\everyfootingmarks{\headingmarks{even}{footing}{#1}
+                          \headingmarks{odd}{footing}{#1} }
+% #1 = even/odd, #2 = heading/footing, #3 = top/bottom.
+\def\headingmarks#1#2#3 {%
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp \csname get#3headingmarks\endcsname
+  \global\expandafter\let\csname get#1#2marks\endcsname \temp
+}
+
+\everyheadingmarks bottom
+\everyfootingmarks bottom
+
+% @headings double      turns headings on for double-sided printing.
+% @headings single      turns headings on for single-sided printing.
+% @headings off         turns them off.
+% @headings on          same as @headings double, retained for compatibility.
+% @headings after       turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings doubleafter turns on double-sided headings after this page.
+% @headings singleafter turns on single-sided headings after this page.
+% By default, they are off at the start of a document,
+% and turned `on' after @end titlepage.
+
+\parseargdef\headings{\csname HEADINGS#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\headingsoff{% non-global headings elimination
+  \evenheadline={\hfil}\evenfootline={\hfil}%
+   \oddheadline={\hfil}\oddfootline={\hfil}%
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSoff{{\globaldefs=1 \headingsoff}} % global setting
+\HEADINGSoff  % it's the default
+
+% When we turn headings on, set the page number to 1.
+% For double-sided printing, put current file name in lower left corner,
+% chapter name on inside top of right hand pages, document
+% title on inside top of left hand pages, and page numbers on outside top
+% edge of all pages.
+\def\HEADINGSdouble{%
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+
+% For single-sided printing, chapter title goes across top left of page,
+% page number on top right.
+\def\HEADINGSsingle{%
+\global\pageno=1
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}
+
+\def\HEADINGSafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSdoublex}
+\let\HEADINGSdoubleafter=\HEADINGSafter
+\def\HEADINGSdoublex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\folio\hfil\thistitle}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+}
+
+\def\HEADINGSsingleafter{\let\HEADINGShook=\HEADINGSsinglex}
+\def\HEADINGSsinglex{%
+\global\evenfootline={\hfil}
+\global\oddfootline={\hfil}
+\global\evenheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
+\global\oddheadline={\line{\thischapterheading\hfil\folio}}
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+}
+
+% Subroutines used in generating headings
+% This produces Day Month Year style of output.
+% Only define if not already defined, in case a txi-??.tex file has set
+% up a different format (e.g., txi-cs.tex does this).
+\ifx\today\thisisundefined
+\def\today{%
+  \number\day\space
+  \ifcase\month
+  \or\putwordMJan\or\putwordMFeb\or\putwordMMar\or\putwordMApr
+  \or\putwordMMay\or\putwordMJun\or\putwordMJul\or\putwordMAug
+  \or\putwordMSep\or\putwordMOct\or\putwordMNov\or\putwordMDec
+  \fi
+  \space\number\year}
+\fi
+
+% @settitle line...  specifies the title of the document, for headings.
+% It generates no output of its own.
+\def\thistitle{\putwordNoTitle}
+\def\settitle{\parsearg{\gdef\thistitle}}
+
+
+\message{tables,}
+% Tables -- @table, @ftable, @vtable, @item(x).
+
+% default indentation of table text
+\newdimen\tableindent \tableindent=.8in
+% default indentation of @itemize and @enumerate text
+\newdimen\itemindent  \itemindent=.3in
+% margin between end of table item and start of table text.
+\newdimen\itemmargin  \itemmargin=.1in
+
+% used internally for \itemindent minus \itemmargin
+\newdimen\itemmax
+
+% Note @table, @ftable, and @vtable define @item, @itemx, etc., with
+% these defs.
+% They also define \itemindex
+% to index the item name in whatever manner is desired (perhaps none).
+
+\newif\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip
+
+\def\itemxpar{\par\ifitemxneedsnegativevskip\nobreak\vskip-\parskip\nobreak\fi}
+
+\def\internalBitem{\smallbreak \parsearg\itemzzz}
+\def\internalBitemx{\itemxpar \parsearg\itemzzz}
+
+\def\itemzzz #1{\begingroup %
+  \advance\hsize by -\rightskip
+  \advance\hsize by -\tableindent
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\itemindicate{#1}}%
+  \itemindex{#1}%
+  \nobreak % This prevents a break before @itemx.
+  %
+  % If the item text does not fit in the space we have, put it on a line
+  % by itself, and do not allow a page break either before or after that
+  % line.  We do not start a paragraph here because then if the next
+  % command is, e.g., @kindex, the whatsit would get put into the
+  % horizontal list on a line by itself, resulting in extra blank space.
+  \ifdim \wd0>\itemmax
+    %
+    % Make this a paragraph so we get the \parskip glue and wrapping,
+    % but leave it ragged-right.
+    \begingroup
+      \advance\leftskip by-\tableindent
+      \advance\hsize by\tableindent
+      \advance\rightskip by0pt plus1fil\relax
+      \leavevmode\unhbox0\par
+    \endgroup
+    %
+    % We're going to be starting a paragraph, but we don't want the
+    % \parskip glue -- logically it's part of the @item we just started.
+    \nobreak \vskip-\parskip
+    %
+    % Stop a page break at the \parskip glue coming up.  However, if
+    % what follows is an environment such as @example, there will be no
+    % \parskip glue; then the negative vskip we just inserted would
+    % cause the example and the item to crash together.  So we use this
+    % bizarre value of 10001 as a signal to \aboveenvbreak to insert
+    % \parskip glue after all.  Section titles are handled this way also.
+    %
+    \penalty 10001
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskipfalse
+  \else
+    % The item text fits into the space.  Start a paragraph, so that the
+    % following text (if any) will end up on the same line.
+    \noindent
+    % Do this with kerns and \unhbox so that if there is a footnote in
+    % the item text, it can migrate to the main vertical list and
+    % eventually be printed.
+    \nobreak\kern-\tableindent
+    \dimen0 = \itemmax  \advance\dimen0 by \itemmargin \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0
+    \unhbox0
+    \nobreak\kern\dimen0
+    \endgroup
+    \itemxneedsnegativevskiptrue
+  \fi
+}
+
+\def\item{\errmessage{@item while not in a list environment}}
+\def\itemx{\errmessage{@itemx while not in a list environment}}
+
+% @table, @ftable, @vtable.
+\envdef\table{%
+  \let\itemindex\gobble
+  \tablecheck{table}%
+}
+\envdef\ftable{%
+  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {fn}{\code{##1}}}%
+  \tablecheck{ftable}%
+}
+\envdef\vtable{%
+  \def\itemindex ##1{\doind {vr}{\code{##1}}}%
+  \tablecheck{vtable}%
+}
+\def\tablecheck#1{%
+  \ifnum \the\catcode`\^^M=\active
+    \endgroup
+    \errmessage{This command won't work in this context; perhaps the problem is
+      that we are \inenvironment\thisenv}%
+    \def\next{\doignore{#1}}%
+  \else
+    \let\next\tablex
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+\def\tablex#1{%
+  \def\itemindicate{#1}%
+  \parsearg\tabley
+}
+\def\tabley#1{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \edef\temp{\noexpand\tablez #1\space\space\space}%
+    \expandafter
+  }\temp \endtablez
+}
+\def\tablez #1 #2 #3 #4\endtablez{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \ifnum 0#1>0 \advance \leftskip by #1\mil \fi
+  \ifnum 0#2>0 \tableindent=#2\mil \fi
+  \ifnum 0#3>0 \advance \rightskip by #3\mil \fi
+  \itemmax=\tableindent
+  \advance \itemmax by -\itemmargin
+  \advance \leftskip by \tableindent
+  \exdentamount=\tableindent
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \parskip = \smallskipamount
+  \ifdim \parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+  \let\item = \internalBitem
+  \let\itemx = \internalBitemx
+}
+\def\Etable{\endgraf\afterenvbreak}
+\let\Eftable\Etable
+\let\Evtable\Etable
+\let\Eitemize\Etable
+\let\Eenumerate\Etable
+
+% This is the counter used by @enumerate, which is really @itemize
+
+\newcount \itemno
+
+\envdef\itemize{\parsearg\doitemize}
+
+\def\doitemize#1{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \itemmax=\itemindent
+  \advance\itemmax by -\itemmargin
+  \advance\leftskip by \itemindent
+  \exdentamount=\itemindent
+  \parindent=0pt
+  \parskip=\smallskipamount
+  \ifdim\parskip=0pt \parskip=2pt \fi
+  %
+  % Try typesetting the item mark so that if the document erroneously says
+  % something like @itemize @samp (intending @table), there's an error
+  % right away at the @itemize.  It's not the best error message in the
+  % world, but it's better than leaving it to the @item.  This means if
+  % the user wants an empty mark, they have to say @w{} not just @w.
+  \def\itemcontents{#1}%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\itemcontents}%
+  %
+  % @itemize with no arg is equivalent to @itemize @bullet.
+  \ifx\itemcontents\empty\def\itemcontents{\bullet}\fi
+  %
+  \let\item=\itemizeitem
+}
+
+% Definition of @item while inside @itemize and @enumerate.
+%
+\def\itemizeitem{%
+  \advance\itemno by 1  % for enumerations
+  {\let\par=\endgraf \smallbreak}% reasonable place to break
+  {%
+   % If the document has an @itemize directly after a section title, a
+   % \nobreak will be last on the list, and \sectionheading will have
+   % done a \vskip-\parskip.  In that case, we don't want to zero
+   % parskip, or the item text will crash with the heading.  On the
+   % other hand, when there is normal text preceding the item (as there
+   % usually is), we do want to zero parskip, or there would be too much
+   % space.  In that case, we won't have a \nobreak before.  At least
+   % that's the theory.
+   \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \parskip=0in \fi
+   \noindent
+   \hbox to 0pt{\hss \itemcontents \kern\itemmargin}%
+   %
+   \ifinner\else
+     \vadjust{\penalty 1200}% not good to break after first line of item.
+   \fi
+   % We can be in inner vertical mode in a footnote, although an
+   % @itemize looks awful there.
+  }%
+  \flushcr
+}
+
+% \splitoff TOKENS\endmark defines \first to be the first token in
+% TOKENS, and \rest to be the remainder.
+%
+\def\splitoff#1#2\endmark{\def\first{#1}\def\rest{#2}}%
+
+% Allow an optional argument of an uppercase letter, lowercase letter,
+% or number, to specify the first label in the enumerated list.  No
+% argument is the same as `1'.
+%
+\envparseargdef\enumerate{\enumeratey #1  \endenumeratey}
+\def\enumeratey #1 #2\endenumeratey{%
+  % If we were given no argument, pretend we were given `1'.
+  \def\thearg{#1}%
+  \ifx\thearg\empty \def\thearg{1}\fi
+  %
+  % Detect if the argument is a single token.  If so, it might be a
+  % letter.  Otherwise, the only valid thing it can be is a number.
+  % (We will always have one token, because of the test we just made.
+  % This is a good thing, since \splitoff doesn't work given nothing at
+  % all -- the first parameter is undelimited.)
+  \expandafter\splitoff\thearg\endmark
+  \ifx\rest\empty
+    % Only one token in the argument.  It could still be anything.
+    % A ``lowercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is nonzero.
+    % An ``uppercase letter'' is one whose \lccode is both nonzero, and
+    %   not equal to itself.
+    % Otherwise, we assume it's a number.
+    %
+    % We need the \relax at the end of the \ifnum lines to stop TeX from
+    % continuing to look for a <number>.
+    %
+    \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=0\relax
+      \numericenumerate % a number (we hope)
+    \else
+      % It's a letter.
+      \ifnum\lccode\expandafter`\thearg=\expandafter`\thearg\relax
+        \lowercaseenumerate % lowercase letter
+      \else
+        \uppercaseenumerate % uppercase letter
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Multiple tokens in the argument.  We hope it's a number.
+    \numericenumerate
+  \fi
+}
+
+% An @enumerate whose labels are integers.  The starting integer is
+% given in \thearg.
+%
+\def\numericenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \thearg
+  \startenumeration{\the\itemno}%
+}
+
+% The starting (lowercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\lowercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more lowercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}%
+    \fi
+    \char\lccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% The starting (uppercase) letter is in \thearg.
+\def\uppercaseenumerate{%
+  \itemno = \expandafter`\thearg
+  \startenumeration{%
+    % Be sure we're not beyond the end of the alphabet.
+    \ifnum\itemno=0
+      \errmessage{No more uppercase letters in @enumerate; get a bigger
+                  alphabet}
+    \fi
+    \char\uccode\itemno
+  }%
+}
+
+% Call \doitemize, adding a period to the first argument and supplying the
+% common last two arguments.  Also subtract one from the initial value in
+% \itemno, since @item increments \itemno.
+%
+\def\startenumeration#1{%
+  \advance\itemno by -1
+  \doitemize{#1.}\flushcr
+}
+
+% @alphaenumerate and @capsenumerate are abbreviations for giving an arg
+% to @enumerate.
+%
+\def\alphaenumerate{\enumerate{a}}
+\def\capsenumerate{\enumerate{A}}
+\def\Ealphaenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+\def\Ecapsenumerate{\Eenumerate}
+
+
+% @multitable macros
+% Amy Hendrickson, 8/18/94, 3/6/96
+%
+% @multitable ... @end multitable will make as many columns as desired.
+% Contents of each column will wrap at width given in preamble.  Width
+% can be specified either with sample text given in a template line,
+% or in percent of \hsize, the current width of text on page.
+
+% Table can continue over pages but will only break between lines.
+
+% To make preamble:
+%
+% Either define widths of columns in terms of percent of \hsize:
+%   @multitable @columnfractions .25 .3 .45
+%   @item ...
+%
+%   Numbers following @columnfractions are the percent of the total
+%   current hsize to be used for each column. You may use as many
+%   columns as desired.
+
+
+% Or use a template:
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item ...
+%   using the widest term desired in each column.
+
+% Each new table line starts with @item, each subsequent new column
+% starts with @tab. Empty columns may be produced by supplying @tab's
+% with nothing between them for as many times as empty columns are needed,
+% ie, @tab@tab@tab will produce two empty columns.
+
+% @item, @tab do not need to be on their own lines, but it will not hurt
+% if they are.
+
+% Sample multitable:
+
+%   @multitable {Column 1 template} {Column 2 template} {Column 3 template}
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff @tab third col
+%   @item
+%   first col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   second col stuff
+%   @tab
+%   third col
+%   @item first col stuff @tab second col stuff
+%   @tab Many paragraphs of text may be used in any column.
+%
+%         They will wrap at the width determined by the template.
+%   @item@tab@tab This will be in third column.
+%   @end multitable
+
+% Default dimensions may be reset by user.
+% @multitableparskip is vertical space between paragraphs in table.
+% @multitableparindent is paragraph indent in table.
+% @multitablecolmargin is horizontal space to be left between columns.
+% @multitablelinespace is space to leave between table items, baseline
+%                                                            to baseline.
+%   0pt means it depends on current normal line spacing.
+%
+\newskip\multitableparskip
+\newskip\multitableparindent
+\newdimen\multitablecolspace
+\newskip\multitablelinespace
+\multitableparskip=0pt
+\multitableparindent=6pt
+\multitablecolspace=12pt
+\multitablelinespace=0pt
+
+% Macros used to set up halign preamble:
+%
+\let\endsetuptable\relax
+\def\xendsetuptable{\endsetuptable}
+\let\columnfractions\relax
+\def\xcolumnfractions{\columnfractions}
+\newif\ifsetpercent
+
+% #1 is the @columnfraction, usually a decimal number like .5, but might
+% be just 1.  We just use it, whatever it is.
+%
+\def\pickupwholefraction#1 {%
+  \global\advance\colcount by 1
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{#1\hsize}%
+  \setuptable
+}
+
+\newcount\colcount
+\def\setuptable#1{%
+  \def\firstarg{#1}%
+  \ifx\firstarg\xendsetuptable
+    \let\go = \relax
+  \else
+    \ifx\firstarg\xcolumnfractions
+      \global\setpercenttrue
+    \else
+      \ifsetpercent
+         \let\go\pickupwholefraction
+      \else
+         \global\advance\colcount by 1
+         \setbox0=\hbox{#1\unskip\space}% Add a normal word space as a
+                   % separator; typically that is always in the input, anyway.
+         \expandafter\xdef\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname{\the\wd0}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifx\go\pickupwholefraction
+      % Put the argument back for the \pickupwholefraction call, so
+      % we'll always have a period there to be parsed.
+      \def\go{\pickupwholefraction#1}%
+    \else
+      \let\go = \setuptable
+    \fi%
+  \fi
+  \go
+}
+
+% multitable-only commands.
+% 
+% @headitem starts a heading row, which we typeset in bold.  Assignments
+% have to be global since we are inside the implicit group of an
+% alignment entry.  \everycr below resets \everytab so we don't have to
+% undo it ourselves.
+\def\headitemfont{\b}% for people to use in the template row; not changeable
+\def\headitem{%
+  \checkenv\multitable
+  \crcr
+  \gdef\headitemcrhook{\nobreak}% attempt to avoid page break after headings
+  \global\everytab={\bf}% can't use \headitemfont since the parsing differs
+  \the\everytab % for the first item
+}%
+%
+% default for tables with no headings.
+\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
+%
+% A \tab used to include \hskip1sp.  But then the space in a template
+% line is not enough.  That is bad.  So let's go back to just `&' until
+% we again encounter the problem the 1sp was intended to solve.
+%					--karl, nathan@acm.org, 20apr99.
+\def\tab{\checkenv\multitable &\the\everytab}%
+
+% @multitable ... @end multitable definitions:
+%
+\newtoks\everytab  % insert after every tab.
+%
+\envdef\multitable{%
+  \vskip\parskip
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  % @item within a multitable starts a normal row.
+  % We use \def instead of \let so that if one of the multitable entries
+  % contains an @itemize, we don't choke on the \item (seen as \crcr aka
+  % \endtemplate) expanding \doitemize.
+  \def\item{\crcr}%
+  %
+  \tolerance=9500
+  \hbadness=9500
+  \setmultitablespacing
+  \parskip=\multitableparskip
+  \parindent=\multitableparindent
+  \overfullrule=0pt
+  \global\colcount=0
+  %
+  \everycr = {%
+    \noalign{%
+      \global\everytab={}% Reset from possible headitem.
+      \global\colcount=0 % Reset the column counter.
+      %
+      % Check for saved footnotes, etc.:
+      \checkinserts
+      %
+      % Perhaps a \nobreak, then reset:
+      \headitemcrhook
+      \global\let\headitemcrhook=\relax
+    }%
+  }%
+  %
+  \parsearg\domultitable
+}
+\def\domultitable#1{%
+  % To parse everything between @multitable and @item:
+  \setuptable#1 \endsetuptable
+  %
+  % This preamble sets up a generic column definition, which will
+  % be used as many times as user calls for columns.
+  % \vtop will set a single line and will also let text wrap and
+  % continue for many paragraphs if desired.
+  \halign\bgroup &%
+    \global\advance\colcount by 1
+    \multistrut
+    \vtop{%
+      % Use the current \colcount to find the correct column width:
+      \hsize=\expandafter\csname col\the\colcount\endcsname
+      %
+      % In order to keep entries from bumping into each other
+      % we will add a \leftskip of \multitablecolspace to all columns after
+      % the first one.
+      %
+      % If a template has been used, we will add \multitablecolspace
+      % to the width of each template entry.
+      %
+      % If the user has set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize we will
+      % use that dimension as the width of the column, and the \leftskip
+      % will keep entries from bumping into each other.  Table will start at
+      % left margin and final column will justify at right margin.
+      %
+      % Make sure we don't inherit \rightskip from the outer environment.
+      \rightskip=0pt
+      \ifnum\colcount=1
+	% The first column will be indented with the surrounding text.
+	\advance\hsize by\leftskip
+      \else
+	\ifsetpercent \else
+	  % If user has not set preamble in terms of percent of \hsize
+	  % we will advance \hsize by \multitablecolspace.
+	  \advance\hsize by \multitablecolspace
+	\fi
+       % In either case we will make \leftskip=\multitablecolspace:
+      \leftskip=\multitablecolspace
+      \fi
+      % Ignoring space at the beginning and end avoids an occasional spurious
+      % blank line, when TeX decides to break the line at the space before the
+      % box from the multistrut, so the strut ends up on a line by itself.
+      % For example:
+      % @multitable @columnfractions .11 .89
+      % @item @code{#}
+      % @tab Legal holiday which is valid in major parts of the whole country.
+      % Is automatically provided with highlighting sequences respectively
+      % marking characters.
+      \noindent\ignorespaces##\unskip\multistrut
+    }\cr
+}
+\def\Emultitable{%
+  \crcr
+  \egroup % end the \halign
+  \global\setpercentfalse
+}
+
+\def\setmultitablespacing{%
+  \def\multistrut{\strut}% just use the standard line spacing
+  %
+  % Compute \multitablelinespace (if not defined by user) for use in
+  % \multitableparskip calculation.  We used define \multistrut based on
+  % this, but (ironically) that caused the spacing to be off.
+  % See bug-texinfo report from Werner Lemberg, 31 Oct 2004 12:52:20 +0100.
+\ifdim\multitablelinespace=0pt
+\setbox0=\vbox{X}\global\multitablelinespace=\the\baselineskip
+\global\advance\multitablelinespace by-\ht0
+\fi
+% Test to see if parskip is larger than space between lines of
+% table. If not, do nothing.
+%        If so, set to same dimension as multitablelinespace.
+\ifdim\multitableparskip>\multitablelinespace
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      % than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi%
+\ifdim\multitableparskip=0pt
+\global\multitableparskip=\multitablelinespace
+\global\advance\multitableparskip-7pt % to keep parskip somewhat smaller
+                                      % than skip between lines in the table.
+\fi}
+
+
+\message{conditionals,}
+
+% @iftex, @ifnotdocbook, @ifnothtml, @ifnotinfo, @ifnotplaintext,
+% @ifnotxml always succeed.  They currently do nothing; we don't
+% attempt to check whether the conditionals are properly nested.  But we
+% have to remember that they are conditionals, so that @end doesn't
+% attempt to close an environment group.
+%
+\def\makecond#1{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname #1\endcsname = \relax
+  \expandafter\let\csname iscond.#1\endcsname = 1
+}
+\makecond{iftex}
+\makecond{ifnotdocbook}
+\makecond{ifnothtml}
+\makecond{ifnotinfo}
+\makecond{ifnotplaintext}
+\makecond{ifnotxml}
+
+% Ignore @ignore, @ifhtml, @ifinfo, and the like.
+%
+\def\direntry{\doignore{direntry}}
+\def\documentdescription{\doignore{documentdescription}}
+\def\docbook{\doignore{docbook}}
+\def\html{\doignore{html}}
+\def\ifdocbook{\doignore{ifdocbook}}
+\def\ifhtml{\doignore{ifhtml}}
+\def\ifinfo{\doignore{ifinfo}}
+\def\ifnottex{\doignore{ifnottex}}
+\def\ifplaintext{\doignore{ifplaintext}}
+\def\ifxml{\doignore{ifxml}}
+\def\ignore{\doignore{ignore}}
+\def\menu{\doignore{menu}}
+\def\xml{\doignore{xml}}
+
+% Ignore text until a line `@end #1', keeping track of nested conditionals.
+%
+% A count to remember the depth of nesting.
+\newcount\doignorecount
+
+\def\doignore#1{\begingroup
+  % Scan in ``verbatim'' mode:
+  \obeylines
+  \catcode`\@ = \other
+  \catcode`\{ = \other
+  \catcode`\} = \other
+  %
+  % Make sure that spaces turn into tokens that match what \doignoretext wants.
+  \spaceisspace
+  %
+  % Count number of #1's that we've seen.
+  \doignorecount = 0
+  %
+  % Swallow text until we reach the matching `@end #1'.
+  \dodoignore{#1}%
+}
+
+{ \catcode`_=11 % We want to use \_STOP_ which cannot appear in texinfo source.
+  \obeylines %
+  %
+  \gdef\dodoignore#1{%
+    % #1 contains the command name as a string, e.g., `ifinfo'.
+    %
+    % Define a command to find the next `@end #1'.
+    \long\def\doignoretext##1^^M@end #1{%
+      \doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1\_STOP_}%
+    %
+    % And this command to find another #1 command, at the beginning of a
+    % line.  (Otherwise, we would consider a line `@c @ifset', for
+    % example, to count as an @ifset for nesting.)
+    \long\def\doignoretextyyy##1^^M@#1##2\_STOP_{\doignoreyyy{##2}\_STOP_}%
+    %
+    % And now expand that command.
+    \doignoretext ^^M%
+  }%
+}
+
+\def\doignoreyyy#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty			% Nothing found.
+    \let\next\doignoretextzzz
+  \else					% Found a nested condition, ...
+    \advance\doignorecount by 1
+    \let\next\doignoretextyyy		% ..., look for another.
+    % If we're here, #1 ends with ^^M\ifinfo (for example).
+  \fi
+  \next #1% the token \_STOP_ is present just after this macro.
+}
+
+% We have to swallow the remaining "\_STOP_".
+%
+\def\doignoretextzzz#1{%
+  \ifnum\doignorecount = 0	% We have just found the outermost @end.
+    \let\next\enddoignore
+  \else				% Still inside a nested condition.
+    \advance\doignorecount by -1
+    \let\next\doignoretext      % Look for the next @end.
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+% Finish off ignored text.
+{ \obeylines%
+  % Ignore anything after the last `@end #1'; this matters in verbatim
+  % environments, where otherwise the newline after an ignored conditional
+  % would result in a blank line in the output.
+  \gdef\enddoignore#1^^M{\endgroup\ignorespaces}%
+}
+
+
+% @set VAR sets the variable VAR to an empty value.
+% @set VAR REST-OF-LINE sets VAR to the value REST-OF-LINE.
+%
+% Since we want to separate VAR from REST-OF-LINE (which might be
+% empty), we can't just use \parsearg; we have to insert a space of our
+% own to delimit the rest of the line, and then take it out again if we
+% didn't need it.
+% We rely on the fact that \parsearg sets \catcode`\ =10.
+%
+\parseargdef\set{\setyyy#1 \endsetyyy}
+\def\setyyy#1 #2\endsetyyy{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \def\temp{#2}%
+    \edef\next{\gdef\makecsname{SET#1}}%
+    \ifx\temp\empty
+      \next{}%
+    \else
+      \setzzz#2\endsetzzz
+    \fi
+  }%
+}
+% Remove the trailing space \setxxx inserted.
+\def\setzzz#1 \endsetzzz{\next{#1}}
+
+% @clear VAR clears (i.e., unsets) the variable VAR.
+%
+\parseargdef\clear{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \global\expandafter\let\csname SET#1\endcsname=\relax
+  }%
+}
+
+% @value{foo} gets the text saved in variable foo.
+\def\value{\begingroup\makevalueexpandable\valuexxx}
+\def\valuexxx#1{\expandablevalue{#1}\endgroup}
+{
+  \catcode`\-=\active \catcode`\_=\active
+  %
+  \gdef\makevalueexpandable{%
+    \let\value = \expandablevalue
+    % We don't want these characters active, ...
+    \catcode`\-=\other \catcode`\_=\other
+    % ..., but we might end up with active ones in the argument if
+    % we're called from @code, as @code{@value{foo-bar_}}, though.
+    % So \let them to their normal equivalents.
+    \let-\normaldash \let_\normalunderscore
+  }
+}
+
+% We have this subroutine so that we can handle at least some @value's
+% properly in indexes (we call \makevalueexpandable in \indexdummies).
+% The command has to be fully expandable (if the variable is set), since
+% the result winds up in the index file.  This means that if the
+% variable's value contains other Texinfo commands, it's almost certain
+% it will fail (although perhaps we could fix that with sufficient work
+% to do a one-level expansion on the result, instead of complete).
+% 
+% Unfortunately, this has the consequence that when _ is in the *value*
+% of an @set, it does not print properly in the roman fonts (get the cmr
+% dot accent at position 126 instead).  No fix comes to mind, and it's
+% been this way since 2003 or earlier, so just ignore it.
+% 
+\def\expandablevalue#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    {[No value for ``#1'']}%
+    \message{Variable `#1', used in @value, is not set.}%
+  \else
+    \csname SET#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Like \expandablevalue, but completely expandable (the \message in the
+% definition above operates at the execution level of TeX).  Used when
+% writing to auxiliary files, due to the expansion that \write does.
+% If flag is undefined, pass through an unexpanded @value command: maybe it 
+% will be set by the time it is read back in.
+%
+% NB flag names containing - or _ may not work here.
+\def\dummyvalue#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    \noexpand\value{#1}%
+  \else
+    \csname SET#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Used for @value's in index entries to form the sort key: expand the @value
+% if possible, otherwise sort late.
+\def\indexnofontsvalue#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#1\endcsname\relax
+    ZZZZZZZ
+  \else
+    \csname SET#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @ifset VAR ... @end ifset reads the `...' iff VAR has been defined
+% with @set.
+% 
+% To get the special treatment we need for `@end ifset,' we call
+% \makecond and then redefine.
+%
+\makecond{ifset}
+\def\ifset{\parsearg{\doifset{\let\next=\ifsetfail}}}
+\def\doifset#1#2{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \let\next=\empty
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SET#2\endcsname\relax
+      #1% If not set, redefine \next.
+    \fi
+    \expandafter
+  }\next
+}
+\def\ifsetfail{\doignore{ifset}}
+
+% @ifclear VAR ... @end executes the `...' iff VAR has never been
+% defined with @set, or has been undefined with @clear.
+%
+% The `\else' inside the `\doifset' parameter is a trick to reuse the
+% above code: if the variable is not set, do nothing, if it is set,
+% then redefine \next to \ifclearfail.
+%
+\makecond{ifclear}
+\def\ifclear{\parsearg{\doifset{\else \let\next=\ifclearfail}}}
+\def\ifclearfail{\doignore{ifclear}}
+
+% @ifcommandisdefined CMD ... @end executes the `...' if CMD (written
+% without the @) is in fact defined.  We can only feasibly check at the
+% TeX level, so something like `mathcode' is going to considered
+% defined even though it is not a Texinfo command.
+% 
+\makecond{ifcommanddefined}
+\def\ifcommanddefined{\parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\let\next=\ifcmddefinedfail}}}
+%
+\def\doifcmddefined#1#2{{%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \let\next=\empty
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname #2\endcsname\relax
+      #1% If not defined, \let\next as above.
+    \fi
+    \expandafter
+  }\next
+}
+\def\ifcmddefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommanddefined}}
+
+% @ifcommandnotdefined CMD ... handled similar to @ifclear above.
+\makecond{ifcommandnotdefined}
+\def\ifcommandnotdefined{%
+  \parsearg{\doifcmddefined{\else \let\next=\ifcmdnotdefinedfail}}}
+\def\ifcmdnotdefinedfail{\doignore{ifcommandnotdefined}}
+
+% Set the `txicommandconditionals' variable, so documents have a way to
+% test if the @ifcommand...defined conditionals are available.
+\set txicommandconditionals
+
+% @dircategory CATEGORY  -- specify a category of the dir file
+% which this file should belong to.  Ignore this in TeX.
+\let\dircategory=\comment
+
+% @defininfoenclose.
+\let\definfoenclose=\comment
+
+
+\message{indexing,}
+% Index generation facilities
+
+% Define \newwrite to be identical to plain tex's \newwrite
+% except not \outer, so it can be used within macros and \if's.
+\edef\newwrite{\makecsname{ptexnewwrite}}
+
+% \newindex {foo} defines an index named IX.
+% It automatically defines \IXindex such that
+% \IXindex ...rest of line... puts an entry in the index IX.
+% It also defines \IXindfile to be the number of the output channel for
+% the file that accumulates this index.  The file's extension is IX.
+% The name of an index should be no more than 2 characters long
+% for the sake of vms.
+%
+\def\newindex#1{%
+  \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%     % Define @#1index
+    \noexpand\doindex{#1}}
+}
+
+% @defindex foo  ==  \newindex{foo}
+%
+\def\defindex{\parsearg\newindex}
+
+% Define @defcodeindex, like @defindex except put all entries in @code.
+%
+\def\defcodeindex{\parsearg\newcodeindex}
+%
+\def\newcodeindex#1{%
+  \expandafter\chardef\csname#1indfile\endcsname=0
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#1index\endcsname{%
+    \noexpand\docodeindex{#1}}%
+}
+
+% The default indices:
+\newindex{cp}%      concepts,
+\newcodeindex{fn}%  functions,
+\newcodeindex{vr}%  variables,
+\newcodeindex{tp}%  types,
+\newcodeindex{ky}%  keys
+\newcodeindex{pg}%  and programs.
+
+
+% @synindex foo bar    makes index foo feed into index bar.
+% Do this instead of @defindex foo if you don't want it as a separate index.
+%
+% @syncodeindex foo bar   similar, but put all entries made for index foo
+% inside @code.
+%
+\def\synindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\doindex{#1}{#2}}
+\def\syncodeindex#1 #2 {\dosynindex\docodeindex{#1}{#2}}
+
+% #1 is \doindex or \docodeindex, #2 the index getting redefined (foo),
+% #3 the target index (bar).
+\def\dosynindex#1#2#3{%
+  \requireopenindexfile{#3}%
+  % redefine \fooindfile:
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\temp\expandafter=\csname#3indfile\endcsname
+  \expandafter\let\csname#2indfile\endcsname=\temp
+  % redefine \fooindex:
+  \expandafter\xdef\csname#2index\endcsname{\noexpand#1{#3}}%
+}
+
+% Define \doindex, the driver for all index macros.
+% Argument #1 is generated by the calling \fooindex macro,
+% and it is the two-letter name of the index.
+
+\def\doindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\doindexxxx}
+\def\doindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{#1}}
+
+% like the previous two, but they put @code around the argument.
+\def\docodeindex#1{\edef\indexname{#1}\parsearg\docodeindexxxx}
+\def\docodeindexxxx #1{\doind{\indexname}{\code{#1}}}
+
+
+% Used when writing an index entry out to an index file to prevent
+% expansion of Texinfo commands that can appear in an index entry.
+%
+\def\indexdummies{%
+  \escapechar = `\\     % use backslash in output files.
+  \definedummyletter\@%
+  \definedummyletter\ %
+  %
+  % For texindex which always views { and } as separators.
+  \def\{{\lbracechar{}}%
+  \def\}{\rbracechar{}}%
+  %
+  % Do the redefinitions.
+  \definedummies
+}
+
+% Used for the aux and toc files, where @ is the escape character.
+%
+\def\atdummies{%
+  \definedummyletter\@%
+  \definedummyletter\ %
+  \definedummyletter\{%
+  \definedummyletter\}%
+  %
+  % Do the redefinitions.
+  \definedummies
+  \otherbackslash
+}
+
+% \definedummyword defines \#1 as \string\#1\space, thus effectively
+% preventing its expansion.  This is used only for control words,
+% not control letters, because the \space would be incorrect for
+% control characters, but is needed to separate the control word
+% from whatever follows.
+%
+% These can be used both for control words that take an argument and
+% those that do not.  If it is followed by {arg} in the input, then
+% that will dutifully get written to the index (or wherever).
+%
+% For control letters, we have \definedummyletter, which omits the
+% space.
+%
+\def\definedummyword  #1{\def#1{\string#1\space}}%
+\def\definedummyletter#1{\def#1{\string#1}}%
+\let\definedummyaccent\definedummyletter
+
+% Called from \indexdummies and \atdummies, to effectively prevent
+% the expansion of commands.
+%
+\def\definedummies{%
+  %
+  \let\commondummyword\definedummyword
+  \let\commondummyletter\definedummyletter
+  \let\commondummyaccent\definedummyaccent
+  \commondummiesnofonts
+  %
+  \definedummyletter\_%
+  \definedummyletter\-%
+  %
+  % Non-English letters.
+  \definedummyword\AA
+  \definedummyword\AE
+  \definedummyword\DH
+  \definedummyword\L
+  \definedummyword\O
+  \definedummyword\OE
+  \definedummyword\TH
+  \definedummyword\aa
+  \definedummyword\ae
+  \definedummyword\dh
+  \definedummyword\exclamdown
+  \definedummyword\l
+  \definedummyword\o
+  \definedummyword\oe
+  \definedummyword\ordf
+  \definedummyword\ordm
+  \definedummyword\questiondown
+  \definedummyword\ss
+  \definedummyword\th
+  %
+  % Although these internal commands shouldn't show up, sometimes they do.
+  \definedummyword\bf
+  \definedummyword\gtr
+  \definedummyword\hat
+  \definedummyword\less
+  \definedummyword\sf
+  \definedummyword\sl
+  \definedummyword\tclose
+  \definedummyword\tt
+  %
+  \definedummyword\LaTeX
+  \definedummyword\TeX
+  %
+  % Assorted special characters.
+  \definedummyword\atchar
+  \definedummyword\arrow
+  \definedummyword\bullet
+  \definedummyword\comma
+  \definedummyword\copyright
+  \definedummyword\registeredsymbol
+  \definedummyword\dots
+  \definedummyword\enddots
+  \definedummyword\entrybreak
+  \definedummyword\equiv
+  \definedummyword\error
+  \definedummyword\euro
+  \definedummyword\expansion
+  \definedummyword\geq
+  \definedummyword\guillemetleft
+  \definedummyword\guillemetright
+  \definedummyword\guilsinglleft
+  \definedummyword\guilsinglright
+  \definedummyword\lbracechar
+  \definedummyword\leq
+  \definedummyword\mathopsup
+  \definedummyword\minus
+  \definedummyword\ogonek
+  \definedummyword\pounds
+  \definedummyword\point
+  \definedummyword\print
+  \definedummyword\quotedblbase
+  \definedummyword\quotedblleft
+  \definedummyword\quotedblright
+  \definedummyword\quoteleft
+  \definedummyword\quoteright
+  \definedummyword\quotesinglbase
+  \definedummyword\rbracechar
+  \definedummyword\result
+  \definedummyword\sub
+  \definedummyword\sup
+  \definedummyword\textdegree
+  %
+  % We want to disable all macros so that they are not expanded by \write.
+  \macrolist
+  \let\value\dummyvalue
+  %
+  \normalturnoffactive
+}
+
+% \commondummiesnofonts: common to \definedummies and \indexnofonts.
+% Define \commondummyletter, \commondummyaccent and \commondummyword before
+% using.  Used for accents, font commands, and various control letters.
+%
+\def\commondummiesnofonts{%
+  % Control letters and accents.
+  \commondummyletter\!%
+  \commondummyaccent\"%
+  \commondummyaccent\'%
+  \commondummyletter\*%
+  \commondummyaccent\,%
+  \commondummyletter\.%
+  \commondummyletter\/%
+  \commondummyletter\:%
+  \commondummyaccent\=%
+  \commondummyletter\?%
+  \commondummyaccent\^%
+  \commondummyaccent\`%
+  \commondummyaccent\~%
+  \commondummyword\u
+  \commondummyword\v
+  \commondummyword\H
+  \commondummyword\dotaccent
+  \commondummyword\ogonek
+  \commondummyword\ringaccent
+  \commondummyword\tieaccent
+  \commondummyword\ubaraccent
+  \commondummyword\udotaccent
+  \commondummyword\dotless
+  %
+  % Texinfo font commands.
+  \commondummyword\b
+  \commondummyword\i
+  \commondummyword\r
+  \commondummyword\sansserif
+  \commondummyword\sc
+  \commondummyword\slanted
+  \commondummyword\t
+  %
+  % Commands that take arguments.
+  \commondummyword\abbr
+  \commondummyword\acronym
+  \commondummyword\anchor
+  \commondummyword\cite
+  \commondummyword\code
+  \commondummyword\command
+  \commondummyword\dfn
+  \commondummyword\dmn
+  \commondummyword\email
+  \commondummyword\emph
+  \commondummyword\env
+  \commondummyword\file
+  \commondummyword\image
+  \commondummyword\indicateurl
+  \commondummyword\inforef
+  \commondummyword\kbd
+  \commondummyword\key
+  \commondummyword\math
+  \commondummyword\option
+  \commondummyword\pxref
+  \commondummyword\ref
+  \commondummyword\samp
+  \commondummyword\strong
+  \commondummyword\tie
+  \commondummyword\U
+  \commondummyword\uref
+  \commondummyword\url
+  \commondummyword\var
+  \commondummyword\verb
+  \commondummyword\w
+  \commondummyword\xref
+}
+
+% For testing: output @{ and @} in index sort strings as \{ and \}.
+\newif\ifusebracesinindexes
+
+\let\indexlbrace\relax
+\let\indexrbrace\relax
+
+{\catcode`\@=0
+\catcode`\\=13
+  @gdef@backslashdisappear{@def\{}}
+}
+
+{
+\catcode`\<=13
+\catcode`\-=13
+\catcode`\`=13
+  \gdef\indexnonalnumdisappear{%
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlquoteignore\endcsname\relax\else
+      % @set txiindexlquoteignore makes us ignore left quotes in the sort term.
+      % (Introduced for FSFS 2nd ed.)
+      \let`=\empty
+    \fi
+    %
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexbackslashignore\endcsname\relax\else
+      \backslashdisappear
+    \fi
+    %
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexhyphenignore\endcsname\relax\else
+      \def-{}%
+    \fi
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexlessthanignore\endcsname\relax\else
+      \def<{}%
+    \fi
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxiindexatsignignore\endcsname\relax\else
+      \def\@{}%
+    \fi
+  }
+
+  \gdef\indexnonalnumreappear{%
+    \useindexbackslash
+    \let-\normaldash
+    \let<\normalless
+    \def\@{@}%
+  }
+}
+
+
+% \indexnofonts is used when outputting the strings to sort the index
+% by, and when constructing control sequence names.  It eliminates all
+% control sequences and just writes whatever the best ASCII sort string
+% would be for a given command (usually its argument).
+%
+\def\indexnofonts{%
+  % Accent commands should become @asis.
+  \def\commondummyaccent##1{\let##1\asis}%
+  % We can just ignore other control letters.
+  \def\commondummyletter##1{\let##1\empty}%
+  % All control words become @asis by default; overrides below.
+  \let\commondummyword\commondummyaccent
+  \commondummiesnofonts
+  %
+  % Don't no-op \tt, since it isn't a user-level command
+  % and is used in the definitions of the active chars like <, >, |, etc.
+  % Likewise with the other plain tex font commands.
+  %\let\tt=\asis
+  %
+  \def\ { }%
+  \def\@{@}%
+  \def\_{\normalunderscore}%
+  \def\-{}% @- shouldn't affect sorting
+  %
+  \uccode`\1=`\{ \uppercase{\def\{{1}}%
+  \uccode`\1=`\} \uppercase{\def\}{1}}%
+  \let\lbracechar\{%
+  \let\rbracechar\}%
+  %
+  % Non-English letters.
+  \def\AA{AA}%
+  \def\AE{AE}%
+  \def\DH{DZZ}%
+  \def\L{L}%
+  \def\OE{OE}%
+  \def\O{O}%
+  \def\TH{TH}%
+  \def\aa{aa}%
+  \def\ae{ae}%
+  \def\dh{dzz}%
+  \def\exclamdown{!}%
+  \def\l{l}%
+  \def\oe{oe}%
+  \def\ordf{a}%
+  \def\ordm{o}%
+  \def\o{o}%
+  \def\questiondown{?}%
+  \def\ss{ss}%
+  \def\th{th}%
+  %
+  \def\LaTeX{LaTeX}%
+  \def\TeX{TeX}%
+  %
+  % Assorted special characters.  \defglyph gives the control sequence a
+  % definition that removes the {} that follows its use.
+  \defglyph\atchar{@}%
+  \defglyph\arrow{->}%
+  \defglyph\bullet{bullet}%
+  \defglyph\comma{,}%
+  \defglyph\copyright{copyright}%
+  \defglyph\dots{...}%
+  \defglyph\enddots{...}%
+  \defglyph\equiv{==}%
+  \defglyph\error{error}%
+  \defglyph\euro{euro}%
+  \defglyph\expansion{==>}%
+  \defglyph\geq{>=}%
+  \defglyph\guillemetleft{<<}%
+  \defglyph\guillemetright{>>}%
+  \defglyph\guilsinglleft{<}%
+  \defglyph\guilsinglright{>}%
+  \defglyph\leq{<=}%
+  \defglyph\lbracechar{\{}%
+  \defglyph\minus{-}%
+  \defglyph\point{.}%
+  \defglyph\pounds{pounds}%
+  \defglyph\print{-|}%
+  \defglyph\quotedblbase{"}%
+  \defglyph\quotedblleft{"}%
+  \defglyph\quotedblright{"}%
+  \defglyph\quoteleft{`}%
+  \defglyph\quoteright{'}%
+  \defglyph\quotesinglbase{,}%
+  \defglyph\rbracechar{\}}%
+  \defglyph\registeredsymbol{R}%
+  \defglyph\result{=>}%
+  \defglyph\textdegree{o}%
+  %
+  % We need to get rid of all macros, leaving only the arguments (if present).
+  % Of course this is not nearly correct, but it is the best we can do for now.
+  % makeinfo does not expand macros in the argument to @deffn, which ends up
+  % writing an index entry, and texindex isn't prepared for an index sort entry
+  % that starts with \.
+  %
+  % Since macro invocations are followed by braces, we can just redefine them
+  % to take a single TeX argument.  The case of a macro invocation that
+  % goes to end-of-line is not handled.
+  %
+  \macrolist
+  \let\value\indexnofontsvalue
+}
+\def\defglyph#1#2{\def#1##1{#2}} % see above
+
+
+
+
+\let\SETmarginindex=\relax % put index entries in margin (undocumented)?
+
+% Most index entries go through here, but \dosubind is the general case.
+% #1 is the index name, #2 is the entry text.
+\def\doind#1#2{\dosubind{#1}{#2}{}}
+
+% There is also \dosubind {index}{topic}{subtopic}
+% which makes an entry in a two-level index such as the operation index.
+% TODO: Two-level index?  Operation index?
+
+% Workhorse for all indexes.
+% #1 is name of index, #2 is stuff to put there, #3 is subentry --
+% empty if called from \doind, as we usually are (the main exception
+% is with most defuns, which call us directly).
+%
+\def\dosubind#1#2#3{%
+  \iflinks
+  {%
+    \requireopenindexfile{#1}%
+    % Store the main index entry text (including the third arg).
+    \toks0 = {#2}%
+    % If third arg is present, precede it with a space.
+    \def\thirdarg{#3}%
+    \ifx\thirdarg\empty \else
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\the\toks0 \space #3}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \edef\writeto{\csname#1indfile\endcsname}%
+    %
+    \safewhatsit\dosubindwrite
+  }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Check if an index file has been opened, and if not, open it.
+\def\requireopenindexfile#1{%
+\ifnum\csname #1indfile\endcsname=0
+  \expandafter\newwrite \csname#1indfile\endcsname
+  \edef\suffix{#1}%
+  % A .fls suffix would conflict with the file extension for the output
+  % of -recorder, so use .f1s instead.
+  \ifx\suffix\indexisfl\def\suffix{f1}\fi
+  % Open the file
+  \immediate\openout\csname#1indfile\endcsname \jobname.\suffix
+  % Using \immediate above here prevents an object entering into the current 
+  % box, which could confound checks such as those in \safewhatsit for
+  % preceding skips.
+  \typeout{Writing index file \jobname.\suffix}%
+\fi}
+\def\indexisfl{fl}
+
+% Output \ as {\indexbackslash}, because \ is an escape character in
+% the index files.
+\let\indexbackslash=\relax
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=\active
+  @gdef@useindexbackslash{@def\{{@indexbackslash}}}
+}
+
+% Definition for writing index entry text.
+\def\sortas#1{\ignorespaces}%
+
+% Definition for writing index entry sort key.  Should occur at the at
+% the beginning of the index entry, like
+%     @cindex @sortas{september} \september
+% The \ignorespaces takes care of following space, but there's no way
+% to remove space before it.
+{
+\catcode`\-=13
+\gdef\indexwritesortas{%
+  \begingroup
+  \indexnonalnumreappear
+  \indexwritesortasxxx}
+\gdef\indexwritesortasxxx#1{%
+  \xdef\indexsortkey{#1}\endgroup}
+}
+
+
+% Write the entry in \toks0 to the index file.
+%
+\def\dosubindwrite{%
+  % Put the index entry in the margin if desired.
+  \ifx\SETmarginindex\relax\else
+    \insert\margin{\hbox{\vrule height8pt depth3pt width0pt \the\toks0}}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Remember, we are within a group.
+  \indexdummies % Must do this here, since \bf, etc expand at this stage
+  \useindexbackslash % \indexbackslash isn't defined now so it will be output 
+                     % as is; and it will print as backslash.
+  % The braces around \indexbrace are recognized by texindex.
+  %
+  % Get the string to sort by, by processing the index entry with all
+  % font commands turned off.
+  {\indexnofonts
+   \def\lbracechar{{\indexlbrace}}%
+   \def\rbracechar{{\indexrbrace}}%
+   \let\{=\lbracechar
+   \let\}=\rbracechar
+   \indexnonalnumdisappear
+   \xdef\indexsortkey{}%
+   \let\sortas=\indexwritesortas
+   \edef\temp{\the\toks0}%
+   \setbox\dummybox = \hbox{\temp}% Make sure to execute any \sortas
+   \ifx\indexsortkey\empty
+     \xdef\indexsortkey{\temp}%
+     \ifx\indexsortkey\empty\xdef\indexsortkey{ }\fi
+   \fi
+  }%
+  %
+  % Set up the complete index entry, with both the sort key and
+  % the original text, including any font commands.  We write
+  % three arguments to \entry to the .?? file (four in the
+  % subentry case), texindex reduces to two when writing the .??s
+  % sorted result.
+  \edef\temp{%
+    \write\writeto{%
+      \string\entry{\indexsortkey}{\noexpand\folio}{\the\toks0}}%
+  }%
+  \temp
+}
+\newbox\dummybox % used above
+
+% Take care of unwanted page breaks/skips around a whatsit:
+%
+% If a skip is the last thing on the list now, preserve it
+% by backing up by \lastskip, doing the \write, then inserting
+% the skip again.  Otherwise, the whatsit generated by the
+% \write or \pdfdest will make \lastskip zero.  The result is that
+% sequences like this:
+% @end defun
+% @tindex whatever
+% @defun ...
+% will have extra space inserted, because the \medbreak in the
+% start of the @defun won't see the skip inserted by the @end of
+% the previous defun.
+%
+% But don't do any of this if we're not in vertical mode.  We
+% don't want to do a \vskip and prematurely end a paragraph.
+%
+% Avoid page breaks due to these extra skips, too.
+%
+% But wait, there is a catch there:
+% We'll have to check whether \lastskip is zero skip.  \ifdim is not
+% sufficient for this purpose, as it ignores stretch and shrink parts
+% of the skip.  The only way seems to be to check the textual
+% representation of the skip.
+%
+% The following is almost like \def\zeroskipmacro{0.0pt} except that
+% the ``p'' and ``t'' characters have catcode \other, not 11 (letter).
+%
+\edef\zeroskipmacro{\expandafter\the\csname z@skip\endcsname}
+%
+\newskip\whatsitskip
+\newcount\whatsitpenalty
+%
+% ..., ready, GO:
+%
+\def\safewhatsit#1{\ifhmode
+  #1%
+ \else
+  % \lastskip and \lastpenalty cannot both be nonzero simultaneously.
+  \whatsitskip = \lastskip
+  \edef\lastskipmacro{\the\lastskip}%
+  \whatsitpenalty = \lastpenalty
+  %
+  % If \lastskip is nonzero, that means the last item was a
+  % skip.  And since a skip is discardable, that means this
+  % -\whatsitskip glue we're inserting is preceded by a
+  % non-discardable item, therefore it is not a potential
+  % breakpoint, therefore no \nobreak needed.
+  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+  \else
+    \vskip-\whatsitskip
+  \fi
+  %
+  #1%
+  %
+  \ifx\lastskipmacro\zeroskipmacro
+    % If \lastskip was zero, perhaps the last item was a penalty, and
+    % perhaps it was >=10000, e.g., a \nobreak.  In that case, we want
+    % to re-insert the same penalty (values >10000 are used for various
+    % signals); since we just inserted a non-discardable item, any
+    % following glue (such as a \parskip) would be a breakpoint.  For example:
+    %   @deffn deffn-whatever
+    %   @vindex index-whatever
+    %   Description.
+    % would allow a break between the index-whatever whatsit
+    % and the "Description." paragraph.
+    \ifnum\whatsitpenalty>9999 \penalty\whatsitpenalty \fi
+  \else
+    % On the other hand, if we had a nonzero \lastskip,
+    % this make-up glue would be preceded by a non-discardable item
+    % (the whatsit from the \write), so we must insert a \nobreak.
+    \nobreak\vskip\whatsitskip
+  \fi
+\fi}
+
+% The index entry written in the file actually looks like
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}
+% or
+%  \entry {sortstring}{page}{topic}{subtopic}
+% The texindex program reads in these files and writes files
+% containing these kinds of lines:
+%  \initial {c}
+%     before the first topic whose initial is c
+%  \entry {topic}{pagelist}
+%     for a topic that is used without subtopics
+%  \primary {topic}
+%     for the beginning of a topic that is used with subtopics
+%  \secondary {subtopic}{pagelist}
+%     for each subtopic.
+
+% Define the user-accessible indexing commands
+% @findex, @vindex, @kindex, @cindex.
+
+\def\findex {\fnindex}
+\def\kindex {\kyindex}
+\def\cindex {\cpindex}
+\def\vindex {\vrindex}
+\def\tindex {\tpindex}
+\def\pindex {\pgindex}
+
+\def\cindexsub {\begingroup\obeylines\cindexsub}
+{\obeylines %
+\gdef\cindexsub "#1" #2^^M{\endgroup %
+\dosubind{cp}{#2}{#1}}}
+
+% Define the macros used in formatting output of the sorted index material.
+
+% @printindex causes a particular index (the ??s file) to get printed.
+% It does not print any chapter heading (usually an @unnumbered).
+%
+\parseargdef\printindex{\begingroup
+  \dobreak \chapheadingskip{10000}%
+  %
+  \smallfonts \rm
+  \tolerance = 9500
+  \plainfrenchspacing
+  \everypar = {}% don't want the \kern\-parindent from indentation suppression.
+  %
+  % See if the index file exists and is nonempty.
+  % Change catcode of @ here so that if the index file contains
+  % \initial {@}
+  % as its first line, TeX doesn't complain about mismatched braces
+  % (because it thinks @} is a control sequence).
+  \catcode`\@ = 12
+  % See comment in \requireopenindexfile.
+  \def\indexname{#1}\ifx\indexname\indexisfl\def\indexname{f1}\fi
+  \openin 1 \jobname.\indexname s
+  \ifeof 1
+    % \enddoublecolumns gets confused if there is no text in the index,
+    % and it loses the chapter title and the aux file entries for the
+    % index.  The easiest way to prevent this problem is to make sure
+    % there is some text.
+    \putwordIndexNonexistent
+    \typeout{No file \jobname.\indexname s.}%
+  \else
+    \catcode`\\ = 0
+    %
+    % If the index file exists but is empty, then \openin leaves \ifeof
+    % false.  We have to make TeX try to read something from the file, so
+    % it can discover if there is anything in it.
+    \read 1 to \thisline
+    \ifeof 1
+      \putwordIndexIsEmpty
+    \else
+      % Index files are almost Texinfo source, but we use \ as the escape
+      % character.  It would be better to use @, but that's too big a change
+      % to make right now.
+      \def\indexbackslash{\ttbackslash}%
+      \let\indexlbrace\{   % Likewise, set these sequences for braces
+      \let\indexrbrace\}   % used in the sort key.
+      \begindoublecolumns
+      \let\dotheinsertentrybox\dotheinsertentryboxwithpenalty
+      %
+      % Read input from the index file line by line.
+      \loopdo
+        \ifeof1 \else
+          \read 1 to \nextline
+        \fi
+        %
+        \indexinputprocessing
+        \thisline
+        %
+        \ifeof1\else
+        \let\thisline\nextline
+      \repeat
+      %%
+      \enddoublecolumns
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+\endgroup}
+\def\loopdo#1\repeat{\def\body{#1}\loopdoxxx}
+\def\loopdoxxx{\let\next=\relax\body\let\next=\loopdoxxx\fi\next}
+
+\def\indexinputprocessing{%
+  \ifeof1
+    \let\firsttoken\relax
+  \else
+    \edef\act{\gdef\noexpand\firsttoken{\getfirsttoken\nextline}}%
+    \act
+  \fi
+}
+\def\getfirsttoken#1{\expandafter\getfirsttokenx#1\endfirsttoken}
+\long\def\getfirsttokenx#1#2\endfirsttoken{\noexpand#1}
+
+
+% These macros are used by the sorted index file itself.
+% Change them to control the appearance of the index.
+
+{\catcode`\/=13 \catcode`\-=13 \catcode`\^=13 \catcode`\~=13 \catcode`\_=13
+\catcode`\|=13 \catcode`\<=13 \catcode`\>=13 \catcode`\+=13 \catcode`\"=13
+\catcode`\$=3
+\gdef\initialglyphs{%
+  % Some changes for non-alphabetic characters.  Using the glyphs from the
+  % math fonts looks more consistent than the typewriter font used elsewhere
+  % for these characters.
+  \def\indexbackslash{\math{\backslash}}%
+  \let\\=\indexbackslash
+  %
+  % Can't get bold backslash so don't use bold forward slash
+  \catcode`\/=13
+  \def/{{\secrmnotbold \normalslash}}%
+  \def-{{\normaldash\normaldash}}% en dash `--'
+  \def^{{\chapbf \normalcaret}}%
+  \def~{{\chapbf \normaltilde}}%
+  \def\_{%
+     \leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }%
+  \def|{$\vert$}%
+  \def<{$\less$}%
+  \def>{$\gtr$}%
+  \def+{$\normalplus$}%
+}}
+
+\def\initial{%
+  \bgroup
+  \initialglyphs
+  \initialx
+}
+
+\def\initialx#1{%
+  % Remove any glue we may have, we'll be inserting our own.
+  \removelastskip
+  %
+  % We like breaks before the index initials, so insert a bonus.
+  % The glue before the bonus allows a little bit of space at the
+  % bottom of a column to reduce an increase in inter-line spacing.
+  \nobreak
+  \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
+  \penalty -300 
+  \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
+  %
+  % Typeset the initial.  Making this add up to a whole number of
+  % baselineskips increases the chance of the dots lining up from column
+  % to column.  It still won't often be perfect, because of the stretch
+  % we need before each entry, but it's better.
+  %
+  % No shrink because it confuses \balancecolumns.
+  \vskip 1.67\baselineskip plus 1\baselineskip
+  \leftline{\secfonts \kern-0.05em \secbf #1}%
+  % \secfonts is inside the argument of \leftline so that the change of
+  % \baselineskip will not affect any glue inserted before the vbox that
+  % \leftline creates.
+  % Do our best not to break after the initial.
+  \nobreak
+  \vskip .33\baselineskip plus .1\baselineskip
+  \egroup % \initialglyphs
+}
+
+\newdimen\entryrightmargin
+\entryrightmargin=0pt
+
+% \entry typesets a paragraph consisting of the text (#1), dot leaders, and
+% then page number (#2) flushed to the right margin.  It is used for index
+% and table of contents entries.  The paragraph is indented by \leftskip.
+%
+\def\entry{%
+  \begingroup
+    %
+    % For pdfTeX and XeTeX.
+    % The redefinition of \domark stops marks being added in \pdflink to 
+    % preserve coloured links across page boundaries.  Otherwise the marks
+    % would get in the way of \lastbox in \insertentrybox.
+    \let\domark\relax
+    %
+    % Start a new paragraph if necessary, so our assignments below can't
+    % affect previous text.
+    \par
+    %
+    % No extra space above this paragraph.
+    \parskip = 0in
+    %
+    % When reading the text of entry, convert explicit line breaks
+    % from @* into spaces.  The user might give these in long section
+    % titles, for instance.
+    \def\*{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
+    \def\entrybreak{\hfil\break}% An undocumented command
+    %
+    % Swallow the left brace of the text (first parameter):
+    \afterassignment\doentry
+    \let\temp =
+}
+\def\entrybreak{\unskip\space\ignorespaces}%
+\def\doentry{%
+    % Save the text of the entry
+    \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup
+    \bgroup % Instead of the swallowed brace.
+      \noindent
+      \aftergroup\finishentry
+      % And now comes the text of the entry.
+      % Not absorbing as a macro argument reduces the chance of problems
+      % with catcodes occurring.
+}
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\finishentry#1{%
+    \egroup % end box A
+    \dimen@ = \wd\boxA % Length of text of entry
+    \global\setbox\boxA=\hbox\bgroup\unhbox\boxA
+    % #1 is the page number.
+    %
+    % Get the width of the page numbers, and only use
+    % leaders if they are present.
+    \global\setbox\boxB = \hbox{#1}%
+    \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
+      \null\nobreak\hfill\ %
+    \else
+      %
+      \null\nobreak\indexdotfill % Have leaders before the page number.
+      %
+      \ifpdf
+        \pdfgettoks#1.%
+        \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA
+      \else
+        \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+          \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable #1%
+        \else
+          \pdfgettoks#1.%
+          \hskip\skip\thinshrinkable\the\toksA
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \egroup % end \boxA
+    \ifdim\wd\boxB = 0pt
+      \global\setbox\entrybox=\vbox{\unhbox\boxA}%
+    \else
+    \global\setbox\entrybox=\vbox\bgroup
+      % We want the text of the entries to be aligned to the left, and the
+      % page numbers to be aligned to the right.
+      %
+      \parindent = 0pt
+      \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fil
+      \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus -1fill
+      \rightskip = 0pt plus -1fil
+      \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fill
+      % Cause last line, which could consist of page numbers on their own
+      % if the list of page numbers is long, to be aligned to the right.
+      \parfillskip=0pt plus -1fill
+      %
+      \advance\rightskip by \entryrightmargin
+      % Determine how far we can stretch into the margin.
+      % This allows, e.g., "Appendix H  GNU Free Documentation License" to
+      % fit on one line in @letterpaper format.
+      \ifdim\entryrightmargin>2.1em
+        \dimen@i=2.1em
+      \else
+        \dimen@i=0em
+      \fi
+      \advance \parfillskip by 0pt minus 1\dimen@i
+      %
+      \dimen@ii = \hsize
+      \advance\dimen@ii by -1\leftskip
+      \advance\dimen@ii by -1\entryrightmargin
+      \advance\dimen@ii by 1\dimen@i
+      \ifdim\wd\boxA > \dimen@ii % If the entry doesn't fit in one line
+      \ifdim\dimen@ > 0.8\dimen@ii   % due to long index text
+        % Try to split the text roughly evenly.  \dimen@ will be the length of 
+        % the first line.
+        \dimen@ = 0.7\dimen@
+        \dimen@ii = \hsize
+        \ifnum\dimen@>\dimen@ii
+          % If the entry is too long (for example, if it needs more than
+          % two lines), use all the space in the first line.
+          \dimen@ = \dimen@ii
+        \fi
+        \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill % ragged right
+        \advance \dimen@ by 1\rightskip
+        \parshape = 2 0pt \dimen@ 0em \dimen@ii
+        % Ideally we'd add a finite glue at the end of the first line only,
+        % instead of using \parshape with explicit line lengths, but TeX
+        % doesn't seem to provide a way to do such a thing.
+        %
+        % Indent all lines but the first one.
+        \advance\leftskip by 1em
+        \advance\parindent by -1em
+      \fi\fi
+      \indent % start paragraph
+      \unhbox\boxA
+      %
+      % Do not prefer a separate line ending with a hyphen to fewer lines.
+      \finalhyphendemerits = 0
+      %
+      % Word spacing - no stretch
+      \spaceskip=\fontdimen2\font minus \fontdimen4\font
+      %
+      \linepenalty=1000  % Discourage line breaks.
+      \hyphenpenalty=5000  % Discourage hyphenation.
+      %
+      \par % format the paragraph
+    \egroup % The \vbox
+    \fi
+  \endgroup
+  \dotheinsertentrybox
+}}
+
+\newskip\thinshrinkable
+\skip\thinshrinkable=.15em minus .15em
+
+\newbox\entrybox
+\def\insertentrybox{%
+  \ourunvbox\entrybox
+}
+
+% default definition
+\let\dotheinsertentrybox\insertentrybox
+
+% Use \lastbox to take apart vbox box by box, and add each sub-box
+% to the current vertical list.
+\def\ourunvbox#1{%
+\bgroup % for local binding of \delayedbox
+  % Remove the last box from box #1
+  \global\setbox#1=\vbox{%
+    \unvbox#1%
+    \unskip % remove any glue
+    \unpenalty
+    \global\setbox\interbox=\lastbox
+  }%
+  \setbox\delayedbox=\box\interbox
+  \ifdim\ht#1=0pt\else
+    \ourunvbox#1 % Repeat on what's left of the box
+    \nobreak
+  \fi
+  \box\delayedbox
+\egroup
+}
+\newbox\delayedbox
+\newbox\interbox
+
+% Used from \printindex.  \firsttoken should be the first token
+% after the \entry.  If it's not another \entry, we are at the last
+% line of a group of index entries, so insert a penalty to discourage
+% widowed index entries.
+\def\dotheinsertentryboxwithpenalty{%
+  \ifx\firsttoken\isentry
+  \else
+    \penalty 9000
+  \fi
+  \insertentrybox
+}
+\def\isentry{\entry}%
+
+% Like plain.tex's \dotfill, except uses up at least 1 em.
+% The filll stretch here overpowers both the fil and fill stretch to push
+% the page number to the right.
+\def\indexdotfill{\cleaders
+  \hbox{$\mathsurround=0pt \mkern1.5mu.\mkern1.5mu$}\hskip 1em plus 1filll}
+
+
+\def\primary #1{\line{#1\hfil}}
+
+\newskip\secondaryindent \secondaryindent=0.5cm
+\def\secondary#1#2{{%
+  \parfillskip=0in
+  \parskip=0in
+  \hangindent=1in
+  \hangafter=1
+  \noindent\hskip\secondaryindent\hbox{#1}\indexdotfill
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+  \else
+    \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+      #2
+    \else
+      \pdfgettoks#2.\ \the\toksA % The page number ends the paragraph.
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \par
+}}
+
+% Define two-column mode, which we use to typeset indexes.
+% Adapted from the TeXbook, page 416, which is to say,
+% the manmac.tex format used to print the TeXbook itself.
+\catcode`\@=11  % private names
+
+\newbox\partialpage
+\newdimen\doublecolumnhsize
+
+% Use inside an output routine to save \topmark and \firstmark
+\def\savemarks{%
+  \global\savedtopmark=\expandafter{\topmark }%
+  \global\savedfirstmark=\expandafter{\firstmark }%
+}
+\newtoks\savedtopmark
+\newtoks\savedfirstmark
+
+% Set \topmark and \firstmark for next time \output runs.
+% Can't be run from withinside \output (because any material
+% added while an output routine is active, including 
+% penalties, is saved for after it finishes).  The page so far
+% should be empty, otherwise what's on it will be thrown away.
+\def\restoremarks{%
+  \mark{\the\savedtopmark}%
+  \bgroup\output = {%
+    \setbox\dummybox=\box\PAGE
+  }abc\eject\egroup
+  % "abc" because output routine doesn't fire for a completely empty page.
+  \mark{\the\savedfirstmark}%
+}
+
+\def\begindoublecolumns{\begingroup % ended by \enddoublecolumns
+  % If not much space left on page, start a new page.
+  \ifdim\pagetotal>0.8\vsize\vfill\eject\fi
+  %
+  % Grab any single-column material above us.
+  \output = {%
+    %
+    % Here is a possibility not foreseen in manmac: if we accumulate a
+    % whole lot of material, we might end up calling this \output
+    % routine twice in a row (see the doublecol-lose test, which is
+    % essentially a couple of indexes with @setchapternewpage off).  In
+    % that case we just ship out what is in \partialpage with the normal
+    % output routine.  Generally, \partialpage will be empty when this
+    % runs and this will be a no-op.  See the indexspread.tex test case.
+    \ifvoid\partialpage \else
+      \onepageout{\pagecontents\partialpage}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    \global\setbox\partialpage = \vbox{%
+      % Unvbox the main output page.
+      \unvbox\PAGE
+      \kern-\topskip \kern\baselineskip
+    }%
+    \savemarks
+  }%
+  \eject % run that output routine to set \partialpage
+  \restoremarks
+  %
+  % We recover the two marks that the last output routine saved in order
+  % to propagate the information in marks added around a chapter heading,
+  % which could be otherwise be lost by the time the final page is output.
+  %
+  %
+  % Use the double-column output routine for subsequent pages.
+  \output = {\doublecolumnout}%
+  %
+  % Change the page size parameters.  We could do this once outside this
+  % routine, in each of @smallbook, @afourpaper, and the default 8.5x11
+  % format, but then we repeat the same computation.  Repeating a couple
+  % of assignments once per index is clearly meaningless for the
+  % execution time, so we may as well do it in one place.
+  %
+  % First we halve the line length, less a little for the gutter between
+  % the columns.  We compute the gutter based on the line length, so it
+  % changes automatically with the paper format.  The magic constant
+  % below is chosen so that the gutter has the same value (well, +-<1pt)
+  % as it did when we hard-coded it.
+  %
+  % We put the result in a separate register, \doublecolumhsize, so we
+  % can restore it in \pagesofar, after \hsize itself has (potentially)
+  % been clobbered.
+  %
+  \doublecolumnhsize = \hsize
+    \advance\doublecolumnhsize by -.04154\hsize
+    \divide\doublecolumnhsize by 2
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  %
+  % Double the \vsize as well.
+  \advance\vsize by -\ht\partialpage
+  \vsize = 2\vsize
+  %
+  % For the benefit of balancing columns
+  \advance\baselineskip by 0pt plus 0.5pt
+}
+
+% The double-column output routine for all double-column pages except
+% the last, which is done by \balancecolumns.
+%
+\def\doublecolumnout{%
+  %
+  \splittopskip=\topskip \splitmaxdepth=\maxdepth
+  % Get the available space for the double columns -- the normal
+  % (undoubled) page height minus any material left over from the
+  % previous page.
+  \dimen@ = \vsize
+  \divide\dimen@ by 2
+  %
+  % box0 will be the left-hand column, box2 the right.
+  \setbox0=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@ \setbox2=\vsplit\PAGE to\dimen@
+  \global\advance\vsize by 2\ht\partialpage
+  \onepageout\pagesofar
+  \unvbox\PAGE
+  \penalty\outputpenalty
+}
+%
+% Re-output the contents of the output page -- any previous material,
+% followed by the two boxes we just split, in box0 and box2.
+\def\pagesofar{%
+  \unvbox\partialpage
+  %
+  \hsize = \doublecolumnhsize
+  \wd0=\hsize \wd2=\hsize
+  \hbox to\txipagewidth{\box0\hfil\box2}%
+}
+
+
+% Finished with with double columns.
+\def\enddoublecolumns{%
+  % The following penalty ensures that the page builder is exercised
+  % _before_ we change the output routine.  This is necessary in the
+  % following situation:
+  %
+  % The last section of the index consists only of a single entry.
+  % Before this section, \pagetotal is less than \pagegoal, so no
+  % break occurs before the last section starts.  However, the last
+  % section, consisting of \initial and the single \entry, does not
+  % fit on the page and has to be broken off.  Without the following
+  % penalty the page builder will not be exercised until \eject
+  % below, and by that time we'll already have changed the output
+  % routine to the \balancecolumns version, so the next-to-last
+  % double-column page will be processed with \balancecolumns, which
+  % is wrong:  The two columns will go to the main vertical list, with
+  % the broken-off section in the recent contributions.  As soon as
+  % the output routine finishes, TeX starts reconsidering the page
+  % break.  The two columns and the broken-off section both fit on the
+  % page, because the two columns now take up only half of the page
+  % goal.  When TeX sees \eject from below which follows the final
+  % section, it invokes the new output routine that we've set after
+  % \balancecolumns below; \onepageout will try to fit the two columns
+  % and the final section into the vbox of \txipageheight (see
+  % \pagebody), causing an overfull box.
+  %
+  % Note that glue won't work here, because glue does not exercise the
+  % page builder, unlike penalties (see The TeXbook, pp. 280-281).
+  \penalty0
+  %
+  \output = {%
+    % Split the last of the double-column material.
+    \savemarks
+    \balancecolumns
+  }%
+  \eject % call the \output just set
+  \ifdim\pagetotal=0pt
+    % Having called \balancecolumns once, we do not
+    % want to call it again.  Therefore, reset \output to its normal
+    % definition right away.
+    \global\output = {\onepageout{\pagecontents\PAGE}}%
+    %
+    \endgroup % started in \begindoublecolumns
+    \restoremarks
+    % Leave the double-column material on the current page, no automatic
+    % page break.
+    \box\balancedcolumns
+    %
+    % \pagegoal was set to the doubled \vsize above, since we restarted
+    % the current page.  We're now back to normal single-column
+    % typesetting, so reset \pagegoal to the normal \vsize.
+    \global\vsize = \txipageheight %
+    \pagegoal = \txipageheight %
+  \else
+    % We had some left-over material.  This might happen when \doublecolumnout
+    % is called in \balancecolumns.  Try again.
+    \expandafter\enddoublecolumns
+  \fi
+}
+\newbox\balancedcolumns
+\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{shouldnt see this}%
+%
+% Only called for the last of the double column material.  \doublecolumnout 
+% does the others.
+\def\balancecolumns{%
+  \setbox0 = \vbox{\unvbox\PAGE}% like \box255 but more efficient, see p.120.
+  \dimen@ = \ht0
+  \advance\dimen@ by \topskip
+  \advance\dimen@ by-\baselineskip
+  \ifdim\dimen@<5\baselineskip
+    % Don't split a short final column in two.
+    \setbox2=\vbox{}%
+    \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
+  \else
+    \divide\dimen@ by 2 % target to split to
+    \dimen@ii = \dimen@
+    \splittopskip = \topskip
+    % Loop until left column is at least as high as the right column.
+    {%
+      \vbadness = 10000
+      \loop
+        \global\setbox3 = \copy0
+        \global\setbox1 = \vsplit3 to \dimen@
+      \ifdim\ht1<\ht3
+        \global\advance\dimen@ by 1pt
+      \repeat
+    }%
+    % Now the left column is in box 1, and the right column in box 3.
+    %
+    % Check whether the left column has come out higher than the page itself.  
+    % (Note that we have doubled \vsize for the double columns, so
+    % the actual height of the page is 0.5\vsize).
+    \ifdim2\ht1>\vsize
+      % It appears that we have been called upon to balance too much material.
+      % Output some of it with \doublecolumnout, leaving the rest on the page.
+      \setbox\PAGE=\box0
+      \doublecolumnout
+    \else
+      % Compare the heights of the two columns.
+      \ifdim4\ht1>5\ht3
+        % Column heights are too different, so don't make their bottoms
+        % flush with each other.
+        \setbox2=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox3\vfill}%
+        \setbox0=\vbox to \ht1 {\unvbox1\vfill}%
+      \else
+        % Make column bottoms flush with each other.
+        \setbox2=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox3\unskip}%
+        \setbox0=\vbox to\ht1{\unvbox1\unskip}%
+      \fi
+      \global\setbox\balancedcolumns=\vbox{\pagesofar}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+}
+\catcode`\@ = \other
+
+
+\message{sectioning,}
+% Chapters, sections, etc.
+
+% Let's start with @part.
+\outer\parseargdef\part{\partzzz{#1}}
+\def\partzzz#1{%
+  \chapoddpage
+  \null
+  \vskip.3\vsize  % move it down on the page a bit
+  \begingroup
+    \noindent \titlefonts\rm #1\par % the text
+    \let\lastnode=\empty      % no node to associate with
+    \writetocentry{part}{#1}{}% but put it in the toc
+    \headingsoff              % no headline or footline on the part page
+    % This outputs a mark at the end of the page that clears \thischapter
+    % and \thissection, as is done in \startcontents.
+    \let\pchapsepmacro\relax
+    \chapmacro{}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
+    \chapoddpage
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% \unnumberedno is an oxymoron.  But we count the unnumbered
+% sections so that we can refer to them unambiguously in the pdf
+% outlines by their "section number".  We avoid collisions with chapter
+% numbers by starting them at 10000.  (If a document ever has 10000
+% chapters, we're in trouble anyway, I'm sure.)
+\newcount\unnumberedno \unnumberedno = 10000
+\newcount\chapno
+\newcount\secno        \secno=0
+\newcount\subsecno     \subsecno=0
+\newcount\subsubsecno  \subsubsecno=0
+
+% This counter is funny since it counts through charcodes of letters A, B, ...
+\newcount\appendixno  \appendixno = `\@
+%
+% \def\appendixletter{\char\the\appendixno}
+% We do the following ugly conditional instead of the above simple
+% construct for the sake of pdftex, which needs the actual
+% letter in the expansion, not just typeset.
+%
+\def\appendixletter{%
+  \ifnum\appendixno=`A A%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`B B%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`C C%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`D D%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`E E%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`F F%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`G G%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`H H%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`I I%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`J J%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`K K%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`L L%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`M M%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`N N%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`O O%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`P P%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Q Q%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`R R%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`S S%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`T T%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`U U%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`V V%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`W W%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`X X%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Y Y%
+  \else\ifnum\appendixno=`Z Z%
+  % The \the is necessary, despite appearances, because \appendixletter is
+  % expanded while writing the .toc file.  \char\appendixno is not
+  % expandable, thus it is written literally, thus all appendixes come out
+  % with the same letter (or @) in the toc without it.
+  \else\char\the\appendixno
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi}
+
+% Each @chapter defines these (using marks) as the number+name, number
+% and name of the chapter.  Page headings and footings can use
+% these.  @section does likewise.
+\def\thischapter{}
+\def\thischapternum{}
+\def\thischaptername{}
+\def\thissection{}
+\def\thissectionnum{}
+\def\thissectionname{}
+
+\newcount\absseclevel % used to calculate proper heading level
+\newcount\secbase\secbase=0 % @raisesections/@lowersections modify this count
+
+% @raisesections: treat @section as chapter, @subsection as section, etc.
+\def\raisesections{\global\advance\secbase by -1}
+\let\up=\raisesections % original BFox name
+
+% @lowersections: treat @chapter as section, @section as subsection, etc.
+\def\lowersections{\global\advance\secbase by 1}
+\let\down=\lowersections % original BFox name
+
+% we only have subsub.
+\chardef\maxseclevel = 3
+%
+% A numbered section within an unnumbered changes to unnumbered too.
+% To achieve this, remember the "biggest" unnum. sec. we are currently in:
+\chardef\unnlevel = \maxseclevel
+%
+% Trace whether the current chapter is an appendix or not:
+% \chapheadtype is "N" or "A", unnumbered chapters are ignored.
+\def\chapheadtype{N}
+
+% Choose a heading macro
+% #1 is heading type
+% #2 is heading level
+% #3 is text for heading
+\def\genhead#1#2#3{%
+  % Compute the abs. sec. level:
+  \absseclevel=#2
+  \advance\absseclevel by \secbase
+  % Make sure \absseclevel doesn't fall outside the range:
+  \ifnum \absseclevel < 0
+    \absseclevel = 0
+  \else
+    \ifnum \absseclevel > 3
+      \absseclevel = 3
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  % The heading type:
+  \def\headtype{#1}%
+  \if \headtype U%
+    \ifnum \absseclevel < \unnlevel
+      \chardef\unnlevel = \absseclevel
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % Check for appendix sections:
+    \ifnum \absseclevel = 0
+      \edef\chapheadtype{\headtype}%
+    \else
+      \if \headtype A\if \chapheadtype N%
+	\errmessage{@appendix... within a non-appendix chapter}%
+      \fi\fi
+    \fi
+    % Check for numbered within unnumbered:
+    \ifnum \absseclevel > \unnlevel
+      \def\headtype{U}%
+    \else
+      \chardef\unnlevel = 3
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  % Now print the heading:
+  \if \headtype U%
+    \ifcase\absseclevel
+	\unnumberedzzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedseczzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+    \or \unnumberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \if \headtype A%
+      \ifcase\absseclevel
+	  \appendixzzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsectionzzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \or \appendixsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \ifcase\absseclevel
+	  \chapterzzz{#3}%
+      \or \seczzz{#3}%
+      \or \numberedsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \or \numberedsubsubseczzz{#3}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% an interface:
+\def\numhead{\genhead N}
+\def\apphead{\genhead A}
+\def\unnmhead{\genhead U}
+
+% @chapter, @appendix, @unnumbered.  Increment top-level counter, reset
+% all lower-level sectioning counters to zero.
+%
+% Also set \chaplevelprefix, which we prepend to @float sequence numbers
+% (e.g., figures), q.v.  By default (before any chapter), that is empty.
+\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+%
+\outer\parseargdef\chapter{\numhead0{#1}} % normally numhead0 calls chapterzzz
+\def\chapterzzz#1{%
+  % section resetting is \global in case the chapter is in a group, such
+  % as an @include file.
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\chapno by 1
+  %
+  % Used for \float.
+  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\the\chapno.}%
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  % \putwordChapter can contain complex things in translations.
+  \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordChapter}%
+  \message{\the\toks0 \space \the\chapno}%
+  %
+  % Write the actual heading.
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno}%
+  %
+  % So @section and the like are numbered underneath this chapter.
+  \global\let\section = \numberedsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+\outer\parseargdef\appendix{\apphead0{#1}} % normally calls appendixzzz
+%
+\def\appendixzzz#1{%
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\appendixno by 1
+  \gdef\chaplevelprefix{\appendixletter.}%
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  % \putwordAppendix can contain complex things in translations.
+  \toks0=\expandafter{\putwordAppendix}%
+  \message{\the\toks0 \space \appendixletter}%
+  %
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter}%
+  %
+  \global\let\section = \appendixsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \appendixsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \appendixsubsubsec
+}
+
+% normally unnmhead0 calls unnumberedzzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumbered{\unnmhead0{#1}}
+\def\unnumberedzzz#1{%
+  \global\secno=0 \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0
+    \global\advance\unnumberedno by 1
+  %
+  % Since an unnumbered has no number, no prefix for figures.
+  \global\let\chaplevelprefix = \empty
+  \resetallfloatnos
+  %
+  % This used to be simply \message{#1}, but TeX fully expands the
+  % argument to \message.  Therefore, if #1 contained @-commands, TeX
+  % expanded them.  For example, in `@unnumbered The @cite{Book}', TeX
+  % expanded @cite (which turns out to cause errors because \cite is meant
+  % to be executed, not expanded).
+  %
+  % Anyway, we don't want the fully-expanded definition of @cite to appear
+  % as a result of the \message, we just want `@cite' itself.  We use
+  % \the<toks register> to achieve this: TeX expands \the<toks> only once,
+  % simply yielding the contents of <toks register>.  (We also do this for
+  % the toc entries.)
+  \toks0 = {#1}%
+  \message{(\the\toks0)}%
+  %
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno}%
+  %
+  \global\let\section = \unnumberedsec
+  \global\let\subsection = \unnumberedsubsec
+  \global\let\subsubsection = \unnumberedsubsubsec
+}
+
+% @centerchap is like @unnumbered, but the heading is centered.
+\outer\parseargdef\centerchap{%
+  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \centerparameters
+  \unnmhead0{#1}%
+  \let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+}
+
+% @top is like @unnumbered.
+\let\top\unnumbered
+
+% Sections.
+% 
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsec{\numhead1{#1}} % normally calls seczzz
+\def\seczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}%
+}
+
+% normally calls appendixsectionzzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsection{\apphead1{#1}}
+\def\appendixsectionzzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yappendix}{\appendixletter.\the\secno}%
+}
+\let\appendixsec\appendixsection
+
+% normally calls unnumberedseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsec{\unnmhead1{#1}}
+\def\unnumberedseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsecno=0 \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\secno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Ynothing}{\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno}%
+}
+
+% Subsections.
+% 
+% normally calls numberedsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsec{\numhead2{#1}}
+\def\numberedsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynumbered}{\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+% normally calls appendixsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsec{\apphead2{#1}}
+\def\appendixsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yappendix}%
+                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+% normally calls unnumberedsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsec{\unnmhead2{#1}}
+\def\unnumberedsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\subsubsecno=0  \global\advance\subsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Ynothing}%
+                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno}%
+}
+
+% Subsubsections.
+% 
+% normally numberedsubsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\numberedsubsubsec{\numhead3{#1}}
+\def\numberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynumbered}%
+                 {\the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+% normally appendixsubsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\appendixsubsubsec{\apphead3{#1}}
+\def\appendixsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yappendix}%
+                 {\appendixletter.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+% normally unnumberedsubsubseczzz:
+\outer\parseargdef\unnumberedsubsubsec{\unnmhead3{#1}}
+\def\unnumberedsubsubseczzz#1{%
+  \global\advance\subsubsecno by 1
+  \sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Ynothing}%
+                 {\the\unnumberedno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno}%
+}
+
+% These macros control what the section commands do, according
+% to what kind of chapter we are in (ordinary, appendix, or unnumbered).
+% Define them by default for a numbered chapter.
+\let\section = \numberedsec
+\let\subsection = \numberedsubsec
+\let\subsubsection = \numberedsubsubsec
+
+% Define @majorheading, @heading and @subheading
+
+\def\majorheading{%
+  {\advance\chapheadingskip by 10pt \chapbreak }%
+  \parsearg\chapheadingzzz
+}
+
+\def\chapheading{\chapbreak \parsearg\chapheadingzzz}
+\def\chapheadingzzz#1{%
+  \vbox{\chapfonts \raggedtitlesettings #1\par}%
+  \nobreak\bigskip \nobreak
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% @heading, @subheading, @subsubheading.
+\parseargdef\heading{\sectionheading{#1}{sec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+\parseargdef\subsubheading{\sectionheading{#1}{subsubsec}{Yomitfromtoc}{}
+  \suppressfirstparagraphindent}
+
+% These macros generate a chapter, section, etc. heading only
+% (including whitespace, linebreaking, etc. around it),
+% given all the information in convenient, parsed form.
+
+% Args are the skip and penalty (usually negative)
+\def\dobreak#1#2{\par\ifdim\lastskip<#1\removelastskip\penalty#2\vskip#1\fi}
+
+% Parameter controlling skip before chapter headings (if needed)
+\newskip\chapheadingskip
+
+% Define plain chapter starts, and page on/off switching for it.
+\def\chapbreak{\dobreak \chapheadingskip {-4000}}
+
+% Start a new page
+\def\chappager{\par\vfill\supereject}
+
+% \chapoddpage - start on an odd page for a new chapter
+% Because \domark is called before \chapoddpage, the filler page will
+% get the headings for the next chapter, which is wrong.  But we don't
+% care -- we just disable all headings on the filler page.
+\def\chapoddpage{%
+  \chappager
+  \ifodd\pageno \else
+    \begingroup
+      \headingsoff
+      \null
+      \chappager
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+
+\parseargdef\setchapternewpage{\csname CHAPPAG#1\endcsname}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGoff{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapbreak
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGon{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chappager
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chappager
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chappager
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSsingle}}
+
+\def\CHAPPAGodd{%
+\global\let\contentsalignmacro = \chapoddpage
+\global\let\pchapsepmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\let\pagealignmacro=\chapoddpage
+\global\def\HEADINGSon{\HEADINGSdouble}}
+
+\CHAPPAGon
+
+% \chapmacro - Chapter opening.
+%
+% #1 is the text, #2 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing,
+% Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc), #3 the chapter number.
+% Not used for @heading series.
+%
+% To test against our argument.
+\def\Ynothingkeyword{Ynothing}
+\def\Yappendixkeyword{Yappendix}
+\def\Yomitfromtockeyword{Yomitfromtoc}
+%
+\def\chapmacro#1#2#3{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\thisenv\titlepage\else
+    \checkenv{}% chapters, etc., should not start inside an environment.
+  \fi
+  % FIXME: \chapmacro is currently called from inside \titlepage when
+  % \setcontentsaftertitlepage to print the "Table of Contents" heading, but
+  % this should probably be done by \sectionheading with an option to print
+  % in chapter size.
+  %
+  % Insert the first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
+  \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
+  \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+  \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
+                        \gdef\thissection{}}%
+  %
+  \def\temptype{#2}%
+  \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+    \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
+                          \gdef\thischapter{\thischaptername}}%
+  \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+    \gdef\lastchapterdefs{\gdef\thischaptername{#1}\gdef\thischapternum{}%
+                          \gdef\thischapter{}}%
+  \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+    \toks0={#1}%
+    \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\appendixletter}%
+      % \noexpand\putwordAppendix avoids expanding indigestible
+      % commands in some of the translations.
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordAppendix{}
+                                 \noexpand\thischapternum:
+                                 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+    }%
+  \else
+    \toks0={#1}%
+    \xdef\lastchapterdefs{%
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischaptername{\the\toks0}%
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischapternum{\the\chapno}%
+      % \noexpand\putwordChapter avoids expanding indigestible
+      % commands in some of the translations.
+      \gdef\noexpand\thischapter{\noexpand\putwordChapter{}
+                                 \noexpand\thischapternum:
+                                 \noexpand\thischaptername}%
+    }%
+  \fi\fi\fi
+  %
+  % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
+  % the preceding space.
+  \safewhatsit\domark
+  %
+  % Insert the chapter heading break.
+  \pchapsepmacro
+  %
+  % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
+  % between here and the heading.
+  \let\prevchapterdefs=\lastchapterdefs
+  \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+  \domark
+  %
+  {%
+    \chapfonts \rm
+    \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading % give better error message
+    %
+    % Have to define \lastsection before calling \donoderef, because the
+    % xref code eventually uses it.  On the other hand, it has to be called
+    % after \pchapsepmacro, or the headline will change too soon.
+    \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+    %
+    % Only insert the separating space if we have a chapter/appendix
+    % number, and don't print the unnumbered ``number''.
+    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{unnchap}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}% contents like unnumbered, but no toc entry
+      \def\toctype{omit}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} #3\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{app}%
+    \else
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#3\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{numchap}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    %
+    % Write the toc entry for this chapter.  Must come before the
+    % \donoderef, because we include the current node name in the toc
+    % entry, and \donoderef resets it to empty.
+    \writetocentry{\toctype}{#1}{#3}%
+    %
+    % For pdftex, we have to write out the node definition (aka, make
+    % the pdfdest) after any page break, but before the actual text has
+    % been typeset.  If the destination for the pdf outline is after the
+    % text, then jumping from the outline may wind up with the text not
+    % being visible, for instance under high magnification.
+    \donoderef{#2}%
+    %
+    % Typeset the actual heading.
+    \nobreak % Avoid page breaks at the interline glue.
+    \vbox{\raggedtitlesettings \hangindent=\wd0 \centerparametersmaybe
+          \unhbox0 #1\par}%
+  }%
+  \nobreak\bigskip % no page break after a chapter title
+  \nobreak
+}
+
+% @centerchap -- centered and unnumbered.
+\let\centerparametersmaybe = \relax
+\def\centerparameters{%
+  \advance\rightskip by 3\rightskip
+  \leftskip = \rightskip
+  \parfillskip = 0pt
+}
+
+
+% Section titles.  These macros combine the section number parts and
+% call the generic \sectionheading to do the printing.
+%
+\newskip\secheadingskip
+\def\secheadingbreak{\dobreak \secheadingskip{-1000}}
+
+% Subsection titles.
+\newskip\subsecheadingskip
+\def\subsecheadingbreak{\dobreak \subsecheadingskip{-500}}
+
+% Subsubsection titles.
+\def\subsubsecheadingskip{\subsecheadingskip}
+\def\subsubsecheadingbreak{\subsecheadingbreak}
+
+
+% Print any size, any type, section title.
+%
+% #1 is the text of the title,
+% #2 is the section level (sec/subsec/subsubsec),
+% #3 is the section type (Ynumbered, Ynothing, Yappendix, Yomitfromtoc),
+% #4 is the section number.
+%
+\def\seckeyword{sec}
+%
+\def\sectionheading#1#2#3#4{%
+  {%
+    \def\sectionlevel{#2}%
+    \def\temptype{#3}%
+    %
+    % It is ok for the @heading series commands to appear inside an
+    % environment (it's been historically allowed, though the logic is
+    % dubious), but not the others.
+    \ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword\else
+      \checkenv{}% non-@*heading should not be in an environment.
+    \fi
+    \let\footnote=\errfootnoteheading
+    %
+    % Switch to the right set of fonts.
+    \csname #2fonts\endcsname \rm
+    %
+    % Insert first mark before the heading break (see notes for \domark).
+    \let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+        \gdef\lastsectiondefs{\gdef\thissectionname{#1}\gdef\thissectionnum{}%
+                              \gdef\thissection{\thissectionname}}%
+      \fi
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+      % Don't redefine \thissection.
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+        \toks0={#1}%
+        \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
+          % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
+          % commands in some of the translations.
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
+                                     \noexpand\thissectionnum:
+                                     \noexpand\thissectionname}%
+        }%
+      \fi
+    \else
+      \ifx\sectionlevel\seckeyword
+        \toks0={#1}%
+        \xdef\lastsectiondefs{%
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionname{\the\toks0}%
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissectionnum{#4}%
+          % \noexpand\putwordSection avoids expanding indigestible
+          % commands in some of the translations.
+          \gdef\noexpand\thissection{\noexpand\putwordSection{}
+                                     \noexpand\thissectionnum:
+                                     \noexpand\thissectionname}%
+        }%
+      \fi
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    %
+    % Go into vertical mode.  Usually we'll already be there, but we
+    % don't want the following whatsit to end up in a preceding paragraph
+    % if the document didn't happen to have a blank line.
+    \par
+    %
+    % Output the mark.  Pass it through \safewhatsit, to take care of
+    % the preceding space.
+    \safewhatsit\domark
+    %
+    % Insert space above the heading.
+    \csname #2headingbreak\endcsname
+    %
+    % Now the second mark, after the heading break.  No break points
+    % between here and the heading.
+    \global\let\prevsectiondefs=\lastsectiondefs
+    \domark
+    %
+    % Only insert the space after the number if we have a section number.
+    \ifx\temptype\Ynothingkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{unn}%
+      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yomitfromtockeyword
+      % for @headings -- no section number, don't include in toc,
+      % and don't redefine \lastsection.
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{}%
+      \def\toctype{omit}%
+      \let\sectionlevel=\empty
+    \else\ifx\temptype\Yappendixkeyword
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{app}%
+      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+    \else
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{#4\enspace}%
+      \def\toctype{num}%
+      \gdef\lastsection{#1}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+    %
+    % Write the toc entry (before \donoderef).  See comments in \chapmacro.
+    \writetocentry{\toctype\sectionlevel}{#1}{#4}%
+    %
+    % Write the node reference (= pdf destination for pdftex).
+    % Again, see comments in \chapmacro.
+    \donoderef{#3}%
+    %
+    % Interline glue will be inserted when the vbox is completed.
+    % That glue will be a valid breakpoint for the page, since it'll be
+    % preceded by a whatsit (usually from the \donoderef, or from the
+    % \writetocentry if there was no node).  We don't want to allow that
+    % break, since then the whatsits could end up on page n while the
+    % section is on page n+1, thus toc/etc. are wrong.  Debian bug 276000.
+    \nobreak
+    %
+    % Output the actual section heading.
+    \vbox{\hyphenpenalty=10000 \tolerance=5000 \parindent=0pt \ptexraggedright
+          \hangindent=\wd0  % zero if no section number
+          \unhbox0 #1}%
+  }%
+  % Add extra space after the heading -- half of whatever came above it.
+  % Don't allow stretch, though.
+  \kern .5 \csname #2headingskip\endcsname
+  %
+  % Do not let the kern be a potential breakpoint, as it would be if it
+  % was followed by glue.
+  \nobreak
+  %
+  % We'll almost certainly start a paragraph next, so don't let that
+  % glue accumulate.  (Not a breakpoint because it's preceded by a
+  % discardable item.)  However, when a paragraph is not started next
+  % (\startdefun, \cartouche, \center, etc.), this needs to be wiped out
+  % or the negative glue will cause weirdly wrong output, typically
+  % obscuring the section heading with something else.
+  \vskip-\parskip
+  %
+  % This is so the last item on the main vertical list is a known
+  % \penalty > 10000, so \startdefun, etc., can recognize the situation
+  % and do the needful.
+  \penalty 10001
+}
+
+
+\message{toc,}
+% Table of contents.
+\newwrite\tocfile
+
+% Write an entry to the toc file, opening it if necessary.
+% Called from @chapter, etc.
+%
+% Example usage: \writetocentry{sec}{Section Name}{\the\chapno.\the\secno}
+% We append the current node name (if any) and page number as additional
+% arguments for the \{chap,sec,...}entry macros which will eventually
+% read this.  The node name is used in the pdf outlines as the
+% destination to jump to.
+%
+% We open the .toc file for writing here instead of at @setfilename (or
+% any other fixed time) so that @contents can be anywhere in the document.
+% But if #1 is `omit', then we don't do anything.  This is used for the
+% table of contents chapter openings themselves.
+%
+\newif\iftocfileopened
+\def\omitkeyword{omit}%
+%
+\def\writetocentry#1#2#3{%
+  \edef\writetoctype{#1}%
+  \ifx\writetoctype\omitkeyword \else
+    \iftocfileopened\else
+      \immediate\openout\tocfile = \jobname.toc
+      \global\tocfileopenedtrue
+    \fi
+    %
+    \iflinks
+      {\atdummies
+       \edef\temp{%
+         \write\tocfile{@#1entry{#2}{#3}{\lastnode}{\noexpand\folio}}}%
+       \temp
+      }%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Tell \shipout to create a pdf destination on each page, if we're
+  % writing pdf.  These are used in the table of contents.  We can't
+  % just write one on every page because the title pages are numbered
+  % 1 and 2 (the page numbers aren't printed), and so are the first
+  % two pages of the document.  Thus, we'd have two destinations named
+  % `1', and two named `2'.
+  \ifpdf
+    \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue
+  \else
+    \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+    \else
+      \global\pdfmakepagedesttrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+
+% These characters do not print properly in the Computer Modern roman
+% fonts, so we must take special care.  This is more or less redundant
+% with the Texinfo input format setup at the end of this file.
+%
+\def\activecatcodes{%
+  \catcode`\"=\active
+  \catcode`\$=\active
+  \catcode`\<=\active
+  \catcode`\>=\active
+  \catcode`\\=\active
+  \catcode`\^=\active
+  \catcode`\_=\active
+  \catcode`\|=\active
+  \catcode`\~=\active
+}
+
+
+% Read the toc file, which is essentially Texinfo input.
+\def\readtocfile{%
+  \setupdatafile
+  \activecatcodes
+  \input \tocreadfilename
+}
+
+\newskip\contentsrightmargin \contentsrightmargin=1in
+\newcount\savepageno
+\newcount\lastnegativepageno \lastnegativepageno = -1
+
+% Prepare to read what we've written to \tocfile.
+%
+\def\startcontents#1{%
+  % If @setchapternewpage on, and @headings double, the contents should
+  % start on an odd page, unlike chapters.  Thus, we maintain
+  % \contentsalignmacro in parallel with \pagealignmacro.
+  % From: Torbjorn Granlund <tege@matematik.su.se>
+  \contentsalignmacro
+  \immediate\closeout\tocfile
+  %
+  % Don't need to put `Contents' or `Short Contents' in the headline.
+  % It is abundantly clear what they are.
+  \chapmacro{#1}{Yomitfromtoc}{}%
+  %
+  \savepageno = \pageno
+  \begingroup                  % Set up to handle contents files properly.
+    \raggedbottom              % Worry more about breakpoints than the bottom.
+    \entryrightmargin=\contentsrightmargin % Don't use the full line length.
+    %
+    % Roman numerals for page numbers.
+    \ifnum \pageno>0 \global\pageno = \lastnegativepageno \fi
+}
+
+% redefined for the two-volume lispref.  We always output on
+% \jobname.toc even if this is redefined.
+%
+\def\tocreadfilename{\jobname.toc}
+
+% Normal (long) toc.
+%
+\def\contents{%
+  \startcontents{\putwordTOC}%
+    \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \readtocfile
+    \fi
+    \vfill \eject
+    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \pdfmakeoutlines
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+  \endgroup
+  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+  \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+
+% And just the chapters.
+\def\summarycontents{%
+  \startcontents{\putwordShortTOC}%
+    %
+    \let\partentry = \shortpartentry
+    \let\numchapentry = \shortchapentry
+    \let\appentry = \shortchapentry
+    \let\unnchapentry = \shortunnchapentry
+    % We want a true roman here for the page numbers.
+    \secfonts
+    \let\rm=\shortcontrm \let\bf=\shortcontbf
+    \let\sl=\shortcontsl \let\tt=\shortconttt
+    \rm
+    \hyphenpenalty = 10000
+    \advance\baselineskip by 1pt % Open it up a little.
+    \def\numsecentry##1##2##3##4{}
+    \let\appsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\numsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\appsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\numsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\appsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \let\unnsubsubsecentry = \numsecentry
+    \openin 1 \tocreadfilename\space
+    \ifeof 1 \else
+      \readtocfile
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+    \vfill \eject
+    \contentsalignmacro % in case @setchapternewpage odd is in effect
+  \endgroup
+  \lastnegativepageno = \pageno
+  \global\pageno = \savepageno
+}
+\let\shortcontents = \summarycontents
+
+% Typeset the label for a chapter or appendix for the short contents.
+% The arg is, e.g., `A' for an appendix, or `3' for a chapter.
+%
+\def\shortchaplabel#1{%
+  % This space should be enough, since a single number is .5em, and the
+  % widest letter (M) is 1em, at least in the Computer Modern fonts.
+  % But use \hss just in case.
+  % (This space doesn't include the extra space that gets added after
+  % the label; that gets put in by \shortchapentry above.)
+  %
+  % We'd like to right-justify chapter numbers, but that looks strange
+  % with appendix letters.  And right-justifying numbers and
+  % left-justifying letters looks strange when there is less than 10
+  % chapters.  Have to read the whole toc once to know how many chapters
+  % there are before deciding ...
+  \hbox to 1em{#1\hss}%
+}
+
+% These macros generate individual entries in the table of contents.
+% The first argument is the chapter or section name.
+% The last argument is the page number.
+% The arguments in between are the chapter number, section number, ...
+
+% Parts, in the main contents.  Replace the part number, which doesn't
+% exist, with an empty box.  Let's hope all the numbers have the same width.
+% Also ignore the page number, which is conventionally not printed.
+\def\numeralbox{\setbox0=\hbox{8}\hbox to \wd0{\hfil}}
+\def\partentry#1#2#3#4{%
+  % Add stretch and a bonus for breaking the page before the part heading.
+  % This reduces the chance of the page being broken immediately after the
+  % part heading, before a following chapter heading.
+  \vskip 0pt plus 5\baselineskip
+  \penalty-300
+  \vskip 0pt plus -5\baselineskip
+  \dochapentry{\numeralbox\labelspace#1}{}%
+}
+%
+% Parts, in the short toc.
+\def\shortpartentry#1#2#3#4{%
+  \penalty-300
+  \vskip.5\baselineskip plus.15\baselineskip minus.1\baselineskip
+  \shortchapentry{{\bf #1}}{\numeralbox}{}{}%
+}
+
+% Chapters, in the main contents.
+\def\numchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+
+% Chapters, in the short toc.
+% See comments in \dochapentry re vbox and related settings.
+\def\shortchapentry#1#2#3#4{%
+  \tocentry{\shortchaplabel{#2}\labelspace #1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}%
+}
+
+% Appendices, in the main contents.
+% Need the word Appendix, and a fixed-size box.
+%
+\def\appendixbox#1{%
+  % We use M since it's probably the widest letter.
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\putwordAppendix{} M}%
+  \hbox to \wd0{\putwordAppendix{} #1\hss}}
+%
+\def\appentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{\appendixbox{#2}\hskip.7em#1}{#4}}
+
+% Unnumbered chapters.
+\def\unnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\dochapentry{#1}{#4}}
+\def\shortunnchapentry#1#2#3#4{\tocentry{#1}{\doshortpageno\bgroup#4\egroup}}
+
+% Sections.
+\def\numsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsecentry=\numsecentry
+\def\unnsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% Subsections.
+\def\numsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsecentry=\numsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% And subsubsections.
+\def\numsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#2\labelspace#1}{#4}}
+\let\appsubsubsecentry=\numsubsubsecentry
+\def\unnsubsubsecentry#1#2#3#4{\dosubsubsecentry{#1}{#4}}
+
+% This parameter controls the indentation of the various levels.
+% Same as \defaultparindent.
+\newdimen\tocindent \tocindent = 15pt
+
+% Now for the actual typesetting. In all these, #1 is the text and #2 is the
+% page number.
+%
+% If the toc has to be broken over pages, we want it to be at chapters
+% if at all possible; hence the \penalty.
+\def\dochapentry#1#2{%
+   \penalty-300 \vskip1\baselineskip plus.33\baselineskip minus.25\baselineskip
+   \begingroup
+     % Move the page numbers slightly to the right
+     \advance\entryrightmargin by -0.05em
+     \chapentryfonts
+     \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+   \endgroup
+   \nobreak\vskip .25\baselineskip plus.1\baselineskip
+}
+
+\def\dosecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \secentryfonts \leftskip=\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsecentryfonts \leftskip=2\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+\def\dosubsubsecentry#1#2{\begingroup
+  \subsubsecentryfonts \leftskip=3\tocindent
+  \tocentry{#1}{\dopageno\bgroup#2\egroup}%
+\endgroup}
+
+% We use the same \entry macro as for the index entries.
+\let\tocentry = \entry
+
+% Space between chapter (or whatever) number and the title.
+\def\labelspace{\hskip1em \relax}
+
+\def\dopageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+\def\doshortpageno#1{{\rm #1}}
+
+\def\chapentryfonts{\secfonts \rm}
+\def\secentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+\def\subsubsecentryfonts{\textfonts}
+
+
+\message{environments,}
+% @foo ... @end foo.
+
+% @tex ... @end tex    escapes into raw TeX temporarily.
+% One exception: @ is still an escape character, so that @end tex works.
+% But \@ or @@ will get a plain @ character.
+
+\envdef\tex{%
+  \setupmarkupstyle{tex}%
+  \catcode `\\=0 \catcode `\{=1 \catcode `\}=2
+  \catcode `\$=3 \catcode `\&=4 \catcode `\#=6
+  \catcode `\^=7 \catcode `\_=8 \catcode `\~=\active \let~=\tie
+  \catcode `\%=14
+  \catcode `\+=\other
+  \catcode `\"=\other
+  \catcode `\|=\other
+  \catcode `\<=\other
+  \catcode `\>=\other
+  \catcode `\`=\other
+  \catcode `\'=\other
+  %
+  % ' is active in math mode (mathcode"8000).  So reset it, and all our
+  % other math active characters (just in case), to plain's definitions.
+  \mathactive
+  %
+  % Inverse of the list at the beginning of the file.
+  \let\b=\ptexb
+  \let\bullet=\ptexbullet
+  \let\c=\ptexc
+  \let\,=\ptexcomma
+  \let\.=\ptexdot
+  \let\dots=\ptexdots
+  \let\equiv=\ptexequiv
+  \let\!=\ptexexclam
+  \let\i=\ptexi
+  \let\indent=\ptexindent
+  \let\noindent=\ptexnoindent
+  \let\{=\ptexlbrace
+  \let\+=\tabalign
+  \let\}=\ptexrbrace
+  \let\/=\ptexslash
+  \let\sp=\ptexsp
+  \let\*=\ptexstar
+  %\let\sup=\ptexsup % do not redefine, we want @sup to work in math mode
+  \let\t=\ptext
+  \expandafter \let\csname top\endcsname=\ptextop  % we've made it outer
+  \let\frenchspacing=\plainfrenchspacing
+  %
+  \def\endldots{\mathinner{\ldots\ldots\ldots\ldots}}%
+  \def\enddots{\relax\ifmmode\endldots\else$\mathsurround=0pt \endldots\,$\fi}%
+  \def\@{@}%
+}
+% There is no need to define \Etex.
+
+% Define @lisp ... @end lisp.
+% @lisp environment forms a group so it can rebind things,
+% including the definition of @end lisp (which normally is erroneous).
+
+% Amount to narrow the margins by for @lisp.
+\newskip\lispnarrowing \lispnarrowing=0.4in
+
+% This is the definition that ^^M gets inside @lisp, @example, and other
+% such environments.  \null is better than a space, since it doesn't
+% have any width.
+\def\lisppar{\null\endgraf}
+
+% This space is always present above and below environments.
+\newskip\envskipamount \envskipamount = 0pt
+
+% Make spacing and below environment symmetrical.  We use \parskip here
+% to help in doing that, since in @example-like environments \parskip
+% is reset to zero; thus the \afterenvbreak inserts no space -- but the
+% start of the next paragraph will insert \parskip.
+%
+\def\aboveenvbreak{{%
+  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
+  % \sectionheading, q.v.
+  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
+    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+    \endgraf
+    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+      \removelastskip
+      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
+        % Penalize breaking before the environment, because preceding text
+        % often leads into it.
+        \penalty100
+      \fi
+      \vskip\envskipamount
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}}
+
+\def\afterenvbreak{{%
+  % =10000 instead of <10000 because of a special case in \itemzzz and
+  % \sectionheading, q.v.
+  \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else
+    \advance\envskipamount by \parskip
+    \endgraf
+    \ifdim\lastskip<\envskipamount
+      \removelastskip
+      % it's not a good place to break if the last penalty was \nobreak
+      % or better ...
+      \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000 \penalty-50 \fi
+      \vskip\envskipamount
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}}
+
+% \nonarrowing is a flag.  If "set", @lisp etc don't narrow margins; it will
+% also clear it, so that its embedded environments do the narrowing again.
+\let\nonarrowing=\relax
+
+% @cartouche ... @end cartouche: draw rectangle w/rounded corners around
+% environment contents.
+\font\circle=lcircle10
+\newdimen\circthick
+\newdimen\cartouter\newdimen\cartinner
+\newskip\normbskip\newskip\normpskip\newskip\normlskip
+\circthick=\fontdimen8\circle
+%
+\def\ctl{{\circle\char'013\hskip -6pt}}% 6pt from pl file: 1/2charwidth
+\def\ctr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'010}}
+\def\cbl{{\circle\char'012\hskip -6pt}}
+\def\cbr{{\hskip 6pt\circle\char'011}}
+\def\carttop{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \ctl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\ctr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+\def\cartbot{\hbox to \cartouter{\hskip\lskip
+        \cbl\leaders\hrule height\circthick\hfil\cbr
+        \hskip\rskip}}
+%
+\newskip\lskip\newskip\rskip
+
+\envdef\cartouche{%
+  \ifhmode\par\fi  % can't be in the midst of a paragraph.
+  \startsavinginserts
+  \lskip=\leftskip \rskip=\rightskip
+  \leftskip=0pt\rightskip=0pt % we want these *outside*.
+  \cartinner=\hsize \advance\cartinner by-\lskip
+  \advance\cartinner by-\rskip
+  \cartouter=\hsize
+  \advance\cartouter by 18.4pt	% allow for 3pt kerns on either
+				% side, and for 6pt waste from
+				% each corner char, and rule thickness
+  \normbskip=\baselineskip \normpskip=\parskip \normlskip=\lineskip
+  %
+  % If this cartouche directly follows a sectioning command, we need the
+  % \parskip glue (backspaced over by default) or the cartouche can
+  % collide with the section heading.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty>10000 \vskip\parskip \penalty\lastpenalty \fi
+  %
+  \setbox\groupbox=\vbox\bgroup
+      \baselineskip=0pt\parskip=0pt\lineskip=0pt
+      \carttop
+      \hbox\bgroup
+	  \hskip\lskip
+	  \vrule\kern3pt
+	  \vbox\bgroup
+	      \kern3pt
+	      \hsize=\cartinner
+	      \baselineskip=\normbskip
+	      \lineskip=\normlskip
+	      \parskip=\normpskip
+	      \vskip -\parskip
+	      \comment % For explanation, see the end of def\group.
+}
+\def\Ecartouche{%
+              \ifhmode\par\fi
+	      \kern3pt
+	  \egroup
+	  \kern3pt\vrule
+	  \hskip\rskip
+      \egroup
+      \cartbot
+  \egroup
+  \addgroupbox
+  \checkinserts
+}
+
+
+% This macro is called at the beginning of all the @example variants,
+% inside a group.
+\newdimen\nonfillparindent
+\def\nonfillstart{%
+  \aboveenvbreak
+  \ifdim\hfuzz < 12pt \hfuzz = 12pt \fi % Don't be fussy
+  \sepspaces % Make spaces be word-separators rather than space tokens.
+  \let\par = \lisppar % don't ignore blank lines
+  \obeylines % each line of input is a line of output
+  \parskip = 0pt
+  % Turn off paragraph indentation but redefine \indent to emulate
+  % the normal \indent.
+  \nonfillparindent=\parindent
+  \parindent = 0pt
+  \let\indent\nonfillindent
+  %
+  \emergencystretch = 0pt % don't try to avoid overfull boxes
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance \leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount=\lispnarrowing
+  \else
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+  \fi
+  \let\exdent=\nofillexdent
+}
+
+\begingroup
+\obeyspaces
+% We want to swallow spaces (but not other tokens) after the fake
+% @indent in our nonfill-environments, where spaces are normally
+% active and set to @tie, resulting in them not being ignored after
+% @indent.
+\gdef\nonfillindent{\futurelet\temp\nonfillindentcheck}%
+\gdef\nonfillindentcheck{%
+\ifx\temp %
+\expandafter\nonfillindentgobble%
+\else%
+\leavevmode\nonfillindentbox%
+\fi%
+}%
+\endgroup
+\def\nonfillindentgobble#1{\nonfillindent}
+\def\nonfillindentbox{\hbox to \nonfillparindent{\hss}}
+
+% If you want all examples etc. small: @set dispenvsize small.
+% If you want even small examples the full size: @set dispenvsize nosmall.
+% This affects the following displayed environments:
+%    @example, @display, @format, @lisp
+%
+\def\smallword{small}
+\def\nosmallword{nosmall}
+\let\SETdispenvsize\relax
+\def\setnormaldispenv{%
+  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\smallword
+    % end paragraph for sake of leading, in case document has no blank
+    % line.  This is redundant with what happens in \aboveenvbreak, but
+    % we need to do it before changing the fonts, and it's inconvenient
+    % to change the fonts afterward.
+    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
+    \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \fi
+}
+\def\setsmalldispenv{%
+  \ifx\SETdispenvsize\nosmallword
+  \else
+    \ifnum \lastpenalty=10000 \else \endgraf \fi
+    \smallexamplefonts \rm
+  \fi
+}
+
+% We often define two environments, @foo and @smallfoo.
+% Let's do it in one command.  #1 is the env name, #2 the definition.
+\def\makedispenvdef#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\envdef\csname#1\endcsname {\setnormaldispenv #2}%
+  \expandafter\envdef\csname small#1\endcsname {\setsmalldispenv #2}%
+  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+  \expandafter\let\csname Esmall#1\endcsname \afterenvbreak
+}
+
+% Define two environment synonyms (#1 and #2) for an environment.
+\def\maketwodispenvdef#1#2#3{%
+  \makedispenvdef{#1}{#3}%
+  \makedispenvdef{#2}{#3}%
+}
+%
+% @lisp: indented, narrowed, typewriter font;
+% @example: same as @lisp.
+%
+% @smallexample and @smalllisp: use smaller fonts.
+% Originally contributed by Pavel@xerox.
+%
+\maketwodispenvdef{lisp}{example}{%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \tt\setupmarkupstyle{example}%
+  \let\kbdfont = \kbdexamplefont % Allow @kbd to do something special.
+  \gobble % eat return
+}
+% @display/@smalldisplay: same as @lisp except keep current font.
+%
+\makedispenvdef{display}{%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @format/@smallformat: same as @display except don't narrow margins.
+%
+\makedispenvdef{format}{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \gobble
+}
+
+% @flushleft: same as @format, but doesn't obey \SETdispenvsize.
+\envdef\flushleft{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \gobble
+}
+\let\Eflushleft = \afterenvbreak
+
+% @flushright.
+%
+\envdef\flushright{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \advance\leftskip by 0pt plus 1fill\relax
+  \gobble
+}
+\let\Eflushright = \afterenvbreak
+
+
+% @raggedright does more-or-less normal line breaking but no right
+% justification.  From plain.tex.  Don't stretch around special
+% characters in urls in this environment, since the stretch at the right
+% should be enough.
+\envdef\raggedright{%
+  \rightskip0pt plus2.4em \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em\relax
+  \def\urefprestretchamount{0pt}%
+  \def\urefpoststretchamount{0pt}%
+}
+\let\Eraggedright\par
+
+\envdef\raggedleft{%
+  \parindent=0pt \leftskip0pt plus2em
+  \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
+  \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
+                  % badness reporting.
+}
+\let\Eraggedleft\par
+
+\envdef\raggedcenter{%
+  \parindent=0pt \rightskip0pt plus1em \leftskip0pt plus1em
+  \spaceskip.3333em \xspaceskip.5em \parfillskip=0pt
+  \hbadness=10000 % Last line will usually be underfull, so turn off
+                  % badness reporting.
+}
+\let\Eraggedcenter\par
+
+
+% @quotation does normal linebreaking (hence we can't use \nonfillstart)
+% and narrows the margins.  We keep \parskip nonzero in general, since
+% we're doing normal filling.  So, when using \aboveenvbreak and
+% \afterenvbreak, temporarily make \parskip 0.
+%
+\makedispenvdef{quotation}{\quotationstart}
+%
+\def\quotationstart{%
+  \indentedblockstart % same as \indentedblock, but increase right margin too.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\rightskip by \lispnarrowing
+  \fi
+  \parsearg\quotationlabel
+}
+
+% We have retained a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're
+% doing normal filling.
+%
+\def\Equotation{%
+  \par
+  \ifx\quotationauthor\thisisundefined\else
+    % indent a bit.
+    \leftline{\kern 2\leftskip \sl ---\quotationauthor}%
+  \fi
+  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
+}
+\def\Esmallquotation{\Equotation}
+
+% If we're given an argument, typeset it in bold with a colon after.
+\def\quotationlabel#1{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\empty \else
+    {\bf #1: }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @indentedblock is like @quotation, but indents only on the left and
+% has no optional argument.
+% 
+\makedispenvdef{indentedblock}{\indentedblockstart}
+%
+\def\indentedblockstart{%
+  {\parskip=0pt \aboveenvbreak}% because \aboveenvbreak inserts \parskip
+  \parindent=0pt
+  %
+  % @cartouche defines \nonarrowing to inhibit narrowing at next level down.
+  \ifx\nonarrowing\relax
+    \advance\leftskip by \lispnarrowing
+    \exdentamount = \lispnarrowing
+  \else
+    \let\nonarrowing = \relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Keep a nonzero parskip for the environment, since we're doing normal filling.
+%
+\def\Eindentedblock{%
+  \par
+  {\parskip=0pt \afterenvbreak}%
+}
+\def\Esmallindentedblock{\Eindentedblock}
+
+
+% LaTeX-like @verbatim...@end verbatim and @verb{<char>...<char>}
+% If we want to allow any <char> as delimiter,
+% we need the curly braces so that makeinfo sees the @verb command, eg:
+% `@verbx...x' would look like the '@verbx' command.  --janneke@gnu.org
+%
+% [Knuth]: Donald Ervin Knuth, 1996.  The TeXbook.
+%
+% [Knuth] p.344; only we need to do the other characters Texinfo sets
+% active too.  Otherwise, they get lost as the first character on a
+% verbatim line.
+\def\dospecials{%
+  \do\ \do\\\do\{\do\}\do\$\do\&%
+  \do\#\do\^\do\^^K\do\_\do\^^A\do\%\do\~%
+  \do\<\do\>\do\|\do\@\do+\do\"%
+  % Don't do the quotes -- if we do, @set txicodequoteundirected and
+  % @set txicodequotebacktick will not have effect on @verb and
+  % @verbatim, and ?` and !` ligatures won't get disabled.
+  %\do\`\do\'%
+}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 380
+\def\uncatcodespecials{%
+  \def\do##1{\catcode`##1=\other}\dospecials}
+%
+% Setup for the @verb command.
+%
+% Eight spaces for a tab
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\tabeightspaces{\catcode`\^^I=\active\def^^I{\ \ \ \ \ \ \ \ }}
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\setupverb{%
+  \tt  % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\endgraf}%
+  \setupmarkupstyle{verb}%
+  \tabeightspaces
+  % Respect line breaks,
+  % print special symbols as themselves, and
+  % make each space count
+  % must do in this order:
+  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+}
+
+% Setup for the @verbatim environment
+%
+% Real tab expansion.
+\newdimen\tabw \setbox0=\hbox{\tt\space} \tabw=8\wd0 % tab amount
+%
+% We typeset each line of the verbatim in an \hbox, so we can handle
+% tabs.  The \global is in case the verbatim line starts with an accent,
+% or some other command that starts with a begin-group.  Otherwise, the
+% entire \verbbox would disappear at the corresponding end-group, before
+% it is typeset.  Meanwhile, we can't have nested verbatim commands
+% (can we?), so the \global won't be overwriting itself.
+\newbox\verbbox
+\def\starttabbox{\global\setbox\verbbox=\hbox\bgroup}
+%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^I=\active
+  \gdef\tabexpand{%
+    \catcode`\^^I=\active
+    \def^^I{\leavevmode\egroup
+      \dimen\verbbox=\wd\verbbox % the width so far, or since the previous tab
+      \divide\dimen\verbbox by\tabw
+      \multiply\dimen\verbbox by\tabw % compute previous multiple of \tabw
+      \advance\dimen\verbbox by\tabw  % advance to next multiple of \tabw
+      \wd\verbbox=\dimen\verbbox \box\verbbox \starttabbox
+    }%
+  }
+\endgroup
+
+% start the verbatim environment.
+\def\setupverbatim{%
+  \let\nonarrowing = t%
+  \nonfillstart
+  \tt % easiest (and conventionally used) font for verbatim
+  % The \leavevmode here is for blank lines.  Otherwise, we would
+  % never \starttabox and the \egroup would end verbatim mode.
+  \def\par{\leavevmode\egroup\box\verbbox\endgraf}%
+  \tabexpand
+  \setupmarkupstyle{verbatim}%
+  % Respect line breaks,
+  % print special symbols as themselves, and
+  % make each space count.
+  % Must do in this order:
+  \obeylines \uncatcodespecials \sepspaces
+  \everypar{\starttabbox}%
+}
+
+% Do the @verb magic: verbatim text is quoted by unique
+% delimiter characters.  Before first delimiter expect a
+% right brace, after last delimiter expect closing brace:
+%
+%    \def\doverb'{'<char>#1<char>'}'{#1}
+%
+% [Knuth] p. 382; only eat outer {}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`[=1\catcode`]=2\catcode`\{=\other\catcode`\}=\other
+  \gdef\doverb{#1[\def\next##1#1}[##1\endgroup]\next]
+\endgroup
+%
+\def\verb{\begingroup\setupverb\doverb}
+%
+%
+% Do the @verbatim magic: define the macro \doverbatim so that
+% the (first) argument ends when '@end verbatim' is reached, ie:
+%
+%     \def\doverbatim#1@end verbatim{#1}
+%
+% For Texinfo it's a lot easier than for LaTeX,
+% because texinfo's \verbatim doesn't stop at '\end{verbatim}':
+% we need not redefine '\', '{' and '}'.
+%
+% Inspired by LaTeX's verbatim command set [latex.ltx]
+%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\ =\active
+  \obeylines %
+  % ignore everything up to the first ^^M, that's the newline at the end
+  % of the @verbatim input line itself.  Otherwise we get an extra blank
+  % line in the output.
+  \xdef\doverbatim#1^^M#2@end verbatim{#2\noexpand\end\gobble verbatim}%
+  % We really want {...\end verbatim} in the body of the macro, but
+  % without the active space; thus we have to use \xdef and \gobble.
+\endgroup
+%
+\envdef\verbatim{%
+    \setupverbatim\doverbatim
+}
+\let\Everbatim = \afterenvbreak
+
+
+% @verbatiminclude FILE - insert text of file in verbatim environment.
+%
+\def\verbatiminclude{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\doverbatiminclude}
+%
+\def\doverbatiminclude#1{%
+  {%
+    \makevalueexpandable
+    \setupverbatim
+    \indexnofonts       % Allow `@@' and other weird things in file names.
+    \wlog{texinfo.tex: doing @verbatiminclude of #1^^J}%
+    \input #1
+    \afterenvbreak
+  }%
+}
+
+% @copying ... @end copying.
+% Save the text away for @insertcopying later.
+%
+% We save the uninterpreted tokens, rather than creating a box.
+% Saving the text in a box would be much easier, but then all the
+% typesetting commands (@smallbook, font changes, etc.) have to be done
+% beforehand -- and a) we want @copying to be done first in the source
+% file; b) letting users define the frontmatter in as flexible order as
+% possible is desirable.
+%
+\def\copying{\checkenv{}\begingroup\scanargctxt\docopying}
+\def\docopying#1@end copying{\endgroup\def\copyingtext{#1}}
+%
+\def\insertcopying{%
+  \begingroup
+    \parindent = 0pt  % paragraph indentation looks wrong on title page
+    \scanexp\copyingtext
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+
+\message{defuns,}
+% @defun etc.
+
+\newskip\defbodyindent \defbodyindent=.4in
+\newskip\defargsindent \defargsindent=50pt
+\newskip\deflastargmargin \deflastargmargin=18pt
+\newcount\defunpenalty
+
+% Start the processing of @deffn:
+\def\startdefun{%
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty<10000
+    \medbreak
+    \defunpenalty=10003 % Will keep this @deffn together with the
+                        % following @def command, see below.
+  \else
+    % If there are two @def commands in a row, we'll have a \nobreak,
+    % which is there to keep the function description together with its
+    % header.  But if there's nothing but headers, we need to allow a
+    % break somewhere.  Check specifically for penalty 10002, inserted
+    % by \printdefunline, instead of 10000, since the sectioning
+    % commands also insert a nobreak penalty, and we don't want to allow
+    % a break between a section heading and a defun.
+    %
+    % As a further refinement, we avoid "club" headers by signalling
+    % with penalty of 10003 after the very first @deffn in the
+    % sequence (see above), and penalty of 10002 after any following
+    % @def command.
+    \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty2000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
+    %
+    % Similarly, after a section heading, do not allow a break.
+    % But do insert the glue.
+    \medskip  % preceded by discardable penalty, so not a breakpoint
+  \fi
+  %
+  \parindent=0in
+  \advance\leftskip by \defbodyindent
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+}
+
+\def\dodefunx#1{%
+  % First, check whether we are in the right environment:
+  \checkenv#1%
+  %
+  % As above, allow line break if we have multiple x headers in a row.
+  % It's not a great place, though.
+  \ifnum\lastpenalty=10002 \penalty3000 \else \defunpenalty=10002 \fi
+  %
+  % And now, it's time to reuse the body of the original defun:
+  \expandafter\gobbledefun#1%
+}
+\def\gobbledefun#1\startdefun{}
+
+% \printdefunline \deffnheader{text}
+%
+\def\printdefunline#1#2{%
+  \begingroup
+    % call \deffnheader:
+    #1#2 \endheader
+    % common ending:
+    \interlinepenalty = 10000
+    \advance\rightskip by 0pt plus 1fil\relax
+    \endgraf
+    \nobreak\vskip -\parskip
+    \penalty\defunpenalty  % signal to \startdefun and \dodefunx
+    % Some of the @defun-type tags do not enable magic parentheses,
+    % rendering the following check redundant.  But we don't optimize.
+    \checkparencounts
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+\def\Edefun{\endgraf\medbreak}
+
+% \makedefun{deffn} creates \deffn, \deffnx and \Edeffn;
+% the only thing remaining is to define \deffnheader.
+%
+\def\makedefun#1{%
+  \expandafter\let\csname E#1\endcsname = \Edefun
+  \edef\temp{\noexpand\domakedefun
+    \makecsname{#1}\makecsname{#1x}\makecsname{#1header}}%
+  \temp
+}
+
+% \domakedefun \deffn \deffnx \deffnheader { (defn. of \deffnheader) }
+%
+% Define \deffn and \deffnx, without parameters.
+% \deffnheader has to be defined explicitly.
+%
+\def\domakedefun#1#2#3{%
+  \envdef#1{%
+    \startdefun
+    \doingtypefnfalse    % distinguish typed functions from all else
+    \parseargusing\activeparens{\printdefunline#3}%
+  }%
+  \def#2{\dodefunx#1}%
+  \def#3%
+}
+
+\newif\ifdoingtypefn       % doing typed function?
+\newif\ifrettypeownline    % typeset return type on its own line?
+
+% @deftypefnnewline on|off says whether the return type of typed functions
+% are printed on their own line.  This affects @deftypefn, @deftypefun,
+% @deftypeop, and @deftypemethod.
+% 
+\parseargdef\deftypefnnewline{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
+      = \empty
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @txideftypefnnl value `\temp',
+                must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% Untyped functions:
+
+% @deffn category name args
+\makedefun{deffn}{\deffngeneral{}}
+
+% @deffn category class name args
+\makedefun{defop}#1 {\defopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+
+% \defopon {category on}class name args
+\def\defopon#1#2 {\deffngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deffngeneral {subind}category name args
+%
+\def\deffngeneral#1#2 #3 #4\endheader{%
+  % Remember that \dosubind{fn}{foo}{} is equivalent to \doind{fn}{foo}.
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#3}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{}{#3}\magicamp\defunargs{#4\unskip}%
+}
+
+% Typed functions:
+
+% @deftypefn category type name args
+\makedefun{deftypefn}{\deftypefngeneral{}}
+
+% @deftypeop category class type name args
+\makedefun{deftypeop}#1 {\deftypeopon{#1\ \putwordon}}
+
+% \deftypeopon {category on}class type name args
+\def\deftypeopon#1#2 {\deftypefngeneral{\putwordon\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deftypefngeneral {subind}category type name args
+%
+\def\deftypefngeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+  \dosubind{fn}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \doingtypefntrue
+  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+}
+
+% Typed variables:
+
+% @deftypevr category type var args
+\makedefun{deftypevr}{\deftypecvgeneral{}}
+
+% @deftypecv category class type var args
+\makedefun{deftypecv}#1 {\deftypecvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+
+% \deftypecvof {category of}class type var args
+\def\deftypecvof#1#2 {\deftypecvgeneral{\putwordof\ \code{#2}}{#1\ \code{#2}} }
+
+% \deftypecvgeneral {subind}category type var args
+%
+\def\deftypecvgeneral#1#2 #3 #4 #5\endheader{%
+  \dosubind{vr}{\code{#4}}{#1}%
+  \defname{#2}{#3}{#4}\defunargs{#5\unskip}%
+}
+
+% Untyped variables:
+
+% @defvr category var args
+\makedefun{defvr}#1 {\deftypevrheader{#1} {} }
+
+% @defcv category class var args
+\makedefun{defcv}#1 {\defcvof{#1\ \putwordof}}
+
+% \defcvof {category of}class var args
+\def\defcvof#1#2 {\deftypecvof{#1}#2 {} }
+
+% Types:
+
+% @deftp category name args
+\makedefun{deftp}#1 #2 #3\endheader{%
+  \doind{tp}{\code{#2}}%
+  \defname{#1}{}{#2}\defunargs{#3\unskip}%
+}
+
+% Remaining @defun-like shortcuts:
+\makedefun{defun}{\deffnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defmac}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefmac} }
+\makedefun{defspec}{\deffnheader{\putwordDefspec} }
+\makedefun{deftypefun}{\deftypefnheader{\putwordDeffunc} }
+\makedefun{defvar}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defopt}{\defvrheader{\putwordDefopt} }
+\makedefun{deftypevar}{\deftypevrheader{\putwordDefvar} }
+\makedefun{defmethod}{\defopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{deftypemethod}{\deftypeopon\putwordMethodon}
+\makedefun{defivar}{\defcvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+\makedefun{deftypeivar}{\deftypecvof\putwordInstanceVariableof}
+
+% \defname, which formats the name of the @def (not the args).
+% #1 is the category, such as "Function".
+% #2 is the return type, if any.
+% #3 is the function name.
+%
+% We are followed by (but not passed) the arguments, if any.
+%
+\def\defname#1#2#3{%
+  \par
+  % Get the values of \leftskip and \rightskip as they were outside the @def...
+  \advance\leftskip by -\defbodyindent
+  %
+  % Determine if we are typesetting the return type of a typed function
+  % on a line by itself.
+  \rettypeownlinefalse
+  \ifdoingtypefn  % doing a typed function specifically?
+    % then check user option for putting return type on its own line:
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETtxideftypefnnl\endcsname\relax \else
+      \rettypeownlinetrue
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % How we'll format the category name.  Putting it in brackets helps
+  % distinguish it from the body text that may end up on the next line
+  % just below it.
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \setbox0=\hbox{\kern\deflastargmargin \ifx\temp\empty\else [\rm\temp]\fi}
+  %
+  % Figure out line sizes for the paragraph shape.  We'll always have at
+  % least two.
+  \tempnum = 2
+  %
+  % The first line needs space for \box0; but if \rightskip is nonzero,
+  % we need only space for the part of \box0 which exceeds it:
+  \dimen0=\hsize  \advance\dimen0 by -\wd0  \advance\dimen0 by \rightskip
+  %
+  % If doing a return type on its own line, we'll have another line.
+  \ifrettypeownline
+    \advance\tempnum by 1
+    \def\maybeshapeline{0in \hsize}%
+  \else
+    \def\maybeshapeline{}%
+  \fi
+  %
+  % The continuations:
+  \dimen2=\hsize  \advance\dimen2 by -\defargsindent
+  %
+  % The final paragraph shape:
+  \parshape \tempnum  0in \dimen0  \maybeshapeline  \defargsindent \dimen2
+  %
+  % Put the category name at the right margin.
+  \noindent
+  \hbox to 0pt{%
+    \hfil\box0 \kern-\hsize
+    % \hsize has to be shortened this way:
+    \kern\leftskip
+    % Intentionally do not respect \rightskip, since we need the space.
+  }%
+  %
+  % Allow all lines to be underfull without complaint:
+  \tolerance=10000 \hbadness=10000
+  \exdentamount=\defbodyindent
+  {%
+    % defun fonts. We use typewriter by default (used to be bold) because:
+    % . we're printing identifiers, they should be in tt in principle.
+    % . in languages with many accents, such as Czech or French, it's
+    %   common to leave accents off identifiers.  The result looks ok in
+    %   tt, but exceedingly strange in rm.
+    % . we don't want -- and --- to be treated as ligatures.
+    % . this still does not fix the ?` and !` ligatures, but so far no
+    %   one has made identifiers using them :).
+    \df \tt
+    \def\temp{#2}% text of the return type
+    \ifx\temp\empty\else
+      \tclose{\temp}% typeset the return type
+      \ifrettypeownline
+        % put return type on its own line; prohibit line break following:
+        \hfil\vadjust{\nobreak}\break  
+      \else
+        \space  % type on same line, so just followed by a space
+      \fi
+    \fi           % no return type
+    #3% output function name
+  }%
+  {\rm\enskip}% hskip 0.5 em of \rmfont
+  %
+  \boldbrax
+  % arguments will be output next, if any.
+}
+
+% Print arguments in slanted roman (not ttsl), inconsistently with using
+% tt for the name.  This is because literal text is sometimes needed in
+% the argument list (groff manual), and ttsl and tt are not very
+% distinguishable.  Prevent hyphenation at `-' chars.
+%
+\def\defunargs#1{%
+  % use sl by default (not ttsl),
+  % tt for the names.
+  \df \sl \hyphenchar\font=0
+  %
+  % On the other hand, if an argument has two dashes (for instance), we
+  % want a way to get ttsl.  We used to recommend @var for that, so
+  % leave the code in, but it's strange for @var to lead to typewriter.
+  % Nowadays we recommend @code, since the difference between a ttsl hyphen
+  % and a tt hyphen is pretty tiny.  @code also disables ?` !`.
+  \def\var##1{{\setupmarkupstyle{var}\ttslanted{##1}}}%
+  #1%
+  \sl\hyphenchar\font=45
+}
+
+% We want ()&[] to print specially on the defun line.
+%
+\def\activeparens{%
+  \catcode`\(=\active \catcode`\)=\active
+  \catcode`\[=\active \catcode`\]=\active
+  \catcode`\&=\active
+}
+
+% Make control sequences which act like normal parenthesis chars.
+\let\lparen = ( \let\rparen = )
+
+% Be sure that we always have a definition for `(', etc.  For example,
+% if the fn name has parens in it, \boldbrax will not be in effect yet,
+% so TeX would otherwise complain about undefined control sequence.
+{
+  \activeparens
+  \global\let(=\lparen \global\let)=\rparen
+  \global\let[=\lbrack \global\let]=\rbrack
+  \global\let& = \&
+
+  \gdef\boldbrax{\let(=\opnr\let)=\clnr\let[=\lbrb\let]=\rbrb}
+  \gdef\magicamp{\let&=\amprm}
+}
+
+\newcount\parencount
+
+% If we encounter &foo, then turn on ()-hacking afterwards
+\newif\ifampseen
+\def\amprm#1 {\ampseentrue{\bf\&#1 }}
+
+\def\parenfont{%
+  \ifampseen
+    % At the first level, print parens in roman,
+    % otherwise use the default font.
+    \ifnum \parencount=1 \rm \fi
+  \else
+    % The \sf parens (in \boldbrax) actually are a little bolder than
+    % the contained text.  This is especially needed for [ and ] .
+    \sf
+  \fi
+}
+\def\infirstlevel#1{%
+  \ifampseen
+    \ifnum\parencount=1
+      #1%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+\def\bfafterword#1 {#1 \bf}
+
+\def\opnr{%
+  \global\advance\parencount by 1
+  {\parenfont(}%
+  \infirstlevel \bfafterword
+}
+\def\clnr{%
+  {\parenfont)}%
+  \infirstlevel \sl
+  \global\advance\parencount by -1
+}
+
+\newcount\brackcount
+\def\lbrb{%
+  \global\advance\brackcount by 1
+  {\bf[}%
+}
+\def\rbrb{%
+  {\bf]}%
+  \global\advance\brackcount by -1
+}
+
+\def\checkparencounts{%
+  \ifnum\parencount=0 \else \badparencount \fi
+  \ifnum\brackcount=0 \else \badbrackcount \fi
+}
+% these should not use \errmessage; the glibc manual, at least, actually
+% has such constructs (when documenting function pointers).
+\def\badparencount{%
+  \message{Warning: unbalanced parentheses in @def...}%
+  \global\parencount=0
+}
+\def\badbrackcount{%
+  \message{Warning: unbalanced square brackets in @def...}%
+  \global\brackcount=0
+}
+
+
+\message{macros,}
+% @macro.
+
+% To do this right we need a feature of e-TeX, \scantokens,
+% which we arrange to emulate with a temporary file in ordinary TeX.
+\ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
+  \newwrite\macscribble
+  \def\scantokens#1{%
+    \toks0={#1}%
+    \immediate\openout\macscribble=\jobname.tmp
+    \immediate\write\macscribble{\the\toks0}%
+    \immediate\closeout\macscribble
+    \input \jobname.tmp
+  }
+\fi
+
+% alias because \c means cedilla in @tex or @math
+\let\texinfoc=\c
+
+\newcount\savedcatcodeone
+\newcount\savedcatcodetwo
+
+% Used at the time of macro expansion.
+% Argument is macro body with arguments substituted
+\def\scanmacro#1{%
+  \newlinechar`\^^M
+  \def\xeatspaces{\eatspaces}%
+  %
+  % Temporarily undo catcode changes of \printindex.  Set catcode of @ to
+  % 0 so that @-commands in macro expansions aren't printed literally when 
+  % formatting an index file, where \ is used as the escape character.
+  \savedcatcodeone=\catcode`\@
+  \savedcatcodetwo=\catcode`\\
+  \catcode`\@=0
+  \catcode`\\=\active
+  %
+  % Process the macro body under the current catcode regime.
+  \scantokens{#1@texinfoc}%
+  %
+  \catcode`\@=\savedcatcodeone
+  \catcode`\\=\savedcatcodetwo
+  %
+  % The \texinfoc is to remove the \newlinechar added by \scantokens, and
+  % can be noticed by \parsearg.
+  %   We avoid surrounding the call to \scantokens with \bgroup and \egroup
+  % to allow macros to open or close groups themselves.
+}
+
+% Used for copying and captions
+\def\scanexp#1{%
+  \expandafter\scanmacro\expandafter{#1}%
+}
+
+\newcount\paramno   % Count of parameters
+\newtoks\macname    % Macro name
+\newif\ifrecursive  % Is it recursive?
+
+% List of all defined macros in the form
+%    \commondummyword\macro1\commondummyword\macro2...
+% Currently is also contains all @aliases; the list can be split
+% if there is a need.
+\def\macrolist{}
+
+% Add the macro to \macrolist
+\def\addtomacrolist#1{\expandafter \addtomacrolistxxx \csname#1\endcsname}
+\def\addtomacrolistxxx#1{%
+     \toks0 = \expandafter{\macrolist\commondummyword#1}%
+     \xdef\macrolist{\the\toks0}%
+}
+
+% Utility routines.
+% This does \let #1 = #2, with \csnames; that is,
+%   \let \csname#1\endcsname = \csname#2\endcsname
+% (except of course we have to play expansion games).
+%
+\def\cslet#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\let
+  \csname#1\expandafter\endcsname
+  \csname#2\endcsname
+}
+
+% Trim leading and trailing spaces off a string.
+% Concepts from aro-bend problem 15 (see CTAN).
+{\catcode`\@=11
+\gdef\eatspaces #1{\expandafter\trim@\expandafter{#1 }}
+\gdef\trim@ #1{\trim@@ @#1 @ #1 @ @@}
+\gdef\trim@@ #1@ #2@ #3@@{\trim@@@\empty #2 @}
+\def\unbrace#1{#1}
+\unbrace{\gdef\trim@@@ #1 } #2@{#1}
+}
+
+% Trim a single trailing ^^M off a string.
+{\catcode`\^^M=\other \catcode`\Q=3%
+\gdef\eatcr #1{\eatcra #1Q^^MQ}%
+\gdef\eatcra#1^^MQ{\eatcrb#1Q}%
+\gdef\eatcrb#1Q#2Q{#1}%
+}
+
+% Macro bodies are absorbed as an argument in a context where
+% all characters are catcode 10, 11 or 12, except \ which is active
+% (as in normal texinfo). It is necessary to change the definition of \
+% to recognize macro arguments; this is the job of \mbodybackslash.
+%
+% Non-ASCII encodings make 8-bit characters active, so un-activate
+% them to avoid their expansion.  Must do this non-globally, to
+% confine the change to the current group.
+%
+% It's necessary to have hard CRs when the macro is executed. This is
+% done by making ^^M (\endlinechar) catcode 12 when reading the macro
+% body, and then making it the \newlinechar in \scanmacro.
+%
+\def\scanctxt{% used as subroutine
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\+=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \passthroughcharstrue
+}
+
+\def\scanargctxt{% used for copying and captions, not macros.
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+}
+
+\def\macrobodyctxt{% used for @macro definitions
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\ =\other
+  \catcode`\@=\other
+  \catcode`\{=\other
+  \catcode`\}=\other
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+  \usembodybackslash
+}
+
+% Used when scanning braced macro arguments.  Note, however, that catcode
+% changes here are ineffectual if the macro invocation was nested inside
+% an argument to another Texinfo command.
+\def\macroargctxt{%
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\ =\active
+  \catcode`\^^M=\other
+  \catcode`\\=\active
+}
+
+\def\macrolineargctxt{% used for whole-line arguments without braces
+  \scanctxt
+  \catcode`\{=\other
+  \catcode`\}=\other
+}
+
+% \mbodybackslash is the definition of \ in @macro bodies.
+% It maps \foo\ => \csname macarg.foo\endcsname => #N
+% where N is the macro parameter number.
+% We define \csname macarg.\endcsname to be \realbackslash, so
+% \\ in macro replacement text gets you a backslash.
+%
+{\catcode`@=0 @catcode`@\=@active
+ @gdef@usembodybackslash{@let\=@mbodybackslash}
+ @gdef@mbodybackslash#1\{@csname macarg.#1@endcsname}
+}
+\expandafter\def\csname macarg.\endcsname{\realbackslash}
+
+\def\margbackslash#1{\char`\#1 }
+
+\def\macro{\recursivefalse\parsearg\macroxxx}
+\def\rmacro{\recursivetrue\parsearg\macroxxx}
+
+\def\macroxxx#1{%
+  \getargs{#1}% now \macname is the macname and \argl the arglist
+  \ifx\argl\empty       % no arguments
+     \paramno=0\relax
+  \else
+     \expandafter\parsemargdef \argl;%
+     \if\paramno>256\relax
+       \ifx\eTeXversion\thisisundefined
+         \errhelp = \EMsimple
+         \errmessage{You need eTeX to compile a file with macros with more than 256 arguments}
+       \fi
+     \fi
+  \fi
+  \if1\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname
+     \message{Warning: redefining \the\macname}%
+  \else
+     \expandafter\ifx\csname \the\macname\endcsname \relax
+     \else \errmessage{Macro name \the\macname\space already defined}\fi
+     \global\cslet{macsave.\the\macname}{\the\macname}%
+     \global\expandafter\let\csname ismacro.\the\macname\endcsname=1%
+     \addtomacrolist{\the\macname}%
+  \fi
+  \begingroup \macrobodyctxt
+  \ifrecursive \expandafter\parsermacbody
+  \else \expandafter\parsemacbody
+  \fi}
+
+\parseargdef\unmacro{%
+  \if1\csname ismacro.#1\endcsname
+    \global\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}%
+    \global\expandafter\let \csname ismacro.#1\endcsname=0%
+    % Remove the macro name from \macrolist:
+    \begingroup
+      \expandafter\let\csname#1\endcsname \relax
+      \let\commondummyword\unmacrodo
+      \xdef\macrolist{\macrolist}%
+    \endgroup
+  \else
+    \errmessage{Macro #1 not defined}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Called by \do from \dounmacro on each macro.  The idea is to omit any
+% macro definitions that have been changed to \relax.
+%
+\def\unmacrodo#1{%
+  \ifx #1\relax
+    % remove this
+  \else
+    \noexpand\commondummyword \noexpand#1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% \getargs -- Parse the arguments to a @macro line.  Set \macname to
+% the name of the macro, and \argl to the braced argument list.
+\def\getargs#1{\getargsxxx#1{}}
+\def\getargsxxx#1#{\getmacname #1 \relax\getmacargs}
+\def\getmacname#1 #2\relax{\macname={#1}}
+\def\getmacargs#1{\def\argl{#1}}
+% This made use of the feature that if the last token of a
+% <parameter list> is #, then the preceding argument is delimited by
+% an opening brace, and that opening brace is not consumed.
+
+% Parse the optional {params} list to @macro or @rmacro.
+% Set \paramno to the number of arguments,
+% and \paramlist to a parameter text for the macro (e.g. #1,#2,#3 for a
+% three-param macro.)  Define \macarg.BLAH for each BLAH in the params
+% list to some hook where the argument is to be expanded.  If there are
+% less than 10 arguments that hook is to be replaced by ##N where N
+% is the position in that list, that is to say the macro arguments are to be
+% defined `a la TeX in the macro body.  
+%
+% That gets used by \mbodybackslash (above).
+%
+% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used: see
+% \parsemmanyargdef.
+%
+\def\parsemargdef#1;{%
+  \paramno=0\def\paramlist{}%
+  \let\hash\relax
+  % \hash is redefined to `#' later to get it into definitions
+  \let\xeatspaces\relax
+  \parsemargdefxxx#1,;,%
+  \ifnum\paramno<10\relax\else
+    \paramno0\relax
+    \parsemmanyargdef@@#1,;,% 10 or more arguments
+  \fi
+}
+\def\parsemargdefxxx#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else \let\next=\parsemargdefxxx
+    \advance\paramno by 1
+    \expandafter\edef\csname macarg.\eatspaces{#1}\endcsname
+        {\xeatspaces{\hash\the\paramno}}%
+    \edef\paramlist{\paramlist\hash\the\paramno,}%
+  \fi\next}
+
+% \parsemacbody, \parsermacbody
+%
+% Read recursive and nonrecursive macro bodies. (They're different since
+% rec and nonrec macros end differently.)
+% 
+% We are in \macrobodyctxt, and the \xdef causes backslashshes in the macro 
+% body to be transformed.
+% Set \macrobody to the body of the macro, and call \defmacro.
+%
+{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsemacbody#1@end macro{%
+\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}%
+{\catcode`\ =\other\long\gdef\parsermacbody#1@end rmacro{%
+\xdef\macrobody{\eatcr{#1}}\endgroup\defmacro}}%
+
+% Make @ a letter, so that we can make private-to-Texinfo macro names.
+\edef\texiatcatcode{\the\catcode`\@}
+\catcode `@=11\relax
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%% Code for > 10 arguments only   %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% If there are 10 or more arguments, a different technique is used, where the
+% hook remains in the body, and when macro is to be expanded the body is
+% processed again to replace the arguments.
+%
+% In that case, the hook is \the\toks N-1, and we simply set \toks N-1 to the
+% argument N value and then \edef the body (nothing else will expand because of
+% the catcode regime under which the body was input).
+%
+% If you compile with TeX (not eTeX), and you have macros with 10 or more
+% arguments, no macro can have more than 256 arguments (else error).
+%
+% In case that there are 10 or more arguments we parse again the arguments
+% list to set new definitions for the \macarg.BLAH macros corresponding to
+% each BLAH argument. It was anyhow needed to parse already once this list
+% in order to count the arguments, and as macros with at most 9 arguments
+% are by far more frequent than macro with 10 or more arguments, defining
+% twice the \macarg.BLAH macros does not cost too much processing power.
+\def\parsemmanyargdef@@#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next=\relax
+  \else 
+    \let\next=\parsemmanyargdef@@
+    \edef\tempb{\eatspaces{#1}}%
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\tempa
+       \expandafter{\csname macarg.\tempb\endcsname}%
+    % Note that we need some extra \noexpand\noexpand, this is because we
+    % don't want \the  to be expanded in the \parsermacbody  as it uses an
+    % \xdef .
+    \expandafter\edef\tempa
+      {\noexpand\noexpand\noexpand\the\toks\the\paramno}%
+    \advance\paramno by 1\relax
+  \fi\next}
+
+
+\let\endargs@\relax
+\let\nil@\relax
+\def\nilm@{\nil@}%
+\long\def\nillm@{\nil@}%
+
+% This macro is expanded during the Texinfo macro expansion, not during its
+% definition.  It gets all the arguments' values and assigns them to macros
+% macarg.ARGNAME
+%
+% #1 is the macro name
+% #2 is the list of argument names
+% #3 is the list of argument values
+\def\getargvals@#1#2#3{%
+  \def\macargdeflist@{}%
+  \def\saveparamlist@{#2}% Need to keep a copy for parameter expansion.
+  \def\paramlist{#2,\nil@}%
+  \def\macroname{#1}%
+  \begingroup
+  \macroargctxt
+  \def\argvaluelist{#3,\nil@}%
+  \def\@tempa{#3}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\empty
+    \setemptyargvalues@
+  \else
+    \getargvals@@
+  \fi
+}
+\def\getargvals@@{%
+  \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
+      % Some sanity check needed here that \argvaluelist is also empty.
+      \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
+      \else
+        \errhelp = \EMsimple
+        \errmessage{Too many arguments in macro `\macroname'!}%
+      \fi
+      \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
+  \else
+    \ifx\argvaluelist\nillm@
+       % No more arguments values passed to macro.  Set remaining named-arg
+       % macros to empty.
+       \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
+    \else
+      % pop current arg name into \@tempb
+      \def\@tempa##1{\pop@{\@tempb}{\paramlist}##1\endargs@}%
+      \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\paramlist}%
+       % pop current argument value into \@tempc
+      \def\@tempa##1{\longpop@{\@tempc}{\argvaluelist}##1\endargs@}%
+      \expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\argvaluelist}%
+       % Here \@tempb is the current arg name and \@tempc is the current arg value.
+       % First place the new argument macro definition into \@tempd
+       \expandafter\macname\expandafter{\@tempc}%
+       \expandafter\let\csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname\relax
+       \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempe\expandafter{%
+         \csname macarg.\@tempb\endcsname}%
+       \edef\@tempd{\long\def\@tempe{\the\macname}}%
+       \push@\@tempd\macargdeflist@
+       \let\next\getargvals@@
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+\def\push@#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\def
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#2%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{%
+  \expandafter#1#2}%
+}
+
+% Replace arguments by their values in the macro body, and place the result
+% in macro \@tempa.
+% 
+\def\macvalstoargs@{%
+  %  To do this we use the property that token registers that are \the'ed
+  % within an \edef  expand only once. So we are going to place all argument
+  % values into respective token registers.
+  %
+  % First we save the token context, and initialize argument numbering.
+  \begingroup
+    \paramno0\relax
+    % Then, for each argument number #N, we place the corresponding argument
+    % value into a new token list register \toks#N
+    \expandafter\putargsintokens@\saveparamlist@,;,%
+    % Then, we expand the body so that argument are replaced by their
+    % values. The trick for values not to be expanded themselves is that they
+    % are within tokens and that tokens expand only once in an \edef .
+    \edef\@tempc{\csname mac.\macroname .body\endcsname}%
+    % Now we restore the token stack pointer to free the token list registers
+    % which we have used, but we make sure that expanded body is saved after
+    % group.
+    \expandafter
+  \endgroup
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{\@tempc}%
+  }
+
+% Define the named-macro outside of this group and then close this group. 
+% 
+\def\macargexpandinbody@{% 
+  \expandafter
+  \endgroup
+  \macargdeflist@
+  % First the replace in body the macro arguments by their values, the result
+  % is in \@tempa .
+  \macvalstoargs@
+  % Then we point at the \norecurse or \gobble (for recursive) macro value
+  % with \@tempb .
+  \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempb\csname mac.\macroname .recurse\endcsname
+  % Depending on whether it is recursive or not, we need some tailing
+  % \egroup .
+  \ifx\@tempb\gobble
+     \let\@tempc\relax
+  \else
+     \let\@tempc\egroup
+  \fi
+  % And now we do the real job:
+  \edef\@tempd{\noexpand\@tempb{\macroname}\noexpand\scanmacro{\@tempa}\@tempc}%
+  \@tempd
+}
+
+\def\putargsintokens@#1,{%
+  \if#1;\let\next\relax
+  \else
+    \let\next\putargsintokens@
+    % First we allocate the new token list register, and give it a temporary
+    % alias \@tempb .
+    \toksdef\@tempb\the\paramno
+    % Then we place the argument value into that token list register.
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\@tempa\csname macarg.#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+    \advance\paramno by 1\relax
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+% Trailing missing arguments are set to empty.
+% 
+\def\setemptyargvalues@{%
+  \ifx\paramlist\nilm@
+    \let\next\macargexpandinbody@
+  \else
+    \expandafter\setemptyargvaluesparser@\paramlist\endargs@
+    \let\next\setemptyargvalues@
+  \fi
+  \next
+}
+
+\def\setemptyargvaluesparser@#1,#2\endargs@{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\@tempa\expandafter{%
+    \expandafter\def\csname macarg.#1\endcsname{}}%
+  \push@\@tempa\macargdeflist@
+  \def\paramlist{#2}%
+}
+
+% #1 is the element target macro
+% #2 is the list macro
+% #3,#4\endargs@ is the list value
+\def\pop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
+   \def#1{#3}%
+   \def#2{#4}%
+}
+\long\def\longpop@#1#2#3,#4\endargs@{%
+   \long\def#1{#3}%
+   \long\def#2{#4}%
+}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%% End of code for > 10 arguments %%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+
+% This defines a Texinfo @macro or @rmacro, called by \parsemacbody.
+%    \macrobody has the body of the macro in it, with placeholders for
+% its parameters, looking like "\xeatspaces{\hash 1}".
+%    \paramno is the number of parameters
+%    \paramlist is a TeX parameter text, e.g. "#1,#2,#3,"
+% There are four cases: macros of zero, one, up to nine, and many arguments.
+% \xdef is used so that macro definitions will survive the file
+% they're defined in: @include reads the file inside a group.
+%
+\def\defmacro{%
+  \let\hash=##% convert placeholders to macro parameter chars
+  \ifnum\paramno=1
+    \def\xeatspaces##1{##1}%
+    % This removes the pair of braces around the argument.  We don't
+    % use \eatspaces, because this can cause ends of lines to be lost
+    % when the argument to \eatspaces is read, leading to line-based
+    % commands like "@itemize" not being read correctly.
+  \else
+    \let\xeatspaces\relax % suppress expansion
+  \fi
+  \ifcase\paramno
+  % 0
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+      \bgroup
+        \noexpand\spaceisspace
+        \noexpand\endlineisspace
+        \noexpand\expandafter % skip any whitespace after the macro name.
+        \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{%
+      \egroup
+      \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
+  \or % 1
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+       \bgroup
+       \noexpand\braceorline
+       \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname}%
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
+      \egroup
+      \noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}%
+      }%
+  \else % at most 9
+    \ifnum\paramno<10\relax
+      % @MACNAME sets the context for reading the macro argument
+      % @MACNAME@@ gets the argument, processes backslashes and appends a 
+      % comma.
+      % @MACNAME@@@ removes braces surrounding the argument list.
+      % @MACNAME@@@@ scans the macro body with arguments substituted.
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \bgroup
+        \noexpand\expandafter  % This \expandafter skip any spaces after the
+        \noexpand\macroargctxt % macro before we change the catcode of space.
+        \noexpand\expandafter
+        \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@\endcsname##1{%
+          \noexpand\passargtomacro
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname{##1,}}%
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname @@@\endcsname##1{%
+          \expandafter\noexpand\csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname ##1}%
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\xdef
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+        \csname\the\macname @@@@\endcsname\paramlist{%
+          \egroup\noexpand\scanmacro{\macrobody}}%
+    \else % 10 or more:
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname\the\macname\endcsname{%
+        \noexpand\getargvals@{\the\macname}{\argl}%
+      }%
+      \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .body\endcsname\macrobody
+      \global\expandafter\let\csname mac.\the\macname .recurse\endcsname\gobble
+    \fi
+  \fi}
+
+\catcode `\@\texiatcatcode\relax % end private-to-Texinfo catcodes
+
+\def\norecurse#1{\bgroup\cslet{#1}{macsave.#1}}
+
+
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+%
+{\catcode`\@=0 \catcode`\\=13  % We need to manipulate \ so use @ as escape
+@catcode`@_=11  % private names
+@catcode`@!=11  % used as argument separator
+
+% \passargtomacro#1#2 -
+% Call #1 with a list of tokens #2, with any doubled backslashes in #2
+% compressed to one.
+%
+% This implementation works by expansion, and not execution (so we cannot use 
+% \def or similar).  This reduces the risk of this failing in contexts where 
+% complete expansion is done with no execution (for example, in writing out to 
+% an auxiliary file for an index entry).
+% 
+% State is kept in the input stream: the argument passed to
+% @look_ahead, @gobble_and_check_finish and @add_segment is
+%
+% THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT ! {PENDING_BS} NEXT_TOKEN  (... rest of input)
+%
+% where:
+% THE_MACRO - name of the macro we want to call
+% ARG_RESULT - argument list we build to pass to that macro
+% PENDING_BS - either a backslash or nothing
+% NEXT_TOKEN - used to look ahead in the input stream to see what's coming next
+
+@gdef@passargtomacro#1#2{%
+  @add_segment #1!{}@relax#2\@_finish\%
+}
+@gdef@_finish{@_finishx} @global@let@_finishx@relax
+
+% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
+% #2 - PENDING_BS
+% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
+% #4 used to look ahead
+%
+% If the next token is not a backslash, process the rest of the argument; 
+% otherwise, remove the next token.
+@gdef@look_ahead#1!#2#3#4{%
+  @ifx#4\%
+   @expandafter@gobble_and_check_finish 
+  @else
+   @expandafter@add_segment
+  @fi#1!{#2}#4#4%
+}
+
+% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
+% #2 - PENDING_BS
+% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
+% #4 should be a backslash, which is gobbled.
+% #5 looks ahead
+%
+% Double backslash found.  Add a single backslash, and look ahead.
+@gdef@gobble_and_check_finish#1!#2#3#4#5{%
+  @add_segment#1\!{}#5#5%
+}
+
+@gdef@is_fi{@fi}
+
+% #1 - THE_MACRO ARG_RESULT
+% #2 - PENDING_BS
+% #3 - NEXT_TOKEN
+% #4 is input stream until next backslash
+%
+% Input stream is either at the start of the argument, or just after a 
+% backslash sequence, either a lone backslash, or a doubled backslash.  
+% NEXT_TOKEN contains the first token in the input stream: if it is \finish, 
+% finish; otherwise, append to ARG_RESULT the segment of the argument up until
+% the next backslash.  PENDING_BACKSLASH contains a backslash to represent
+% a backslash just before the start of the input stream that has not been
+% added to ARG_RESULT.
+@gdef@add_segment#1!#2#3#4\{%
+@ifx#3@_finish
+  @call_the_macro#1!%
+@else
+  % append the pending backslash to the result, followed by the next segment
+  @expandafter@is_fi@look_ahead#1#2#4!{\}@fi
+  % this @fi is discarded by @look_ahead.
+  % we can't get rid of it with \expandafter because we don't know how 
+  % long #4 is.
+}
+
+% #1 - THE_MACRO
+% #2 - ARG_RESULT
+% #3 discards the res of the conditional in @add_segment, and @is_fi ends the 
+% conditional.
+@gdef@call_the_macro#1#2!#3@fi{@is_fi #1{#2}}
+
+}
+%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
+
+% \braceorline MAC is used for a one-argument macro MAC.  It checks
+% whether the next non-whitespace character is a {.  It sets the context
+% for reading the argument (slightly different in the two cases).  Then,
+% to read the argument, in the whole-line case, it then calls the regular
+% \parsearg MAC; in the lbrace case, it calls \passargtomacro MAC.
+% 
+\def\braceorline#1{\let\macnamexxx=#1\futurelet\nchar\braceorlinexxx}
+\def\braceorlinexxx{%
+  \ifx\nchar\bgroup
+    \macroargctxt
+    \expandafter\passargtomacro
+  \else
+    \macrolineargctxt\expandafter\parsearg
+  \fi \macnamexxx}
+
+
+% @alias.
+% We need some trickery to remove the optional spaces around the equal
+% sign.  Make them active and then expand them all to nothing.
+%
+\def\alias{\parseargusing\obeyspaces\aliasxxx}
+\def\aliasxxx #1{\aliasyyy#1\relax}
+\def\aliasyyy #1=#2\relax{%
+  {%
+    \expandafter\let\obeyedspace=\empty
+    \addtomacrolist{#1}%
+    \xdef\next{\global\let\makecsname{#1}=\makecsname{#2}}%
+  }%
+  \next
+}
+
+
+\message{cross references,}
+
+\newwrite\auxfile
+\newif\ifhavexrefs    % True if xref values are known.
+\newif\ifwarnedxrefs  % True if we warned once that they aren't known.
+
+% @inforef is relatively simple.
+\def\inforef #1{\inforefzzz #1,,,,**}
+\def\inforefzzz #1,#2,#3,#4**{%
+  \putwordSee{} \putwordInfo{} \putwordfile{} \file{\ignorespaces #3{}},
+  node \samp{\ignorespaces#1{}}}
+
+% @node's only job in TeX is to define \lastnode, which is used in
+% cross-references.  The @node line might or might not have commas, and
+% might or might not have spaces before the first comma, like:
+% @node foo , bar , ...
+% We don't want such trailing spaces in the node name.
+%
+\parseargdef\node{\checkenv{}\donode #1 ,\finishnodeparse}
+%
+% also remove a trailing comma, in case of something like this:
+% @node Help-Cross,  ,  , Cross-refs
+\def\donode#1 ,#2\finishnodeparse{\dodonode #1,\finishnodeparse}
+\def\dodonode#1,#2\finishnodeparse{\gdef\lastnode{#1}}
+
+\let\nwnode=\node
+\let\lastnode=\empty
+
+% Write a cross-reference definition for the current node.  #1 is the
+% type (Ynumbered, Yappendix, Ynothing).
+%
+\def\donoderef#1{%
+  \ifx\lastnode\empty\else
+    \setref{\lastnode}{#1}%
+    \global\let\lastnode=\empty
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @anchor{NAME} -- define xref target at arbitrary point.
+%
+\newcount\savesfregister
+%
+\def\savesf{\relax \ifhmode \savesfregister=\spacefactor \fi}
+\def\restoresf{\relax \ifhmode \spacefactor=\savesfregister \fi}
+\def\anchor#1{\savesf \setref{#1}{Ynothing}\restoresf \ignorespaces}
+
+% \setref{NAME}{SNT} defines a cross-reference point NAME (a node or an
+% anchor), which consists of three parts:
+% 1) NAME-title - the current sectioning name taken from \lastsection,
+%                 or the anchor name.
+% 2) NAME-snt   - section number and type, passed as the SNT arg, or
+%                 empty for anchors.
+% 3) NAME-pg    - the page number.
+%
+% This is called from \donoderef, \anchor, and \dofloat.  In the case of
+% floats, there is an additional part, which is not written here:
+% 4) NAME-lof   - the text as it should appear in a @listoffloats.
+%
+\def\setref#1#2{%
+  \pdfmkdest{#1}%
+  \iflinks
+    {%
+      \requireauxfile
+      \atdummies  % preserve commands, but don't expand them
+      % match definition in \xrdef, \refx, \xrefX.
+      \def\value##1{##1}%
+      \edef\writexrdef##1##2{%
+	\write\auxfile{@xrdef{#1-% #1 of \setref, expanded by the \edef
+	  ##1}{##2}}% these are parameters of \writexrdef
+      }%
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\lastsection}%
+      \immediate \writexrdef{title}{\the\toks0 }%
+      \immediate \writexrdef{snt}{\csname #2\endcsname}% \Ynumbered etc.
+      \safewhatsit{\writexrdef{pg}{\folio}}% will be written later, at \shipout
+    }%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% @xrefautosectiontitle on|off says whether @section(ing) names are used
+% automatically in xrefs, if the third arg is not explicitly specified.
+% This was provided as a "secret" @set xref-automatic-section-title
+% variable, now it's official.
+% 
+\parseargdef\xrefautomaticsectiontitle{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \ifx\temp\onword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
+      = \empty
+  \else\ifx\temp\offword
+    \expandafter\let\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname
+      = \relax
+  \else
+    \errhelp = \EMsimple
+    \errmessage{Unknown @xrefautomaticsectiontitle value `\temp',
+                must be on|off}%
+  \fi\fi
+}
+
+% 
+% @xref, @pxref, and @ref generate cross-references.  For \xrefX, #1 is
+% the node name, #2 the name of the Info cross-reference, #3 the printed
+% node name, #4 the name of the Info file, #5 the name of the printed
+% manual.  All but the node name can be omitted.
+%
+\def\pxref{\putwordsee{} \xrefXX}
+\def\xref{\putwordSee{} \xrefXX}
+\def\ref{\xrefXX}
+
+\def\xrefXX#1{\def\xrefXXarg{#1}\futurelet\tokenafterxref\xrefXXX}
+\def\xrefXXX{\expandafter\xrefX\expandafter[\xrefXXarg,,,,,,,]}
+%
+\newbox\toprefbox
+\newbox\printedrefnamebox
+\newbox\infofilenamebox
+\newbox\printedmanualbox
+%
+\def\xrefX[#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6]{\begingroup
+  \unsepspaces
+  %
+  % Get args without leading/trailing spaces.
+  \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #3}%
+  \setbox\printedrefnamebox = \hbox{\printedrefname\unskip}%
+  %
+  \def\infofilename{\ignorespaces #4}%
+  \setbox\infofilenamebox = \hbox{\infofilename\unskip}%
+  %
+  \def\printedmanual{\ignorespaces #5}%
+  \setbox\printedmanualbox  = \hbox{\printedmanual\unskip}%
+  %
+  % If the printed reference name (arg #3) was not explicitly given in
+  % the @xref, figure out what we want to use.
+  \ifdim \wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
+    % No printed node name was explicitly given.
+    \expandafter\ifx\csname SETxref-automatic-section-title\endcsname \relax
+      % Not auto section-title: use node name inside the square brackets.
+      \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+    \else
+      % Auto section-title: use chapter/section title inside
+      % the square brackets if we have it.
+      \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
+        % It is in another manual, so we don't have it; use node name.
+        \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+      \else
+        \ifhavexrefs
+          % We (should) know the real title if we have the xref values.
+          \def\printedrefname{\refx{#1-title}{}}%
+        \else
+          % Otherwise just copy the Info node name.
+          \def\printedrefname{\ignorespaces #1}%
+        \fi%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Make link in pdf output.
+  \ifpdf
+    % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX
+    {\indexnofonts
+     \makevalueexpandable
+     \turnoffactive
+     % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
+     % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.  This ignores all spaces in
+     % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
+     \getfilename{#4}%
+     %
+     % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
+     % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
+     \setpdfdestname{#1}%
+     %
+     \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
+       \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets
+     \fi
+     %
+     \leavevmode
+     \startlink attr{/Border [0 0 0]}%
+     \ifnum\filenamelength>0
+       goto file{\the\filename.pdf} name{\pdfdestname}%
+     \else
+       goto name{\pdfmkpgn{\pdfdestname}}%
+     \fi
+    }%
+    \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
+  \else
+    \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+    \else
+      % For XeTeX
+      {\indexnofonts
+       \makevalueexpandable
+       \turnoffactive
+       % This expands tokens, so do it after making catcode changes, so _
+       % etc. don't get their TeX definitions.  This ignores all spaces in
+       % #4, including (wrongly) those in the middle of the filename.
+       \getfilename{#4}%
+       %
+       % This (wrongly) does not take account of leading or trailing
+       % spaces in #1, which should be ignored.
+       \setpdfdestname{#1}%
+       %
+       \ifx\pdfdestname\empty
+         \def\pdfdestname{Top}% no empty targets
+       \fi
+       %
+       \leavevmode
+       \ifnum\filenamelength>0
+         % With default settings,
+         % XeTeX (xdvipdfmx) replaces link destination names with integers.
+         % In this case, the replaced destination names of
+         % remote PDFs are no longer known.  In order to avoid a replacement,
+         % you can use xdvipdfmx's command line option `-C 0x0010'.
+         % If you use XeTeX 0.99996+ (TeX Live 2016+),
+         % this command line option is no longer necessary
+         % because we can use the `dvipdfmx:config' special.
+         \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A
+           << /S /GoToR /F (\the\filename.pdf) /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}%
+       \else
+         \special{pdf:bann << /Border [0 0 0] /Type /Annot /Subtype /Link /A
+           << /S /GoTo /D (\pdfdestname) >> >>}%
+       \fi
+      }%
+      \setcolor{\linkcolor}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  {%
+    % Have to otherify everything special to allow the \csname to
+    % include an _ in the xref name, etc.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \def\value##1{##1}%
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\Xthisreftitle
+      \csname XR#1-title\endcsname
+  }%
+  %
+  % Float references are printed completely differently: "Figure 1.2"
+  % instead of "[somenode], p.3".  \iffloat distinguishes them by
+  % \Xthisreftitle being set to a magic string.
+  \iffloat\Xthisreftitle
+    % If the user specified the print name (third arg) to the ref,
+    % print it instead of our usual "Figure 1.2".
+    \ifdim\wd\printedrefnamebox = 0pt
+      \refx{#1-snt}{}%
+    \else
+      \printedrefname
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If the user also gave the printed manual name (fifth arg), append
+    % "in MANUALNAME".
+    \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
+      \space \putwordin{} \cite{\printedmanual}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % node/anchor (non-float) references.
+    % 
+    % If we use \unhbox to print the node names, TeX does not insert
+    % empty discretionaries after hyphens, which means that it will not
+    % find a line break at a hyphen in a node names.  Since some manuals
+    % are best written with fairly long node names, containing hyphens,
+    % this is a loss.  Therefore, we give the text of the node name
+    % again, so it is as if TeX is seeing it for the first time.
+    % 
+    \ifdim \wd\printedmanualbox > 0pt
+      % Cross-manual reference with a printed manual name.
+      % 
+      \crossmanualxref{\cite{\printedmanual\unskip}}%
+    %
+    \else\ifdim \wd\infofilenamebox > 0pt
+      % Cross-manual reference with only an info filename (arg 4), no
+      % printed manual name (arg 5).  This is essentially the same as
+      % the case above; we output the filename, since we have nothing else.
+      % 
+      \crossmanualxref{\code{\infofilename\unskip}}%
+    %
+    \else
+      % Reference within this manual.
+      %
+      % _ (for example) has to be the character _ for the purposes of the
+      % control sequence corresponding to the node, but it has to expand
+      % into the usual \leavevmode...\vrule stuff for purposes of
+      % printing. So we \turnoffactive for the \refx-snt, back on for the
+      % printing, back off for the \refx-pg.
+      {\turnoffactive
+       % Only output a following space if the -snt ref is nonempty; for
+       % @unnumbered and @anchor, it won't be.
+       \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \refx{#1-snt}{}}%
+       \ifdim \wd2 > 0pt \refx{#1-snt}\space\fi
+      }%
+      % output the `[mynode]' via the macro below so it can be overridden.
+      \xrefprintnodename\printedrefname
+      %
+      % But we always want a comma and a space:
+      ,\space
+      %
+      % output the `page 3'.
+      \turnoffactive \putwordpage\tie\refx{#1-pg}{}%
+      % Add a , if xref followed by a space
+      \if\space\noexpand\tokenafterxref ,%
+      \else\ifx\	\tokenafterxref ,% @TAB
+      \else\ifx\*\tokenafterxref ,%   @*
+      \else\ifx\ \tokenafterxref ,%   @SPACE
+      \else\ifx\
+                \tokenafterxref ,%    @NL
+      \else\ifx\tie\tokenafterxref ,% @tie
+      \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+    \fi\fi
+  \fi
+  \endlink
+\endgroup}
+
+% Output a cross-manual xref to #1.  Used just above (twice).
+% 
+% Only include the text "Section ``foo'' in" if the foo is neither
+% missing or Top.  Thus, @xref{,,,foo,The Foo Manual} outputs simply
+% "see The Foo Manual", the idea being to refer to the whole manual.
+% 
+% But, this being TeX, we can't easily compare our node name against the
+% string "Top" while ignoring the possible spaces before and after in
+% the input.  By adding the arbitrary 7sp below, we make it much less
+% likely that a real node name would have the same width as "Top" (e.g.,
+% in a monospaced font).  Hopefully it will never happen in practice.
+% 
+% For the same basic reason, we retypeset the "Top" at every
+% reference, since the current font is indeterminate.
+% 
+\def\crossmanualxref#1{%
+  \setbox\toprefbox = \hbox{Top\kern7sp}%
+  \setbox2 = \hbox{\ignorespaces \printedrefname \unskip \kern7sp}%
+  \ifdim \wd2 > 7sp  % nonempty?
+    \ifdim \wd2 = \wd\toprefbox \else  % same as Top?
+      \putwordSection{} ``\printedrefname'' \putwordin{}\space
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  #1%
+}
+
+% This macro is called from \xrefX for the `[nodename]' part of xref
+% output.  It's a separate macro only so it can be changed more easily,
+% since square brackets don't work well in some documents.  Particularly
+% one that Bob is working on :).
+%
+\def\xrefprintnodename#1{[#1]}
+
+% Things referred to by \setref.
+%
+\def\Ynothing{}
+\def\Yomitfromtoc{}
+\def\Ynumbered{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+    \putwordChapter@tie \the\chapno
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+  \else
+    \putwordSection@tie \the\chapno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+\def\Yappendix{%
+  \ifnum\secno=0
+     \putwordAppendix@tie @char\the\appendixno{}%
+  \else \ifnum\subsecno=0
+     \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno
+  \else \ifnum\subsubsecno=0
+    \putwordSection@tie @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno
+  \else
+    \putwordSection@tie
+      @char\the\appendixno.\the\secno.\the\subsecno.\the\subsubsecno
+  \fi\fi\fi
+}
+
+% \refx{NAME}{SUFFIX} - reference a cross-reference string named NAME.  SUFFIX 
+% is output afterwards if non-empty.
+\def\refx#1#2{%
+  \requireauxfile
+  {%
+    \indexnofonts
+    \otherbackslash
+    \def\value##1{##1}%
+    \expandafter\global\expandafter\let\expandafter\thisrefX
+      \csname XR#1\endcsname
+  }%
+  \ifx\thisrefX\relax
+    % If not defined, say something at least.
+    \angleleft un\-de\-fined\angleright
+    \iflinks
+      \ifhavexrefs
+        {\toks0 = {#1}% avoid expansion of possibly-complex value
+         \message{\linenumber Undefined cross reference `\the\toks0'.}}%
+      \else
+        \ifwarnedxrefs\else
+          \global\warnedxrefstrue
+          \message{Cross reference values unknown; you must run TeX again.}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \else
+    % It's defined, so just use it.
+    \thisrefX
+  \fi
+  #2% Output the suffix in any case.
+}
+
+% This is the macro invoked by entries in the aux file.  Define a control 
+% sequence for a cross-reference target (we prepend XR to the control sequence 
+% name to avoid collisions).  The value is the page number.  If this is a float 
+% type, we have more work to do.
+%
+\def\xrdef#1#2{%
+  {% Expand the node or anchor name to remove control sequences.
+   % \turnoffactive stops 8-bit characters being changed to commands
+   % like @'e.  \refx does the same to retrieve the value in the definition.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \def\value##1{##1}%
+    \xdef\safexrefname{#1}%
+  }%
+  %
+  \bgroup
+    \expandafter\gdef\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname{#2}%
+  \egroup
+  % We put the \gdef inside a group to avoid the definitions building up on 
+  % TeX's save stack, which can cause it to run out of space for aux files with 
+  % thousands of lines.  \gdef doesn't use the save stack, but \csname does
+  % when it defines an unknown control sequence as \relax. 
+  %
+  % Was that xref control sequence that we just defined for a float?
+  \expandafter\iffloat\csname XR\safexrefname\endcsname
+    % it was a float, and we have the (safe) float type in \iffloattype.
+    \expandafter\let\expandafter\floatlist
+      \csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname
+    %
+    % Is this the first time we've seen this float type?
+    \expandafter\ifx\floatlist\relax
+      \toks0 = {\do}% yes, so just \do
+    \else
+      % had it before, so preserve previous elements in list.
+      \toks0 = \expandafter{\floatlist\do}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Remember this xref in the control sequence \floatlistFLOATTYPE,
+    % for later use in \listoffloats.
+    \expandafter\xdef\csname floatlist\iffloattype\endcsname{\the\toks0
+      {\safexrefname}}%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% If working on a large document in chapters, it is convenient to
+% be able to disable indexing, cross-referencing, and contents, for test runs.
+% This is done with @novalidate at the beginning of the file.
+%
+\newif\iflinks \linkstrue % by default we want the aux files.
+\let\novalidate = \linksfalse
+
+% Used when writing to the aux file, or when using data from it.
+\def\requireauxfile{%
+  \iflinks
+    \tryauxfile
+    % Open the new aux file.  TeX will close it automatically at exit.
+    \immediate\openout\auxfile=\jobname.aux
+  \fi
+  \global\let\requireauxfile=\relax   % Only do this once.
+}
+
+% Read the last existing aux file, if any.  No error if none exists.
+%
+\def\tryauxfile{%
+  \openin 1 \jobname.aux
+  \ifeof 1 \else
+    \readdatafile{aux}%
+    \global\havexrefstrue
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+}
+
+\def\setupdatafile{%
+  \catcode`\^^@=\other
+  \catcode`\^^A=\other
+  \catcode`\^^B=\other
+  \catcode`\^^C=\other
+  \catcode`\^^D=\other
+  \catcode`\^^E=\other
+  \catcode`\^^F=\other
+  \catcode`\^^G=\other
+  \catcode`\^^H=\other
+  \catcode`\^^K=\other
+  \catcode`\^^L=\other
+  \catcode`\^^N=\other
+  \catcode`\^^P=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Q=\other
+  \catcode`\^^R=\other
+  \catcode`\^^S=\other
+  \catcode`\^^T=\other
+  \catcode`\^^U=\other
+  \catcode`\^^V=\other
+  \catcode`\^^W=\other
+  \catcode`\^^X=\other
+  \catcode`\^^Z=\other
+  \catcode`\^^[=\other
+  \catcode`\^^\=\other
+  \catcode`\^^]=\other
+  \catcode`\^^^=\other
+  \catcode`\^^_=\other
+  % It was suggested to set the catcode of ^ to 7, which would allow ^^e4 etc.
+  % in xref tags, i.e., node names.  But since ^^e4 notation isn't
+  % supported in the main text, it doesn't seem desirable.  Furthermore,
+  % that is not enough: for node names that actually contain a ^
+  % character, we would end up writing a line like this: 'xrdef {'hat
+  % b-title}{'hat b} and \xrdef does a \csname...\endcsname on the first
+  % argument, and \hat is not an expandable control sequence.  It could
+  % all be worked out, but why?  Either we support ^^ or we don't.
+  %
+  % The other change necessary for this was to define \auxhat:
+  % \def\auxhat{\def^{'hat }}% extra space so ok if followed by letter
+  % and then to call \auxhat in \setq.
+  %
+  \catcode`\^=\other
+  %
+  % Special characters.  Should be turned off anyway, but...
+  \catcode`\~=\other
+  \catcode`\[=\other
+  \catcode`\]=\other
+  \catcode`\"=\other
+  \catcode`\_=\other
+  \catcode`\|=\other
+  \catcode`\<=\other
+  \catcode`\>=\other
+  \catcode`\$=\other
+  \catcode`\#=\other
+  \catcode`\&=\other
+  \catcode`\%=\other
+  \catcode`+=\other % avoid \+ for paranoia even though we've turned it off
+  %
+  % This is to support \ in node names and titles, since the \
+  % characters end up in a \csname.  It's easier than
+  % leaving it active and making its active definition an actual \
+  % character.  What I don't understand is why it works in the *value*
+  % of the xrdef.  Seems like it should be a catcode12 \, and that
+  % should not typeset properly.  But it works, so I'm moving on for
+  % now.  --karl, 15jan04.
+  \catcode`\\=\other
+  %
+  % @ is our escape character in .aux files, and we need braces.
+  \catcode`\{=1
+  \catcode`\}=2
+  \catcode`\@=0
+}
+
+\def\readdatafile#1{%
+\begingroup
+  \setupdatafile
+  \input\jobname.#1
+\endgroup}
+
+
+\message{insertions,}
+% including footnotes.
+
+\newcount \footnoteno
+
+% The trailing space in the following definition for supereject is
+% vital for proper filling; pages come out unaligned when you do a
+% pagealignmacro call if that space before the closing brace is
+% removed. (Generally, numeric constants should always be followed by a
+% space to prevent strange expansion errors.)
+\def\supereject{\par\penalty -20000\footnoteno =0 }
+
+% @footnotestyle is meaningful for Info output only.
+\let\footnotestyle=\comment
+
+{\catcode `\@=11
+%
+% Auto-number footnotes.  Otherwise like plain.
+\gdef\footnote{%
+  \global\advance\footnoteno by \@ne
+  \edef\thisfootno{$^{\the\footnoteno}$}%
+  %
+  % In case the footnote comes at the end of a sentence, preserve the
+  % extra spacing after we do the footnote number.
+  \let\@sf\empty
+  \ifhmode\edef\@sf{\spacefactor\the\spacefactor}\ptexslash\fi
+  %
+  % Remove inadvertent blank space before typesetting the footnote number.
+  \unskip
+  \thisfootno\@sf
+  \dofootnote
+}%
+
+% Don't bother with the trickery in plain.tex to not require the
+% footnote text as a parameter.  Our footnotes don't need to be so general.
+%
+% Oh yes, they do; otherwise, @ifset (and anything else that uses
+% \parseargline) fails inside footnotes because the tokens are fixed when
+% the footnote is read.  --karl, 16nov96.
+%
+\gdef\dofootnote{%
+  \insert\footins\bgroup
+  %
+  % Nested footnotes are not supported in TeX, that would take a lot
+  % more work.  (\startsavinginserts does not suffice.)
+  \let\footnote=\errfootnotenest
+  %
+  % We want to typeset this text as a normal paragraph, even if the
+  % footnote reference occurs in (for example) a display environment.
+  % So reset some parameters.
+  \hsize=\txipagewidth
+  \interlinepenalty\interfootnotelinepenalty
+  \splittopskip\ht\strutbox % top baseline for broken footnotes
+  \splitmaxdepth\dp\strutbox
+  \floatingpenalty\@MM
+  \leftskip\z@skip
+  \rightskip\z@skip
+  \spaceskip\z@skip
+  \xspaceskip\z@skip
+  \parindent\defaultparindent
+  %
+  \smallfonts \rm
+  %
+  % Because we use hanging indentation in footnotes, a @noindent appears
+  % to exdent this text, so make it be a no-op.  makeinfo does not use
+  % hanging indentation so @noindent can still be needed within footnote
+  % text after an @example or the like (not that this is good style).
+  \let\noindent = \relax
+  %
+  % Hang the footnote text off the number.  Use \everypar in case the
+  % footnote extends for more than one paragraph.
+  \everypar = {\hang}%
+  \textindent{\thisfootno}%
+  %
+  % Don't crash into the line above the footnote text.  Since this
+  % expands into a box, it must come within the paragraph, lest it
+  % provide a place where TeX can split the footnote.
+  \footstrut
+  %
+  % Invoke rest of plain TeX footnote routine.
+  \futurelet\next\fo@t
+}
+}%end \catcode `\@=11
+
+\def\errfootnotenest{%
+  \errhelp=\EMsimple
+  \errmessage{Nested footnotes not supported in texinfo.tex,
+    even though they work in makeinfo; sorry}
+}
+
+\def\errfootnoteheading{%
+  \errhelp=\EMsimple
+  \errmessage{Footnotes in chapters, sections, etc., are not supported}
+}
+
+% In case a @footnote appears in a vbox, save the footnote text and create
+% the real \insert just after the vbox finished.  Otherwise, the insertion
+% would be lost.
+% Similarly, if a @footnote appears inside an alignment, save the footnote
+% text to a box and make the \insert when a row of the table is finished.
+% And the same can be done for other insert classes.  --kasal, 16nov03.
+%
+% Replace the \insert primitive by a cheating macro.
+% Deeper inside, just make sure that the saved insertions are not spilled
+% out prematurely.
+%
+\def\startsavinginserts{%
+  \ifx \insert\ptexinsert
+    \let\insert\saveinsert
+  \else
+    \let\checkinserts\relax
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This \insert replacement works for both \insert\footins{foo} and
+% \insert\footins\bgroup foo\egroup, but it doesn't work for \insert27{foo}.
+%
+\def\saveinsert#1{%
+  \edef\next{\noexpand\savetobox \makeSAVEname#1}%
+  \afterassignment\next
+  % swallow the left brace
+  \let\temp =
+}
+\def\makeSAVEname#1{\makecsname{SAVE\expandafter\gobble\string#1}}
+\def\savetobox#1{\global\setbox#1 = \vbox\bgroup \unvbox#1}
+
+\def\checksaveins#1{\ifvoid#1\else \placesaveins#1\fi}
+
+\def\placesaveins#1{%
+  \ptexinsert \csname\expandafter\gobblesave\string#1\endcsname
+    {\box#1}%
+}
+
+% eat @SAVE -- beware, all of them have catcode \other:
+{
+  \def\dospecials{\do S\do A\do V\do E} \uncatcodespecials  %  ;-)
+  \gdef\gobblesave @SAVE{}
+}
+
+% initialization:
+\def\newsaveins #1{%
+  \edef\next{\noexpand\newsaveinsX \makeSAVEname#1}%
+  \next
+}
+\def\newsaveinsX #1{%
+  \csname newbox\endcsname #1%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\checkinserts\expandafter{\checkinserts
+    \checksaveins #1}%
+}
+
+% initialize:
+\let\checkinserts\empty
+\newsaveins\footins
+\newsaveins\margin
+
+
+% @image.  We use the macros from epsf.tex to support this.
+% If epsf.tex is not installed and @image is used, we complain.
+%
+% Check for and read epsf.tex up front.  If we read it only at @image
+% time, we might be inside a group, and then its definitions would get
+% undone and the next image would fail.
+\openin 1 = epsf.tex
+\ifeof 1 \else
+  % Do not bother showing banner with epsf.tex v2.7k (available in
+  % doc/epsf.tex and on ctan).
+  \def\epsfannounce{\toks0 = }%
+  \input epsf.tex
+\fi
+\closein 1
+%
+% We will only complain once about lack of epsf.tex.
+\newif\ifwarnednoepsf
+\newhelp\noepsfhelp{epsf.tex must be installed for images to
+  work.  It is also included in the Texinfo distribution, or you can get
+  it from https://ctan.org/texarchive/macros/texinfo/texinfo/doc/epsf.tex.}
+%
+\def\image#1{%
+  \ifx\epsfbox\thisisundefined
+    \ifwarnednoepsf \else
+      \errhelp = \noepsfhelp
+      \errmessage{epsf.tex not found, images will be ignored}%
+      \global\warnednoepsftrue
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \imagexxx #1,,,,,\finish
+  \fi
+}
+%
+% Arguments to @image:
+% #1 is (mandatory) image filename; we tack on .eps extension.
+% #2 is (optional) width, #3 is (optional) height.
+% #4 is (ignored optional) html alt text.
+% #5 is (ignored optional) extension.
+% #6 is just the usual extra ignored arg for parsing stuff.
+\newif\ifimagevmode
+\def\imagexxx#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6\finish{\begingroup
+  \catcode`\^^M = 5     % in case we're inside an example
+  \normalturnoffactive  % allow _ et al. in names
+  \def\xprocessmacroarg{\eatspaces}% in case we are being used via a macro
+  % If the image is by itself, center it.
+  \ifvmode
+    \imagevmodetrue
+  \else \ifx\centersub\centerV
+    % for @center @image, we need a vbox so we can have our vertical space
+    \imagevmodetrue
+    \vbox\bgroup % vbox has better behavior than vtop herev
+  \fi\fi
+  %
+  \ifimagevmode
+    \nobreak\medskip
+    % Usually we'll have text after the image which will insert
+    % \parskip glue, so insert it here too to equalize the space
+    % above and below.
+    \nobreak\vskip\parskip
+    \nobreak
+  \fi
+  %
+  % Leave vertical mode so that indentation from an enclosing
+  %  environment such as @quotation is respected.
+  % However, if we're at the top level, we don't want the
+  %  normal paragraph indentation.
+  % On the other hand, if we are in the case of @center @image, we don't
+  %  want to start a paragraph, which will create a hsize-width box and
+  %  eradicate the centering.
+  \ifx\centersub\centerV\else \noindent \fi
+  %
+  % Output the image.
+  \ifpdf
+    % For pdfTeX and LuaTeX <= 0.80
+    \dopdfimage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+  \else
+    \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+      % For epsf.tex
+      % \epsfbox itself resets \epsf?size at each figure.
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}%
+        \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfxsize=#2\relax \fi
+      \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #3}%
+        \ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \epsfysize=#3\relax \fi
+      \epsfbox{#1.eps}%
+    \else
+      % For XeTeX
+      \doxeteximage{#1}{#2}{#3}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  \ifimagevmode
+    \medskip  % space after a standalone image
+  \fi  
+  \ifx\centersub\centerV \egroup \fi
+\endgroup}
+
+
+% @float FLOATTYPE,LABEL,LOC ... @end float for displayed figures, tables,
+% etc.  We don't actually implement floating yet, we always include the
+% float "here".  But it seemed the best name for the future.
+%
+\envparseargdef\float{\eatcommaspace\eatcommaspace\dofloat#1, , ,\finish}
+
+% There may be a space before second and/or third parameter; delete it.
+\def\eatcommaspace#1, {#1,}
+
+% #1 is the optional FLOATTYPE, the text label for this float, typically
+% "Figure", "Table", "Example", etc.  Can't contain commas.  If omitted,
+% this float will not be numbered and cannot be referred to.
+%
+% #2 is the optional xref label.  Also must be present for the float to
+% be referable.
+%
+% #3 is the optional positioning argument; for now, it is ignored.  It
+% will somehow specify the positions allowed to float to (here, top, bottom).
+%
+% We keep a separate counter for each FLOATTYPE, which we reset at each
+% chapter-level command.
+\let\resetallfloatnos=\empty
+%
+\def\dofloat#1,#2,#3,#4\finish{%
+  \let\thiscaption=\empty
+  \let\thisshortcaption=\empty
+  %
+  % don't lose footnotes inside @float.
+  %
+  % BEWARE: when the floats start float, we have to issue warning whenever an
+  % insert appears inside a float which could possibly float. --kasal, 26may04
+  %
+  \startsavinginserts
+  %
+  % We can't be used inside a paragraph.
+  \par
+  %
+  \vtop\bgroup
+    \def\floattype{#1}%
+    \def\floatlabel{#2}%
+    \def\floatloc{#3}% we do nothing with this yet.
+    %
+    \ifx\floattype\empty
+      \let\safefloattype=\empty
+    \else
+      {%
+        % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+        % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+        \indexnofonts
+        \turnoffactive
+        \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If label is given but no type, we handle that as the empty type.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      % We want each FLOATTYPE to be numbered separately (Figure 1,
+      % Table 1, Figure 2, ...).  (And if no label, no number.)
+      %
+      \expandafter\getfloatno\csname\safefloattype floatno\endcsname
+      \global\advance\floatno by 1
+      %
+      {%
+        % This magic value for \lastsection is output by \setref as the
+        % XREFLABEL-title value.  \xrefX uses it to distinguish float
+        % labels (which have a completely different output format) from
+        % node and anchor labels.  And \xrdef uses it to construct the
+        % lists of floats.
+        %
+        \edef\lastsection{\floatmagic=\safefloattype}%
+        \setref{\floatlabel}{Yfloat}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % start with \parskip glue, I guess.
+    \vskip\parskip
+    %
+    % Don't suppress indentation if a float happens to start a section.
+    \restorefirstparagraphindent
+}
+
+% we have these possibilities:
+% @float Foo,lbl & @caption{Cap}: Foo 1.1: Cap
+% @float Foo,lbl & no caption:    Foo 1.1
+% @float Foo & @caption{Cap}:     Foo: Cap
+% @float Foo & no caption:        Foo
+% @float ,lbl & Caption{Cap}:     1.1: Cap
+% @float ,lbl & no caption:       1.1
+% @float & @caption{Cap}:         Cap
+% @float & no caption:
+%
+\def\Efloat{%
+    \let\floatident = \empty
+    %
+    % In all cases, if we have a float type, it comes first.
+    \ifx\floattype\empty \else \def\floatident{\floattype}\fi
+    %
+    % If we have an xref label, the number comes next.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      \ifx\floattype\empty \else % if also had float type, need tie first.
+        \appendtomacro\floatident{\tie}%
+      \fi
+      % the number.
+      \appendtomacro\floatident{\chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % Start the printed caption with what we've constructed in
+    % \floatident, but keep it separate; we need \floatident again.
+    \let\captionline = \floatident
+    %
+    \ifx\thiscaption\empty \else
+      \ifx\floatident\empty \else
+        \appendtomacro\captionline{: }% had ident, so need a colon between
+      \fi
+      %
+      % caption text.
+      \appendtomacro\captionline{\scanexp\thiscaption}%
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If we have anything to print, print it, with space before.
+    % Eventually this needs to become an \insert.
+    \ifx\captionline\empty \else
+      \vskip.5\parskip
+      \captionline
+      %
+      % Space below caption.
+      \vskip\parskip
+    \fi
+    %
+    % If have an xref label, write the list of floats info.  Do this
+    % after the caption, to avoid chance of it being a breakpoint.
+    \ifx\floatlabel\empty \else
+      % Write the text that goes in the lof to the aux file as
+      % \floatlabel-lof.  Besides \floatident, we include the short
+      % caption if specified, else the full caption if specified, else nothing.
+      {%
+        \requireauxfile
+        \atdummies
+        %
+        \ifx\thisshortcaption\empty
+          \def\gtemp{\thiscaption}%
+        \else
+          \def\gtemp{\thisshortcaption}%
+        \fi
+        \immediate\write\auxfile{@xrdef{\floatlabel-lof}{\floatident
+          \ifx\gtemp\empty \else : \gtemp \fi}}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+  \egroup  % end of \vtop
+  %
+  \checkinserts
+}
+
+% Append the tokens #2 to the definition of macro #1, not expanding either.
+%
+\def\appendtomacro#1#2{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter#1\expandafter{#1#2}%
+}
+
+% @caption, @shortcaption
+%
+\def\caption{\docaption\thiscaption}
+\def\shortcaption{\docaption\thisshortcaption}
+\def\docaption{\checkenv\float \bgroup\scanargctxt\defcaption}
+\def\defcaption#1#2{\egroup \def#1{#2}}
+
+% The parameter is the control sequence identifying the counter we are
+% going to use.  Create it if it doesn't exist and assign it to \floatno.
+\def\getfloatno#1{%
+  \ifx#1\relax
+      % Haven't seen this figure type before.
+      \csname newcount\endcsname #1%
+      %
+      % Remember to reset this floatno at the next chap.
+      \expandafter\gdef\expandafter\resetallfloatnos
+        \expandafter{\resetallfloatnos #1=0 }%
+  \fi
+  \let\floatno#1%
+}
+
+% \setref calls this to get the XREFLABEL-snt value.  We want an @xref
+% to the FLOATLABEL to expand to "Figure 3.1".  We call \setref when we
+% first read the @float command.
+%
+\def\Yfloat{\floattype@tie \chaplevelprefix\the\floatno}%
+
+% Magic string used for the XREFLABEL-title value, so \xrefX can
+% distinguish floats from other xref types.
+\def\floatmagic{!!float!!}
+
+% #1 is the control sequence we are passed; we expand into a conditional
+% which is true if #1 represents a float ref.  That is, the magic
+% \lastsection value which we \setref above.
+%
+\def\iffloat#1{\expandafter\doiffloat#1==\finish}
+%
+% #1 is (maybe) the \floatmagic string.  If so, #2 will be the
+% (safe) float type for this float.  We set \iffloattype to #2.
+%
+\def\doiffloat#1=#2=#3\finish{%
+  \def\temp{#1}%
+  \def\iffloattype{#2}%
+  \ifx\temp\floatmagic
+}
+
+% @listoffloats FLOATTYPE - print a list of floats like a table of contents.
+%
+\parseargdef\listoffloats{%
+  \def\floattype{#1}% floattype
+  {%
+    % the floattype might have accents or other special characters,
+    % but we need to use it in a control sequence name.
+    \indexnofonts
+    \turnoffactive
+    \xdef\safefloattype{\floattype}%
+  }%
+  %
+  % \xrdef saves the floats as a \do-list in \floatlistSAFEFLOATTYPE.
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname \relax
+    \ifhavexrefs
+      % if the user said @listoffloats foo but never @float foo.
+      \message{\linenumber No `\safefloattype' floats to list.}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \begingroup
+      \leftskip=\tocindent  % indent these entries like a toc
+      \let\do=\listoffloatsdo
+      \csname floatlist\safefloattype\endcsname
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+
+% This is called on each entry in a list of floats.  We're passed the
+% xref label, in the form LABEL-title, which is how we save it in the
+% aux file.  We strip off the -title and look up \XRLABEL-lof, which
+% has the text we're supposed to typeset here.
+%
+% Figures without xref labels will not be included in the list (since
+% they won't appear in the aux file).
+%
+\def\listoffloatsdo#1{\listoffloatsdoentry#1\finish}
+\def\listoffloatsdoentry#1-title\finish{{%
+  % Can't fully expand XR#1-lof because it can contain anything.  Just
+  % pass the control sequence.  On the other hand, XR#1-pg is just the
+  % page number, and we want to fully expand that so we can get a link
+  % in pdf output.
+  \toksA = \expandafter{\csname XR#1-lof\endcsname}%
+  %
+  % use the same \entry macro we use to generate the TOC and index.
+  \edef\writeentry{\noexpand\entry{\the\toksA}{\csname XR#1-pg\endcsname}}%
+  \writeentry
+}}
+
+
+\message{localization,}
+
+% For single-language documents, @documentlanguage is usually given very
+% early, just after @documentencoding.  Single argument is the language
+% (de) or locale (de_DE) abbreviation.
+%
+{
+  \catcode`\_ = \active
+  \globaldefs=1
+\parseargdef\documentlanguage{%
+  \tex % read txi-??.tex file in plain TeX.
+    % Read the file by the name they passed if it exists.
+    \let_ = \normalunderscore  % normal _ character for filename test
+    \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+    \ifeof 1
+      \documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore #1_\finish
+    \else
+      \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
+      \input txi-#1.tex
+    \fi
+    \closein 1
+  \endgroup % end raw TeX
+}
+%
+% If they passed de_DE, and txi-de_DE.tex doesn't exist,
+% try txi-de.tex.
+%
+\gdef\documentlanguagetrywithoutunderscore#1_#2\finish{%
+  \openin 1 txi-#1.tex
+  \ifeof 1
+    \errhelp = \nolanghelp
+    \errmessage{Cannot read language file txi-#1.tex}%
+  \else
+    \globaldefs = 1  % everything in the txi-LL files needs to persist
+    \input txi-#1.tex
+  \fi
+  \closein 1
+}
+}% end of special _ catcode
+%
+\newhelp\nolanghelp{The given language definition file cannot be found or
+is empty.  Maybe you need to install it?  Putting it in the current
+directory should work if nowhere else does.}
+
+% This macro is called from txi-??.tex files; the first argument is the
+% \language name to set (without the "\lang@" prefix), the second and
+% third args are \{left,right}hyphenmin.
+%
+% The language names to pass are determined when the format is built.
+% See the etex.log file created at that time, e.g.,
+% /usr/local/texlive/2008/texmf-var/web2c/pdftex/etex.log.
+%
+% With TeX Live 2008, etex now includes hyphenation patterns for all
+% available languages.  This means we can support hyphenation in
+% Texinfo, at least to some extent.  (This still doesn't solve the
+% accented characters problem.)
+%
+\catcode`@=11
+\def\txisetlanguage#1#2#3{%
+  % do not set the language if the name is undefined in the current TeX.
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname lang@#1\endcsname \relax
+    \message{no patterns for #1}%
+  \else
+    \global\language = \csname lang@#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+  % but there is no harm in adjusting the hyphenmin values regardless.
+  \global\lefthyphenmin = #2\relax
+  \global\righthyphenmin = #3\relax
+}
+
+% XeTeX and LuaTeX can handle Unicode natively.
+% Their default I/O uses UTF-8 sequences instead of a byte-wise operation.
+% Other TeX engines' I/O (pdfTeX, etc.) is byte-wise.
+%
+\newif\iftxinativeunicodecapable
+\newif\iftxiusebytewiseio
+
+\ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+  \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
+    \txinativeunicodecapablefalse
+    \txiusebytewiseiotrue
+  \else
+    \txinativeunicodecapabletrue
+    \txiusebytewiseiofalse
+  \fi
+\else
+  \txinativeunicodecapabletrue
+  \txiusebytewiseiofalse
+\fi
+
+% Set I/O by bytes instead of UTF-8 sequence for XeTeX and LuaTex
+% for non-UTF-8 (byte-wise) encodings.
+%
+\def\setbytewiseio{%
+  \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+  \else
+    \XeTeXdefaultencoding "bytes"  % For subsequent files to be read
+    \XeTeXinputencoding "bytes"  % For document root file
+    % Unfortunately, there seems to be no corresponding XeTeX command for
+    % output encoding.  This is a problem for auxiliary index and TOC files.
+    % The only solution would be perhaps to write out @U{...} sequences in
+    % place of non-ASCII characters.
+  \fi
+
+  \ifx\luatexversion\thisisundefined
+  \else
+    \directlua{
+    local utf8_char, byte, gsub = unicode.utf8.char, string.byte, string.gsub
+    local function convert_char (char)
+      return utf8_char(byte(char))
+    end
+
+    local function convert_line (line)
+      return gsub(line, ".", convert_char)
+    end
+
+    callback.register("process_input_buffer", convert_line)
+
+    local function convert_line_out (line)
+      local line_out = ""
+      for c in string.utfvalues(line) do
+         line_out = line_out .. string.char(c)
+      end
+      return line_out
+    end
+
+    callback.register("process_output_buffer", convert_line_out)
+    }
+  \fi
+
+  \txiusebytewiseiotrue
+}
+
+
+% Helpers for encodings.
+% Set the catcode of characters 128 through 255 to the specified number.
+%
+\def\setnonasciicharscatcode#1{%
+   \count255=128
+   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
+      \global\catcode\count255=#1\relax
+      \advance\count255 by 1
+   \repeat
+}
+
+\def\setnonasciicharscatcodenonglobal#1{%
+   \count255=128
+   \loop\ifnum\count255<256
+      \catcode\count255=#1\relax
+      \advance\count255 by 1
+   \repeat
+}
+
+% @documentencoding sets the definition of non-ASCII characters
+% according to the specified encoding.
+%
+\def\documentencoding{\parseargusing\filenamecatcodes\documentencodingzzz}
+\def\documentencodingzzz#1{%
+  %
+  % Encoding being declared for the document.
+  \def\declaredencoding{\csname #1.enc\endcsname}%
+  %
+  % Supported encodings: names converted to tokens in order to be able
+  % to compare them with \ifx.
+  \def\ascii{\csname US-ASCII.enc\endcsname}%
+  \def\latnine{\csname ISO-8859-15.enc\endcsname}%
+  \def\latone{\csname ISO-8859-1.enc\endcsname}%
+  \def\lattwo{\csname ISO-8859-2.enc\endcsname}%
+  \def\utfeight{\csname UTF-8.enc\endcsname}%
+  %
+  \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
+     \asciichardefs
+  %
+  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \lattwo
+     \iftxinativeunicodecapable
+       \setbytewiseio
+     \fi
+     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+     \lattwochardefs
+  %
+  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latone
+     \iftxinativeunicodecapable
+       \setbytewiseio
+     \fi
+     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+     \latonechardefs
+  %
+  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \latnine
+     \iftxinativeunicodecapable
+       \setbytewiseio
+     \fi
+     \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+     \latninechardefs
+  %
+  \else \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
+     \iftxinativeunicodecapable
+       % For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX)
+       \nativeunicodechardefs
+     \else
+       % For treating UTF-8 as byte sequences (TeX, eTeX and pdfTeX)
+       \setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+       % since we already invoked \utfeightchardefs at the top level
+       % (below), do not re-invoke it, otherwise our check for duplicated
+       % definitions gets triggered.  Making non-ascii chars active is
+       % sufficient.
+     \fi
+  %
+  \else
+    \message{Ignoring unknown document encoding: #1.}%
+  %
+  \fi % utfeight
+  \fi % latnine
+  \fi % latone
+  \fi % lattwo
+  \fi % ascii
+  %
+  \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+  \else
+    \ifx \declaredencoding \utfeight
+    \else
+      \ifx \declaredencoding \ascii
+      \else
+        \message{Warning: XeTeX with non-UTF-8 encodings cannot handle %
+        non-ASCII characters in auxiliary files.}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+
+% emacs-page
+% A message to be logged when using a character that isn't available
+% the default font encoding (OT1).
+%
+\def\missingcharmsg#1{\message{Character missing, sorry: #1.}}
+
+% Take account of \c (plain) vs. \, (Texinfo) difference.
+\def\cedilla#1{\ifx\c\ptexc\c{#1}\else\,{#1}\fi}
+
+% First, make active non-ASCII characters in order for them to be
+% correctly categorized when TeX reads the replacement text of
+% macros containing the character definitions.
+\setnonasciicharscatcode\active
+%
+
+\def\gdefchar#1#2{%
+\gdef#1{%
+   \ifpassthroughchars
+     \string#1%
+   \else
+     #2%
+   \fi
+}}
+
+% Latin1 (ISO-8859-1) character definitions.
+\def\latonechardefs{%
+  \gdefchar^^a0{\tie}
+  \gdefchar^^a1{\exclamdown}
+  \gdefchar^^a2{{\tcfont \char162}} % cent
+  \gdefchar^^a3{\pounds{}}
+  \gdefchar^^a4{{\tcfont \char164}} % currency
+  \gdefchar^^a5{{\tcfont \char165}} % yen
+  \gdefchar^^a6{{\tcfont \char166}} % broken bar
+  \gdefchar^^a7{\S}
+  \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}}
+  \gdefchar^^a9{\copyright{}}
+  \gdefchar^^aa{\ordf}
+  \gdefchar^^ab{\guillemetleft{}}
+  \gdefchar^^ac{\ensuremath\lnot}
+  \gdefchar^^ad{\-}
+  \gdefchar^^ae{\registeredsymbol{}}
+  \gdefchar^^af{\={}}
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree}
+  \gdefchar^^b1{$\pm$}
+  \gdefchar^^b2{$^2$}
+  \gdefchar^^b3{$^3$}
+  \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}}
+  \gdefchar^^b5{$\mu$}
+  \gdefchar^^b6{\P}
+  \gdefchar^^b7{\ensuremath\cdot}
+  \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ }
+  \gdefchar^^b9{$^1$}
+  \gdefchar^^ba{\ordm}
+  \gdefchar^^bb{\guillemetright{}}
+  \gdefchar^^bc{$1\over4$}
+  \gdefchar^^bd{$1\over2$}
+  \gdefchar^^be{$3\over4$}
+  \gdefchar^^bf{\questiondown}
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^c0{\`A}
+  \gdefchar^^c1{\'A}
+  \gdefchar^^c2{\^A}
+  \gdefchar^^c3{\~A}
+  \gdefchar^^c4{\"A}
+  \gdefchar^^c5{\ringaccent A}
+  \gdefchar^^c6{\AE}
+  \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C}
+  \gdefchar^^c8{\`E}
+  \gdefchar^^c9{\'E}
+  \gdefchar^^ca{\^E}
+  \gdefchar^^cb{\"E}
+  \gdefchar^^cc{\`I}
+  \gdefchar^^cd{\'I}
+  \gdefchar^^ce{\^I}
+  \gdefchar^^cf{\"I}
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^d0{\DH}
+  \gdefchar^^d1{\~N}
+  \gdefchar^^d2{\`O}
+  \gdefchar^^d3{\'O}
+  \gdefchar^^d4{\^O}
+  \gdefchar^^d5{\~O}
+  \gdefchar^^d6{\"O}
+  \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$}
+  \gdefchar^^d8{\O}
+  \gdefchar^^d9{\`U}
+  \gdefchar^^da{\'U}
+  \gdefchar^^db{\^U}
+  \gdefchar^^dc{\"U}
+  \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y}
+  \gdefchar^^de{\TH}
+  \gdefchar^^df{\ss}
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^e0{\`a}
+  \gdefchar^^e1{\'a}
+  \gdefchar^^e2{\^a}
+  \gdefchar^^e3{\~a}
+  \gdefchar^^e4{\"a}
+  \gdefchar^^e5{\ringaccent a}
+  \gdefchar^^e6{\ae}
+  \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c}
+  \gdefchar^^e8{\`e}
+  \gdefchar^^e9{\'e}
+  \gdefchar^^ea{\^e}
+  \gdefchar^^eb{\"e}
+  \gdefchar^^ec{\`{\dotless i}}
+  \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless i}}
+  \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless i}}
+  \gdefchar^^ef{\"{\dotless i}}
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^f0{\dh}
+  \gdefchar^^f1{\~n}
+  \gdefchar^^f2{\`o}
+  \gdefchar^^f3{\'o}
+  \gdefchar^^f4{\^o}
+  \gdefchar^^f5{\~o}
+  \gdefchar^^f6{\"o}
+  \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$}
+  \gdefchar^^f8{\o}
+  \gdefchar^^f9{\`u}
+  \gdefchar^^fa{\'u}
+  \gdefchar^^fb{\^u}
+  \gdefchar^^fc{\"u}
+  \gdefchar^^fd{\'y}
+  \gdefchar^^fe{\th}
+  \gdefchar^^ff{\"y}
+}
+
+% Latin9 (ISO-8859-15) encoding character definitions.
+\def\latninechardefs{%
+  % Encoding is almost identical to Latin1.
+  \latonechardefs
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^a4{\euro{}}
+  \gdefchar^^a6{\v S}
+  \gdefchar^^a8{\v s}
+  \gdefchar^^b4{\v Z}
+  \gdefchar^^b8{\v z}
+  \gdefchar^^bc{\OE}
+  \gdefchar^^bd{\oe}
+  \gdefchar^^be{\"Y}
+}
+
+% Latin2 (ISO-8859-2) character definitions.
+\def\lattwochardefs{%
+  \gdefchar^^a0{\tie}
+  \gdefchar^^a1{\ogonek{A}}
+  \gdefchar^^a2{\u{}}
+  \gdefchar^^a3{\L}
+  \gdefchar^^a4{\missingcharmsg{CURRENCY SIGN}}
+  \gdefchar^^a5{\v L}
+  \gdefchar^^a6{\'S}
+  \gdefchar^^a7{\S}
+  \gdefchar^^a8{\"{}}
+  \gdefchar^^a9{\v S}
+  \gdefchar^^aa{\cedilla S}
+  \gdefchar^^ab{\v T}
+  \gdefchar^^ac{\'Z}
+  \gdefchar^^ad{\-}
+  \gdefchar^^ae{\v Z}
+  \gdefchar^^af{\dotaccent Z}
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^b0{\textdegree{}}
+  \gdefchar^^b1{\ogonek{a}}
+  \gdefchar^^b2{\ogonek{ }}
+  \gdefchar^^b3{\l}
+  \gdefchar^^b4{\'{}}
+  \gdefchar^^b5{\v l}
+  \gdefchar^^b6{\'s}
+  \gdefchar^^b7{\v{}}
+  \gdefchar^^b8{\cedilla\ }
+  \gdefchar^^b9{\v s}
+  \gdefchar^^ba{\cedilla s}
+  \gdefchar^^bb{\v t}
+  \gdefchar^^bc{\'z}
+  \gdefchar^^bd{\H{}}
+  \gdefchar^^be{\v z}
+  \gdefchar^^bf{\dotaccent z}
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^c0{\'R}
+  \gdefchar^^c1{\'A}
+  \gdefchar^^c2{\^A}
+  \gdefchar^^c3{\u A}
+  \gdefchar^^c4{\"A}
+  \gdefchar^^c5{\'L}
+  \gdefchar^^c6{\'C}
+  \gdefchar^^c7{\cedilla C}
+  \gdefchar^^c8{\v C}
+  \gdefchar^^c9{\'E}
+  \gdefchar^^ca{\ogonek{E}}
+  \gdefchar^^cb{\"E}
+  \gdefchar^^cc{\v E}
+  \gdefchar^^cd{\'I}
+  \gdefchar^^ce{\^I}
+  \gdefchar^^cf{\v D}
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^d0{\DH}
+  \gdefchar^^d1{\'N}
+  \gdefchar^^d2{\v N}
+  \gdefchar^^d3{\'O}
+  \gdefchar^^d4{\^O}
+  \gdefchar^^d5{\H O}
+  \gdefchar^^d6{\"O}
+  \gdefchar^^d7{$\times$}
+  \gdefchar^^d8{\v R}
+  \gdefchar^^d9{\ringaccent U}
+  \gdefchar^^da{\'U}
+  \gdefchar^^db{\H U}
+  \gdefchar^^dc{\"U}
+  \gdefchar^^dd{\'Y}
+  \gdefchar^^de{\cedilla T}
+  \gdefchar^^df{\ss}
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^e0{\'r}
+  \gdefchar^^e1{\'a}
+  \gdefchar^^e2{\^a}
+  \gdefchar^^e3{\u a}
+  \gdefchar^^e4{\"a}
+  \gdefchar^^e5{\'l}
+  \gdefchar^^e6{\'c}
+  \gdefchar^^e7{\cedilla c}
+  \gdefchar^^e8{\v c}
+  \gdefchar^^e9{\'e}
+  \gdefchar^^ea{\ogonek{e}}
+  \gdefchar^^eb{\"e}
+  \gdefchar^^ec{\v e}
+  \gdefchar^^ed{\'{\dotless{i}}}
+  \gdefchar^^ee{\^{\dotless{i}}}
+  \gdefchar^^ef{\v d}
+  %
+  \gdefchar^^f0{\dh}
+  \gdefchar^^f1{\'n}
+  \gdefchar^^f2{\v n}
+  \gdefchar^^f3{\'o}
+  \gdefchar^^f4{\^o}
+  \gdefchar^^f5{\H o}
+  \gdefchar^^f6{\"o}
+  \gdefchar^^f7{$\div$}
+  \gdefchar^^f8{\v r}
+  \gdefchar^^f9{\ringaccent u}
+  \gdefchar^^fa{\'u}
+  \gdefchar^^fb{\H u}
+  \gdefchar^^fc{\"u}
+  \gdefchar^^fd{\'y}
+  \gdefchar^^fe{\cedilla t}
+  \gdefchar^^ff{\dotaccent{}}
+}
+
+% UTF-8 character definitions.
+%
+% This code to support UTF-8 is based on LaTeX's utf8.def, with some
+% changes for Texinfo conventions.  It is included here under the GPL by
+% permission from Frank Mittelbach and the LaTeX team.
+%
+\newcount\countUTFx
+\newcount\countUTFy
+\newcount\countUTFz
+
+\gdef\UTFviiiTwoOctets#1#2{\expandafter
+   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}
+%
+\gdef\UTFviiiThreeOctets#1#2#3{\expandafter
+   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}
+%
+\gdef\UTFviiiFourOctets#1#2#3#4{\expandafter
+   \UTFviiiDefined\csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}
+
+\gdef\UTFviiiDefined#1{%
+  \ifx #1\relax
+    \message{\linenumber Unicode char \string #1 not defined for Texinfo}%
+  \else
+    \expandafter #1%
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Give non-ASCII bytes the active definitions for processing UTF-8 sequences
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\~13
+  \catcode`\$12
+  \catcode`\"12
+
+  % Loop from \countUTFx to \countUTFy, performing \UTFviiiTmp
+  % substituting ~ and $ with a character token of that value.
+  \def\UTFviiiLoop{%
+    \global\catcode\countUTFx\active
+    \uccode`\~\countUTFx
+    \uccode`\$\countUTFx
+    \uppercase\expandafter{\UTFviiiTmp}%
+    \advance\countUTFx by 1
+    \ifnum\countUTFx < \countUTFy
+      \expandafter\UTFviiiLoop
+    \fi}
+
+  % For bytes other than the first in a UTF-8 sequence.  Not expected to
+  % be expanded except when writing to auxiliary files.
+  \countUTFx = "80
+  \countUTFy = "C2
+  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+    \gdef~{%
+        \ifpassthroughchars $\fi}}%
+  \UTFviiiLoop
+
+  \countUTFx = "C2
+  \countUTFy = "E0
+  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+    \gdef~{%
+        \ifpassthroughchars $%
+        \else\expandafter\UTFviiiTwoOctets\expandafter$\fi}}%
+  \UTFviiiLoop
+
+  \countUTFx = "E0
+  \countUTFy = "F0
+  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+    \gdef~{%
+        \ifpassthroughchars $%
+        \else\expandafter\UTFviiiThreeOctets\expandafter$\fi}}%
+  \UTFviiiLoop
+
+  \countUTFx = "F0
+  \countUTFy = "F4
+  \def\UTFviiiTmp{%
+    \gdef~{%
+        \ifpassthroughchars $%
+        \else\expandafter\UTFviiiFourOctets\expandafter$\fi
+        }}%
+  \UTFviiiLoop
+\endgroup
+
+\def\globallet{\global\let} % save some \expandafter's below
+
+% @U{xxxx} to produce U+xxxx, if we support it.
+\def\U#1{%
+  \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax
+    \iftxinativeunicodecapable
+      % All Unicode characters can be used if native Unicode handling is
+      % active.  However, if the font does not have the glyph,
+      % letters are missing.
+      \begingroup
+        \uccode`\.="#1\relax
+        \uppercase{.}
+      \endgroup
+    \else
+      \errhelp = \EMsimple	
+      \errmessage{Unicode character U+#1 not supported, sorry}%
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \csname uni:#1\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+
+% These macros are used here to construct the name of a control
+% sequence to be defined.
+\def\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName#1#2{%
+  \csname u8:#1\string #2\endcsname}%
+\def\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName#1#2#3{%
+  \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\endcsname}%
+\def\UTFviiiFourOctetsName#1#2#3#4{%
+  \csname u8:#1\string #2\string #3\string #4\endcsname}%
+
+% For UTF-8 byte sequences (TeX, e-TeX and pdfTeX),
+% provide a definition macro to replace a Unicode character;
+% this gets used by the @U command
+%
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\"=12
+  \catcode`\<=12
+  \catcode`\.=12
+  \catcode`\,=12
+  \catcode`\;=12
+  \catcode`\!=12
+  \catcode`\~=13
+  \gdef\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii#1#2{%
+    \countUTFz = "#1\relax
+    \begingroup
+      \parseXMLCharref
+    
+      % Give \u8:... its definition.  The sequence of seven \expandafter's
+      % expands after the \gdef three times, e.g.
+      %
+      % 1.  \UTFviiTwoOctetsName B1 B2
+      % 2.  \csname u8:B1 \string B2 \endcsname
+      % 3.  \u8: B1 B2  (a single control sequence token)
+      %
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\expandafter
+      \expandafter\gdef       \UTFviiiTmp{#2}%
+      % 
+      \expandafter\ifx\csname uni:#1\endcsname \relax \else
+       \message{Internal error, already defined: #1}%
+      \fi
+      %
+      % define an additional control sequence for this code point.
+      \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFviiiTmp
+    \endgroup}
+  %
+  % Given the value in \countUTFz as a Unicode code point, set \UTFviiiTmp
+  % to the corresponding UTF-8 sequence.
+  \gdef\parseXMLCharref{%
+    \ifnum\countUTFz < "A0\relax
+      \errhelp = \EMsimple
+      \errmessage{Cannot define Unicode char value < 00A0}%
+    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "800\relax
+      \parseUTFviiiA,%
+      \parseUTFviiiB C\UTFviiiTwoOctetsName.,%
+    \else\ifnum\countUTFz < "10000\relax
+      \parseUTFviiiA;%
+      \parseUTFviiiA,%
+      \parseUTFviiiB E\UTFviiiThreeOctetsName.{,;}%
+    \else
+      \parseUTFviiiA;%
+      \parseUTFviiiA,%
+      \parseUTFviiiA!%
+      \parseUTFviiiB F\UTFviiiFourOctetsName.{!,;}%
+    \fi\fi\fi
+  }
+
+  % Extract a byte from the end of the UTF-8 representation of \countUTFx.
+  % It must be a non-initial byte in the sequence.
+  % Change \uccode of #1 for it to be used in \parseUTFviiiB as one
+  % of the bytes.
+  \gdef\parseUTFviiiA#1{%
+    \countUTFx = \countUTFz
+    \divide\countUTFz by 64
+    \countUTFy = \countUTFz  % Save to be the future value of \countUTFz.
+    \multiply\countUTFz by 64
+    
+    % \countUTFz is now \countUTFx with the last 5 bits cleared.  Subtract
+    % in order to get the last five bits.
+    \advance\countUTFx by -\countUTFz
+
+    % Convert this to the byte in the UTF-8 sequence.
+    \advance\countUTFx by 128
+    \uccode `#1\countUTFx
+    \countUTFz = \countUTFy}
+
+  % Used to put a UTF-8 byte sequence into \UTFviiiTmp
+  % #1 is the increment for \countUTFz to yield a the first byte of the UTF-8
+  %    sequence.
+  % #2 is one of the \UTFviii*OctetsName macros.
+  % #3 is always a full stop (.)
+  % #4 is a template for the other bytes in the sequence.  The values for these
+  %    bytes is substituted in here with \uppercase using the \uccode's.
+  \gdef\parseUTFviiiB#1#2#3#4{%
+    \advance\countUTFz by "#10\relax
+    \uccode `#3\countUTFz
+    \uppercase{\gdef\UTFviiiTmp{#2#3#4}}}
+\endgroup
+
+% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
+% provide a definition macro that sets a catcode to `other' non-globally
+%
+\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeOther#1#2{%
+  \catcode"#1=\other
+}
+
+% https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Plane_(Unicode)#Basic_M
+% U+0000..U+007F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Basic_Latin_(Unicode_block)
+% U+0080..U+00FF = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin-1_Supplement_(Unicode_block)
+% U+0100..U+017F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-A
+% U+0180..U+024F = https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Latin_Extended-B
+% 
+% Many of our renditions are less than wonderful, and all the missing
+% characters are available somewhere.  Loading the necessary fonts
+% awaits user request.  We can't truly support Unicode without
+% reimplementing everything that's been done in LaTeX for many years,
+% plus probably using luatex or xetex, and who knows what else.
+% We won't be doing that here in this simple file.  But we can try to at
+% least make most of the characters not bomb out.
+%
+\def\unicodechardefs{%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A0}{\tie}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A1}{\exclamdown}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A2}{{\tcfont \char162}}% 0242=cent
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A3}{\pounds{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A4}{{\tcfont \char164}}% 0244=currency
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A5}{{\tcfont \char165}}% 0245=yen
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A6}{{\tcfont \char166}}% 0246=brokenbar
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A7}{\S}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A8}{\"{ }}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00A9}{\copyright{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AA}{\ordf}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AB}{\guillemetleft{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AC}{\ensuremath\lnot}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AD}{\-}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AE}{\registeredsymbol{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00AF}{\={ }}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B0}{\ringaccent{ }}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B1}{\ensuremath\pm}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B2}{$^2$}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B3}{$^3$}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B4}{\'{ }}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B5}{$\mu$}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B6}{\P}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B7}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B8}{\cedilla{ }}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00B9}{$^1$}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BA}{\ordm}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BB}{\guillemetright{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BC}{$1\over4$}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BD}{$1\over2$}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BE}{$3\over4$}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00BF}{\questiondown}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C0}{\`A}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C1}{\'A}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C2}{\^A}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C3}{\~A}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C4}{\"A}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C5}{\AA}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C6}{\AE}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C7}{\cedilla{C}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C8}{\`E}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00C9}{\'E}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CA}{\^E}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CB}{\"E}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CC}{\`I}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CD}{\'I}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CE}{\^I}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00CF}{\"I}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D0}{\DH}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D1}{\~N}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D2}{\`O}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D3}{\'O}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D4}{\^O}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D5}{\~O}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D6}{\"O}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D7}{\ensuremath\times}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D8}{\O}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00D9}{\`U}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DA}{\'U}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DB}{\^U}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DC}{\"U}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DD}{\'Y}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DE}{\TH}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00DF}{\ss}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E0}{\`a}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E1}{\'a}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E2}{\^a}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E3}{\~a}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E4}{\"a}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E5}{\aa}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E6}{\ae}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E7}{\cedilla{c}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E8}{\`e}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00E9}{\'e}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EA}{\^e}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EB}{\"e}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EC}{\`{\dotless{i}}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00ED}{\'{\dotless{i}}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EE}{\^{\dotless{i}}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00EF}{\"{\dotless{i}}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F0}{\dh}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F1}{\~n}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F2}{\`o}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F3}{\'o}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F4}{\^o}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F5}{\~o}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F6}{\"o}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F7}{\ensuremath\div}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F8}{\o}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00F9}{\`u}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FA}{\'u}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FB}{\^u}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FC}{\"u}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FD}{\'y}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FE}{\th}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{00FF}{\"y}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0100}{\=A}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0101}{\=a}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0102}{\u{A}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0103}{\u{a}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0104}{\ogonek{A}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0105}{\ogonek{a}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0106}{\'C}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0107}{\'c}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0108}{\^C}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0109}{\^c}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010A}{\dotaccent{C}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010B}{\dotaccent{c}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010C}{\v{C}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010D}{\v{c}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010E}{\v{D}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{010F}{d'}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0110}{\DH}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0111}{\dh}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0112}{\=E}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0113}{\=e}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0114}{\u{E}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0115}{\u{e}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0116}{\dotaccent{E}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0117}{\dotaccent{e}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0118}{\ogonek{E}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0119}{\ogonek{e}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011A}{\v{E}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011B}{\v{e}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011C}{\^G}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011D}{\^g}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011E}{\u{G}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{011F}{\u{g}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0120}{\dotaccent{G}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0121}{\dotaccent{g}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0122}{\cedilla{G}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0123}{\cedilla{g}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0124}{\^H}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0125}{\^h}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0126}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0127}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0128}{\~I}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0129}{\~{\dotless{i}}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012A}{\=I}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012B}{\={\dotless{i}}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012C}{\u{I}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012D}{\u{\dotless{i}}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012E}{\ogonek{I}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{012F}{\ogonek{i}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0130}{\dotaccent{I}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0131}{\dotless{i}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0132}{IJ}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0133}{ij}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0134}{\^J}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0135}{\^{\dotless{j}}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0136}{\cedilla{K}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0137}{\cedilla{k}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0138}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0139}{\'L}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013A}{\'l}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013B}{\cedilla{L}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013C}{\cedilla{l}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013D}{L'}% should kern
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013E}{l'}% should kern
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{013F}{L\U{00B7}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0140}{l\U{00B7}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0141}{\L}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0142}{\l}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0143}{\'N}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0144}{\'n}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0145}{\cedilla{N}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0146}{\cedilla{n}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0147}{\v{N}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0148}{\v{n}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0149}{'n}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014A}{\missingcharmsg{ENG}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014B}{\missingcharmsg{eng}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014C}{\=O}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014D}{\=o}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014E}{\u{O}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{014F}{\u{o}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0150}{\H{O}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0151}{\H{o}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0152}{\OE}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0153}{\oe}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0154}{\'R}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0155}{\'r}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0156}{\cedilla{R}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0157}{\cedilla{r}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0158}{\v{R}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0159}{\v{r}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015A}{\'S}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015B}{\'s}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015C}{\^S}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015D}{\^s}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015E}{\cedilla{S}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{015F}{\cedilla{s}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0160}{\v{S}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0161}{\v{s}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0162}{\cedilla{T}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0163}{\cedilla{t}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0164}{\v{T}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0165}{\v{t}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0166}{\missingcharmsg{H WITH STROKE}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0167}{\missingcharmsg{h WITH STROKE}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0168}{\~U}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0169}{\~u}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016A}{\=U}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016B}{\=u}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016C}{\u{U}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016D}{\u{u}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016E}{\ringaccent{U}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{016F}{\ringaccent{u}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0170}{\H{U}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0171}{\H{u}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0172}{\ogonek{U}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0173}{\ogonek{u}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0174}{\^W}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0175}{\^w}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0176}{\^Y}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0177}{\^y}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0178}{\"Y}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0179}{\'Z}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017A}{\'z}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017B}{\dotaccent{Z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017C}{\dotaccent{z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017D}{\v{Z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017E}{\v{z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{017F}{\missingcharmsg{LONG S}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C4}{D\v{Z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C5}{D\v{z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C6}{d\v{z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C7}{LJ}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C8}{Lj}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01C9}{lj}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CA}{NJ}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CB}{Nj}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CC}{nj}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CD}{\v{A}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CE}{\v{a}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01CF}{\v{I}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D0}{\v{\dotless{i}}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D1}{\v{O}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D2}{\v{o}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D3}{\v{U}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01D4}{\v{u}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E2}{\={\AE}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E3}{\={\ae}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E6}{\v{G}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E7}{\v{g}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E8}{\v{K}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01E9}{\v{k}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F0}{\v{\dotless{j}}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F1}{DZ}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F2}{Dz}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F3}{dz}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F4}{\'G}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F5}{\'g}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F8}{\`N}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01F9}{\`n}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FC}{\'{\AE}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FD}{\'{\ae}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FE}{\'{\O}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{01FF}{\'{\o}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021E}{\v{H}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{021F}{\v{h}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0226}{\dotaccent{A}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0227}{\dotaccent{a}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0228}{\cedilla{E}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0229}{\cedilla{e}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022E}{\dotaccent{O}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{022F}{\dotaccent{o}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0232}{\=Y}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0233}{\=y}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0237}{\dotless{j}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{02DB}{\ogonek{ }}%
+  %
+  % Greek letters upper case
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0391}{{\it A}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0392}{{\it B}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0393}{\ensuremath{\mit\Gamma}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0394}{\ensuremath{\mit\Delta}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0395}{{\it E}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0396}{{\it Z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0397}{{\it H}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0398}{\ensuremath{\mit\Theta}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0399}{{\it I}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039A}{{\it K}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039B}{\ensuremath{\mit\Lambda}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039C}{{\it M}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039D}{{\it N}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039E}{\ensuremath{\mit\Xi}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{039F}{{\it O}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A0}{\ensuremath{\mit\Pi}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A1}{{\it P}}%
+  %\DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A2}{} % none - corresponds to final sigma
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A3}{\ensuremath{\mit\Sigma}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A4}{{\it T}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A5}{\ensuremath{\mit\Upsilon}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A6}{\ensuremath{\mit\Phi}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A7}{{\it X}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A8}{\ensuremath{\mit\Psi}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03A9}{\ensuremath{\mit\Omega}}%
+  %
+  % Vowels with accents
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0390}{\ensuremath{\ddot{\acute\iota}}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AC}{\ensuremath{\acute\alpha}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AD}{\ensuremath{\acute\epsilon}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AE}{\ensuremath{\acute\eta}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03AF}{\ensuremath{\acute\iota}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B0}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ddot\upsilon}}}%
+  %
+  % Standalone accent
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{0384}{\ensuremath{\acute{\ }}}%
+  %
+  % Greek letters lower case
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B1}{\ensuremath\alpha}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B2}{\ensuremath\beta}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B3}{\ensuremath\gamma}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B4}{\ensuremath\delta}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B5}{\ensuremath\epsilon}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B6}{\ensuremath\zeta}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B7}{\ensuremath\eta}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B8}{\ensuremath\theta}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03B9}{\ensuremath\iota}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BA}{\ensuremath\kappa}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BB}{\ensuremath\lambda}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BC}{\ensuremath\mu}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BD}{\ensuremath\nu}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BE}{\ensuremath\xi}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03BF}{{\it o}}% omicron
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C0}{\ensuremath\pi}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C1}{\ensuremath\rho}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C2}{\ensuremath\varsigma}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C3}{\ensuremath\sigma}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C4}{\ensuremath\tau}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C5}{\ensuremath\upsilon}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C6}{\ensuremath\phi}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C7}{\ensuremath\chi}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C8}{\ensuremath\psi}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03C9}{\ensuremath\omega}%
+  %
+  % More Greek vowels with accents
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CA}{\ensuremath{\ddot\iota}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CB}{\ensuremath{\ddot\upsilon}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CC}{\ensuremath{\acute o}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CD}{\ensuremath{\acute\upsilon}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03CE}{\ensuremath{\acute\omega}}%
+  %
+  % Variant Greek letters
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D1}{\ensuremath\vartheta}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03D6}{\ensuremath\varpi}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{03F1}{\ensuremath\varrho}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E02}{\dotaccent{B}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E03}{\dotaccent{b}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E04}{\udotaccent{B}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E05}{\udotaccent{b}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E06}{\ubaraccent{B}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E07}{\ubaraccent{b}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0A}{\dotaccent{D}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0B}{\dotaccent{d}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0C}{\udotaccent{D}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0D}{\udotaccent{d}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0E}{\ubaraccent{D}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E0F}{\ubaraccent{d}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1E}{\dotaccent{F}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E1F}{\dotaccent{f}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E20}{\=G}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E21}{\=g}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E22}{\dotaccent{H}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E23}{\dotaccent{h}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E24}{\udotaccent{H}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E25}{\udotaccent{h}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E26}{\"H}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E27}{\"h}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E30}{\'K}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E31}{\'k}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E32}{\udotaccent{K}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E33}{\udotaccent{k}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E34}{\ubaraccent{K}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E35}{\ubaraccent{k}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E36}{\udotaccent{L}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E37}{\udotaccent{l}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3A}{\ubaraccent{L}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3B}{\ubaraccent{l}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3E}{\'M}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E3F}{\'m}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E40}{\dotaccent{M}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E41}{\dotaccent{m}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E42}{\udotaccent{M}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E43}{\udotaccent{m}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E44}{\dotaccent{N}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E45}{\dotaccent{n}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E46}{\udotaccent{N}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E47}{\udotaccent{n}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E48}{\ubaraccent{N}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E49}{\ubaraccent{n}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E54}{\'P}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E55}{\'p}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E56}{\dotaccent{P}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E57}{\dotaccent{p}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E58}{\dotaccent{R}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E59}{\dotaccent{r}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5A}{\udotaccent{R}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5B}{\udotaccent{r}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5E}{\ubaraccent{R}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E5F}{\ubaraccent{r}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E60}{\dotaccent{S}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E61}{\dotaccent{s}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E62}{\udotaccent{S}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E63}{\udotaccent{s}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6A}{\dotaccent{T}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6B}{\dotaccent{t}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6C}{\udotaccent{T}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6D}{\udotaccent{t}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6E}{\ubaraccent{T}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E6F}{\ubaraccent{t}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7C}{\~V}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7D}{\~v}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7E}{\udotaccent{V}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E7F}{\udotaccent{v}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E80}{\`W}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E81}{\`w}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E82}{\'W}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E83}{\'w}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E84}{\"W}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E85}{\"w}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E86}{\dotaccent{W}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E87}{\dotaccent{w}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E88}{\udotaccent{W}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E89}{\udotaccent{w}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8A}{\dotaccent{X}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8B}{\dotaccent{x}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8C}{\"X}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8D}{\"x}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8E}{\dotaccent{Y}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E8F}{\dotaccent{y}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E90}{\^Z}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E91}{\^z}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E92}{\udotaccent{Z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E93}{\udotaccent{z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E94}{\ubaraccent{Z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E95}{\ubaraccent{z}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E96}{\ubaraccent{h}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E97}{\"t}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E98}{\ringaccent{w}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1E99}{\ringaccent{y}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA0}{\udotaccent{A}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EA1}{\udotaccent{a}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB8}{\udotaccent{E}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EB9}{\udotaccent{e}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBC}{\~E}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EBD}{\~e}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECA}{\udotaccent{I}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECB}{\udotaccent{i}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECC}{\udotaccent{O}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1ECD}{\udotaccent{o}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE4}{\udotaccent{U}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EE5}{\udotaccent{u}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF2}{\`Y}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF3}{\`y}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF4}{\udotaccent{Y}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF8}{\~Y}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{1EF9}{\~y}%
+  %
+  % Punctuation
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2013}{--}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2014}{---}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2018}{\quoteleft{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2019}{\quoteright{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201A}{\quotesinglbase{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201C}{\quotedblleft{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201D}{\quotedblright{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{201E}{\quotedblbase{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2020}{\ensuremath\dagger}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2021}{\ensuremath\ddagger}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2022}{\bullet{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{202F}{\thinspace}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2026}{\dots{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2039}{\guilsinglleft{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{203A}{\guilsinglright{}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{20AC}{\euro{}}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2192}{\expansion{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D2}{\result{}}%
+  %
+  % Mathematical symbols
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2200}{\ensuremath\forall}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2203}{\ensuremath\exists}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2208}{\ensuremath\in}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2212}{\minus{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2217}{\ast}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221E}{\ensuremath\infty}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2225}{\ensuremath\parallel}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2227}{\ensuremath\wedge}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2229}{\ensuremath\cap}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2261}{\equiv{}}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2264}{\ensuremath\leq}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2265}{\ensuremath\geq}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2282}{\ensuremath\subset}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2287}{\ensuremath\supseteq}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2016}{\ensuremath\Vert}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2032}{\ensuremath\prime}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{210F}{\ensuremath\hbar}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2111}{\ensuremath\Im}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2113}{\ensuremath\ell}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2118}{\ensuremath\wp}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{211C}{\ensuremath\Re}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2135}{\ensuremath\aleph}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2190}{\ensuremath\leftarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2191}{\ensuremath\uparrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2193}{\ensuremath\downarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2194}{\ensuremath\leftrightarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2195}{\ensuremath\updownarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2196}{\ensuremath\nwarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2197}{\ensuremath\nearrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2198}{\ensuremath\searrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2199}{\ensuremath\swarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A6}{\ensuremath\mapsto}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21A9}{\ensuremath\hookleftarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21AA}{\ensuremath\hookrightarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BC}{\ensuremath\leftharpoonup}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21BD}{\ensuremath\leftharpoondown}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C0}{\ensuremath\rightharpoonup}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21C1}{\ensuremath\rightharpoondown}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21CC}{\ensuremath\rightleftharpoons}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D0}{\ensuremath\Leftarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D1}{\ensuremath\Uparrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D3}{\ensuremath\Downarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D4}{\ensuremath\Leftrightarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{21D5}{\ensuremath\Updownarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2202}{\ensuremath\partial}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2205}{\ensuremath\emptyset}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2207}{\ensuremath\nabla}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2209}{\ensuremath\notin}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220B}{\ensuremath\owns}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{220F}{\ensuremath\prod}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2210}{\ensuremath\coprod}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2211}{\ensuremath\sum}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2213}{\ensuremath\mp}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2218}{\ensuremath\circ}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221A}{\ensuremath\surd}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{221D}{\ensuremath\propto}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2220}{\ensuremath\angle}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2223}{\ensuremath\mid}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2228}{\ensuremath\vee}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222A}{\ensuremath\cup}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222B}{\ensuremath\smallint}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{222E}{\ensuremath\oint}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{223C}{\ensuremath\sim}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2240}{\ensuremath\wr}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2243}{\ensuremath\simeq}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2245}{\ensuremath\cong}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2248}{\ensuremath\approx}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{224D}{\ensuremath\asymp}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2250}{\ensuremath\doteq}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2260}{\ensuremath\neq}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226A}{\ensuremath\ll}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{226B}{\ensuremath\gg}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227A}{\ensuremath\prec}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{227B}{\ensuremath\succ}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2283}{\ensuremath\supset}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2286}{\ensuremath\subseteq}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{228E}{\ensuremath\uplus}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2291}{\ensuremath\sqsubseteq}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2292}{\ensuremath\sqsupseteq}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2293}{\ensuremath\sqcap}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2294}{\ensuremath\sqcup}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2295}{\ensuremath\oplus}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2296}{\ensuremath\ominus}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2297}{\ensuremath\otimes}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2298}{\ensuremath\oslash}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2299}{\ensuremath\odot}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A2}{\ensuremath\vdash}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A3}{\ensuremath\dashv}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A4}{\ensuremath\ptextop}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A5}{\ensuremath\bot}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22A8}{\ensuremath\models}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C0}{\ensuremath\bigwedge}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C1}{\ensuremath\bigvee}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C2}{\ensuremath\bigcap}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C3}{\ensuremath\bigcup}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C4}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C5}{\ensuremath\cdot}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C6}{\ensuremath\star}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{22C8}{\ensuremath\bowtie}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2308}{\ensuremath\lceil}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2309}{\ensuremath\rceil}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230A}{\ensuremath\lfloor}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{230B}{\ensuremath\rfloor}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2322}{\ensuremath\frown}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2323}{\ensuremath\smile}%
+  %
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B3}{\ensuremath\triangle}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25B7}{\ensuremath\triangleright}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25BD}{\ensuremath\bigtriangledown}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C1}{\ensuremath\triangleleft}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{25C7}{\ensuremath\diamond}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2660}{\ensuremath\spadesuit}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2661}{\ensuremath\heartsuit}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2662}{\ensuremath\diamondsuit}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2663}{\ensuremath\clubsuit}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266D}{\ensuremath\flat}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266E}{\ensuremath\natural}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{266F}{\ensuremath\sharp}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{26AA}{\ensuremath\bigcirc}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27B9}{\ensuremath\rangle}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27C2}{\ensuremath\perp}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27E8}{\ensuremath\langle}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F5}{\ensuremath\longleftarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F6}{\ensuremath\longrightarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27F7}{\ensuremath\longleftrightarrow}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{27FC}{\ensuremath\longmapsto}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{29F5}{\ensuremath\setminus}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A00}{\ensuremath\bigodot}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A01}{\ensuremath\bigoplus}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A02}{\ensuremath\bigotimes}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A04}{\ensuremath\biguplus}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A06}{\ensuremath\bigsqcup}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2A3F}{\ensuremath\amalg}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AAF}{\ensuremath\preceq}%
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2AB0}{\ensuremath\succeq}%
+  %
+  \global\mathchardef\checkmark="1370% actually the square root sign
+  \DeclareUnicodeCharacter{2713}{\ensuremath\checkmark}%
+}% end of \unicodechardefs
+
+% UTF-8 byte sequence (pdfTeX) definitions (replacing and @U command)
+% It makes the setting that replace UTF-8 byte sequence.
+\def\utfeightchardefs{%
+  \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterUTFviii
+  \unicodechardefs
+}
+
+% Whether the active definitions of non-ASCII characters expand to
+% non-active tokens with the same character code.  This is used to
+% write characters literally, instead of using active definitions for
+% printing the correct glyphs.
+\newif\ifpassthroughchars
+\passthroughcharsfalse
+
+% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
+% provide a definition macro to replace/pass-through a Unicode character
+%
+\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative#1#2{%
+  \catcode"#1=\active
+  \def\dodeclareunicodecharacternative##1##2##3{%
+    \begingroup
+      \uccode`\~="##2\relax
+      \uppercase{\gdef~}{%
+        \ifpassthroughchars
+          ##1%
+        \else
+          ##3%
+        \fi
+      }
+    \endgroup
+  }
+  \begingroup
+    \uccode`\.="#1\relax
+    \uppercase{\def\UTFNativeTmp{.}}%
+    \expandafter\dodeclareunicodecharacternative\UTFNativeTmp{#1}{#2}%
+  \endgroup
+}
+
+% Native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX) character replacing definition.
+% It activates the setting that replaces Unicode characters.
+\def\nativeunicodechardefs{%
+  \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNative
+  \unicodechardefs
+}
+
+% For native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX),
+% make the character token expand
+% to the sequences given in \unicodechardefs for printing.
+\def\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU#1#2{%
+  \def\UTFAtUTmp{#2}
+  \expandafter\globallet\csname uni:#1\endcsname \UTFAtUTmp
+}
+
+% @U command definitions for native Unicode handling (XeTeX and LuaTeX).
+\def\nativeunicodechardefsatu{%
+  \let\DeclareUnicodeCharacter\DeclareUnicodeCharacterNativeAtU
+  \unicodechardefs
+}
+
+% US-ASCII character definitions.
+\def\asciichardefs{% nothing need be done
+   \relax
+}
+
+% define all Unicode characters we know about, for the sake of @U.
+\iftxinativeunicodecapable
+  \nativeunicodechardefsatu
+\else
+  \utfeightchardefs
+\fi
+
+
+% Make non-ASCII characters printable again for compatibility with
+% existing Texinfo documents that may use them, even without declaring a
+% document encoding.
+%
+\setnonasciicharscatcode \other
+
+
+\message{formatting,}
+
+\newdimen\defaultparindent \defaultparindent = 15pt
+
+\chapheadingskip = 15pt plus 4pt minus 2pt
+\secheadingskip = 12pt plus 3pt minus 2pt
+\subsecheadingskip = 9pt plus 2pt minus 2pt
+
+% Prevent underfull vbox error messages.
+\vbadness = 10000
+
+% Don't be very finicky about underfull hboxes, either.
+\hbadness = 6666
+
+% Following George Bush, get rid of widows and orphans.
+\widowpenalty=10000
+\clubpenalty=10000
+
+% Use TeX 3.0's \emergencystretch to help line breaking, but if we're
+% using an old version of TeX, don't do anything.  We want the amount of
+% stretch added to depend on the line length, hence the dependence on
+% \hsize.  We call this whenever the paper size is set.
+%
+\def\setemergencystretch{%
+  \ifx\emergencystretch\thisisundefined
+    % Allow us to assign to \emergencystretch anyway.
+    \def\emergencystretch{\dimen0}%
+  \else
+    \emergencystretch = .15\hsize
+  \fi
+}
+
+% Parameters in order: 1) textheight; 2) textwidth;
+% 3) voffset; 4) hoffset; 5) binding offset; 6) topskip;
+% 7) physical page height; 8) physical page width.
+%
+% We also call \setleading{\textleading}, so the caller should define
+% \textleading.  The caller should also set \parskip.
+%
+\def\internalpagesizes#1#2#3#4#5#6#7#8{%
+  \voffset = #3\relax
+  \topskip = #6\relax
+  \splittopskip = \topskip
+  %
+  \vsize = #1\relax
+  \advance\vsize by \topskip
+  \outervsize = \vsize
+  \advance\outervsize by 2\topandbottommargin
+  \txipageheight = \vsize
+  %
+  \hsize = #2\relax
+  \outerhsize = \hsize
+  \advance\outerhsize by 0.5in
+  \txipagewidth = \hsize
+  %
+  \normaloffset = #4\relax
+  \bindingoffset = #5\relax
+  %
+  \ifpdf
+    \pdfpageheight #7\relax
+    \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
+    % if we don't reset these, they will remain at "1 true in" of
+    % whatever layout pdftex was dumped with.
+    \pdfhorigin = 1 true in
+    \pdfvorigin = 1 true in
+  \else
+    \ifx\XeTeXrevision\thisisundefined
+      \special{papersize=#8,#7}%
+    \else
+      \pdfpageheight #7\relax
+      \pdfpagewidth #8\relax
+      % XeTeX does not have \pdfhorigin and \pdfvorigin.
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  %
+  \setleading{\textleading}
+  %
+  \parindent = \defaultparindent
+  \setemergencystretch
+}
+
+% @letterpaper (the default).
+\def\letterpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \textleading = 13.2pt
+  %
+  % If page is nothing but text, make it come out even.
+  \internalpagesizes{607.2pt}{6in}% that's 46 lines
+                    {\voffset}{.25in}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{36pt}%
+                    {11in}{8.5in}%
+}}
+
+% Use @smallbook to reset parameters for 7x9.25 trim size.
+\def\smallbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt
+  \textleading = 12pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{7.5in}{5in}%
+                    {-.2in}{0in}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{16pt}%
+                    {9.25in}{7in}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.3in
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = .5cm
+}}
+
+% Use @smallerbook to reset parameters for 6x9 trim size.
+% (Just testing, parameters still in flux.)
+\def\smallerbook{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 1.5pt plus 1pt
+  \textleading = 12pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{7.4in}{4.8in}%
+                    {-.2in}{-.4in}%
+                    {0pt}{14pt}%
+                    {9in}{6in}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.25in
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = .4cm
+}}
+
+% Use @afourpaper to print on European A4 paper.
+\def\afourpaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \textleading = 13.2pt
+  %
+  % Double-side printing via postscript on Laserjet 4050
+  % prints double-sided nicely when \bindingoffset=10mm and \hoffset=-6mm.
+  % To change the settings for a different printer or situation, adjust
+  % \normaloffset until the front-side and back-side texts align.  Then
+  % do the same for \bindingoffset.  You can set these for testing in
+  % your texinfo source file like this:
+  % @tex
+  % \global\normaloffset = -6mm
+  % \global\bindingoffset = 10mm
+  % @end tex
+  \internalpagesizes{673.2pt}{160mm}% that's 51 lines
+                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
+  %
+  \tolerance = 700
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = 5mm
+}}
+
+% Use @afivepaper to print on European A5 paper.
+% From romildo@urano.iceb.ufop.br, 2 July 2000.
+% He also recommends making @example and @lisp be small.
+\def\afivepaper{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \parskip = 2pt plus 1pt minus 0.1pt
+  \textleading = 12.5pt
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{160mm}{120mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{\hoffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{8pt}%
+                    {210mm}{148mm}%
+  %
+  \lispnarrowing = 0.2in
+  \tolerance = 800
+  \contentsrightmargin = 0pt
+  \defbodyindent = 2mm
+  \tableindent = 12mm
+}}
+
+% A specific text layout, 24x15cm overall, intended for A4 paper.
+\def\afourlatex{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{237mm}{150mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{4.6mm}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
+  %
+  % Must explicitly reset to 0 because we call \afourpaper.
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% Use @afourwide to print on A4 paper in landscape format.
+\def\afourwide{{\globaldefs = 1
+  \afourpaper
+  \internalpagesizes{241mm}{165mm}%
+                    {\voffset}{-2.95mm}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{7mm}%
+                    {297mm}{210mm}%
+  \globaldefs = 0
+}}
+
+% @pagesizes TEXTHEIGHT[,TEXTWIDTH]
+% Perhaps we should allow setting the margins, \topskip, \parskip,
+% and/or leading, also. Or perhaps we should compute them somehow.
+%
+\parseargdef\pagesizes{\pagesizesyyy #1,,\finish}
+\def\pagesizesyyy#1,#2,#3\finish{{%
+  \setbox0 = \hbox{\ignorespaces #2}\ifdim\wd0 > 0pt \hsize=#2\relax \fi
+  \globaldefs = 1
+  %
+  \parskip = 3pt plus 2pt minus 1pt
+  \setleading{\textleading}%
+  %
+  \dimen0 = #1\relax
+  \advance\dimen0 by \voffset
+  \advance\dimen0 by 1in % reference point for DVI is 1 inch from top of page
+  %
+  \dimen2 = \hsize
+  \advance\dimen2 by \normaloffset
+  \advance\dimen2 by 1in % reference point is 1 inch from left edge of page
+  %
+  \internalpagesizes{#1}{\hsize}%
+                    {\voffset}{\normaloffset}%
+                    {\bindingoffset}{44pt}%
+                    {\dimen0}{\dimen2}%
+}}
+
+% Set default to letter.
+%
+\letterpaper
+
+% Default value of \hfuzz, for suppressing warnings about overfull hboxes.
+\hfuzz = 1pt
+
+
+\message{and turning on texinfo input format.}
+
+\def^^L{\par} % remove \outer, so ^L can appear in an @comment
+
+% DEL is a comment character, in case @c does not suffice.
+\catcode`\^^? = 14
+
+% Define macros to output various characters with catcode for normal text.
+\catcode`\"=\other \def\normaldoublequote{"}
+\catcode`\$=\other \def\normaldollar{$}%$ font-lock fix
+\catcode`\+=\other \def\normalplus{+}
+\catcode`\<=\other \def\normalless{<}
+\catcode`\>=\other \def\normalgreater{>}
+\catcode`\^=\other \def\normalcaret{^}
+\catcode`\_=\other \def\normalunderscore{_}
+\catcode`\|=\other \def\normalverticalbar{|}
+\catcode`\~=\other \def\normaltilde{~}
+
+% This macro is used to make a character print one way in \tt
+% (where it can probably be output as-is), and another way in other fonts,
+% where something hairier probably needs to be done.
+%
+% #1 is what to print if we are indeed using \tt; #2 is what to print
+% otherwise.  Since all the Computer Modern typewriter fonts have zero
+% interword stretch (and shrink), and it is reasonable to expect all
+% typewriter fonts to have this, we can check that font parameter.
+%
+\def\ifusingtt#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen3\font=0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Same as above, but check for italic font.  Actually this also catches
+% non-italic slanted fonts since it is impossible to distinguish them from
+% italic fonts.  But since this is only used by $ and it uses \sl anyway
+% this is not a problem.
+\def\ifusingit#1#2{\ifdim \fontdimen1\font>0pt #1\else #2\fi}
+
+% Set catcodes for Texinfo file
+
+% Active characters for printing the wanted glyph.
+% Most of these we simply print from the \tt font, but for some, we can
+% use math or other variants that look better in normal text.
+%
+\catcode`\"=\active
+\def\activedoublequote{{\tt\char34}}
+\let"=\activedoublequote
+\catcode`\~=\active \def\activetilde{{\tt\char126}} \let~ = \activetilde
+\chardef\hatchar=`\^
+\catcode`\^=\active \def\activehat{{\tt \hatchar}} \let^ = \activehat
+
+\catcode`\_=\active
+\def_{\ifusingtt\normalunderscore\_}
+\def\_{\leavevmode \kern.07em \vbox{\hrule width.3em height.1ex}\kern .07em }
+\let\realunder=_
+
+\catcode`\|=\active \def|{{\tt\char124}}
+
+\chardef \less=`\<
+\catcode`\<=\active \def\activeless{{\tt \less}}\let< = \activeless
+\chardef \gtr=`\>
+\catcode`\>=\active \def\activegtr{{\tt \gtr}}\let> = \activegtr
+\catcode`\+=\active \def+{{\tt \char 43}}
+\catcode`\$=\active \def${\ifusingit{{\sl\$}}\normaldollar}%$ font-lock fix
+\catcode`\-=\active \let-=\normaldash
+
+
+% used for headline/footline in the output routine, in case the page
+% breaks in the middle of an @tex block.
+\def\texinfochars{%
+  \let< = \activeless
+  \let> = \activegtr
+  \let~ = \activetilde 
+  \let^ = \activehat
+  \markupsetuplqdefault \markupsetuprqdefault 
+  \let\b = \strong
+  \let\i = \smartitalic
+  % in principle, all other definitions in \tex have to be undone too.
+}
+
+% Used sometimes to turn off (effectively) the active characters even after
+% parsing them.
+\def\turnoffactive{%
+  \normalturnoffactive
+  \otherbackslash
+}
+
+\catcode`\@=0
+
+% \backslashcurfont outputs one backslash character in current font,
+% as in \char`\\.
+\global\chardef\backslashcurfont=`\\
+\global\let\rawbackslashxx=\backslashcurfont  % let existing .??s files work
+
+% \realbackslash is an actual character `\' with catcode other, and
+% \doublebackslash is two of them (for the pdf outlines).
+{\catcode`\\=\other @gdef@realbackslash{\} @gdef@doublebackslash{\\}}
+
+% In Texinfo, backslash is an active character; it prints the backslash
+% in fixed width font.
+\catcode`\\=\active  % @ for escape char from now on.
+
+% Print a typewriter backslash.  For math mode, we can't simply use
+% \backslashcurfont: the story here is that in math mode, the \char
+% of \backslashcurfont ends up printing the roman \ from the math symbol
+% font (because \char in math mode uses the \mathcode, and plain.tex
+% sets \mathcode`\\="026E).  Hence we use an explicit \mathchar,
+% which is the decimal equivalent of "715c (class 7, e.g., use \fam;
+% ignored family value; char position "5C).  We can't use " for the
+% usual hex value because it has already been made active.
+
+@def@ttbackslash{{@tt @ifmmode @mathchar29020 @else @backslashcurfont @fi}}
+@let@backslashchar = @ttbackslash % @backslashchar{} is for user documents.
+
+% \rawbackslash defines an active \ to do \backslashcurfont.
+% \otherbackslash defines an active \ to be a literal `\' character with
+% catcode other.  We switch back and forth between these.
+@gdef@rawbackslash{@let\=@backslashcurfont}
+@gdef@otherbackslash{@let\=@realbackslash}
+
+% Same as @turnoffactive except outputs \ as {\tt\char`\\} instead of
+% the literal character `\'.
+%
+{@catcode`- = @active
+ @gdef@normalturnoffactive{%
+   @passthroughcharstrue
+   @let-=@normaldash
+   @let"=@normaldoublequote
+   @let$=@normaldollar %$ font-lock fix
+   @let+=@normalplus
+   @let<=@normalless
+   @let>=@normalgreater
+   @let^=@normalcaret
+   @let_=@normalunderscore
+   @let|=@normalverticalbar
+   @let~=@normaltilde
+   @let\=@ttbackslash
+   @markupsetuplqdefault
+   @markupsetuprqdefault
+   @unsepspaces
+ }
+}
+
+% If a .fmt file is being used, characters that might appear in a file
+% name cannot be active until we have parsed the command line.
+% So turn them off again, and have @fixbackslash turn them back on.
+@catcode`+=@other @catcode`@_=@other
+
+% \enablebackslashhack - allow file to begin `\input texinfo'
+%
+% If a .fmt file is being used, we don't want the `\input texinfo' to show up.
+% That is what \eatinput is for; after that, the `\' should revert to printing
+% a backslash.
+% If the file did not have a `\input texinfo', then it is turned off after
+% the first line; otherwise the first `\' in the file would cause an error.
+% This is used on the very last line of this file, texinfo.tex.
+% We also use @c to call @fixbackslash, in case ends of lines are hidden.
+{
+@catcode`@^=7
+@catcode`@^^M=13@gdef@enablebackslashhack{%
+  @global@let\ = @eatinput%
+  @catcode`@^^M=13%
+  @def@c{@fixbackslash@c}%
+  % Definition for the newline at the end of this file.
+  @def ^^M{@let^^M@secondlinenl}%
+  % Definition for a newline in the main Texinfo file.
+  @gdef @secondlinenl{@fixbackslash}%
+  % In case the first line has a whole-line command on it
+  @let@originalparsearg@parsearg
+  @def@parsearg{@fixbackslash@originalparsearg}
+}}
+
+{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode`@^^M=13%
+@gdef@eatinput input texinfo#1^^M{@fixbackslash}}
+
+% Emergency active definition of newline, in case an active newline token
+% appears by mistake.
+{@catcode`@^=7 @catcode13=13%
+@gdef@enableemergencynewline{%
+  @gdef^^M{%
+    @par%
+    %<warning: active newline>@par%
+}}}
+
+
+@gdef@fixbackslash{%
+  @ifx\@eatinput @let\ = @ttbackslash @fi
+  @catcode13=5 % regular end of line
+  @enableemergencynewline
+  @let@c=@texinfoc
+  @let@parsearg@originalparsearg
+  % Also turn back on active characters that might appear in the input
+  % file name, in case not using a pre-dumped format.
+  @catcode`+=@active
+  @catcode`@_=@active
+  %
+  % If texinfo.cnf is present on the system, read it.
+  % Useful for site-wide @afourpaper, etc.  This macro, @fixbackslash, gets
+  % called at the beginning of every Texinfo file.  Not opening texinfo.cnf
+  % directly in this file, texinfo.tex, makes it possible to make a format
+  % file for Texinfo.
+  %
+  @openin 1 texinfo.cnf
+  @ifeof 1 @else @input texinfo.cnf @fi
+  @closein 1
+}
+
+
+% Say @foo, not \foo, in error messages.
+@escapechar = `@@
+
+% These (along with & and #) are made active for url-breaking, so need
+% active definitions as the normal characters.
+@def@normaldot{.}
+@def@normalquest{?}
+@def@normalslash{/}
+
+% These look ok in all fonts, so just make them not special.
+% @hashchar{} gets its own user-level command, because of #line.
+@catcode`@& = @other @def@normalamp{&}
+@catcode`@# = @other @def@normalhash{#}
+@catcode`@% = @other @def@normalpercent{%}
+
+@let @hashchar = @normalhash
+
+@c Finally, make ` and ' active, so that txicodequoteundirected and
+@c txicodequotebacktick work right in, e.g., @w{@code{`foo'}}.  If we
+@c don't make ` and ' active, @code will not get them as active chars.
+@c Do this last of all since we use ` in the previous @catcode assignments.
+@catcode`@'=@active
+@catcode`@`=@active
+@markupsetuplqdefault
+@markupsetuprqdefault
+
+@c Local variables:
+@c eval: (add-hook 'write-file-hooks 'time-stamp)
+@c page-delimiter: "^\\\\message\\|emacs-page"
+@c time-stamp-start: "def\\\\texinfoversion{"
+@c time-stamp-format: "%:y-%02m-%02d.%02H"
+@c time-stamp-end: "}"
+@c End:
+
+@c vim:sw=2:
+
+@enablebackslashhack
diff --git a/configure.ac b/configure.ac
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6617114
--- /dev/null
+++ b/configure.ac
@@ -0,0 +1,36 @@
+dnl TODO!
+dnl
+dnl Guile-Debbugs --- Guile bindings for Debbugs
+dnl Copyright © 2017, 2018 Ricardo Wurmus <rekado@elephly.net>
+dnl
+dnl This file is part of Guile-Debbugs.
+dnl
+dnl Guile-Debbugs is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
+dnl modify it under the terms of the GNU  General Public License
+dnl as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of
+dnl the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+dnl
+dnl Guile-Debbugs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+dnl WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+dnl MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+dnl Affero General Public License for more details.
+dnl
+dnl You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+dnl along with Guile-Debbugs.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+dnl -*- Autoconf -*-
+
+AC_INIT([guile-picture-language], [m4_translit(m4_esyscmd([cat VERSION]),m4_newline)])
+AC_CONFIG_AUX_DIR([build-aux])
+AM_INIT_AUTOMAKE([color-tests -Wall -Wno-portability foreign])
+AM_SILENT_RULES([yes])
+
+GUILE_PKG([3.0 2.2])
+GUILE_PROGS
+if test "x$GUILD" = "x"; then
+   AC_MSG_ERROR(['guild' binary not found; please check your Guile installation.])
+fi
+
+AC_CONFIG_FILES([Makefile])
+AC_CONFIG_FILES([env], [chmod +x env])
+AC_OUTPUT
diff --git a/doc/fdl-1.3.texi b/doc/fdl-1.3.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cb71f05
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/fdl-1.3.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,505 @@
+@c The GNU Free Documentation License.
+@center Version 1.3, 3 November 2008
+
+@c This file is intended to be included within another document,
+@c hence no sectioning command or @node.
+
+@display
+Copyright @copyright{} 2000, 2001, 2002, 2007, 2008 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
+@uref{http://fsf.org/}
+
+Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies
+of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
+@end display
+
+@enumerate 0
+@item
+PREAMBLE
+
+The purpose of this License is to make a manual, textbook, or other
+functional and useful document @dfn{free} in the sense of freedom: to
+assure everyone the effective freedom to copy and redistribute it,
+with or without modifying it, either commercially or noncommercially.
+Secondarily, this License preserves for the author and publisher a way
+to get credit for their work, while not being considered responsible
+for modifications made by others.
+
+This License is a kind of ``copyleft'', which means that derivative
+works of the document must themselves be free in the same sense.  It
+complements the GNU General Public License, which is a copyleft
+license designed for free software.
+
+We have designed this License in order to use it for manuals for free
+software, because free software needs free documentation: a free
+program should come with manuals providing the same freedoms that the
+software does.  But this License is not limited to software manuals;
+it can be used for any textual work, regardless of subject matter or
+whether it is published as a printed book.  We recommend this License
+principally for works whose purpose is instruction or reference.
+
+@item
+APPLICABILITY AND DEFINITIONS
+
+This License applies to any manual or other work, in any medium, that
+contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it can be
+distributed under the terms of this License.  Such a notice grants a
+world-wide, royalty-free license, unlimited in duration, to use that
+work under the conditions stated herein.  The ``Document'', below,
+refers to any such manual or work.  Any member of the public is a
+licensee, and is addressed as ``you''.  You accept the license if you
+copy, modify or distribute the work in a way requiring permission
+under copyright law.
+
+A ``Modified Version'' of the Document means any work containing the
+Document or a portion of it, either copied verbatim, or with
+modifications and/or translated into another language.
+
+A ``Secondary Section'' is a named appendix or a front-matter section
+of the Document that deals exclusively with the relationship of the
+publishers or authors of the Document to the Document's overall
+subject (or to related matters) and contains nothing that could fall
+directly within that overall subject.  (Thus, if the Document is in
+part a textbook of mathematics, a Secondary Section may not explain
+any mathematics.)  The relationship could be a matter of historical
+connection with the subject or with related matters, or of legal,
+commercial, philosophical, ethical or political position regarding
+them.
+
+The ``Invariant Sections'' are certain Secondary Sections whose titles
+are designated, as being those of Invariant Sections, in the notice
+that says that the Document is released under this License.  If a
+section does not fit the above definition of Secondary then it is not
+allowed to be designated as Invariant.  The Document may contain zero
+Invariant Sections.  If the Document does not identify any Invariant
+Sections then there are none.
+
+The ``Cover Texts'' are certain short passages of text that are listed,
+as Front-Cover Texts or Back-Cover Texts, in the notice that says that
+the Document is released under this License.  A Front-Cover Text may
+be at most 5 words, and a Back-Cover Text may be at most 25 words.
+
+A ``Transparent'' copy of the Document means a machine-readable copy,
+represented in a format whose specification is available to the
+general public, that is suitable for revising the document
+straightforwardly with generic text editors or (for images composed of
+pixels) generic paint programs or (for drawings) some widely available
+drawing editor, and that is suitable for input to text formatters or
+for automatic translation to a variety of formats suitable for input
+to text formatters.  A copy made in an otherwise Transparent file
+format whose markup, or absence of markup, has been arranged to thwart
+or discourage subsequent modification by readers is not Transparent.
+An image format is not Transparent if used for any substantial amount
+of text.  A copy that is not ``Transparent'' is called ``Opaque''.
+
+Examples of suitable formats for Transparent copies include plain
+ASCII without markup, Texinfo input format, La@TeX{} input
+format, SGML or XML using a publicly available
+DTD, and standard-conforming simple HTML,
+PostScript or PDF designed for human modification.  Examples
+of transparent image formats include PNG, XCF and
+JPG.  Opaque formats include proprietary formats that can be
+read and edited only by proprietary word processors, SGML or
+XML for which the DTD and/or processing tools are
+not generally available, and the machine-generated HTML,
+PostScript or PDF produced by some word processors for
+output purposes only.
+
+The ``Title Page'' means, for a printed book, the title page itself,
+plus such following pages as are needed to hold, legibly, the material
+this License requires to appear in the title page.  For works in
+formats which do not have any title page as such, ``Title Page'' means
+the text near the most prominent appearance of the work's title,
+preceding the beginning of the body of the text.
+
+The ``publisher'' means any person or entity that distributes copies
+of the Document to the public.
+
+A section ``Entitled XYZ'' means a named subunit of the Document whose
+title either is precisely XYZ or contains XYZ in parentheses following
+text that translates XYZ in another language.  (Here XYZ stands for a
+specific section name mentioned below, such as ``Acknowledgements'',
+``Dedications'', ``Endorsements'', or ``History''.)  To ``Preserve the Title''
+of such a section when you modify the Document means that it remains a
+section ``Entitled XYZ'' according to this definition.
+
+The Document may include Warranty Disclaimers next to the notice which
+states that this License applies to the Document.  These Warranty
+Disclaimers are considered to be included by reference in this
+License, but only as regards disclaiming warranties: any other
+implication that these Warranty Disclaimers may have is void and has
+no effect on the meaning of this License.
+
+@item
+VERBATIM COPYING
+
+You may copy and distribute the Document in any medium, either
+commercially or noncommercially, provided that this License, the
+copyright notices, and the license notice saying this License applies
+to the Document are reproduced in all copies, and that you add no other
+conditions whatsoever to those of this License.  You may not use
+technical measures to obstruct or control the reading or further
+copying of the copies you make or distribute.  However, you may accept
+compensation in exchange for copies.  If you distribute a large enough
+number of copies you must also follow the conditions in section 3.
+
+You may also lend copies, under the same conditions stated above, and
+you may publicly display copies.
+
+@item
+COPYING IN QUANTITY
+
+If you publish printed copies (or copies in media that commonly have
+printed covers) of the Document, numbering more than 100, and the
+Document's license notice requires Cover Texts, you must enclose the
+copies in covers that carry, clearly and legibly, all these Cover
+Texts: Front-Cover Texts on the front cover, and Back-Cover Texts on
+the back cover.  Both covers must also clearly and legibly identify
+you as the publisher of these copies.  The front cover must present
+the full title with all words of the title equally prominent and
+visible.  You may add other material on the covers in addition.
+Copying with changes limited to the covers, as long as they preserve
+the title of the Document and satisfy these conditions, can be treated
+as verbatim copying in other respects.
+
+If the required texts for either cover are too voluminous to fit
+legibly, you should put the first ones listed (as many as fit
+reasonably) on the actual cover, and continue the rest onto adjacent
+pages.
+
+If you publish or distribute Opaque copies of the Document numbering
+more than 100, you must either include a machine-readable Transparent
+copy along with each Opaque copy, or state in or with each Opaque copy
+a computer-network location from which the general network-using
+public has access to download using public-standard network protocols
+a complete Transparent copy of the Document, free of added material.
+If you use the latter option, you must take reasonably prudent steps,
+when you begin distribution of Opaque copies in quantity, to ensure
+that this Transparent copy will remain thus accessible at the stated
+location until at least one year after the last time you distribute an
+Opaque copy (directly or through your agents or retailers) of that
+edition to the public.
+
+It is requested, but not required, that you contact the authors of the
+Document well before redistributing any large number of copies, to give
+them a chance to provide you with an updated version of the Document.
+
+@item
+MODIFICATIONS
+
+You may copy and distribute a Modified Version of the Document under
+the conditions of sections 2 and 3 above, provided that you release
+the Modified Version under precisely this License, with the Modified
+Version filling the role of the Document, thus licensing distribution
+and modification of the Modified Version to whoever possesses a copy
+of it.  In addition, you must do these things in the Modified Version:
+
+@enumerate A
+@item
+Use in the Title Page (and on the covers, if any) a title distinct
+from that of the Document, and from those of previous versions
+(which should, if there were any, be listed in the History section
+of the Document).  You may use the same title as a previous version
+if the original publisher of that version gives permission.
+
+@item
+List on the Title Page, as authors, one or more persons or entities
+responsible for authorship of the modifications in the Modified
+Version, together with at least five of the principal authors of the
+Document (all of its principal authors, if it has fewer than five),
+unless they release you from this requirement.
+
+@item
+State on the Title page the name of the publisher of the
+Modified Version, as the publisher.
+
+@item
+Preserve all the copyright notices of the Document.
+
+@item
+Add an appropriate copyright notice for your modifications
+adjacent to the other copyright notices.
+
+@item
+Include, immediately after the copyright notices, a license notice
+giving the public permission to use the Modified Version under the
+terms of this License, in the form shown in the Addendum below.
+
+@item
+Preserve in that license notice the full lists of Invariant Sections
+and required Cover Texts given in the Document's license notice.
+
+@item
+Include an unaltered copy of this License.
+
+@item
+Preserve the section Entitled ``History'', Preserve its Title, and add
+to it an item stating at least the title, year, new authors, and
+publisher of the Modified Version as given on the Title Page.  If
+there is no section Entitled ``History'' in the Document, create one
+stating the title, year, authors, and publisher of the Document as
+given on its Title Page, then add an item describing the Modified
+Version as stated in the previous sentence.
+
+@item
+Preserve the network location, if any, given in the Document for
+public access to a Transparent copy of the Document, and likewise
+the network locations given in the Document for previous versions
+it was based on.  These may be placed in the ``History'' section.
+You may omit a network location for a work that was published at
+least four years before the Document itself, or if the original
+publisher of the version it refers to gives permission.
+
+@item
+For any section Entitled ``Acknowledgements'' or ``Dedications'', Preserve
+the Title of the section, and preserve in the section all the
+substance and tone of each of the contributor acknowledgements and/or
+dedications given therein.
+
+@item
+Preserve all the Invariant Sections of the Document,
+unaltered in their text and in their titles.  Section numbers
+or the equivalent are not considered part of the section titles.
+
+@item
+Delete any section Entitled ``Endorsements''.  Such a section
+may not be included in the Modified Version.
+
+@item
+Do not retitle any existing section to be Entitled ``Endorsements'' or
+to conflict in title with any Invariant Section.
+
+@item
+Preserve any Warranty Disclaimers.
+@end enumerate
+
+If the Modified Version includes new front-matter sections or
+appendices that qualify as Secondary Sections and contain no material
+copied from the Document, you may at your option designate some or all
+of these sections as invariant.  To do this, add their titles to the
+list of Invariant Sections in the Modified Version's license notice.
+These titles must be distinct from any other section titles.
+
+You may add a section Entitled ``Endorsements'', provided it contains
+nothing but endorsements of your Modified Version by various
+parties---for example, statements of peer review or that the text has
+been approved by an organization as the authoritative definition of a
+standard.
+
+You may add a passage of up to five words as a Front-Cover Text, and a
+passage of up to 25 words as a Back-Cover Text, to the end of the list
+of Cover Texts in the Modified Version.  Only one passage of
+Front-Cover Text and one of Back-Cover Text may be added by (or
+through arrangements made by) any one entity.  If the Document already
+includes a cover text for the same cover, previously added by you or
+by arrangement made by the same entity you are acting on behalf of,
+you may not add another; but you may replace the old one, on explicit
+permission from the previous publisher that added the old one.
+
+The author(s) and publisher(s) of the Document do not by this License
+give permission to use their names for publicity for or to assert or
+imply endorsement of any Modified Version.
+
+@item
+COMBINING DOCUMENTS
+
+You may combine the Document with other documents released under this
+License, under the terms defined in section 4 above for modified
+versions, provided that you include in the combination all of the
+Invariant Sections of all of the original documents, unmodified, and
+list them all as Invariant Sections of your combined work in its
+license notice, and that you preserve all their Warranty Disclaimers.
+
+The combined work need only contain one copy of this License, and
+multiple identical Invariant Sections may be replaced with a single
+copy.  If there are multiple Invariant Sections with the same name but
+different contents, make the title of each such section unique by
+adding at the end of it, in parentheses, the name of the original
+author or publisher of that section if known, or else a unique number.
+Make the same adjustment to the section titles in the list of
+Invariant Sections in the license notice of the combined work.
+
+In the combination, you must combine any sections Entitled ``History''
+in the various original documents, forming one section Entitled
+``History''; likewise combine any sections Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
+and any sections Entitled ``Dedications''.  You must delete all
+sections Entitled ``Endorsements.''
+
+@item
+COLLECTIONS OF DOCUMENTS
+
+You may make a collection consisting of the Document and other documents
+released under this License, and replace the individual copies of this
+License in the various documents with a single copy that is included in
+the collection, provided that you follow the rules of this License for
+verbatim copying of each of the documents in all other respects.
+
+You may extract a single document from such a collection, and distribute
+it individually under this License, provided you insert a copy of this
+License into the extracted document, and follow this License in all
+other respects regarding verbatim copying of that document.
+
+@item
+AGGREGATION WITH INDEPENDENT WORKS
+
+A compilation of the Document or its derivatives with other separate
+and independent documents or works, in or on a volume of a storage or
+distribution medium, is called an ``aggregate'' if the copyright
+resulting from the compilation is not used to limit the legal rights
+of the compilation's users beyond what the individual works permit.
+When the Document is included in an aggregate, this License does not
+apply to the other works in the aggregate which are not themselves
+derivative works of the Document.
+
+If the Cover Text requirement of section 3 is applicable to these
+copies of the Document, then if the Document is less than one half of
+the entire aggregate, the Document's Cover Texts may be placed on
+covers that bracket the Document within the aggregate, or the
+electronic equivalent of covers if the Document is in electronic form.
+Otherwise they must appear on printed covers that bracket the whole
+aggregate.
+
+@item
+TRANSLATION
+
+Translation is considered a kind of modification, so you may
+distribute translations of the Document under the terms of section 4.
+Replacing Invariant Sections with translations requires special
+permission from their copyright holders, but you may include
+translations of some or all Invariant Sections in addition to the
+original versions of these Invariant Sections.  You may include a
+translation of this License, and all the license notices in the
+Document, and any Warranty Disclaimers, provided that you also include
+the original English version of this License and the original versions
+of those notices and disclaimers.  In case of a disagreement between
+the translation and the original version of this License or a notice
+or disclaimer, the original version will prevail.
+
+If a section in the Document is Entitled ``Acknowledgements'',
+``Dedications'', or ``History'', the requirement (section 4) to Preserve
+its Title (section 1) will typically require changing the actual
+title.
+
+@item
+TERMINATION
+
+You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Document
+except as expressly provided under this License.  Any attempt
+otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute it is void, and
+will automatically terminate your rights under this License.
+
+However, if you cease all violation of this License, then your license
+from a particular copyright holder is reinstated (a) provisionally,
+unless and until the copyright holder explicitly and finally
+terminates your license, and (b) permanently, if the copyright holder
+fails to notify you of the violation by some reasonable means prior to
+60 days after the cessation.
+
+Moreover, your license from a particular copyright holder is
+reinstated permanently if the copyright holder notifies you of the
+violation by some reasonable means, this is the first time you have
+received notice of violation of this License (for any work) from that
+copyright holder, and you cure the violation prior to 30 days after
+your receipt of the notice.
+
+Termination of your rights under this section does not terminate the
+licenses of parties who have received copies or rights from you under
+this License.  If your rights have been terminated and not permanently
+reinstated, receipt of a copy of some or all of the same material does
+not give you any rights to use it.
+
+@item
+FUTURE REVISIONS OF THIS LICENSE
+
+The Free Software Foundation may publish new, revised versions
+of the GNU Free Documentation License from time to time.  Such new
+versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may
+differ in detail to address new problems or concerns.  See
+@uref{http://www.gnu.org/copyleft/}.
+
+Each version of the License is given a distinguishing version number.
+If the Document specifies that a particular numbered version of this
+License ``or any later version'' applies to it, you have the option of
+following the terms and conditions either of that specified version or
+of any later version that has been published (not as a draft) by the
+Free Software Foundation.  If the Document does not specify a version
+number of this License, you may choose any version ever published (not
+as a draft) by the Free Software Foundation.  If the Document
+specifies that a proxy can decide which future versions of this
+License can be used, that proxy's public statement of acceptance of a
+version permanently authorizes you to choose that version for the
+Document.
+
+@item
+RELICENSING
+
+``Massive Multiauthor Collaboration Site'' (or ``MMC Site'') means any
+World Wide Web server that publishes copyrightable works and also
+provides prominent facilities for anybody to edit those works.  A
+public wiki that anybody can edit is an example of such a server.  A
+``Massive Multiauthor Collaboration'' (or ``MMC'') contained in the
+site means any set of copyrightable works thus published on the MMC
+site.
+
+``CC-BY-SA'' means the Creative Commons Attribution-Share Alike 3.0
+license published by Creative Commons Corporation, a not-for-profit
+corporation with a principal place of business in San Francisco,
+California, as well as future copyleft versions of that license
+published by that same organization.
+
+``Incorporate'' means to publish or republish a Document, in whole or
+in part, as part of another Document.
+
+An MMC is ``eligible for relicensing'' if it is licensed under this
+License, and if all works that were first published under this License
+somewhere other than this MMC, and subsequently incorporated in whole
+or in part into the MMC, (1) had no cover texts or invariant sections,
+and (2) were thus incorporated prior to November 1, 2008.
+
+The operator of an MMC Site may republish an MMC contained in the site
+under CC-BY-SA on the same site at any time before August 1, 2009,
+provided the MMC is eligible for relicensing.
+
+@end enumerate
+
+@page
+@heading ADDENDUM: How to use this License for your documents
+
+To use this License in a document you have written, include a copy of
+the License in the document and put the following copyright and
+license notices just after the title page:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+  Copyright (C)  @var{year}  @var{your name}.
+  Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+  under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
+  or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
+  with no Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover
+  Texts.  A copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU
+  Free Documentation License''.
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+If you have Invariant Sections, Front-Cover Texts and Back-Cover Texts,
+replace the ``with@dots{}Texts.''@: line with this:
+
+@smallexample
+@group
+    with the Invariant Sections being @var{list their titles}, with
+    the Front-Cover Texts being @var{list}, and with the Back-Cover Texts
+    being @var{list}.
+@end group
+@end smallexample
+
+If you have Invariant Sections without Cover Texts, or some other
+combination of the three, merge those two alternatives to suit the
+situation.
+
+If your document contains nontrivial examples of program code, we
+recommend releasing these examples in parallel under your choice of
+free software license, such as the GNU General Public License,
+to permit their use in free software.
+
+@c Local Variables:
+@c ispell-local-pdict: "ispell-dict"
+@c End:
diff --git a/doc/images/boring-triangles.svg.scm b/doc/images/boring-triangles.svg.scm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..249f347
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/images/boring-triangles.svg.scm
@@ -0,0 +1,2 @@
+(define triangles (make-list 10 (triangle 40 30)))
+(apply hc-append triangles) ; see combinators
diff --git a/doc/images/hline.svg.scm b/doc/images/hline.svg.scm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0b8845d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/images/hline.svg.scm
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+(hline 200 50 #:color "violet" #:stroke-width 4)
diff --git a/doc/images/line.svg.scm b/doc/images/line.svg.scm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fbee169
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/images/line.svg.scm
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+(line 0 50 200 0 #:color "green")
diff --git a/doc/images/modifiers.svg.scm b/doc/images/modifiers.svg.scm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..cd440f7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/images/modifiers.svg.scm
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+(define triangles (make-list 10 (triangle 40 30)))
+
+(apply hc-append ; see combinators
+       (map (lambda (triangle)
+              (fill (rotate (colorize triangle (random-color))
+                            (random 360))
+                    (random-color)))
+            triangles))
diff --git a/doc/images/polygon.svg.scm b/doc/images/polygon.svg.scm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bffcb32
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/images/polygon.svg.scm
@@ -0,0 +1,9 @@
+(polygon '((0 . 100)
+           (0 . 50)
+           (50 . 0)
+           (70 . 25)
+           (70 . 15)
+           (85 . 15)
+           (85 . 33)
+           (100 . 50)
+           (100 . 100)))
diff --git a/doc/images/polyline.svg.scm b/doc/images/polyline.svg.scm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be22324
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/images/polyline.svg.scm
@@ -0,0 +1,12 @@
+(polyline '((0 . 50)
+            (20 . 60)
+            (40 . 40)
+            (60 . 70)
+            (80 . 30)
+            (100 . 80)
+            (120 . 20)
+            (140 . 90)
+            (160 . 10)
+            (180 . 100)
+            (200 . 0))
+          #:color "blue" #:stroke-width 5)
diff --git a/doc/images/polyline2.svg.scm b/doc/images/polyline2.svg.scm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f0af31a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/images/polyline2.svg.scm
@@ -0,0 +1,8 @@
+(import (srfi srfi-1)) ; for iota and list-tabulate
+
+(polyline
+ (map cons
+      (iota 100 0 10)
+      (list-tabulate 100
+                     (lambda (n)
+                       (+ 100 (* n (expt -1 n)))))))
diff --git a/doc/images/vline.svg.scm b/doc/images/vline.svg.scm
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..be3c175
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/images/vline.svg.scm
@@ -0,0 +1 @@
+(vline 200 50 #:color "red" #:stroke-width 4)
diff --git a/doc/picture-language.texi b/doc/picture-language.texi
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d4196f1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/picture-language.texi
@@ -0,0 +1,357 @@
+\input texinfo
+@c -*-texinfo-*-
+
+@c %**start of header
+@setfilename picture-language.info
+@documentencoding UTF-8
+@settitle Guile Picture Language Reference Manual
+@c %**end of header
+
+@include version.texi
+
+@copying
+Copyright @copyright{} 2019 Ricardo Wurmus@*
+
+Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
+under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3 or
+any later version published by the Free Software Foundation; with no
+Invariant Sections, no Front-Cover Texts, and no Back-Cover Texts.  A
+copy of the license is included in the section entitled ``GNU Free
+Documentation License''.
+@end copying
+
+@dircategory The Algorithmic Language Scheme
+@direntry
+* Guile Picture Language: (picture-language).   Compose pictures with Guile.
+@end direntry
+
+@titlepage
+@title Guile Picture Language Reference Manual
+@subtitle Composing pictures with Guile
+@author Ricardo Wurmus
+
+@page
+@vskip 0pt plus 1filll
+Edition @value{EDITION} @*
+@value{UPDATED} @*
+
+@insertcopying
+@end titlepage
+
+@contents
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Top
+@top Guile Picture Language
+
+This document describes the Guile Picture Language version
+@value{VERSION}, a simple language to compose shapes and pictures using
+vector graphics.
+
+@menu
+* Introduction::                What is this all about?
+* Installation::                Installing the picture language.
+* A Picture Vocabulary::        Learning to speak the language.
+
+* Acknowledgments::             Thanks!
+* GNU Free Documentation License::  The license of this manual.
+* Concept Index::               Concepts.
+* Programming Index::           Data types, functions, and variables.
+@end menu
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Introduction
+@chapter Introduction
+
+This package provides a Guile library containing simple procedures to
+generate primitive shapes, to manipulate them, and to compose them to
+build complex pictures.  While this library could be used to
+procedurally generate images, it is really meant to be used
+interactively.
+
+Pictures in this language are first class values like numbers or
+strings, so they are displayed as actual pictures, not as text.  We
+suggest using Guile Studio to play with the picture language, as it
+comes with everything you need to play with the picture language
+interactively.  You can jump straight to @xref{A Picture Vocabulary} and
+follow along.
+
+If you aren't using Guile Studio you will probably want to use a
+graphical instance of Emacs and set up Geiser for use with Guile.
+
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Installation
+@chapter Installation
+
+The easiest way to install the Picture Language is through GNU Guix.
+
+@example
+guix install guile-picture-language
+@end example
+
+If you cannot use Guix or want to build it manually from a release
+tarball, just unpack it and run the usual GNU build system commands:
+
+@example
+./configure
+make
+make install
+@end example
+
+If you want to build the sources from the source repository you need to
+bootstrap the build system first.  Run the @code{bootstrap.sh} script
+first and then perform the above steps.
+
+Once installed you should make sure that the @code{GUILE_LOAD_PATH}
+includes the directory containing this library.  Start a Guile REPL with
+Geiser and load up the module with @code{,use(pict)}.  If everything
+went well read on to learn how to use the picture language.
+
+If you're getting errors feel free to write email to the Guile user
+mailing list @email{guile-user@@gnu.org}, or ask for help on the
+@code{#guile} IRC channel on the Freenode network.
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node A Picture Vocabulary
+@chapter A Picture Vocabulary
+
+The goal of the picture language is to allow you to interactively work
+with pictures as you would with any other seemingly primitive data type,
+such as numbers or strings of text.  To compose numbers in an we use the
+digits 0 to 9.  Similarly, strings of text compose of a wide range of
+characters enclosed in double quotes.  What, then, are the building
+blocks of pictures?
+
+One approach is to think of a picture as an arrangement of little
+colored dots or pixels.  Building pictures from dots, however, would be
+rather tedious and dull.  It would not be a very expressive language.
+Another approach is to start with a small set of simple shapes that can
+be modified and combined.  Let's first take a look at the different
+kinds of simple shapes that make up the ``nouns'' of our picture
+language vocabulary.
+
+@menu
+* Simple shapes::  The ``nouns'' of our picture language.
+* Modifiers::      Procedures for modifying pictures.
+* Combinators::    Build large pictures from smaller pictures.
+@end menu
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Simple shapes
+@section Simple shapes
+
+@cindex line, simple shape
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} line @
+  @var{x1} @var{y1} @var{x2} @var{y2} @
+  [@var{maxw} @var{maxh} @
+  #:color @var{"black"} #:stroke-width @var{1}]
+
+Return a straight line connecting the start point described by the
+numbers @var{X1} and @var{Y1} and the end point described by the numbers
+@var{X2} and @var{Y2}.  Optionally, the numbers @var{MAXW} and
+@var{MAXH} can be provided to limit the width or height, respectively,
+of the resulting picture.  The keys @var{COLOR} (a string) and
+@var{STROKE-WIDTH} (a number) are accepted to override the line color
+and line thickness, respectively.
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex line, example
+@example
+@verbatiminclude images/line.svg.scm
+@image{images/line.svg.scm,,,A straight line.}
+@end example
+
+
+@cindex hline, simple shape
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} hline @
+  @var{w} @var{h} @
+  [#:color @var{"black"} #:stroke-width @var{1}]
+  
+Return a horizontal line segment of width @var{W}.  The bounding box
+height is @var{H} and the line is drawn in the vertical center of the
+bounding box.  The keys @var{COLOR} (a string) and @var{STROKE-WIDTH} (a
+number) are accepted to override the line color and line thickness.
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex hline, example
+@example
+@verbatiminclude images/hline.svg.scm
+@image{images/hline.svg.scm,,,A horizontal line.}
+@end example
+
+
+@cindex vline, simple shape
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} vline @
+  @var{w} @var{h} @
+  [#:color @var{"black"} #:stroke-width @var{1}]
+
+Return a vertical line segment of height @var{H}.  The bounding box
+width is @var{W} and the line is drawn in the horizontal center of the
+bounding box.  The keys @var{COLOR} (a string) and @var{STROKE-WIDTH} (a
+number) are accepted to override the line color and line thickness.
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex vline, example
+@example
+@verbatiminclude images/vline.svg.scm
+@image{images/vline.svg.scm,,,A vertical line.}
+@end example
+
+
+@cindex polyline, simple shape
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} polyline @
+  @var{points} @
+  [#:color @var{"black"} #:stroke-width @var{1}]
+
+A polyline is a multi-segment line that is drawn through any number of
+points.  This procedure draws a polyline from @var{POINTS}, a list of x
+and y coordinate pairs.  The keys @var{COLOR} (a string) and
+@var{STROKE-WIDTH} (a number) are accepted to override the line color
+and line thickness.
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex polyline, example
+Here is a simple zig zag line:
+@example
+@verbatiminclude images/polyline.svg.scm
+@image{images/polyline.svg.scm,,,A zig zag polyline.}
+@end example
+
+Of course, you could also compute the points.  Here we use @code{iota}
+and @code{list-tabulate} of the @code{(srfi srfi-1)} module to generate
+a list for increasing X coordinates and a list for alternating Y
+coordinates before merging them to a single list of coordinate pairs
+with @code{map} and @code{cons}:
+
+@example
+@verbatiminclude images/polyline2.svg.scm
+@image{images/polyline2.svg.scm,,,A longer zig zag polyline.}
+@end example
+
+
+@cindex polygon, simple shape
+@deffn {Scheme Procedure} polygon @
+  @var{points} @
+  [#:color @var{"black"} #:stroke-width @var{1}]
+
+The @code{polygon} procedure has almost the exact same behavior as
+@code{polyline}, except that it connects the first point and the last
+point with a line segment.  @code{polyline}, on the other hand, leaves
+the two points unconnected.
+
+This procedure draws a line through @var{POINTS}, a list of x and y
+coordinate pairs, connecting the first and last points.  The keys
+@var{COLOR} (a string) and @var{STROKE-WIDTH} (a number) are accepted to
+override the line color and line thickness.
+@end deffn
+
+@cindex polygon, example
+Here is a simple polygon:
+@example
+@verbatiminclude images/polygon.svg.scm
+@image{images/polygon.svg.scm,,,A polygon.}
+@end example
+
+There are more primitive shapes that still need to be documented:
+@code{triangle}, @code{filled-triangle}, @code{octagon},
+@code{filled-octagon}, @code{circle}, @code{disk}, @code{ellipse},
+@code{filled-ellipse}, @code{rectangle}, @code{filled-rectangle}, and
+@code{text}.
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Modifiers
+@section Modifiers
+
+Imagine you have a list of ten identical triangles: all with the same
+size and the same color.  Boring, isn't it?  Perhaps it was easier to
+produce them all alike.  Perhaps it was done like this:
+
+@example
+@verbatiminclude images/boring-triangles.svg.scm
+@image{images/boring-triangles.svg.scm,,,A boring list of triangles.}
+@end example
+
+Luckily, we have a wide range of modifiers to change the properties of
+existing pictures, including the fill color, the border color, the
+orientation, the transparency, and even the properties of the bounding
+box.
+
+@cindex modifiers, example
+Here's a preview of what we can do to the boring triangles:
+
+@example
+@verbatiminclude images/modifiers.svg.scm
+@image{images/modifiers.svg.scm,,,A less boring list of triangles.}
+@end example
+
+Much better!
+
+The following modifiers exist and still need to be documented:
+@code{fill}, @code{colorize}, @code{remove-outline}, @code{rotate},
+@code{scale}, @code{expand}, @code{grow}, @code{shrink}, @code{blur},
+@code{cellophane}, @code{frame}, and @code{ghost}.
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Combinators
+@section Combinators
+
+Now that we have learned about simple shapes we can generate lines and
+shapes with different colors and dimensions, and with modifiers we can
+scale them up or rotate them, but we still cannot compose complex
+pictures that consist of more than just one shape.  To compose and
+arrange shapes we need combinators: procedures that operate on pictures
+and return new pictures.
+
+Combinators cannot only be used on simple shapes but also on complex
+pictures.  This is what makes them very powerful.  For example, we can
+combine circles, lines, and ellipses to build a picture of a flower.  We
+can then take this picture of a flower, duplicate and scale it a hundred
+times, and then combine these pictures to a new picture of a meadow.
+This picture of a meadow can be duplicated, the duplicates tinted and
+arranged as a pop art print.  The picture of a pop art print can be
+duplicated and arranged as a wall in an art gallery...
+
+The following combinators exist and still need to be documented:
+@code{append-align}, @code{ht-append}, @code{hc-append},
+@code{hb-append}, @code{vl-append}, @code{vc-append}, @code{vr-append},
+@code{lt-superimpose}, @code{lc-superimpose}, @code{lb-superimpose},
+@code{ct-superimpose}, @code{cc-superimpose}, @code{cb-superimpose},
+@code{rt-superimpose}, @code{rc-superimpose}, @code{rb-superimpose},
+@code{pin-over}, and @code{pin-under}.
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Acknowledgments
+@chapter Acknowledgments
+
+Thanks to the following people who contributed to the Picture Language
+through bug reports, patches, ideas, encouragement, or suggestions:
+
+@itemize @bullet
+@item Ludovic Courtès @email{ludo@@gnu.org}
+@item Christopher Lemmer Webber @email{cwebber@@dustycloud.org}
+@end itemize
+
+Thank you.
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node GNU Free Documentation License
+@appendix GNU Free Documentation License
+
+@include fdl-1.3.texi
+
+@page
+
+@c *********************************************************************
+@node Concept Index
+@unnumbered Concept Index
+
+@printindex cp
+
+@node Programming Index
+@unnumbered Programming Index
+@syncodeindex tp fn
+@syncodeindex vr fn
+@printindex fn
+
+@bye
diff --git a/env.in b/env.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3e6becb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/env.in
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+# Copyright © 2018, 2019 Ricardo Wurmus <rekado@elephly.net>
+#
+# This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or
+# modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License
+# as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 3 of
+# the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+# 
+# This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful,
+# but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+# Lesser General Public License for more details.
+# 
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public
+# License along with this library.  If not, see
+# <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+GUILE_LOAD_PATH=@abs_top_srcdir@:$GUILE_LOAD_PATH
+if test "@abs_top_srcdir@" != "@abs_top_builddir@"; then
+    GUILE_LOAD_PATH=@abs_top_builddir@:$GUILE_LOAD_PATH
+fi
+GUILE_LOAD_COMPILED_PATH=@abs_top_builddir@:$GUILE_LOAD_PATH
+PATH=@abs_top_builddir@/bin:$PATH
+
+export GUILE_LOAD_PATH
+export GUILE_LOAD_COMPILED_PATH
+export PATH
+export srcdir=@abs_top_srcdir@
+
+exec "$@"
diff --git a/guile.am b/guile.am
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7bbd91b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/guile.am
@@ -0,0 +1,37 @@
+# Guile-Debbugs --- Guile bindings for Debbugs
+# Copyright © 2017 Ricardo Wurmus <rekado@elephly.net>
+#
+# This file is part of Guile-Debbugs.
+#
+# Guile-Debbugs is free software: you can redistribute it and/or
+# modify it under the terms of the GNU  General Public License
+# as published by the Free Software Foundation, either version 3 of
+# the License, or (at your option) any later version.
+#
+# Guile-Debbugs is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but
+# WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of
+# MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.  See the GNU
+# Affero General Public License for more details.
+#
+# You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License
+# along with Guile-Debbugs.  If not, see <http://www.gnu.org/licenses/>.
+
+GOBJECTS = $(SOURCES:%.scm=%.go)
+
+nobase_mod_DATA = $(SOURCES) $(NOCOMP_SOURCES)
+nobase_go_DATA = $(GOBJECTS)
+
+# Make sure source files are installed first, so that the mtime of
+# installed compiled files is greater than that of installed source
+# files.  See
+# <http://lists.gnu.org/archive/html/guile-devel/2010-07/msg00125.html>
+# for details.
+guile_install_go_files = install-nobase_goDATA
+$(guile_install_go_files): install-nobase_modDATA
+
+CLEANFILES = $(GOBJECTS)
+EXTRA_DIST = $(SOURCES) $(NOCOMP_SOURCES)
+GUILE_WARNINGS = -Wunbound-variable -Warity-mismatch -Wformat
+SUFFIXES = .scm .go
+.scm.go:
+	$(AM_V_GEN)$(top_builddir)/env $(GUILE_TOOLS) compile $(GUILE_WARNINGS) -o "$@" "$<"